PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL 101 Exchange Avenue, … · 2014. 11. 13. · Remo General Contracting Ltd. Raymond Mollica 905-792-0700 905-792-7583 [email protected] 2400 North Park

SECTION 00 01 01 PAGE 1 TITLE 07 NOV 2014 ward 99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL for: Toronto and Region Conservation Authority Interim Head Office Interior Renovation 101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan prepared by: ward 99 architects SITE: 101 Exchange Avenue Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5R6 ISSUED FOR: TENDER DATE: November 7, 2014 MANDATORY 5 Shoreham Drive, Toronto SITE VISITS: November 12, 2014: 8:00 a.m. – 8:30 a.m. 101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan November 12, 2014: 8:30 a.m. – 11:30 a.m. CLOSING: November 21, 2014 at 12:00 noon 5 Shoreham Drive, Toronto

SECTION 00 01 07 PAGE 1SEALS 07 NOV 2014ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

CONSULTANT’S SEAL

This seal governs:

DIVISION 1 TO 14 except for the Sections listed below

MECHANICAL CONSULTANT’S SEAL

This seal governs:

DIVISION 20, 21, 22 and 23, all Sections

ELECTRICAL CONSULTANT’S SEAL

This seal governs:

DIVISION 26, 27 and 28, all Sections

FOOD SERVICE CONSULTANT’S SEAL

This seal governs:

SECTION 11 40 00

07 NOV 2014

07 NOV 2014

07 NOV 2014

Peter (VV+R)

Image

SECTION 00 01 10 PAGE 1 LIST OF CONTENTS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project: 14019-TRCA DOCUMENT 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Section Number Section Title 00 01 01 Project Title 00 01 07 Seals Page 00 01 10 List of Contents 00 01 15 List of Drawings 00 01 60 List of Prequalified Bidders 00 20 00 Client and Consultants 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders Procurement Forms and Supplements 00 40 13 Stipulated Price Bid Form 00 43 20 Addenda Form - Appendix A 00 43 21 Allowances Form - Appendix B 00 43 22 Unit Prices Form - Appendix C 00 43 36 List of Subcontractors Form - Appendix D 00 43 37 Itemized Prices Form – Appendix E 00 43 38 Alternative Prices Form – Appendix F 00 52 13 Contracting Forms and Supplements 00 61 13 Bonds 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 00 00 General Requirements 01 04 50 Cutting and Remedial Work 01 20 00 Project Meetings 01 25 00 Payment and Changes 01 33 00 Submittals 01 40 00 Coordination 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities 01 66 00 Product Requirements 01 74 13 Cleaning 01 77 19 Contract Closeout Requirements 01 78 36 Warranties DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 13 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE Not Used DIVISION 04 – MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 20 23 Finish Carpentry 06 41 13 Architectural Woodwork 06 41 93 Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware

SECTION 00 01 10 PAGE 2 LIST OF CONTENTS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project: 14019-TRCA DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 13 26 Self-adhering Sheet Waterproofing 07 51 10 Built-up Bituminous Roofing 07 84 13 Firestopping 07 92 13 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 13 13 Steel Doors, Frames and Screens 08 14 16 Wood Doors 08 70 00 Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 12 00 Ceiling Suspension Systems 09 21 16 Gypsum Board and Cement Board 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile 09 51 23 Acoustic Ceilings 09 54 26 Linear Wood Wall Panels 09 65 19 Resilient Flooring 09 68 16 Sheet Carpet 09 91 23 Interior Painting 09 95 00 Living Wall DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 11 10 Marker Boards 10 22 26 Operable Partitions 10 22 39 Glass Partitions 10 28 13 Washroom Accessories DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 Foodservice Equipment DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL 21 05 00 Mechanical General Requirements 21 07 20 Thermal Insulation for Piping 21 12 01 Fire Sprinkler Systems 22 11 18 Domestic Water Piping 22 13 17 Drainage Waste and Vent Piping 22 42 01 Plumbing Specialties and Accessories 22 42 02 Plumbing Fixtures 23 05 23 Valves

SECTION 00 01 10 PAGE 3 LIST OF CONTENTS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project: 14019-TRCA 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment 23 05 54 Mechanical Identification 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 23 07 13 Ductwork Insulation 23 08 19 Fan Coil Units 23 11 23 Facility Natural Gas Piping 23 21 14 Hydronic Specialties 23 21 16 Hydronic Systems, Steel 23 31 14 Ductwork-Low Pressure Metallic to 500 PA 23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories 23 33 46 Flexible Ducts 23 33 53 Duct Liners 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 23 65 10 Condensing Units

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 01 00 Electrical General Requirements 26 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 26 14 00 Wiring Devices 26 23 00 Back-Up Generator 26 36 23 Low Voltage 26 41 00 Grounding 26 44 00 Panelboards 26 47 00 Disconnect Switches 26 50 00 Lighting Equipment 26 53 00 Emergency Lighting System 26 54 00 Lighting Control System 26 72 00 Fire Alarm System 26 73 00 Telecommunication Raceway Systems DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 23 16 Earthwork

End of Section

SECTION 00 01 15 PAGE 1 LIST OF DRAWINGS DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA ARCHITECTURAL: ward99 architects A0 PROJECT TITLE AND LIST OF DRAWINGS A1 PROJECT INFORMATION, SITE ACCESS PLAN, LEGEND AND NOTES A2 EXISTING GROUND FLOOR PLAN - DEMOLITION PLAN, LEGEND AND NOTES A3 EXISTING SECOND FLOOR PLAN - DEMOLITION PLAN, LEGEND AND NOTES A4 EXISTING GROUND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - DEMOLITION PLAN, LEGEND AND NOTES A5 EXISTING SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - DEMOLITION PLAN, LEGEND AND NOTES A6 PROPOSED GROUND FLOOR PLAN, LEGEND AND NOTES A7 PROPOSED SECOND FLOOR PLAN, LEGEND AND NOTES A8 PROPOSED GROUND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN, LEGEND AND NOTES A9 PROPOSED SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN, LEGEND ANDNOTES A10 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE AND NOTES A11 DETAILS, NOTES AND DOOR SCHEDULE A12 DETAILS A13 DETAILS

STRUCTURAL: Halsall S100 GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS S200 PART PLANS AND SECTIONS FOOD SERVICES: Van Velzen + Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. K1 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PLAN & SERVICE LIST K2 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT DETAILS MECHANICAL: Jain & Associates Ltd. M1.1 PROPOSED GROUND FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING M1.2 PROPOSED SECOND FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING M2.1 GROUND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC LAYOUT (DEMOLITION) M2.2 GROUND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC LAYOUT (RENOVATION) M2.3 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC LAYOUT (DEMOLITION) M2.4 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC LAYOUT (RENOVATION) ELECTRICAL: Jain & Associates Ltd. E0 LEGEND AND DETAILS E1 SITE PLAN - ELECTRICAL E2 DEMOLITION LAYOUT (LIGHTING) - GROUND FLOOR

SECTION 00 01 15 PAGE 2 LIST OF DRAWINGS DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA E3 DEMOLITION LAYOUT (LIGHTING) - SECOND FLOOR E4 DEMOLITION LAYOUT (POWER) - GROUND FLOOR E5 DEMOLITION LAYOUT (POWER) - SECOND FLOOR E6 PROPOSED LIGHTING LAYOUT - GROUND FLOOR E7 PROPOSED LIGHTING LAYOUT - SECOND FLOOR E8 PROPOSED POWER AND SYSTEMS LAYOUT - GROUND FLOOR E9 PROPOSED POWER AND SYSTEMS LAYOUT - SECOND FLOOR E10 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM E11 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND SCHEDULES

END OF SECTION

SECTION 00 01 60 PAGE 1 LIST OF PREQUALIFIED BIDDERS 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

1. GENERAL

This is an invited Tender. General Contract bidders and millwork bidders submitting a bid require prequalification and acceptance by the Owner prior to obtaining Bid Documents.

2. GENERAL CONTRACT BIDDERS The following General Contract bidders have been prequalified and accepted to bid:

Company

Name

Tel.

Fax

Email

Address

Berkim Construction Inc.

Ryan McGonigle

416-224-2550

416-224-2675

[email protected] 120 Willowdale Ave. Toronto, ON, M2N 4Y2

Compass Construction Resources Ltd.

Alan Giller 416-789-9819

416-789-5087

[email protected] 2700 Dufferin St. Unit 77, Toronto, ON, M6B 4J3

Remo General Contracting Ltd.

Raymond Mollica

905-792-0700

905-792-7583

[email protected] 2400 North Park Drive, Brampton, ON, L6S 5M5

Pre-Eng Contracting

John Gregoris 905-738-6866

905-738-4879

[email protected] 1 Applewood Crescent, Unit 10, Concord, ON, L4K 4K1

Vema Corp Contractors

Nigel Mascarenhas

289-837-4262

289-837-4328

[email protected] 200 North Service Rd. West, Unit 1, Suite 308, Oakville, Ontario, L6M 2Y1

J.D. Strachan Construction Ltd.

Don Hutchinson

905-833-0681

905-833-1902

[email protected] 482 Queen St., Newmarket, Ontario, L3Y 2H4

Percon Construction Inc.

Frank Perricone

416-744-9967

416-744-8863

[email protected] 20 Airview Road, Toronto, ON, M9W 4P2

Steelcore Construction Ltd.

Themis Tzovolos

416-282-4888

416-282-9820

[email protected] 50 Venture Dr. Suite 11, Scarborough, ON, M1B 3L6

mailto:[email protected]








SECTION 00 01 60 PAGE 2 LIST OF PREQUALIFIED BIDDERS 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA Brown Daniels Associates

Brad Daniels

416-251-1757

416-251-1798

[email protected]

12 Drummond Street, Unit 1, Etobicoke, ON, M8V 1Y8

Gay Company Ltd.

Jennifer Hewlett

905-432-1279

905-432-1579

[email protected]

1697 Highway 2, Courtice, ON, L1E 2R5

TRP Construction General Contractor

Carrie Postma 905-336-1041

905-336-9564

[email protected] 3050 Harvester RD, Suite 107, Burlington, ON, L7N 3J1

Struct-Con Construction Ltd.

Mo Shariati 905-791-5445

905-791-5380

[email protected] [email protected]

2051 Williams Parkway East, Unit 14, Brampton, ON, L6S 5T3

Ameresco Canada Inc.

Frank Miceli 416-737-6718

416-218-2288

[email protected] 90 Sheppard Avenue East, 7th Floor, Toronto, ON, M2N 6X3

3. MILLWORK SUBCONTRACTOR BIDDERS The following are the prequalified millwork subcontractors:

1. D & A Designer Woodworking Inc., Contact: Mr. Keble Boyd, 647-889-8577 2. Bird’s Eye Millwork Inc., Contact: 905-670-1944 3. Ellrod Holdings Inc., Contact: Mr. Barry McIntosh, 905-683-8444 4. Second Generation Furnishing Inc., Contact: Mr. Robert Antonel, 905-738-1403 5. Baywood Interiors Ltd., Contact: John D. Lassel, 1-519-748-9577







SECTION 00 20 00 PAGE 1 CLIENT and CONSULTANTS 07 OCT 2014 ward 99 architects Project 14019-TRCA CLIENT Toronto and Region Conservation Authority 5 Shoreham Avenue

Downsview, Ontario M3N 1S4 Tel: (416) 661-6600 ARCHITECT / PRIME CONSULTANT: ward 99 architects

2300 Yonge Street, Ste. 1600 Toronto, Ontario M4P 1E4

Tel: (416) 613-5880 MECHANICAL ENGINEER: Jain & Associates Limited and 2270 Argentia Road ELECTRICAL ENGINEER Mississauga, Ontario L5N 6A6 Tel: (905) 542-7211 FOOD SERVICE CONSULTANT Van Velzen + Radchenko 1262 Don Mills Road, Suite 99 Toronto, Ontario M3B 2W7 Tel: (416) 447-6483 END OF SECTION

SECTION 00 21 13 PAGE 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. INVITATION 1.1 BID CALL 1.1.1 Offers signed under seal, executed and dated, will be received by the Owner:

Toronto Region and Conservation Authority 5 Shoreham Drive, Toronto - Downsview T. 416-661-6600

before 12:00 noon local time Friday, November 21, 2014

1.1.2 Offers submitted after the above time may be returned to the bidder unopened. 1.1.3 Offers will be opened in public at 1:00 p.m. following the closing. 1.2 INTENT 1.2.1 The intent of this Bid call is to complete the interior alterations in accordance

with the Contract Documents. 2. CONTRACT AND BID DOCUMENTS 2.1 DEFINITIONS 2.1.1 Contract Documents:

The documents are listed in Section 0 01 10 and Section 00 01 15and Section 00 52 13.

2.1.2 Site:

101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan L4K 5R6 The existing building is a vacant two storey structure.

2.1.3 Client:

The Toronto and Region Conservation Authority 2.1.4 Prime Consultant:

ward99 architects – refer to Section 00 20 00 2.2 AVAILABILITY 2.2.1 Bid Documents will be provided in electronic format only on November 7, 2014

to the prequalified general contractors.

SECTION 00 21 13 PAGE 2 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.2.4 Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for

this project. Their issue does not confer a licence or grant for other purposes. Documents are to be deleted after award of project.

2.2.5 The Consultant will not provide the General Contractor with any hard copies of

documents except for the permits and the contract sets. 2.3 EXAMINATION 2.3.1 Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify documents are complete; notify

Consultants should documents be incomplete. 2.3.2 Immediately notify the Owner upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the

Bid Documents. 2.4 QUERIES/ADDENDA 2.4.1 Direct questions to ward99 architects by email only at [email protected], attention Tina Ranieri-D’Ovidio. 2.4.2 Addenda may be issued during the Bid period. All addenda become part of

the Contract Documents. Include costs in the Bid price. List addenda in Section 00 43 20. 3. SITE ASSESSMENT MEETINGS 3.1 Bidders are to meet on November 12, 2014 at 8:30 a.m. at 5 Shoreham Drive

in Toronto to review the emergency generator that is to be relocated to the 101 Exchange Avenue Site. This is a mandatory site meeting. General Contractors will be required to sign in.

3.2 Visit the project Site at 101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan.

The building will be open for viewing on November 12, 2014 from 8:30 to 11:30 a.m. This is a mandatory site meeting. General Contractors will be required to sign in.

3.3 Bid envelopes will be provided at the 8:30 a.m. site assessment meeting.

4. QUALIFICATIONS 4.1 GENERAL

The Owner's decision as to the Bidder's suitability to Bid shall be final.

SECTION 00 21 13 PAGE 3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA SUBCONTRACTORS 4.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposed subcontractor for

reasonable cause, in conformance with the General Conditions of the Agreement.

4.2.2 Telephone and Data work will be carried out by separate contractors engaged

by the Owner. 5. BID SUBMISSION 5.1 BID INELIGIBILITY 5.1.1 Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible,

obscure, contain arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations or irregularities of any kind may be considered informal.

5.1.2 Bid Forms and enclosures which are improperly prepared may be declared

informal. 5.2 SUBMISSIONS 5.2.1 Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their Bids in the manner

and time prescribed. 5.2.2 Submit one copy of the executed Bid on the forms provided, signed and

corporate sealed, in the envelope provided, clearly identified with bidder's name, project name and Owner's name on the outside.

5.3 BID FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS 5.3.1 State in the Bid Form the time required to complete the Work. The completion

dates in the Agreement shall be this completion time added to the commencement date.

5.3.2 The Owner requires that the Work under this Contract be completed as quickly

as possible and consideration will be given to time of completion when reviewing the submitted Bids.

5.3.3 The work is to be phased. Refer to the notes on drawing A1.

SECTION 00 21 13 PAGE 4 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 5.4 APPENDICES TO BID FORM 5.4.1 Addenda Form, Appendix 'A' to the Stipulated Price Bid: Include a complete

listing of all addenda issued. 5.4.2 Allowances Form, Appendix ‘B’ to the Stipulated Price Bid. Include in the Bid Price the sum of all allowances in Section 00 43 21, 5.4.3 Unit Prices Form, Appendix ‘C’ to the Stipulated Price Bid. Provide the unit prices requested. 5.4.5 Proposed Subcontractors Form, Appendix 'D' to the Stipulated Price Bid:

Include the names of all Subcontractors and the portion of the Work the bidder will require them to perform. This appendix and only this appendix is to be submitted by Monday, November 24 th at 11:00 a.m.. Failure to submit may be grounds for rejecting the Bid. Appendix D is to be emailed to:

[email protected]. 5.4.6 Itemized Prices Form – Appendix ‘E’ to the Stipulated Price Bid. Provide the itemized prices requested. 5.4.7 Alternative Prices Form – Appendix ‘F’ to the Stipulated Price Bid. Provide the alternative prices requested. 6. DURATION OF OFFER 6.1 Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of

sixty (60) days after the bid closing date. 8. ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER 8.1 The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers. 8.2 After acceptance by the Owner, he will issue to the successful bidder a written

Acceptance. 8.3 The Consultant will then prepare contract documents for execution. 9.0 BONDS

.1 Arrange, pay for and execute with an established Guarantee Company, satisfactory to and approved by Owner, and in accordance with GC of General Conditions the following:

.1 Bid Bond equal to 10 % of Tender amount, to accompany sealed Tender.

SECTION 00 21 13 PAGE 5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA .2 Performance Bond equal to 50% of Contract amount including a term

covering warranty period and any specified extended warranty periods .3 A 50% Labour and Materials Payment Bond. .2 Agreement to Bond: .1 Submit, with Tender, an agreement to provide above Performance, and

Labour and Materials Bonds within 15 days of Tender acceptance. .2 Agreement to Bond shall bind Surety Company to providing a 50% Performance Bond as described, providing Bidder's Tender is accepted by Owner within specified period.

.3 Submit bonds as specified in Section 00 61 13. 10. PHASED CONSTRUCTION

Phase one to run from project award to January 15, 2015: to include the installation of the concrete pad and conduits and all work on the second floor. TRCA Staff to occupy the building on the second floor only by February 1, 2015. Phase two to run from project award to March 15, 2015: to include all work on the ground floor and the relocation of the existing generator once TRCA staff has moved into the ground floor of 101 Exchange Avenue.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 00 40 13 PAGE 1 STIPULATED PRICE BID 07 Nov 14 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

STIPULATED PRICE BID

.1 PROJECT: Interior Alterations for the Toronto and Region Conservation Authority

101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan

.2 BIDDER

Legal Name of Bidder

Street, number and postal box number if applicable

Town or city, province, postal code

Telephone Fax Email

.3 SUBMITTED TO OWNER AT:

The Toronto and Region Conservation Authority 5 Shoreham Drive, Downsview, Ontario

.4 BID PRICE OFFER:

Having examined the Bid Documents, Addenda and Instructions to Bidders, having visited the Place of Work, and having a full knowledge of the locality and conditions affecting the Work, we do hereby offer to enter into a Contract to perform the Work required by the Bid Documents for the stipulated price (excluding HST) of:

($ . ) Dollars in lawful money of Canada. The TENDER SUM is the total of the Bid Price exclusive of the HST (Harmonized Sales Tax)

.5 COMPLETION

We agree to achieve Substantial Performance by March 15, 2015. .6 ACCEPTANCE:

If notified in writing by the Owner or its authorized representative of the acceptance of this Bid Offer within 60 days of Bid Closing, we will:

Project: 101 Exchange Avenue

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 00 40 13 PAGE 2 STIPULATED PRICE BID 07 Nov 14 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

.1 Within 7 calendar days, or subsequently agreed time, execute and deliver to the Owner the Agreement, and within 7 days deliver the Performance Bond and the Labour and Material Payment Bond.

.2 Within 7 calendar days submit the documents required by Supplementary Condition GC 5.3.1 Progress Payment, together with all other documents required by the Bid Documents to be delivered by the successful bidder.

.3 Within 10 calendar days commence the Work.

.4 Complete the Work in accordance with Item 5 and the Contract Documents. .7 SIGNATURE:

Where the Bidder is a Partnership, the tender must be signed by at least two (2) partners, accompanied by the signature of a witness.

Where the Bidder is a Corporation, the tender must be signed under the legal name of the Corporation followed by the legal signature(s) of an officer(s) authorized to bind the Corporation into the Contract accompanied by the signature of a witness. A certified copy of a resolution naming the person(s) as authorized to sign Agreements for and on behalf of the Corporation shall be submitted to the Consultant if and when requested.

Legal Name of Bidder

signature

name and title of person signing

second signature (if applicable)

name and title of second person signing (if applicable)

WITNESS

witness' signature

name of witness

SIGNED THIS of , 2014

day month year Where legal jurisdiction or Owner requirement calls for the affixing of a corporate seal, this Bid shall be properly sealed.

Project: 101 Exchange Avenue

Page 2 of 2

SECTION 00 43 20 PAGE 1 ADDENDA FORM 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

APPENDIX ‘A’

To Stipulated Price Bid

ADDENDA PROJECT: 101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan BIDDER: ________________________________________________________________ Addenda received and included in Bid Offer: ADDENDUM DATED NO. OF PAGES

Insert “None” if none issued.

SECTION 00 43 21 PAGE 1 ALLOWANCES FORM 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA Appendix ‘B’ to the Stipulated Price Form 1. CASH ALLOWANCES 1.1 Refer to GC 4.1. Cash Allowances 1.2 Include in the Contract Price, cash allowances stated herein. 1.3 Cash allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover the net cost to the

Contractor of services, products, unloading, storage, installation and other authorized expenses incurred in performing the Work.

1.4 The Contract Price, and not the cash allowance, includes the Contractor's

overhead and profit in connection with such cash allowance. 1.5 Progress payments on accounts of work authorized under cash allowances

shall be included in the Consultant's monthly certificate of payment. The Contractor shall show work completed under each individual cash allowance in the monthly progress payment application.

1.6 Submit a complete record of all invoices paid for cash allowances before

application for Certificate of Total Performance. 1.7 The following is a list of work to be carried out under the Allowances.

NO. WORK AMOUNT 1

Fire Safety Plans

See below

2

Testing & Inspections

3

Quiet Room Reconfiguration Work

4

Shower and Wellness Room accessories not otherwise indicated on drawings

SECTION 00 43 21 PAGE 2 ALLOWANCES FORM 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

5

Existing door hardware replacement or repair and additional hardware not otherwise described on the hardware schedule.

6

Glazing Film

7

Scanning at existing grade beam and associated alteration work

8

Structural steel support at living wall

9

Car charging posts and associated equipment and work not described on the drawings and in the specifications.

10

Engineered fill at concrete Slab.

11

Intumescent Painting

12

Planting at living wall in addition to the described planting in Section 09 95 00 Living Wall.

13

Additional millwork and accessories not described on the drawings and in the specifications

14

Electrical connections between TV screens and furniture

TOTAL

ALL ALLOWANCES

$70,000.00

SECTION 00 43 22 PAGE 1 UNIT PRICES FORM 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

APPENDIX ‘C’


UNIT PRICES PROJECT: 101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan BIDDER: ________________________________________________________________ The following is our offer of Unit Prices for the units of work listed. The Unit Prices exclude the HST, but include all other applicable taxes. UNIT OF WORK

UNIT MEASURE

UNIT PRICE ($) ADDITION

UNIT PRICE ($) DELETION

1. Carpet supplied and installed

Sq. m

2. Resilient Tile flooring supplied and

installed

Sq. m

3. Soil excavation:

i. By Hand ii. By Machine-(deposited on

site iii. By Machine (include

removal of excavated material from site)

m3 m3 m3

4. Earth Removal and Disposal to local landfill site

Per 1000kg

5. Backfill, compacted in place

m3

6. Imported Topsoil (in place)

m3

SECTION 00 43 22 PAGE 2 UNIT PRICES FORM 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

7. Non-rated gypsum board (including 90mm framing)

lm

8. Non-rated gypsum board (including 150mm framing)

lm

9. Painting (three coat work)

m3

10. Labourer

Per hour

11. Carpenter

Per hour

SECTION 00 43 36 PAGE 1 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

APPENDIX ‘D’


PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS PROJECT: 101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan BIDDER: ________________________________________________________________ The following are Subcontractors which we are prepared to accept for the performance of a portion of the Work. Division or Section of the Work

Name of Subcontractor

Mechanical

Electrical

Gypsum Board & Framing

Suspended Ceilings

Carpet Installation

Sprinkler Modifications

Grading, excavation and backfilling

SECTION 00 43 36 PAGE 2 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA Concrete work

Resilient Tile Flooring

Painting

END OF SECTION

SECTION 00 43 37 PAGE 1 ITEMIZED PRICES FORM 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

APPENDIX ‘E’


ITEMIZED PRICES PROJECT: 101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan BIDDER: ________________________________________________________________ Itemized Prices are for work which is included in the Bid Price listed on the Stipulated Price Bid Form and are provided for information only. All prices are inclusive of labour, material, tools, equipment, applicable taxes, overhead and profit, but exclusive of HST. Description

Price

Itemized Price No. 1 Building Envelope Water Damage Repair denoted as Note No.5 on drawing A2 – Existing Ground Floor Plan – Demolition Plan, Legend and Notes and drawing A3 – Existing Second Floor Plan – Demolition Plan, Legend and Notes.

$___________________

Itemized Price No. 2 Mechanical Price – All work indicated on the Mechanical Drawings and Specifications but excluding sprinkler work and any work associated with the relocation and installation of the existing generator.

$___________________

Itemized Price No. 3 Electrical Price – All work indicated on the Electrical

Drawings and Specifications but excluding sprinkler work and any work associated with the relocation and installation of the existing generator.

$___________________

SECTION 00 43 37 PAGE 2 ITEMIZED PRICES FORM 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA Itemized Price No. 4

Sprinkler Price – All work indicated on the Mechanical Drawings pertaining to the modification of existing sprinklers and the addition of new sprinklers and the Sprinkler Protection Specifications.

Description

$___________________

Itemized Price No. 5 Foodservices Price – All work indicated on the Food Services Drawings and Specifications.

$___________________

Itemized Price No. 6

Glass Folding Partition – The price to supply and install the two glass folding partitions including the structural work required to support the partitions as described on the structural drawings and architectural drawings 3/A13 and 4/A13.

$___________________


Highland Room S242 – The price to provide new sprinkler heads and new recessed lights in the existing gypsum board finished suspended ceiling as described on the Mechanical and Electrical drawings. Include the price to patch, repair, make good and paint the existing suspended gypsum board finished ceiling.

$___________________


Existing Generator – The price to decommission, uninstall, relocate and transport the existing generator (and associated equipment) from 5 Shoreham Drive in Toronto to 101 Exchange Avenue in Vaughan. Include the work associated to install the existing generator and to supply and install the concrete pad and associated conduits and power as described on the Architectural, Structural, Electrical and Mechanical Drawings.

$___________________

END OF SECTION

SECTION 00 43 38 PAGE 1 ALTERNATIVE PRICES 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

APPENDIX ‘F’


ALTERNATIVE PRICES PROJECT: 101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan BIDDER: ________________________________________________________________ The following are our prices for the alternative work listed hereunder. Such alternative work and amounts are NOT included in our Bid Price. These prices for the alternative work do NOT include Value Added Taxes. Effect on Stipulated Price ($) NUMBER

DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATE OF WORK

ADDITION

DELETION

1.

Substitute the two manual folding glass partitions and accompanying steel support structure as described on the Structural Drawings, with the following: 50mmx115mm anodized aluminum frame with 13mm single glazed tempered glass panels in the arrangement indicated on Architectural drawing 2/A13. Acceptable Product: Alumicor Limited, Flushglaze BF 3400 Series Frame. Provide extended lateral bracing at each vertical aluminum frame within the finished ceiling assembly, to the underside of the existing structure as required to secure the aluminum frame in place.

SECTION 00 52 13 PAGE 1 CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

1. CONTENTS 1.1 CCDC 2-2008, will be the Stipulated Price Contract for the Project 1.2 Refer to Section 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions 1.3 Refer to list of specifications in Section 00 01 10, List of Contents. 1.4 Refer to list of drawings in Section 00 01 15, List of Drawings

END OF SECTION

SECTION 00 61 13 PAGE 1 BONDS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

BONDS

1. Arrange, pay for and execute with an established Guarantee Company, satisfactory to and approved by Owner, and in accordance with GC 11.2 Contract Security of General Conditions the following:

2. Bid Bond equal to 10% of the Tender amount to accompany the sealed Tender. 3. Performance Bond equal to 50% of Contract amount including a term covering warranty period and any specified extended warranty periods 4. A 50% Labour and Materials Payment Bond. 5. Agreement to Bond: .1 Submit, with the Tender, an agreement to provide the above Performance, and

Labour and Materials Bonds within 15 days of Tender acceptance. .2 Agreement to Bond shall bind Surety Company to providing

Bonds as described, providing Bidder's Tender is accepted by Owner within the specified period.

.3 A 50% Labour and Materials Payment Bond.

SECTION 00 73 00 PAGE 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA Supplementary Conditions to CCDC-2 2008 The Standard Construction Document for Stipulated Price Contract, 2008 English version, consisting of the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Definitions, and General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract, Parts 1 to 12 inclusive, governing same is hereby made part of these Contract Documents, with the following amendments, additions and modifications. Where these amendments, additions, and modifications specifically reference a change to the Agreement, Definitions, or General Conditions, these amendments, additions and modifications shall govern. ARTICLE A-6 – RECEIPT AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES IN WRITING Delete Article A-6.1 and substitute new article 6.1: 6.1 Notices in Writing between the parties or between them and the Consultant shall be considered to

have been received by the addressee on the date of receipt if delivered by hand or by commercial courier or if sent during normal business hours by fax and addressed as set out below. Such Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the next business day if sent by fax after normal business hours or if sent by overnight commercial courier. Such Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the fifth Working Day following the date of mailing, if sent by pre-paid registered post, when addressed as set out below. An address for a party may be changed by Notice in Writing to the other party setting out the new address in accordance with this Article.

DEFINITIONS Add the following definition: 19a. Submittals

Submittals are documents or items required by the Contract Documents to be provided by the Contractor, such as: - Shop Drawings, samples, models, mock-ups to indicate details or characteristics, before

the portion of the Work that they represent can be incorporated into the Work; and - As-built drawings and manuals to provide instructions to the operation and maintenance of

the Work. 1 GENERAL 1.1 Where a General Condition or paragraph of the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price

Contract is deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the numbering of the remaining General Conditions or paragraphs shall remain unchanged, and the numbering of the deleted item will be retained, unused.

GC 1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

.1 Add to the end of subparagraph 1.1.2.2

Except where the Consultant shall be indemnified as a third party beneficiary as provided in subparagraphs 9.2.7.4, 9.5.3.4 and in 12.1.3.

.2 Add new subparagraph 1.1.7.5: 1.1.7.5 In case of discrepancies, noted materials and annotations shall take precedence over graphic indications in the Contract Documents.

SECTION 00 73 00 PAGE 2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA GC 2.2 ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT

.1 Add at the end of paragraph 2.2.9. “The Owner and the Contractor shall waive any

claims against the Consultant arising out of the making of such interpretations and findings made in accordance with paragraphs 2.2.7., 2.2.8. and 2.2.9”.

.2 Delete the comma after the word “submittals” and add the words “which are

provided” before the words “in accordance” in paragraph 2.2.14. GC 2.4 DEFECTIVE WORK

.1 Add new subparagraphs 2.4.1.1 and 2.4.1.2:

2.4.1.1 The Contractor shall rectify, in a manner acceptable to the Owner and the Consultant, all defective work and deficiencies throughout the Work, whether or not they are specifically identified by the Consultant.

2.4.1.2 The Contractor shall prioritize the correction of any defective work which, in the sole discretion of the Owner, adversely affects the day to day operation of the Owner.

GC 3.1 CONTROL OF THE WORK

.1 Add new paragraph 3.1.3:

3.1.3 Prior to commencing individual procurement, fabrication and construction activities, the Contractor shall verify, at the Place of the Work, all relevant measurements and levels necessary for proper and complete fabrication, assembly and installation of the Work and shall further carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where dimensions

are not included or contradictions exist, or exact locations are not apparent, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant in writing and obtain written instructions from the Consultant before proceeding with any part of the affected work.

GC 3.4 DOCUMENT REVIEW .1 Delete paragraph 3.4.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.4.1:

3.4.1 The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and shall report promptly to the Consultant any error, inconsistency or omission the Contractor may discover. Such review by the Contractor shall comply with the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1 of the Contract. Except for its obligation to make such review and report the result, the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or to the Consultant for the accuracy of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be liable for damage or costs resulting from such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents, which the Contractor could not reasonably have discovered. If the Contractor does discover any error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work affected until the Contractor has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant.

GC 3.8 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS

SECTION 00 73 00 PAGE 3 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA .1 Add new paragraph 3.8.4: 3.8.4 The Contractor is responsible for the safe on-site storage of Products and their protection (including Products supplied by the Owner

and other contractors to be installed under the Contract) in such ways as to avoid dangerous conditions or contamination to the Products or other persons or property and in locations at the Place of the Work to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Consultant. The Owner shall provide all relevant information on the Products to be supplied by the Owner.

GC 3.10 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Add the words “AND OTHER SUBMITTALS” to the Title after SHOP DRAWINGS.

.2 Add “and Submittals” after the words “Shop Drawings” in paragraphs 3.10.1,

3.10.2, 3.10.4, 3.10.7, 3.10.8, 3.10.8.2, 3.10.9, 3.10.10, 3.10.11, and 3.10.12. .3 Delete 3.10.3 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.10.3

GC.3.10.3 Prior to the first application for payment, the Contractor and the Consultant shall jointly prepare a schedule of the dates for submission and return of Shop Drawings and any Submittals.

.4 Delete the words “with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay in the

performance of the Work” and replace with “within 10 working days or such longer period as may be reasonably required” in paragraph 3.10.12.

GC 3.14 PERFORMANCE BY CONTRACTOR

.1 Add new General Condition 3.14.1

3.14.1 In performing its services and obligations under the Contract, the Contractor shall exercise a standard of care, skill and diligence that would normally be provided by an experienced and prudent contractor supplying similar services for similar projects. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that throughout the Contract, the Contractor’s obligations, duties and responsibilities shall be interpreted in accordance with this standard. The Contractor shall exercise the same standard of due care and diligence in respect of any Products, personnel, or procedures which it may recommend to the Owner.

.2 Add new General Condition 3.14.2

3.14.2 The Contractor further represents, covenants and warrants to the Owner that: .1 The personnel it assigns to the Project are appropriately experienced;

.2 It has a sufficient staff of qualified and competent personnel to replace its

designated supervisor and project manager, subject to the Owner’s approval, in the event of death, incapacity, removal or resignation.

GC 4.1 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Delete paragraph 4.1.4 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.4:

4.1.4 Where costs under a cash allowance exceed the amount of the

SECTION 00 73 00 PAGE 4 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

allowance, unexpended amounts from other cash allowances shall be reallocated at the Consultant’s direction to cover the shortfall.

.2 Delete paragraph 4.1.5 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.5:

4.1.5. The net amount of any unexpended cash allowances, after providing for any reallocations as contemplated in paragraph 4.1.4, shall be deducted from the Contract Price by Change Order.

.3 Delete paragraph 4.1.7 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.7.

4.1.7 At the commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall prepare for the review and acceptance of the Owner and the Consultant, a schedule indicating the times, within the construction schedule referred to in GC 3.5, that items called for under cash allowances and items that are specified to be Owner purchased and Contractor installed or hooked up are required at the site to avoid delaying the progress of the Work.

.4 Add new paragraph 4.1.8:

4.1.8 The Owner reserves the right to call, or to have the Contractor call, for competitive bids for portions of the Work, to be paid for from cash allowances.

GC 6.4 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS .1 Add new subparagraph 6.4.5:

6.4.5 The Contractor confirms that, prior to bidding the Project, it carefully investigated the Place of the Work and applied to that investigation the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.14.1, given the amount of time provided between the issue of the bid documents and the actual closing of bids, the degree of access provided to the Contractor prior to submission of bid, and the sufficiency and completeness of the information provided by the Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to compensation or to an extension of the Contract Time for conditions which could reasonably have been ascertained by the Contractor by such careful investigation undertaken prior to the submission of the bid.

GC 6.5 DELAYS

.1 Delete the period at the end of paragraph 6.5.1, and substitute the following words:

“, but excluding any consequential, indirect or special damages.”

.2 Add new subparagraph 6.5.6.

6.5.6 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an act or omission of the Contractor or anyone employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, or by any cause within the Contractor’s control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may decide in consultation with the Contractor. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for all reasonable costs incurred by the Owner as the result of such delay, including all services required by the Owner from the Consultant as a result of such


delay by the Contractor and, in particular, the cost of the Consultant’s services during the period between the date of Substantial Performance of the Work stated in Article A-1 herein as the same may be extended through the provisions of these General Conditions and any later, actual date of Substantial Performance of the Work achieved by the Contractor.

GC 6.6 CLAIMS FOR A CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE

.1 Add the words “as noted in paragraph 6.6.3” after the words “of the claim” in paragraph 6.6.5 and add the words “and the Consultant”, at the end of paragraph 6.6.5.

GC 8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION .1 Add the following new paragraphs 8.2.9, 8.2.10, 8.2.11, 8.2.12., 8.2.13., and

8.2.14.

8.2.9 Within five days of receipt of the notice of arbitration by the responding party under paragraph 8.2.6, the Owner and the Contractor shall give the Consultant a written notice containing:

a) a copy of the notice of arbitration b) a copy of supplementary conditions 8.2.9 to 8.2.14 of this Contract, and; c) any claims or issues which the Contractor or the Owner, as the case may be, wishes to raise in relation to the Consultant arising out of the issues in dispute in the arbitration 8.2.10 The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Consultant may elect, within ten days of receipt of the notice under paragraph 8.2.9, to become a full party to the arbitration under paragraph 8.2.6 if the Consultant:

a) has a vested or contingent financial interest in the outcome of the arbitration; b) gives the notice of election to the Owner and the Contractor before the arbitrator is appointed; c) agrees to be a party to the arbitration within the meaning of the rules referred to in paragraph 8.2.6, and, d) agrees to be bound by the arbitral award made in the arbitration.

8.2.11 If an election is made under paragraph 8.2.10, the Consultant may participate in the appointment of the arbitrator and, notwithstanding the rules referred to in paragraph 8.2.6, the time period for reaching agreement on the appointment of the arbitrator shall begin to run from the date the respondent receives a copy of the notice of arbitration. 8.2.12 The arbitrator in the arbitration in which the Consultant has elected under paragraph 8.2.10 to become a full party may: a) on application of the Owner or the Contractor, determine whether the Consultant has satisfied the requirements of paragraph 8.2.10, and; b) make any procedural order considered necessary to facilitate the addition of the Consultant as a party to the arbitration.

8.2.13 The provisions of paragraph 8.2.9 shall apply mutatis mutandis to written notice to be given by the Consultant to any sub-consultant; 8.2.14 In the event of notice of arbitration given by the Consultant to a sub-consultant, the


sub-consultant is not entitled to any election with respect to the proceeding as outlined in 8.2.10, and is deemed to be bound by the arbitration proceeding.

GC 9.1 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

.1 Delete subparagraph 9.1.1.1 in its entirety and substitute new subparagraph 9.1.1.1:

9.1.1.1 Errors in the Contract Documents which the Contractor could not have discovered applying the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1;

.2 Delete paragraph 9.1.2 in its entirety and substitute the following new paragraph

9.1.2:

9.1.2 Before commencing any Work, the Contractor shall determine the locations of all underground utilities and structures indicated in the Contract Documents, or that are discoverable by applying to an inspection of the Place of the Work the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.14.1.

GC 9.2 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

.1 Add to paragraph 9.2.6 after the word "responsible”, the following new words: or whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others,

.2 Add “and the Consultant” after the word “Contractor” in subparagraph 9.2.7.4. .3 Add to paragraph 9.2.8 after the word "responsible”, the following new words:

or that any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others,

GC 9.5 MOULD .1 Add “and the Consultant” after “Contractor” in subparagraph 9.5.3.4. GC 10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES

.1 Delete from the first line of paragraph 10.2.5 the word, “The” and substitute the words: “Subject to paragraph 3.14.1, the”.

SECTION 00 73 00 PAGE 7 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA GC 12.1 INDEMNIFICATION

.1 Add new clause 12.1.1.3.

12.1.1. 3. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Consultant, its agents and employees from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings by third parties that arise out of, or are attributable to, the Contractor’s performance of the Contract, provided such claims are attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, and caused by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable, and made in writing within a period of 6 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, or within such shorter such period as may be prescribed by any limitation statute or the province or territory of the Place of Work.

GC 12.3 WARRANTY

.1 Delete from the first line of paragraph 12.3.2 the word, “The” and substitute the words:

"Subject to paragraph 3.14.1, the…".

SECTION 01 00 00 PAGE 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1. The Work will be carried out under a CCDC 2- 2008 agreement between the

Owner and the General Contractor. 1.2 The Architect is the Prime Consultant and whenever the word Consultant or

Consultants is used in the Contract Documents it shall imply the Architect or Architects.

2. DESCRIPTION 2.1. Requirements Included: 2.1.1 Scope of Project. 2.1.2 Work Site. 2.1.3 Work in this Contract 2.1.4 General Requirements. 2.1.5 Execution and Completion of the Work. 2.1.6 Occupancy. 2.1.7 Documents at site. 2.1.8 Construction Permit / Building Permit 2.1.1 SCOPE OF PROJECT a Interior alterations to office space on two levels, ground and second floor. 2.1.2 WORK SITE a The work shall be confined to the area defined by the property lines. 2.1.3 WORK IN THIS CONTRACT

shall include but not be limited to: a Demolition

Refer to Section 02 41 13. b Site Work:

Site work includes relocation of an emergency generator, concrete pad, electrical conduits and the installation of car charging posts.

c Erect:

Partitions, door frames, doors and suspended ceilings. Carry out painting, carpet installation, millwork and all related mechanical and electrical work as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications.

2.1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS a Conform to all Divisions and all parts of all Divisions of the Contract

Documents. Ensure that each Trade Contractor and their Sub-Contractors

SECTION 01 00 00 PAGE 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

understand that Division 1, General Requirements, apply to Sections of the Specifications governing their Work.

b Notes on the Drawings augment the Specifications subject to the General

Conditions. c Supply means:

deliver to the Site and place as directed by the Contractor or the Section required to install at grade or otherwise as agreed upon in conformance with Section 01 66 00, Products.

d Install means:

accommodate in the Work, receive, store, uncrate assemble, adjust, trim, and fit as necessary, locate as per the documents as adjusted by the Consultant, affix to the Work and connect to services as per manufacturers instructions and as required by the documents in conformance with shop drawings and as required for full operation or service and make final trimming and adjustment, test, clear, make fully operational, provide operating and reference data required by Section 01300 and warranty as per contract.

e Provide means supply and install: f Not in the Contract.

The means by which something shown or specified shall be indicated as not being in the Contract is by the use of the initials "NIC" or the words "not in (the) Contract", "by Owner" or "by an other Contractor".

g Number.

In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is referred to in the Specifications in the singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation. The word "all", whether used or not, is intended to apply to all products and cases (events) mentioned in the Specifications, unless the context clearly and specifically provides otherwise.

h Authority of the Consultant.

Wherever the words "approved", "satisfactory", "directed", "permitted", "inspected", "instructed", "required", "submit", "ordered", or similar words or phrases are used in the Contract Documents, it shall be understood, unless the context provides otherwise, that "by (to) the Consultant" follow.

2.1.5 EXECUTION AND COMPLETION OF THE WORK a Commence no work on Site until the Contract is signed.

SECTION 01 00 00 PAGE 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA b Commence the Work within 10 days of notification to commence unless

otherwise stated in the Contract, and complete the Work in the time specified in the Contract.

c The progress of the work shall be carried forward with all possible haste until

completion and acceptance by the Consultant. Continue full scale operations throughout all seasons.

d It is understood that the Contract Price includes sufficient funds for the

provisions of temporary heating, temporary shelters and all other necessary measures to enable all trades to proceed without delay regardless of weather.

e If necessary in accordance with factors within the contractors control and

due to special construction conditions, or if it becomes necessary in order to complete the Work within the Contract time, to work overtime, the Contractor shall pay all necessary overtime and provide all necessary services, permits etc. for same.

2.1.6 OCCUPANCY a The Contractor shall grant the owner the right to occupy and use prior to and

during the completion of the Work of this Contract such portions or areas of the building as, in the opinion of the Consultant, are ready for occupancy.

b The work at the second floor is to be completed by January 15, 2015 to allow

the occupancy of the second floor by TRCA staff on February 1, 2015. The move and new furniture installation will occur from January 15 to February 1, 2015

2.1.7 DOCUMENTS AT SITE a Maintain the following documents on site: b Approved Construction Permit Drawings c Addendums d Reviewed Shop Drawings e Change Orders and Contemplated Change Orders, Change Directives f Site Instructions g Other Reports and test reports 2.1.8 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT a The Owner will provide the general building permit, the plumbing permit and

the HVAC permit. The permit fees shall be paid for by the Owner. b The Trade Contractors shall apply and pay for all other required permits,

fees, licences and similar approvals and documents.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 04 50 PAGE 1 CUTTING AND REMEDIAL WORK 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Requirements Included: 1.1.1 Cutting, patching and making good. 1.2 Related Requirements: 1.2.1 General Conditions: GC 3.12, Cutting and Remedial Work. 2. CUTTING AND PATCHING 2.1 Cut, patch and make good to leave work in a finished condition where new

work connects with existing and where existing work is altered. Cutting in this sense shall mean the actual cutting of components to allow new components to pass through or to provide new openings. Cutting shall not mean the mere drilling of holes to accommodate screws, anchors, bolts or other fasteners as such. Drilling shall be considered as part of a trade's installation function.

3. CUTTING 3.1 The Section requiring cuts, holes or sleeves for its work shall locate same.

Cuts shall be made by Section which did original work needing cutting or by trade trained in such work. Cuts shall be clean, true with smooth edges.

3.2 Avoid cutting reinforcing steel when cutting through existing concrete or

masonry slabs or structural members. Avoid cutting existing mechanical and electrical services, conduits and ducts to remain.

4. PATCHING: 4.1 Patching shall be done by Section which did original work being patched or

by trade trained in such work. Patches shall be invisible in final assembly. Complete and tightly fit, and seal if exterior wall, all construction to pipes, ducts and conduits which pass through construction to completely prevent the passage of air. Maintain or restore vapour barrier, air barrier, insulation and cavity in the building envelope. Maintain or restore fire or smoke rating of cut element.

5. APPROVALS REQUIRED FOR CUTTING AND PATCHING: 5.1 Whenever penetration of the exterior vapour barrier or air barrier of floor,

soffit, wall or roof is required which is not described in the Documents, submit shop drawings of the proposed method of making good the air and vapour barriers, insulation, cavity, membrane and finishes.

5.2 Obtain Consultant's written approval in each case where load bearing

members are to be cut, drilled or sleeved. Proposed locations for cutting and drilling reinforced concrete members shall be radiographed.

5.3 Final location of cuts and holes shall be reviewed by the Consultant before

such work commences.

SECTION 01 04 50 PAGE 2 CUTTING AND REMEDIAL WORK 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 6. MAKING GOOD: 6.1 Damaged work shall be made good by appropriate trades trained in such

work but at the expense of those causing damage. END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 20 00 PAGE 1 PROJECT MEETINGS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Requirements Included: 1.1.1 Administration of Project Meetings. 1.1.2 Pre-construction Meeting. 1.1.3 Progress Meetings. 1.2 Related Requirements: 1.2.1 Section 01 40 00, Co-ordination. 2. ADMINISTRATION OF PROJECT MEETINGS 2.1 Schedule and administer project meetings. 2.2 Prepare agenda for meetings. 2.3 Distribute written notice of each unscheduled meeting four days in advance of

meeting date to Consultant, subconsultants, Owner, and relevant Subcontractors.

2.4 Provide physical space and make arrangements for meetings. 2.5 The consultant shall chair the Preconstruction meeting. The General Contractor

shall chair all other project meetings. 2.6 A representative of the General Contractor shall record the minutes, include

significant proceedings and decisions, and identify àction by' parties, and delegate responsibility for required action.

2.7 The General Contractor shall reproduce and distribute copies of minutes

promptly within four days after each meeting and transmit to meeting participants, affected parties not in attendance and the Developer and the Consultants.

2.8 Representatives of General Contractor, Trade contractors, Subcontractors and

suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the party each represents.

3. PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING 3.1 Within 5 days after award of Contract, request a meeting of parties in contract

to discuss and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities. 3.2 Key representatives of the Owner, Consultants, General Contractor, Trade

Contractors, major Subcontractors, field inspectors and supervisors shall be in attendance.

3.3 Establish a time and location of meeting and notify parties concerned minimum

3 days before meeting.

SECTION 01 20 00 PAGE 2 PROJECT MEETINGS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 3.4 Incorporate mutually agreed variations to Contract Documents into Agreement,

prior to signing. 3.5 Agenda to include the following: 3.5.1 Appointment of official representative of participants in the Work. 3.5.2 Schedule of Work, progress scheduling (Section 01 33 00). 3.5.3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips, (Section 01 33 00). 3.5.4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities,

fences. 3.5.5 Delivery schedule of specified equipment (Section 01 33 00). 3.5.6 Contemplated change orders, change orders, procedures, approvals required,

mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, administrative requirements (GC),

3.5.7 Shop Drawings (Section 01 33 00). 3.5.8 Operating manuals and reference data (Section 01 33 00). 3.5.9 Record drawings (Section 01 33 00). 3.5.10 Maintenance manuals (Section 01 33 00). 3.5.11 Take-over procedures, acceptance, warranties (Sections 01 77 19 and 01 78

36). 3.5.12 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, holdback

(GC) (Sections 01 25 00 and 01 33 00). 3.5.13 The Consultant will provide the General Contractor with the inspection and

testing firm to contact. 3.5.14 Insurances, transcript of policies (GC). 4. PROGRESS MEETINGS 4.1 During course of Work schedule progress meetings every two weeks. 4.2 General Contractor, Trade Contractors, major Subcontractors involved in Work

and Consultants, and Owner are to be in attendance. 4.3 Notify parties minimum 3 days prior to meeting of changed time or place. 4.4 Agenda to include the following: 4.4.1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 4.4.2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting.

SECTION 01 20 00 PAGE 3 PROJECT MEETINGS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 4.4.3 Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4.4.4 Problems which impede construction schedule. 4.4.5 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules. 4.4.6 Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 4.4.7 Revisions to construction schedule. 4.4.8 Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. 4.4.9 Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 4.4.10 Maintenance of quality standards. 4.4.11 Pending changes and substitutions. 4.4.12 Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule and on

completion date. 4.4.13 Other business.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 25 00 PAGE 1 PAYMENT AND CHANGES 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Requirements Included 1.1.1 Application for Payment. 1.1.2 Change Order Procedure. 1.2 Related Requirements 1.2.1 Refer to CCDC 2 - 2008 2. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 2.1 Submit applications for monthly payments showing the full schedule of

values as per Section 01 33 00, in rough draft form for approval by the Consultants.

2.2 Enter Change Orders as approved during the preceding month on the

application form and keep up-to-date month by month. 2.3 Provide a Statutory Declaration on C.C.A. Form 9B certifying that all

accounts have been paid for which he has received payment prior to making application for Substantial Performance. C.C.A. Form No. 9A shall be used for the final application.

3. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE 3.1 Any variation in the Contract involving a change in the total amount of the

Contract Price shall be initiated by the Consultant in the form of a Contemplated Change Order (CCO) describing the work proposed under the variation and requesting a quotation from the Contractor.

3.2 An electronic copy only of the CCO will be issued. 3.3 The General Contractor shall inform all Subcontractors and suppliers of the

contemplated change. 3.4 The General Contractor shall return the CCO with his quotation for the work

to the Consultant. 3.5 The quotation shall cover all work described in the CCO and all other work

caused, however incidentally, by the contemplated change. 3.6 Once the quotation is accepted by the Owner no further extra costs or time

will be accepted in relation to the contemplated change. A Change Order will be issued.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 33 00 PAGE 1 SUBMITTALS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Requirements Included: 1.1.1 Survey Data. 1.1.2 Schedule of Values. 1.1.3 Construction Schedule. 1.1.4 Shop Drawings. 1.1.5 Record Drawings. 1.1.6 Operating Manuals and Reference Data. 1.2 Work Included: 1.2.1 Make submittals to the Consultant as called for throughout the Contract

Documents, in conformance with this Section. 1.2.2 Make any changes in submittals which the Consultant may require,

consistent with the Contract Documents and resubmit unless otherwise directed by the Consultant.

2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1 Contractor's Responsibility for Submittals: 2.1.1 The review of submittals by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of

ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design inherent in the submittals, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor submitting same. Such review shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the submittals, or of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the submittals, or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the Site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation, and for co-ordination of the work of all Subcontractors.

2.1.2 The Contractor shall assume responsibility for any conflicts occurring

between Subcontractors which result from lack of comparison and co-ordination of submittals of the work of the affected trades.

2.1.3 The Consultant's review of submittals does not authorize changes in cost or

time. 2.1.4 The Work shall conform to reviewed submittals subject to the above

conditions. 2.1.5 All submittals shall be checked by the Contractor for conformity to Drawings

and Specifications or approved substitutions and his contractual

SECTION 01 33 00 PAGE 2 SUBMITTALS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

requirements before submission to the Consultant for review. All submittals must bear the stamp of the Contractor and the signature of a responsible official in the Contractor's organization indicating in writing that such submittals have been checked and co-ordinated by the Contractor. The Contractor is required to signify his approval on all submittals before forwarding to the Consultant.

3. SURVEY DATA 3.1 Submit any survey data obtained by the Contractor or the Subcontractors for

the execution of the Work on which the completed Work is proposed to be based.

4. SCHEDULE OF VALUES 4.1 Submit a schedule of values in accordance with General Conditions. 5. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 5.1 The construction schedule shall be in the form of a bar chart showing the

commencement date, duration, completion date and any anticipated interruptions of each Section and each Sub-contractor.

5.2 Show the date of commencement of work and the date of Substantial

Completion. 6. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA 6.1 Submit shop drawings and product data as requested under the various

Sections. 6.2 Shop Drawing Submittal: 6.2.1 Submit shop drawings in Adobe Portable Document Format (pdf) 7. RECORD DRAWINGS 7.1 The General Contractor shall print and retain a complete and separate set

of white prints to keep on the Site at all times. 7.2 These prints shall be marked up by responsible personnel of the Contractor

and Subcontractors to record clearly, neatly, accurately and promptly all locations of buried mechanical and electrical work and deviations from the Contract Documents.

7.3 The accurate location, depth, size and type of each underground utility and

service line shall be recorded before concealment to ensure accurately directed future access to these buried lines.

7.4 AS BUILT DRAWINGS *

SECTION 01 33 00 PAGE 3 SUBMITTALS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

During construction of the Project the General Contractor shall maintain a record of any changes or revisions wherein the “as-built” construction condition differs from the drawings and specifications. Wherever practical the Architect shall be instructed to issue a Site Instruction documenting the revision. Where Site Instructions are not issued the “as-built” condition shall be noted on the “on-site” drawings by the General Contractor, and at the completion of the Project, the General Contractor shall provide this information to the relevant member of the construction team, so that they can incorporate said information on an updated set of “as-built drawings.

8. OPERATING MANUALS AND REFERENCE DATA 8.1 The General Contractor shall forward the following to the Consultant in

conformance with the specified take-over procedures: 8.1.1 In duplicate in two matching looseleaf binders: a. List of all Trade Contractors, Subcontractors, major suppliers, and local

equipment service representatives, their addresses and telephone numbers. b. Date of substantial completion (commencement of warranty periods) and

termination dates of warranties. c. Operating manuals including lubricating, repair and other instructions to

keep all mechanical and electrical/electronic equipment in good working order. Reviewed shop drawings of same.

d. Final hardware schedule, including lock manufacturer's descriptive and

service literature. e. Maintenance instructions for all types of floor finish and other special

finishes, if applicable, including instructions for cleaning, repairing, refinishing and freshening, and warnings on wrong maintenance procedures where necessary.

f. Maintenance and service instructions and manufacturer's literature for all

special architectural features - windows, patent glazing, etc. g. All duly completed and signed guarantees, warranties, etc. which extend

beyond the one year general period, for all work and equipment as specified or as otherwise available from manufacturers and trades.

h. A complete list of all such warranties. 8.2 The two binders shall be 8 1/2" x 11" format, hard cover, three-D ring. END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 1 COORDINATION 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Requirements Included: 1.1.1 Co-ordinate the Work. 1.1.2 Co-operate with Other Contractors. 1.2 Related Requirements: 1.2.1 General Conditions, Contractor's Responsibility and Control of the Work. 1.2.2 General Conditions, Superintendence. 2. CO-ORDINATE THE WORK 2.1 All applicable requirements of Division 01, General Requirements, apply to

all Sections of the Work. Instruct all Sections to read and familiarize themselves with all such requirements.

2.2 Co-ordinate all Sections. Maintain efficient and continuous supervision.

Ensure co-operation of workers in laying out the Work. 2.3 The use of work included, related Work, description of system, or similar

articles in the Specifications shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to assign the various parts of the Work to the appropriate Subcontractors and forces and shall not impose upon the Consultant the duty to arbitrate disputes between the Contractor and the Subcontractors nor shall it relieve the Subcontractors from their responsibility for carefully examining all the Drawings and Specifications and co-ordinating their work with each other and the Contractor.

2.4 Be responsible for co-ordination and placement of openings, sleeves and

accessories. 2.5 Take into account existing or previously installed installations to ensure best

arrangement of components in the available space. For critical locations where adequate direction is not given by the Documents, consult the Consultant.

2.6 Direct all Sections to: 2.6.1 Co-operate and co-ordinate with each other to ensure proper progress of the

Work; 2.6.2 Show all embedded items and holes etc. required by other Sections on Shop

Drawings before submitting to Architect. 2.6.3 Provide all necessary information required in regard to materials provided

under each Section and work required by other Sections. Exchange pertinent Shop Drawings with all Sections which interface with any Section.

SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 2 COORDINATION 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.6.4 Take field dimensions relative to the Work. Fabricate and erect Work to suit

field dimensions and field conditions. Provide forms, templates, anchors, sleeves, inserts and accessories required to be fixed to or inserted in the Work and set in place or instruct related Sections as to their location, giving required supervision.

2.6.5 Pay cost of extra work caused by, and make up time lost as a result of:

Failure to co-ordinate all Sections or to obtain from them co-operation and information necessary to co-ordinate their work with others.

3. CO-OPERATE WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS 3.1 Co-operate and co-ordinate with Other Contractors on the Project as

required for satisfactory and expeditious completion of the Project. 3.2 Afford all Other Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and

storage of their materials and the execution of their work. END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 50 00 PAGE 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Requirements Included: 1.1.1 Temporary Electricity; 1.1.2 Temporary Lighting; 1.1.3 Temporary Water; 1.1.4 Temporary Telephone; 1.1.5 Temporary Fire Protection; 1.1.6 Temporary First Aid Facilities; 1.1.7 Temporary Heating and Ventilating; 1.1.8 Temporary Sanitary Facilities. 1.2 Related Requirements: 1.2.1 General Conditions, Contractor's Responsibilities and Control of the Work. 1.2.2 All construction personnel to enter the work place through the doors at the

Loading Area on the north end of the building. 2. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY 2.1 120 volts, 15 amp max. power for small tools is available on site. 2.2 Provide temporary wiring to all floor areas as required for adequate power

(and light). Extension cords (and lamps) shall be provided by the Subcontractors requiring them.

4. TEMPORARY LIGHTING 4.1 Provide a minimum level of illumination in all areas where work is to take

place. 4.2 Further task lighting shall be provided by Subcontractors requiring same. 5. TEMPORARY WATER 5.1 Potable water for construction use is available at the site. 6. TEMPORARY TELEPHONE 6.1 The General Contractor will provide any telephones required for the work.

SECTION 01 50 00 PAGE 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 7. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 7.1 Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment during

performance of the Work as required by governing codes, regulations and by-laws.

7.2 The General Contractor will provide and maintain in working order, suitable

Underwriter's labelled, fire extinguishers and locate in prominent positions to approval of authorities.

7.3 The General Contractor will provide a minimum 50mm temporary standpipe

for firefighting with 25mm hose until permanent fire hoses are in working order, as required by the insurance companies and authorities.

8. TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES 8.1 The General Contractor will provide well stocked and maintained first aid kit

adequate to handle requirements of hazards in the Work in the Site office and at each building.

9. TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION 9.1 Temporary Heating: 9.2 Use of Permanent Heating and Ventilation System:

The permanent heating and ventilation system may be used by the Contractor under the following conditions:

9.3 Install temporary filters on exhaust fans to protect them from dust. 9.4 Inspect and maintain all parts of system on a regular basis. 9.5 Before turning the Work over to the Owner, clean, inspect and service

equipment if necessary, and turn over to Owner in clean and like-new manner.

10. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 10.1 The General Contractor may use the washrooms on the first floor only. 10.2 Washrooms are to be kept clean and final cleaning is to be carried out prior

to occupancy. Provide soap and toilet paper for the duration of the work. 10.3 Repair or replace any areas or items damaged during the work. 10.4 Portable toilets are not required. END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 66 00 PAGE.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 07 Nov 2014 ward 99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Requirements Included: 1.1.1 Acceptable Products; 1.1.2 Product Options; 1.1.3 Availability; 1.1.4 Transportation; 1.1.5 Storage, Handling and Protection. 1.2 Related Requirements: 1.2.1 General Conditions, Labour and Products. 2. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS AND FABRICATORS 2.1 Products and materials specified throughout the specifications are

acceptable only provided they meet all requirements of the specifications. 2.2 Acceptable products become approved products only after they are

manufactured, fabricated, supplied, assembled, installed and demonstrate performance in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and their intent.

2.3 Where some products specified as acceptable under a product description

do not meet all requirements of the specifications, it is understood that, if tendered, the fabrication and/or materials of such products will be modified so that the products provided to the Work meet all requirements of the specifications, unless authorized otherwise by the Consultant in writing.

2.4 Deviations from the specifications shown on Shop Drawings reviewed by the

Consultant do not qualify as deviations accepted in writing by the Consultant. 3. PRODUCT OPTIONS FOR OWNER 3.1 Offer all choices available within specified products for colours, patterns,

finishes, or options available. Submit full range or product options as per Section 01 33 00, Submittals, for Consultant's choice.

4. AVAILABILITY 4.1 It is imperative that materials specified for the project are readily available

and are manufactured, if possible, in Canada, to ensure delivery in keeping with the critical construction schedule.

4.2 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm with the supplier and/or

distributor that the products specified, will be on the Site when required. To

SECTION 01 66 00 PAGE.2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 07 Nov 2014 ward 99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

this end, the Contractor shall obtain confirmed delivery dates from the suppliers and/or distributors for all products.

4.3 Inability of the supplier and/or the distributor to give these dates, or to meet

the schedule as required by the Contractor, shall be brought immediately to the attention of the Consultant.

4.4 If delays in supply of Products are foreseeable, notify the Consultant of such,

in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of the Work.

4.5 In the event of failure to notify the Consultant at commencement of the Work

and should it subsequently appear that the Work may be delayed for such reason, the Consultant reserves the right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, and of his choice, at no increase in Contract Price.

5. TRANSPORTATION 5.1 Pay costs of transportation of Products required in the performance of the

Work and not supplied by the Owner. 5.2 Transportation cost of Products supplied by the Owner will be paid for by the

Owner. Unload, handle and store such Products. 5.3 Reject Products damaged in transit. 6. STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION 6.1 Handle and store Products in a manner to prevent damage, adulteration,

deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.

6.2 Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition

with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in the Work.

6.3 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures. 6.4 Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from

walls. 6.5 Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store

sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.

6.6 Do not store sand or soil materials against above grade masonry. 6.7 Store sheet materials, lumber, doors, windows and casework on flat, solid

supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to shed moisture those materials exposed to weather or rainwater.

SECTION 01 66 00 PAGE.3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 07 Nov 2014 ward 99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 6.8 Store and mix paints in a heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags

and other combustible debris from Site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion. Storage of paint materials in the finished Work is not approved.

6.9 Remove and replace damaged Products at own expense and to the

satisfaction of the Consultant. END OF SECTION

SECTION 00 74 13 PAGE 1 CLEANING 07 Nov 14 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Requirements Included: 1.1.1 Cleaning of the Work in progress. 1.2 Related Requirements: 1.2.1 Section 01 77 19, Contract Closeout. 1.2.2 General Conditions, Clean-up and Final Cleaning of the Work. 2. GENERAL CLEANING 2.1 The General Contractor shall clean the building and the Site each week

during the construction period. Each Trade Contractor shall be responsible to maintain his work areas in a clean condition and remove all debris and excess material from the Site immediately after clean up.

a. Should a Trade Contractor fail to perform such clean up and/or removal then

the General Contractor shall notify the Contractor in writing that he is in default of his contractual obligations and instruct the Contractor to undertake said work within five (5) days of receiving the notice.

b. If the Contractor fails to comply with the direction, then the General

Contractor may undertake such work and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor.

2.2 Each Contractor shall remove oily rags and waste and other combustible

debris from building at close of each day, or more often if required, and from Site at least once a week.

3. EXTERIOR GLASS 3.1 The General Contractor shall clean the interior of all exterior glass at

completion of his Work. 4. SUBFLOORS 4.1 Where floors which are to receive adhered floor finishes are contaminated

with grease or oil, the Floor Finish Contractor shall obtain and follow flooring manufacturer's instructions for cleaning procedure, subject to Consultant's approval, before installing flooring.

5. STRIPPABLE COATINGS AND LABELS 5.1 Each Contractor shall remove from his finished surfaces all labels and

strippable protective coatings before they become baked on or thermoset or difficult to remove.

SECTION 00 74 13 PAGE 2 CLEANING 07 Nov 14 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 6. FINISHED SURFACES 6.1 Each Contractor shall clean his finished surfaces upon the completion of the

work of each Section for inspection by the Consultant. 7. FINISHED AREAS 7.1 Each Contractor shall close-off rooms and areas when work of installing

finished flooring, painting and wall covering is in progress or complete. END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 77 19 PAGE 1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Requirements Included: 1.1.1 Take-Over Procedure; 1.1.2 Final Cleaning; 1.1.3 Systems Demonstrations; 1.1.4 Documents; 1.1.5 Project Commissioning. 1.2 Related Requirements: 1.2.1 General Conditions, Payment; 1.2.2 General Conditions, Workers' Compensation 1.2.3 General Conditions, Clean-up 1.2.4 Section 00 25 00, Payment and Changes; 1.2.5 Section 01 33 00, Submittals (Record Drawings, Operating Manuals); 1.2.6 Section 01 74 13, Cleaning; 2. TAKE-OVER PROCEDURE 2.1 General: At the time of Substantial Performance, the General

Contractor will state his intentions for occupancy of the Project in writing to the Owner. The General Contractor shall conduct the completion of the Work in accordance with this Section.

2.1.1 The procedure for completing contracts and acceptance by the Owner is to

be in accordance with the method described in the OAA/OGCA Document 100 and any additional requirements described below. The procedure described in the document consists of the following seven stages:

Stage 1 Contractor's Inspection for Substantial

Performance Stage 2 Contractor's Application for Certificate

of Substantial Performance Stage 3 Consultant's Certificate of Substantial

Performance Stage 4 Consultant's Certificate for Payment of

Holdback Monies Stage 5 Final Inspection for Total Performance Stage 6 Consultant's Final Payment Certificate

SECTION 01 77 19 PAGE 2 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

Stage 7 Guarantee Period(s). 2.1.2 All stages will be reviewed at the first Owner's Co-ordination Site Meeting

to ensure that all parties understand their responsibilities. (See Article on Documents in this Section)

2.2 The Lien Period:

The Lien Period commencement, procedure and release of holdback monies will be in accordance with the Construction Lien Act.

2.3 Certificate of Substantial Performance:

The Certificate of Substantial Performance is to be prepared in the form required by the Construction Lien Act. When issued it is to have attached a normal Progress Certificate showing the statement of account to-date and is to be sub-titled "Substantial Performance". It is also to be accompanied by the Final Change Order, sub-titled FINAL, on which all expenditures from cash allowances are consolidated.

2.4 Defect and Deficiency: 2.4.1 A defect is an item of the Work required by the Contract which has been

installed but requires repair and/or replacement at a specific time. 2.4.2 A deficiency is an item of the Work required by the Contract which has not

been installed or put into operating condition. 2.4.3 A guarantee item is an item of work, installed under a contract which the

manufacturer or installer agrees to maintain in, or restore to perfect condition for a specific period of time, after the Owner's acceptance of the Work as being substantially complete.

2.4.4 When, in the Consultant's opinion, the Work under the Contract is

substantially complete, and prior to the final inspection by the Owner, a preliminary inspection shall be made at which time all defects and deficiencies shall be listed, taking care to distinguish between the two.

2.5 Deficiency Lists: 2.5.1 The Consultant will not be responsible for the issuance of extensive lists of

deficiencies. The Contractor is to understand that the prime responsibility for ensuring that all items shown on the Drawings and described in the Specification are complete is his. Any inspections to approve Certificates of Substantial Performance must be immediately cancelled if it becomes obvious that extensive deficiencies are outstanding.

2.5.2 Every effort shall be made to ensure that both defects and deficiencies are made good prior to final inspection.

SECTION 01 77 19 PAGE 3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.5.3 During the inspection, decision must be made as to which defects must be

rectified before the building can be accepted and which defects are to be treated as guarantee items.

2.5.4 Deficiencies shall be made good before the Contract is considered complete. 3. FINISHED AREAS 3.1 Close rooms and areas when Work of finished flooring, painting and wall

covering is at final application stage and is complete. 4. FINAL CLEANING 4.1 Remove waste materials and debris from the Site at regularly scheduled

times or dispose of as directed by the Consultant. Do not burn waste materials on site, unless approved by the Consultant.

4.2 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having

jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris. 4.3 Leave the work broom clean before the inspection process commences. 4.4 Immediately prior to occupancy, clean and dust and remove all stains and

smudges from all finished surfaces, and all exposed fixtures and equipment. 4.5 Remove dust and soil from all surfaces by vacuuming, damp mopping,

washing or scrubbing, as required. Vacuum behind grilles, louvres and screens.

4.6 Exterior paved walkways and roadways shall be thoroughly washed down. 4.7 Glass, mirrors and polished metal surfaces shall be cleaned and polished

free of streaks. 4.8 Clean all mechanical and electrical equipment, plumbing fixtures, light

fixtures, casework, specialties and accessories. 4.9 Remove all temporary labels, protective coatings, markings and tags,

thoroughly clean surfaces of adhesive. 4.10 Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes. 4.11 Clean roofs, gutters and downspouts. 4.12 Clean drains and drainage systems and leave open and functioning. 4.13 Purge potable water system. 4.14 Avoid contamination of surrounding surfaces with cleaning fluids. Install

temporary protection, if required, and remove same immediately upon completion of the cleaning operation involved.

SECTION 01 77 19 PAGE 4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 4.15 Methods and materials for cleaning shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations for the finishes involved. Exercise extreme care with abrasive and chemical cleaning agents, and verify their compatibility with the finish and materials to be cleaned.

4.16 Use heavy-duty type industrial machine for all vacuum cleaning. 5. SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION 5.1 Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to Owner's

Operating Staff and Consultants. 5.2 Instruct personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment

and systems, using provided operation and maintenance data as the basis for instruction.

5.3 The Contractor and responsible personnel from the sub-trades whose work

is being demonstrated shall be present at these demonstrations. 6. DOCUMENTS 6.1 Within 42 days of commencement of Work the Contractor shall make the first

submittal required by OAA/OGCA Document 100, Take-Over Procedures. 6.2 Submit all documents in accordance with Section 01300, and take-over

procedures. 6.3 Submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum,

previous payments, and monies remaining due. 6.4 All required documents shall be submitted along with request for certification

of Substantial Performance. Consultant's inspection for Substantial Performance shall not take place until such submittal.

6.5 In addition to the above requirements the following items shall be provided:

.1 Confirmation of occupancy approved by the municipality.

.2 Insurance Advisory Organization approval of the sprinkler system.

.3 Elevator inspection and approval by governing authority.

.4 Verification of the fire alarm system.

.5 Confirmation of acceptance of fire alarm system, sprinkler system and annunciator by the Fire Department.

7. PROJECT COMMISSIONING 7.1 Expedite and complete deficiencies and defects identified by the Consultant.

SECTION 01 77 19 PAGE 5 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 7.2 Review maintenance manual contents (operating, maintenance

instructions, record "as-built" drawings, materials) for completeness. Review supply and completeness of all spare parts required by the Documents and the manufacturers.

7.3 Review cash and contingency allowances in relation to Contract Price,

change orders, holdbacks and other Contract Price adjustments. 7.4 Submit required documentation such as statutory declarations, Workers'

Compensation Certificates, warranties, certificates of approval or acceptance from the authorities.

7.5 Attend 'end-of-work' testing and break-in or start-up demonstrations. 7.6 Review inspection and testing reports to verify conformance to the intent of

the documents and that changes, repairs or replacements have been completed.

7.7 Meet with other consultants, structural, mechanical, electrical, to co-ordinate

completion, testing and approvals. 7.8 Review condition of equipment which have been used in the course of the

work to ensure turning over at completion in "as new condition" with warranties, dated and certified.

7.9 Arrange and co-ordinate instruction of Owner's staff in care, maintenance

and operation of building systems and finishes by suppliers or Subcontractors.

7.10 When partial occupancy of uncompleted project is required by the Owner,

co-ordinate Owner's uses, requirements, access, with Contractor's requirements to complete project.

7.11 The Construction Manager shall co-ordinate Owner's moving-in of staff,

furnishings, equipment with building accessibility, traffic, and Contractor's and Subcontractor's cleaning-up and completion activities all to suit Owner's work schedule and not disrupt Owner's productivity.

7.12 Each Contractor shall provide on-going review, inspection and attendance

to building call-back, maintenance and repair problems during the Warranty periods.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 78 36 PAGE 1 WARRANTIES 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Requirements Included: 1.1.1 Definitions; 1.1.2 Date of Commencement of Warranty Period; 1.1.3 Submittals; 1.1.4 Transition to Warranty Period; 1.1.5 Extended or Special Warranties. 1.2 Related Requirements: 1.2.1 General Conditions. 2. DEFINITIONS 2.1 Failure of a product, a system of products, a piece of equipment or a system

of equipment to operate in the manner in which they were designed and/or specified shall constitute a defect.

2.2 The term "defect" shall not be construed as embracing such imperfections

as would naturally follow misuse, failure to perform recommended maintenance or accident.

2.3 Generally, any manufactured item or material which, when used as directed,

must be capable of such use for the duration of the specified warranty period. Failure to comply with this requirement shall be considered as being a "defect".

2.4 The costs of investigations, tests, repairs and/or replacement and the

making good of any resulting damage shall be borne by the contractor. 2.5 Perform all required remedial work without undue delay. 3. DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF WARRANTY PERIOD 3.1 The warranty period for each product or installation shall commence on the

date of publication of Substantial Performance by the Work after being certified by the Architect or the date of acceptance f a product or system, whichever comes later.

3.2 The above applies for products or installations used by the Contractor during

the progress of the Work, and the Contractor assumes such upon putting to use such products and installations.

SECTION 01 78 36 PAGE 2 WARRANTIES 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Submit a fully executed and notarized copy of each extended warranty and

each warranty with special provisions, worded as per the specifications, along with application for Certificate of Substantial Performance.

4.2 Submit, at time of Substantial Performance, a complete list of all extended

and special warranties as above in Operating Manuals in Section 01300. Format list as per the list following.

5. EXTENDED OR SPECIAL WARRANTIES 5.1 The following is a compilation of extended warranties, i.e. warranties which

extend beyond the 12 months required under the General Conditions of Contract or which have special conditions attached to them.

5.2 This list is given for convenience only and may not be complete. There may

exist warranties in the Specifications or elsewhere in the Contract Documents or warranties may be available for products supplied for the Work without said warranties being stipulated in the Contract Documents. All such warranties are applicable and in force whether listed in this summary or not.

6. LIST OF EXTENDED AND SPECIAL WARRANTIES

Work or Product Section(s) Warranty Period

6.1 Finish Carpentry, 06 41 13 2 years plastic laminate.

6.2 Joint Sealers 07 92 13 3 years 6.3 Steel Doors and Frames 08 13 13 2 years 6.4 Wood Doors 08 14 16 3 years 6.5 Finish Hardware 08 70 00 2 years 6.6 Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 2 years 6.7 Sheet Carpet 09 68 16

Manufacturer: 10 years Installation: 2 years

6.8 Operable Partitions 10 22 26 5 years 6.9 Glass Partitions 10 22 39 5 years

SECTION 01 78 36 PAGE 3 WARRANTIES 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA END OF SECTION

SECTION 02 41 13 PAGE 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included a. Work consists of the selective interior demolition. b. Removal of carpet. c. Removal of gypsum board and metal stud partitions. d. Millwork e. Doors and frames f. Ceilings where indicated g. Refer to Demolition drawings for more detail. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere a. Erecting of temporary hoardings. b. Removal of mechanical and electrical services and equipment, provided

under Divisions 23 and 26. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies a. Conform to the requirements of all pertinent codes, by-laws and regulations. 1.3.2 Carry out demolition in strict accordance with provincial and municipal

regulations as applicable, and Part 8 of Ontario Building Code. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 1.4.1 Protection a. Protect immediate and adjacent property against damage which might occur. b. Burning of debris on site is not permitted. 1.4.2 Maintaining Traffic: a. Do not close nor obstruct, place nor store materials in roadways, sidewalks,

or laneways.

SECTION 02 41 13 PAGE 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 Unless otherwise indicated, all materials requiring demolition and not

forming permanent part of building shall become property of Contractor and shall be removed from site.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 When contaminated or dangerous material is encountered, remove from Site

and dispose of by safe means so that no danger is involved at job Site or in disposing operations. Selling from Site is not permitted.

3.1.2 Arrange with appropriate trades to have all services disconnected and

sealed as applicable. 3.1.3 Remove resultant debris from Site. 3.1.4 Provide all demolition required to permit the various parts of the Work. 3.2 LIST OF DEMOLITION 3.2.1 See Drawings and visit site to determine extent of demolition Work.

a. Ensure Owner has removed all materials he wants to keep; b. Remove existing carpet and existing vinyl composite tile. All existing

adhesives and mastics to be removed from the existing concrete floor. The concrete slab is to be left dry, smooth and free from debris to accept the new carpet tile installation.

3.3 SALVAGE 3.3.1 Treasure, such as coins, bills, papers of value and

articles of antiquity and historical significance discovered during the Work shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered into his custody immediately.

3.3.2 All other salvage is the property of the Contractor and

shall be removed from site. END OF SECTION

SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 1 METAL FABRICATIONS DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects TRCA-14019 1. GENERAL

.1 Undertake welding only by welders fully approved to the following codes as applicable. CSA W55.5, Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Steel Members Used in Buildings.

.2 Provide shop drawings. 2. PRODUCTS

.1 Materials generally: New, free of rust, waves, buckles, or other defects which are visible or that may impair structural, adequacy and durability.

.2 Steel: CSA G40.21 Grade 44W for rolled sections, bars and plates; and Grade 50W, Class H, for hollow sections.

.3 Bituminous Paint: Alkali resisting, CGSB Spec. 1-GP-108.

.4 Prime Paint for Steel: CGSB Specifications 1-GP-40 for oil alkyd primer and 1-GP-132 for zinc chromate primer as applicable for specified finish treatments.

.5 Zinc rich paint: CGSB 1-GP-181.

.6 Fabricate to ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion and permanent deformation.

.7 Fit joints, corners copes and mitres tightly, smoothly and in true planes, and with concealed fastenings, unless this is impossible by detail. Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions between this and other work.

.8 Weld connections where possible; bolt where not possible; cut off bolts flush with nuts; countersink bolt heads and provide means to prevent loosening of nuts. Make welded joints tight and flush ground smooth where exposed to view; and continuous to prevent entry of water into building or into component voids where free drainage is not provided.

.9 Finish surfaces and edges smoothly, including holes. Fill joints and depressions with metal paste filler or welds, and grind smooth.

.10 Support work with level bearings. Machine grind bearing surface at loose components.

.11 Priming of Steel: one coat of prime paint on surfaces unless otherwise specified and except where field welded, galvanized or imbedded in concrete. Remove from surfaces loose scale, rust dirt, weld flux and other foreign materials, and grind sharp projections smooth before priming. Work paint into all crevices and finish smoothly. Give surfaces inaccessible to finish painting two coats of prime paint.

.12 Galvanized Steel Sheet: to ASTM A52M, Z90 zinc coating. .13 Specified Miscellaneous Metal Items: Refer to drawings:

.1 Steel Bollards .2 Galvanized metal trough and perimeter trim for the Living Wall, 16 gauge.

3. EXECUTION

.1 Examine conditions at site to ensure work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction, and around obstructions and projections in place or as indicated on drawings or both.

.2 Install work plumb, true, square, level and fitted tightly and accurately to adjacent work.

.3 Insulate between dissimilar metals, or between metal and masonry or concrete with bituminous paint to prevent electrolysis.

.4 Clean and refinish to remove soil and repair prime painted and galvanized surfaces with zinc rich paint. Remove damaged, dented, defaced or tool marked components and replace with new.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 2 METAL FABRICATIONS DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects TRCA-14019

SECTION 06 10 00 PAGE 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY 07Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included: a. Wood framing for townhouses. Provide wood blocking for roofs, and for

support of wall mounted millwork, equipment and washroom accessories. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Wood trim provided by Section 06 20 23, Interior Finish Carpentry; b. Painting provided in conformance with Section 09 91 23. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Conform to the requirements of: a. The Code, Part 9 for wood framing and sheathing; b. CAN3-086-M80, Engineering Design in Wood (Working Stress Design).

CAN3-086.1-M84, Engineering Design in Wood (Limit States Design). 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings upon request. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 Protect all wood products from wetting and moisture, protect wood products

from moisture gain, by covering with well secured tarpaulins during rain or snow or storing indoors during prolonged inclement weather.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Conform to: a. The National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading Rules for

Canadian Lumber, 1977, and b. CSA 0141-1970, Softwood Lumber.

SECTION 06 10 00 PAGE 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 07Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.1.2 Moisture Content: All wood products shall by dry at time of delivery and

installation. 2.1.3 Other Lumber: CSA 0141-1970, Spruce-Pine-Fir, dressed structural. 2.1.4 Bolts, Nuts and Washers: CSA-S16.1-M89 and ASTM A325, standard

structural grade, hexagonal nuts. 2.1.5 Nails: CSA BIII-1974: 2.1.6 Moisture Barrier: under all wood products bearing on concrete: CSA

A123.3-M1979, 22.7kg (50lb) asphalt-coated roofing felt. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Provide moisture barrier specified under all wood products resting on

concrete. 3.1.2 Nailing of framing and sheathing shall conform to or exceed requirements

of Tables 9.23.3.4 and 9.23.3.5. of the Ontario Building Code. 3.1.3 Provide Support for all wall mounted items such as handrails, grab bars,

cabinets and washroom accessories. 3.1.4 Provide Equipment back panels as called for in Divisions 23 and 26 of the

Specifications. END OF SECTION

SECTION 06 20 00 PAGE 1 FINISH CARPENTRY DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included: a. Provide finish wood trim, and other items detailed on drawings or referred to

in this section. b. Provide nailing strips for Architectural Woodwork and Specialties. c. Receive and install: Architectural woodwork, metal fabrications as

specified, finish hardware, doors, door frames and screws, washroom and janitorial accessories, and wardrobe specialties.

1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Rough framing and structural blocking provided by Section 06100, Rough

Carpentry; b. Items installed by this Section supplied by the following Sections:

Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications; Section 06 40 00, Architectural Woodwork; Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware; Section 10 28 13, Washroom Accessories; Section 08 13 13, Steel Doors and Frames; Section 08 14 16 Wood Doors

c. This Section to bed thresholds in sealant as specified in Section 07 92 13. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Work of this Section shall be performed by journeyman carpenters familiar

with the work they are installing. 1.3.2 Conform to the requirements of the following; a. The Ontario Building Code; b. CAN 3-O86-M84, Engineering Design In Wood (Working Stress Design); c. The National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading Rules; d. Quality Standards For Architectural Woodwork, Edition 2, by the

Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers of Canada (AWMAC); e. CSA O112 - Series M1977, Standards for Wood Adhesives;

SECTION 06 20 00 PAGE 2 FINISH CARPENTRY DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA f. CSA O121 - M1978, Douglas Fir Plywood; g. CSA O141 - 1970, Softwood Lumber; h. CSA O151 - M1978, Canadian Softwood Plywood; i. CAN 3 O188.1-M78, Interior Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard; j. CAN 3 0188.3-M82, Exterior-Bond Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard; k. CAN 3 O437.O-M85, Waverboard and Strandboard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Submit 1 pdf copy of all details and instructions for all work to be installed by

this Section. Where products are fabricated by other Sections, instructions and details shall be as provided by the fabricator through this Section.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 Protect all wood from wetting and moisture gain. 1.5.2 Receive and store all products with care, preventing damage, store indoors

in secure, dry area off the floor, under wrap. 1.6 WARRANTY 1.6.1 Warrant plastic laminate work for a period of two years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 General:

Conform to: a. The National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading rules; b. The Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada Millwork

Standards, (AWMAC). 2.1.2 Moisture Content: All wood products shall be dry at time of delivery and

installation. 2.1.3 Unfinished Lumber: NLGA Spruce-Pine-Fir, "Construction" Light Framing

Grade. 2.1.4 Unfinished Plywood: Douglas Fir, G1S, or particleboard, Sanded,

waterproof, 19mm thick for panelboards.

SECTION 06 20 00 PAGE 3 FINISH CARPENTRY DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.1.5 Interior Exposed Wood for Paint: AWMAC Custom Grade, clear pine. 2.1.6 Interior Exposed Plywood for Paint: AWMAC Paint Grade, composition

board core. White birch face or faces (each exposed face). 2.1.7 Nails: "Common spiral nails", for unfinished work, and "spiral finishing

nails" for finished work, conforming to CSA B111-1974. 2.1.8 Adhesives: Waterproof, suited to work for which they are used,

conforming to CSA 0112 Series-M1977. 2.1.9 Birch: Clear Select, Architectural Grade White Birch.

2.1.10 MDF: Medium Density Fibreboard 2.2.2 FABRICATION 2.2.1 Fabricate work of this Section to AWMAC Custom Grade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Finished Woodwork: Conform to AWMAC Millwork Standards for Custom

Grade work. 3.1.2 Woodwork: Cut and fit accurately, neatly and true to line. 3.1.3 Securement: Secure woodwork and other products in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations for best results, in accordance with AWMAC standards, the Drawings and reviewed shop drawings and to best practice to ensure all work in place for long life under hard use.

3.1.4 Installation of Products from Other Sections: Collect and review shop

and installation drawings of all such work. Install all such work in accordance with reviewed installation drawings and manufacturers printed instructions and directions.

3.1.5 Metal Fabrications: Install metal fabrications listed in Section 05500 to be

installed by this Section. 3.1.6 Doors and Screens: Hang wood and steel doors and screens plumb and

accurately within openings, free of hinge bound condition. 3.1.7 Bed all exterior and vestibule door thresholds in bed of sealant. 3.1.8 Hardware: Install all hardware except cabinet hardware. Install in strict

conformance with manufacturer's instructions and as dictated by hardware schedule.

SECTION 06 20 00 PAGE 4 FINISH CARPENTRY DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 3.1.9 Washroom and Janitorial Accessories: Install in accordance with

Section 10 28 13, reviewed shop drawings and reviewed instructions. END OF SECTION

SECTION 06 41 13 PAGE 1 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included: a. Supply and install all architectural woodwork requiring shop fabrication.

See List at end of this Section. Co-ordinate with purchase agreements. b. Cutting of sink and faucet openings. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Painting of walls behind cabinets by Section 09 91 23. b. Sinks, trim and plumbing provided by Division 23, Mechanical; 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Quality Standards for Architectural Woodwork, Edition 2, by the Architectural

Woodwork Manufacturers of Canada (AWMAC); 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Shop Drawings:

Submit shop drawings. 1.4.2 Samples: a. Submit samples of proposed kitchen and vanity units for approval. 1.4.3 Reference Data: a. Provide finish materials, catalogue cuts and maintenance instructions

including warnings on wrong maintenance practices for insertion in Operating Manuals and Reference Data specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND STANDARDS 2.1.1 Countertops: Plastic laminate bonded to plywood of 19 mm thickness,

post formed edges. 2.1.2 Doors: Plywood, 19 mm with plastic laminate face and edges and interiors.

SECTION 06 41 13 PAGE 2 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.1.3 Edges: Plastic laminate 2.1.4 Gables: 19mm plywood. Plastic laminate faces. Top and bottom edging

same as face. 2.1.5 Shelves: Plywood covered two sides with plastic laminate, and all exposed

edges. 2.1.6 Drawers: Plywood covered two sides with plastic laminate, and all

exposed edges. 19mm face panel. 13mm front, sides and back. Bottom 6mm hardboard covered one side with plastic lamnate. Drawer

grooved and glued in four sides. Drawer face and edges to match doors. 2.1.7 Kickboard: Plywood for installation of rubber base and stainless steel

base. 2.1.8 Backing: 6 mm plywood covered one side with plastic laminate. 2.1.9 Hinges: Self-closing metal, 180 degree opening, concealed. 2.1.10 Handles: Manufacturer's concealed design or "D" handles as selected by

the Architect. 2.1.11 Finishes:

a. Plastic Laminate: PL1 for cabinetry: Formica 933-58 b. Plastic Laminate: PL2 for counters: Nevamar, Silver Alu Metalx /

MXT003 c. Stainless Steel kickbase:

Manufacturer: diamondLife Type: Base Molding MX4 Height: 4” with 0.25”bottom cove edge Length: 8LF in length each piece, cut to suit Metal: Stainless Steel: Brushed, 0.030” thick (22GA) Mounting: Plain Back requires polyurethane construction adhesive to secure molding to wood base at cabinet Special Pieces at cabinet base corners: Provide pre-formed outside corners and pre-formed inside corners.

2.2 FABRICATION 2.2.1 General: a. Conform to AWMAC Millwork Standards. 2.3 INSTALLATION 2.3.1 Install units plumb, level, scribed to walls and floors, fastened solidly to

backing in a manner to adequately sustain loads. 2.3.2 Use filler pieces as required and show location on shop drawings.

SECTION 06 41 13 PAGE 3 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Deliver work to Section 06 20 23, Interior Finish Carpentry, at Site. 3.2 CLEAN-UP 3.2.1 At time of final acceptance of the Work, Section 06 20 23 to strip work of all

wrappings and labels on Site. 3.3 LIST OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

LOCATION COMPONENTS 3.3.1 Cabinetry - Base and upper cabinets - Counter tops - Drawer units 3.3.2 Coat Rod Shelf: Plastic laminate on 19mm plywood.

Chrome coat rod and flanges secured to plywood gussets at each end.

3.3.3 Display Case 1. General: Material thickness shall be as indicated on the drawings.

2. Case Bodies and Faces: Plastic laminate finished plywood with particle board core.

3. Case Doors: Tempered glass to CAN/CGSB-12.1, with integral round finger pulls, 12mm minimum thickness. 4. Case Shelves: Tempered glass to CAN/CGSB-12.1, with integral round finger pulls, 12mm minimum thickness. 5. Hardware: Refer to Cabinet and Misc. Hardware Refer to drawings A12, K1 and K2. END OF SECTION

SECTION 06 41 93 PAGE 1 CABINET and MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Hardware for custom fabricated millwork.

.2 Miscellaneous hardware.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Division 1 ‐ General Requirements.

.2 Section 06 20 23 ‐ Finish Carpentry.

.3 Section 06 41 13 ‐ Architectural Woodwork.

.4 Section 08 70 00 ‐ Door Hardware.

1.03 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

.1 Millwork Hardware: for installation under Section 06 41 13 ‐ Architectural Woodwork. .2 Miscellaneous Hardware: for installation under Section 06 20 23 ‐ Finish Carpentry.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 CAN/CGSB‐69.17‐M86, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. .2 CAN/CGSB‐69.25‐M90/ANSI/BHMA‐A156.9‐1982, Cabinet Hardware. .3 CAN/CGSB‐69.27‐93/ANSI/BHMA‐A156.11‐1991, Cabinet Locks. .4 CAN/CGSB‐69.32‐M90/ANSI/BHMA‐A156.16‐1981, Auxiliary Hardware.

1.05 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 00 00 ‐ General Requirements: Submittals. .2 Submit one sample of each piece of hardware.

1.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

.1 Submit cabinet and miscellaneous hardware schedule in accordance with Section

01 00 00 ‐ General Requirements: Submittals. .2 Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, material, function, finish and

other pertinent information.

1.07 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide maintenance data, parts list, and manufacturer's instructions for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 ‐ General Requirements: Project Closeout.

.2 Brief maintenance staff regarding proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance.

SECTION 06 41 93 PAGE 2 CABINET and MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 Store hardware in locked, clean and dry area.

.2 Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HARDWARE ITEMS

.1 Use one manufacturer's Product for all similar items.

2.02 MILLWORK HARDWARE

.1 Cabinet Hardware: to CAN/CGSB‐69.25. .1 Hinges: 1700 opening, self‐closing, full overlay hinges, with factory‐installed

knock‐on dowels. Wood screw fastening system will not be accepted. Acceptable Products: Blum or Salice.

.2 Hinge Plates: one piece plate with minimum 3mm height adjustment, install using pre‐mounted system screws. Wood screw fastening system will not be accepted.

.3 Door Dampener: Blumotion 971A with Cruciform Base.

.4 Bumpers: polyurethane, 3mm high by 10mm diameter. Minimum 2 per door and drawer front.

.5 Pulls: 8mm diameter solid aluminum wire type pull, 96mm centres, silver anodized finish. Häfele Canada Inc.: 116.05.922.

.6 Latches: Elbow catch , Richelieu Heavy Duty Elbow Catch No. 5540180, nickel finish. .7 Double Door Bolt: Die‐cast zinc, Häfele Canada Inc. Automatic Door Bolt No. 245.58.754. .8 Pilasters: "U" shaped for recessed installation steel with zinc plating. Knape and

Vogt KV‐255. .9 Shelf Brackets: Clip‐in steel brackets ‐ Finish to match pilasters. Knape and Vogt KV‐256. .10 Drawer Slides: 45 kg capacity, full extension, length to suit, with self‐closing

feature. Accuride No. 3832 EC Easy Close .11 Flush Bolts: Onward 392C. .12 Casters: steel zinc-plated, swivel casters, 35kg capacity, 40mm diameter. Hafele Canada Inc. Item 662.03.870

.13 Cabinet Locks: To CAN/CGSB-69.27, cylinder lock recessed in door or drawer front, dead bolt type lock, complete with matching strikes as required.

.1 Door locks: CompX National Stock Locks C8704. .2 Drawer locks: CompX National Stock Locks C8703. .14 Cable Grommets: Hafele, two piece, plastic with brush, silver, 80mm diameter,

SECTION 06 41 93 PAGE 3 CABINET and MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA No. 631.35,214.

2.03 DISPLAY CASE HARDWARE

.1 Pilasters: “U” shaped for recessed installation, double-slotted steel with zinc coating. Knape and Vogt KV-85 Standards .2 Brackets: Clip-in double steel brackets, finish to match pilasters. Knape and Vogt KV-185 Brackets, in lengths shown on details

.3 Sliding glass door locks: Ratchet locks, polished nickel steel. Knape and Vogt KV-965NP

.4 Sliding Glass Door Track Assembly: Anodized aluminum double channel at top and sides, double channel and tracks at bottom. .1 Channel: Knape and Vogt, KV-1093 .2 Track: Knape and Vogt, KV-1096/1093 assembly .5 Sliding Glass Door Shoe: Anodized aluminum with steel ball bearing rollers at bottom of glass doors. Knape and Vogt: KV-1095 shoe with KV-1098ZC rollers. .6 Sliding Glass Door Guide: Vinyl guide at top of glass doors. Knape and Vogt: KV-1085 Vinyl. .7 Sliding Glass Door Bumpers: Rubber jamb bumpers, 3 per jamb evenly spaced on door height: Knape and Vogt KV-1087RUB.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE

.1 Auxiliary Hardware: to CAN/CGSB‐69.32.

.2 Coat Rods: .1 Rod: 27mm diameter polished stainless steel tube. Knape and Vogt, KV‐660SS. .2 Flanges: Steel end flanges, finished to match coat rod. Knape and Vogt KV‐ 734CHR. .3 Intermediate Hangers: Vertical hanger rod, finish to match coat rod. Hangers

for rods spanning more than 1200mm. Knape and Vogt KV‐760ANO.

2.05 FASTENINGS

.1 Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware.

.2 Exposed fastening devices shall match finish of hardware.

.3 Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass. 2.06 KEYING .1 Cabinet locks shall be keyed alike by room and master keyed. .2 Provide keys in duplicate for every lock.

SECTION 06 41 93 PAGE 4 CABINET and MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA .3 Provide 3 master keys. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Furnish manufacturers' instructions for proper installation of each hardware component.

.2 Hardware for millwork units shall be supplied to Section 06 41 10 ‐ Architectural Woodwork for installation.

.3 Miscellaneous hardware shall be installed under Section 06 20 00 ‐ Finish Carpentry.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 13 26 PAGE 1 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING DATE 07 Nov 14 ward99architects TRCA-14019 1. GENERAL

.1 Conform to Division 1, General Requirements.

.2 Waterproofing of cement board behind Living Wall, Section 09 95 00. 2. PRODUCTS

.1 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing: Soprema colphene 3000.

.2 Primer: Soprema Elastocol Stick. 3. EXECUTION

.1 Mask adjacent work as necessary to prevent unwanted adhesion.

.2 Prepare surfaces and apply primer by roller or brush.

.3 Install waterproof membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

.4 Coordinate with the installation of the Living Wall Panels and trough. END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 51 00 PAGE.1 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward 99 architects TRCA-14019 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01 General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included: a. Provide roofing and flexible flashings for curbs at new condenser unit. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies a. Conform to the Canadian Roofing Contractors Association Roofing Specifications,

except as specified otherwise herein, and in particular as follows: 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 Materials shall be handled and stored carefully to prevent damage. Manufacturers'

labels and seals shall remain intact. Bitumen containers shall be stored upright and roof felts shall be stored on end to prevent flattening. All materials shall be protected from moisture at all times.

1.5 WARRANTIES 1.5.1 Warrant the roof membrane and flashings for two years. 1.5.2 Warranties shall cover the making good of all defects in workmanship and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 General: a. All materials shall be the product of established manufacturers and shall be

approved by the Consultant. They shall conform to the CSA or CGSB Specifications named, including all revisions to-date or shall be the product named.

2.1.2 Asphalt Primer: Conforming to CGSB 37-GP-9Ma. 2.1.3 Roofing Asphalts: Types 1 and 3 oxidized asphalt conforming to CSA A123.4-

1979. Note: This material shall be obtained from one source of supply only.

SECTION 07 51 00 PAGE.2 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward 99 architects TRCA-14019 2.1.4 Roofing felt: #15 perforated and/or air vent asphalt saturated roofing felt

conforming to CSA A123.3-M1979. Note: This material shall be obtained from one course of supply only.

2.1.5 Fibre cant strips: Standard asphalt impregnated fibre cant strips, min. 75mm high,

min. 100mm face, cut from min. 38mm thick top grade board. 2.1.6 Steam refined asphalt mastic: SRI Mastic supplied by R.A.Products Limited, 316

Marsland Drive, Kitchener, Ontario, telephone No.(519) 885-0861. 2.1.7 Roof surfacing aggregate: 9 - 15mm gravel, clean and dry, free from dust, sand

or organic impurities, soft or friable materials. 2.1.8 Elastic flashing: FR40 reinforced PVC flashing, supplied by Lexsuco Canada

Limited. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 Inspect surfaces to roofing and flashings, and ensure that they are acceptable to

provide good appearing work. 3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Before commencement of work, sweep roof surfaces clean and remove all debris. 3.2.2 Do not lay roofing materials over surfaces covered with dust, rainwater, dew, ice,

frost, lumps of mortar or concrete. In cold weather warm felts and gravel before using.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP 3.3.1 Execute work in strict accordance with Drawings and Specifications. 3.3.2 Maintain roofing equipment in good working order. 3.3.3 Do not overheat bitumen. Maximum temperature for type 1, type 2 and type 3

oxidized asphalt is 2450C. Do not apply to the roof under 2000C. Once asphalt temperatures exceed 2450C the material will be considered unsatisfactory and must be removed from the Site.

3.3.4 The roofing crew must have access, at all times, to an accurate liquid thermometer. 3.3.5 All plies of roofing felt except as otherwise specified shall be "mopped solid" and

squeegeed into bitumen. 3.3.6 Unsuitable or damaged materials shall immediately be removed from the Site.

SECTION 07 51 00 PAGE.3 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward 99 architects TRCA-14019 3.3.7 Wherever two or more plies of roofing felt are applied to the surface of the built-up

roofing system, the edge of the roofing felt plies must not be left in a total raw edge thickness, but, applied with progressive increases of150mm of each successive layer of felt applied.

3.3.8 Should at the conclusion of any day's work, "gravelling-in" operations be incomplete

or postponed, all newly applied roofing shall reveive a continuous and uniform protective coating of bitumen.

3.3.9 Materials shall not be applied during inclement weather. Do not roof over damp,

frozen or unsuitable surfaces. 3.3.10 Bitumen shall be supplied direct from the refinery. Bitumen temperature in tankers

shall not exceed 1900C. Bitumen shall be transferred into standard kettles and heated to the required temperature. Tankers must be equipped with a thermometer which accurately registers bitumen temperature at all times. Operator to leave the tanker lid open at all times to permit fumes to escape. Bitumen shall be maintained in the tanker at the lowests possible temperature.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIBRE CANT STRIPS 3.4.1 Apply a heavy continuous mopping of type 3 asphalt sufficiently wide to take up the

space of the cant strip and set in place while the bitumen is still hot. 3.5 BUILT-UP ROOFING APPLICATION 3.5.1 Built-up roofing membrane shall be 5 plies of #15 felt terminating at the top of cant

strips. Initially apply 1 ply of felt with minimum 100mm overlaps followed by application of 4 plies #15 lapped 700mm applied to the following procedures:

3.5.2 Apply type 1 hot asphalt uniformly and continuously at the rate of 1 kg/m2 of roof

area over the substrate and each ply of felt including laps. Lap end joints minimum 150mm. Felts to be rolled and squeegeed into hot bitumen. Apply felts in straight lines, smooth, free of air pockets, wrinkles, fishmouths, open laps and tears.

3.5.3 NOTE: Set back gravelling-in operations at least 600mm from the base of cant

strips until such time as membrane flashings and surfacing hereinafter specified are in place.

3.5.4 Apply to the top surface of the built-up roofing a uniform flood coat of type 1 oxidized

asphalt applied at the rate of 2.15 kg/m2 of roof area. While the asphalt is still hot, embed a minimum of 14.5 kg of gravel per m2 of roof area. Then sweep the roof surface free of all loose and surplus particles.

3.5.5 Apply a second uniform coating of type 1 oxidized asphalt at the rate of 2.15 kg/m2

of roof area over the swept gravel surface. While the asphalt is still hot, embed not less than 22 kg of roofing gravel for each m2 of roof area. (Do not sweep the surface.)

3.6 BITUMINOUS FLASHINGS

SECTION 07 51 00 PAGE.4 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward 99 architects TRCA-14019 3.6.1 Apply 4 ply felt flashings using type 3 asphalt in according with C.R.C.A.

requirements. At eaves, parapets and copings, the last 2 piles of flashing felt shall extend across the top and minimum 50mm face of roof-edge angle where same must be mechanically secured. The last ply of flashing felt shall not be coated with asphalt, but shall immediately receive the steam refined asphalt coating.

3.6.2 Steam refined asphalt coating: Ensure that the bituminous flashings are free from

dust, dirt and surface mopping of asphalt. Apply steam refined asphalt plastic cement at the rate of 3.16/m2 and minimum thickness of 3mm. Commence application 75mm from the base of the cant strip, extend to the base of the cant, up the slope of the cant and up the vertical surface to the highest possible point. In the case of roof edges, extend the steam refined asphalt coating across the top of the parapet, roof-edge angle and copings all prepared to receive metal counter-flashings.

3.7 ELASTIC FLASHING APPLICATION 3.7.2 General:

Embed elastic flashing in a 1.2 kg/m2 continuous and uniform mopping of type 3 hot asphalt. Overlaps shall be minimum 150mm tightly sealed with type 3 hot asphalt in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply flashing membrane in 75mm lengths, free from air pockets and wrinkles. Ensure all junctions are properly sealed and made watertight. Upon completion, extend the top pouring of bitumen and aggregate to base of cant strips.

3.8 MECHANICAL ROOF PENETRATIONS 3.8.1 Install sleeve complete with flange and collar. All seams shall be soldered or welded.

Collar shall be soldered in place or extend minimum 25mm down the inside of the pipe. Horizontal flange shall extend minimum 100mm in all directions from base of pipe. Set flashing flange into a trowel coat of plastic cement and "strip in" the flange with 3 plies of felt and bitumen extending from the base of the pipe with progressive increases of 150mm. Extend the top pouring of bitumen and aggregate to the base of the pipe.

3.4 INSPECTION 3.9.1 An Inspector appointed by the Consultant shall inspect the work and materials of

this Section. 3.5 CLEAN-UP 3.5.1 When all work under this Section is completed, clean-up and remove all debris,

surplus materials, tools and equipment and leave work in a condition satisfactory to the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 51 00 PAGE.5 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward 99 architects TRCA-14019

SECTION 07 84 13 PAGE 1 FIRESTOPPING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included:

Provide firestopping and smoke seals in fire separations, including penetrations by electrical and mechanical elements.

1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Firestopping and smoke seals within mechanical elements. (ie: inside ducts,

dampers, etc.) provided by Division 15, Mechanical; b. Firestopping and smoke seals within electrical elements (ie: inside cable

trays, etc.) provided by Division 16, Electrical. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies.

Conform to the requirements of the following: a. CAN 4 - S115-M85, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems. 1.3.2 Coordination

Coordinate firestop requirements with all related Sections. Provide joint, gap and opening requirements along with shop drawings to all related Sections. Attend site meetings and give instructions as required.

1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Samples:

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals showing actual firestop material proposed for project.

1.4.2 Shop Drawings:

Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section, 01 33 00, Submittals.

SECTION 07 84 13 PAGE 2 FIRESTOPPING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Firestopping and smoke seal systems: a. Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective

barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN4-S115-M85 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.

b. Service penetration firestop components certified by ULC in accordance with

CAN4-S115 M85 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 U19.15 under Label Service of ULC.

c. Fire resistance rating of installed firestopping assembly not less than the fire

resistance rating of surrounding floor and wall assembly as indicated on the Drawings.

d. Firestopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such

as cables, elastomeric seal; do not use cementitious or rigid seal at such locations.

e. Firestopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes,

ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal; do not use a cementitious or rigid seal at such locations.

f. Acceptable suppliers: 2.1.2 Fire Stopping:

.1 Asbestos‐free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame and heat in compliance with requirements of CAN4‐S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended. .2 Acceptable Products: .1 A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.: A/D Firebarrier Mineral Wool Fire Stopping Insulation

.2 Roxul Inc.: Roxul Safe Fire Stop Batt.

SECTION 07 84 13 PAGE 3 FIRESTOPPING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

Smoke Seals: fire resistant material capable of maintaining an effective barrier against smoke and gases. .1 Fire Rated Sealant ‐ Type 1 (for joints in vertical surfaces): non‐sagging,

fire rated silicone listed for use in fire separations: .1 Hilti (Canada) Corporation: CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant. .2 3M Canada Inc.: Firebarrier 2000. .3 Tremco Construction Products: TREMstop Fyre‐Sil.

.2 Fire Rated Sealant ‐ Type 2 (for head of wall applications): sprayable single component, water‐based, acrylic fire stop sealant. .1 Hilti (Canada) Corporation: CP672 Firestop Joint Spray. .2 3M Canada Inc.: 3M FireDam Spray. .3 Tremco Construction Products: TREMstop Acrylic SP.

.3 Fire Rated Sealant ‐ Type 3 (for joints in horizontal surfaces): self‐leveling, fire rated silicone, listed for use in fire separations. .1 Hilti (Canada) Corporation: CP604 Self‐leveling Firestop Sealant. .2 3M Canada Inc.: Firebarrier 2003. .3 Tremco Construction Products: TREMstop Fyre‐Sil Self Leveling

2.1.3 Primers:

To manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use.

2.1.4 Water (if applicable):

Potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances. 2.1.5 Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices:

To manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct

thicknesses and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are dry and frost free.

3.1.2 Prepare surfaces in contact with firestopping materials and smoke seals to

manufacturer's instructions. 3.1.3 Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation. 3.1.4 Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining

surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION

SECTION 07 84 13 PAGE 4 FIRESTOPPING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 3.2.1 Install firestopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance

with ULC certification and manufacturer's instructions. 3.2.2 Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination

devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.

3.2.3 Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after

materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing. 3.2.4 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish. 3.2.5 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon

completion. 3.3 INSPECTION 3.3.1 Notify Consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or

enclosing firestopping materials and service penetration assemblies. 3.4 SCHEDULE 3.4.1 Firestop and smoke seal at: a. Penetrations through fire resistance rated masonry, concrete, and gypsum

board partitions and walls; b. Edge of floor slabs and shear walls at exterior wall. c. Top of fire resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions; d. Intersecting fire resistant rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.

Control and expansion joints in fire resistant rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls;

e. Penetrations through fire resistant rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs; f. Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire resistant rated

separations. 3.5 CLEAN UP 3.5.1 Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces

immediately after application. 3.5.2 Remove temporary dams after initial set of firestopping and smoke seal

materials. END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 92 13 PAGE 1 JOINT SEALANTS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects` Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included:

Provide sealants in the following locations: a. Control joints in masonry, joint at top of non-loadbearing non fire-rated

masonry walls; b. Joints around perimeter inside and out of window door and screen frames

and exterior wall louvres; c. Control joints in ceramic tile floors; d. Joints between gypsum board and abutting materials, to maintain air barrier. e. Vapour/Air Seal joint between various elements of exterior walls and roofs

not specified as by other Sections; f. Seal between cladding and door frames; g. Seal between cladding and other openings; h. Seal under all metal thresholds and window sills; i. Seal around pipes passing through exterior walls; j. Seal junction of wall and balcony slab; k. Seal at perimeter of metal louvres. l. Contact joint between flashing and concrete; m. Seal at junction of floor and bathroom fixtures; n. Other work specified herein. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

The following work shall be provided in conformance with this Section:

a. Firestopping and smoke seals provided by Section 07 84 13, Firestopping; b. Expansion joint filler for concrete pavement provided by Section 02515,

Portland Cement Concrete Paving expansion joint seal where specified by this Section;

SECTION 07 92 13 PAGE 2 JOINT SEALANTS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects` Project 14019-TRCA c. Sealing of openings around pipe sleeves and duct wall openings in exposed

walls, bedding of plumbing fixtures, sealing of ducts against louvres provided by Division 15, Mechanical or Section 07 84 13, Firestopping;

d. Sealing of openings around electrical wire, conduit, ducts, etc. in exposed

walls provided by Division 16, Electrical or Section 07 84 13, Firestopping; e. Acoustic sealing of gypsum board partitions provided by Section 09250,

Gypsum Board. 1.2.3 Definitions:

Non-staining means bleeding not more than 3mm beyond edge of sealant. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Qualifications of Products:

All products shall be packaged in conformance with the specified standards with every package bearing a label stating the standard to which the product conforms.

1.3.2 Qualifications of Subcontractor:

Possess a copy of and be familiar with all standards specified. Have a minimum of 5 years' experience in the work specified.

1.3.3 Qualifications of Applier:

Have a minimum of one year experience in installing sealants in exposed joints.

1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 List of Proposed Products:

Submit list of proposed products within 60 days of signing of Contract for review.

1.4.2 Samples: a. Submit samples of materials if and when requested for review; b. Submit samples of full colour range of all exposed products for colour choice

by Consultant.

SECTION 07 92 13 PAGE 3 JOINT SEALANTS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects` Project 14019-TRCA 1.4.3 Maintenance and Reference Data:

Submit to Section 01 33 00 as specified therein. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 Deliver and store products in original containers and packaging. 1.5.2 Protect products from freezing or overheating. 1.5.3 Bring products to temperature range recommended by manufacturer before

use. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS 1.6.1 Other Sections providing joints between elements to be sealed by or in

conformance with this Section shall conform to the limits of movement of the specified sealant by the careful determination of acceptable lengths of element to be joined (spacing of joints) and establishment of sufficiently wide joints to accommodate anticipated movement in the finished Work.

1.6.2 Install sealants at mean ambient annual temperatures. 1.6.3 Inspection:

Inspect work of other Sections upon which work of this Section depends and verify that conditions are suitable for this work to proceed.

1.7 WARRANTY 1.7.1 Warrant sealant work for a period of Three Years, from the date of

substantial performance. 1.7.2 Warrant that surfaces shall not be stained by sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Primer:

As recommended by sealant manufacturer for type of surface being primed and conditions of service.

2.1.2 Joint Filler and Back-up:

Circular cross-section unless shown as slab or sheet, min. 25% wider than joint, semi-rigid: closed cell polyethylene or polyurethane product, Ethafoam by Dow Chemical of Canada Limited, or product of Herecules Inc., Delaware, U.S.A., rubber tubing or non-migrating plasticized vinyl having a shore 'A' hardness of 20 and tensile strength of 130 - 200 kPA, compatible with sealant and as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

SECTION 07 92 13 PAGE 4 JOINT SEALANTS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects` Project 14019-TRCA 2.1.3 Bond Breaker:

As recommended for use by sealant manufacturer. 2.1.4 Vent Tubes:

Rigid clear extruded plastic, min. 6mm ID and 9mm OD. 2.1.5 Sealant Colours:

Colours of exposed sealants as chosen by the Consultant. 2.1.6 Sealant Types: a. Type 1: Sealing Compound, One Component, Acrylic Base, Solvent

Curing conforming to CGSB 19-GP-5M; Mono 555 by Tremco Ltd. b. Type 2: Air barrier and sealant quality conforming to Thermal Insulation,

Urethane, Spray in Place, CAN 2-19.13-M82. Dymonic by Tremco. c. Type 3: Sealing Compound, One Component, Solvent Curing conforming

to CSGB 19-GP-14M; TRS 600 by Tremco Ltd. d. Type 4: Sealing Compound, One Component, Acrylic Emulsion Base

conforming to CGSB 19-GP-17M; Laxtex 100 by Tremco Ltd. e. Type 5: Sealing Compound, One Component, Silicone Base, Moisture

Curing conforming to CGSB-19.18-M87; Spectrem II by Tremco Ltd. f. Type 6: Non-curing, non-skinning, non-oxidizing, non-bleeding Sealing

and Bedding Compound for Acoustical Purposes and concealed joints conforming to CGSB 19-GP-21M; Acoustical Sealant.

g. Type 7: Sealing Compound, Mildew Resistant, for Tubs and Tile

conforming to CGSB 19-GP-22M; Proglaze White by Tremco Ltd. h. Type 8: Sealing Compound, Multicomponent, Chemical Curing conforming

to CAN2-19.24-M80. Dymeric by Tremco Ltd. i. Type 9: Tacky preformed tape of 100% solids butyl polyisobutylene base,

cross-sectional size as required or as specified; 440 Tape by Tremco Ltd. j. Type 10: Tacky preformed tape of 100% solids vulcanized-rubber base or

macro-polyisobutylene base with solid rubber bead centred in tape, cross-sectional size as required or as specified; Polshim II by Tremco Ltd.

k. Type 11: Preformed wedge or gasket in shape designed for specific

installation condition of appropriate shore 'A' hardness of dense neoprene, EPDM or Santoprene PVC by Monsanto Canada Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

SECTION 07 92 13 PAGE 5 JOINT SEALANTS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects` Project 14019-TRCA 3.1.1 Check compatibility of proposed sealants with materials to be in contact with

sealant including roofing and waterproofing materials and sealants. 3.1.2 Where sealant beads terminate against another material, check compatibility

of sealant with materials encountered and ensure durable seal is provided there.

3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Clean joints and spaces which are to be caulked and ensure that they are

dry and free of dust, loose mortar, oil, grease and other foreign material. Clean ferrous metals of rust, mill scale and foreign materials by wire brushing, grinding or sanding.

3.2.2 Wipe metal surfaces to be caulked, except pre-coated metals, with

cellulose sponges or clean rags soaked with ethyl alcohol, a ketone solvent, xylol or toluol, and wipe dry with a clean cloth. Clean pre-coated metals with solutions or compounds which will not injure finish and which are compatible with the primer and sealant.

3.2.3 Provide bond breaker between sealant and other materials spanning joint

where backup rod cannot be provided because of depth. 3.2.4 Where joint depth/width ratio is 3:2 or greater, Install joint filler to proper,

uniform depth to give sealant bead of optimism size and shape for joint condition and expected movement condition.

3.2.5 Where surfaces adjacent to joints are likely to become coated with

sealant during applications, mask them prior to priming and caulking. 3.2.6 Seal joints in surfaces to be painted before surfaces are painted. Where

surfaces to be caulked are prime-painted in shop before caulking, check to make sure prime paint is compatible with primer and sealant. If they are incompatible, inform Consultant and change primer and sealant to compatible types approved by Consultant.

3.2.7 Prime sides of joints, if priming is recommended by sealant manufacturer

for type of surface being caulked, for service conditions or performance requirement of joint.

3.3. APPLICATION 3.3.1 Apply sealant using air- or hand-operated guns fitted with suitable

nozzles and equipment approved by sealant manufacturer. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations.

3.3.2 Apply sealant under pressure in such a manner as to assure good

adhesion to sides of joints and to completely fill all voids in the joint. 3.3.3 Form surface of sealant smooth, concave, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags,

air pockets and embedded foreign matter.

SECTION 07 92 13 PAGE 6 JOINT SEALANTS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects` Project 14019-TRCA 3.3.4 Upon completion, remove masking and sealant smears and droppings from

adjacent and other surfaces. 3.4 LIST OF TYPES AND USES OF SEALANTS 3.4.1 General: a. Use sealant types (non-sag, self-levelling, glazing, non-glazing etc.) for uses

for which they are recommended; b. Use sealants as recommended by the respective CGSB standards. 3.4.2 Interior Joints. a. Not for glazing, not on exterior walls, not on interior of exterior window, door

or screen frames, not in shower or washroom areas, not specifically for acoustic isolation: Type 1, 3, 4, 5 or 8;

b. Joints within reach of occupants: Sealant used shall be a toughness when

cured which resists damage due to mischief. 3.4.3 Building Envelope Joints: a. Lap Joints in Plastic Sheet Vapour Barrier: Sealant Type 6; b. Securement Joints in Plastic Sheet Air/Vapour Barrier: Sealant Type

6; c. Joints Between Air/Vapour Barrier and Frames of Windows, Doors or

Equipment: Sealant Type 2 d. Control Joints in Masonry : Type 8 inside or outside. e. Inside or Outside of Exterior Window, Door and Screen Frames:

Sealant Type 8; f. Thresholds in Exterior and Vestibule Doors: Type 8. g. Roof: As supplied by roofing membrane manufacturer. Check

compatibility of all sealants in contact with roof membrane or roof sealants; 3.4.4. Joints in Exterior and Interior Pavements:

Sealant Type 8, with a toughness when cured which resists damage due to mischief and traffic. Sealant Type 8 pourable in floor slab and floor finish expansion and crack control joints.

3.4.5 Glazing: a. Use Type 9, 10 or 11 sealant as specified in Section 08800; b. Size Type 9 or 10 sealant 6mm x 6mm unless otherwise required;

SECTION 07 92 13 PAGE 7 JOINT SEALANTS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects` Project 14019-TRCA c. Interior Glazing, not interior parts of exterior windows, doors and screens:

Sealant Type 9. d. Exterior Glazing: Sealant Type 10. e. Use non-solvent base sealants only for glazing insulating glass units. 3.4.6 Joints in Shower Rooms and Washrooms:

Sealant Type 7. 3.4.7 Sealing Partitions for Acoustical Isolation:

Sealant Type 6. END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 13 13 Page 1 STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Date: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 1, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included:

Supply steel doors and frames and screens to Sections installing them. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Sealing around frames - under Section 07 92 13 b. Supply of finish hardware - under Section 08 71 00, and installation by

Section 06 20 23 c. Glazing of doors and frames - under Section 08 80 00. d. Installation of frames and screens in steel stud partitions and walls - under

Section 09 21 16. e. Field applied paint topcoats - under Section 09 91 23. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

Perform Work of this Section in accordance with requirements of Canadian Manufacturing Specifications for Steel Doors and Frames, January 1978, of Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association (CSDFMA), except as otherwise specified herein or shown.

1.3.2 Coordination:

Give full cooperation to finish hardware distributor's representative during preparation of shop drawings and execution of shop fabrication.

1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Shop Drawings: a. Further to requirements of Section 01300, indicate each type of door,

transom panel, door frame and window frame, materials being supplied, sufficient detail to show door construction and anchorage, type of primer, cut-outs and reinforcements for hardware, mortar boxes, anchors, fire and sound ratings and location of fastenings.

SECTION 08 13 13 Page 2 STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Date: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA b. Submit on standard shop drawing sheets conforming to format of Canadian

Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association Guide. Manufacturer's numbering system shall correspond to Consultant's numbering system.

c. Draw frame profile details at scale not less than one-half full size. d. Prior to issuing shop drawings to Consultant for review, submit shop

drawings to finish hardware trades for coordination and review. Shop drawings released to Consultant for review shall contain hardware contractor's review stamp and acceptance signatures. Consultant's review of shop drawings is not intended to be a detailed review of hardware coordination points.

1.4.2 Samples: a. Submit samples of following items in accordance with requirements of

Section 01 30 00: b. Sample of typical frame showing welded corner joint, welded hinge

reinforcements, mortar boxes and floor anchors. c. Sample of door showing edge, top and/or bottom construction, integral

astragal (where designated on Schedule), snap-on glazing bead and fixed stop, insulation, hinge reinforcement and face stiffening.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING 1.5.1 Carefully handle doors and frames to preclude any disfigurement, twisting or

marking. 1.5.2 Mark conspicuously, backs of each door frame and screen with number

corresponding to those shown on Architectural Door and Frame Schedule to assist in in-plant coordination and on-Site positioning and installation.

1.5.3 Store frames on supports such that a minimum clearance of 100 mm [4"] is

maintained between underside of metal and ground or floor. 1.5.4 Remove protective coverings and store doors in vertical position. Separate

surfaces by blocking to permit air circulation. 1.5.5 Cover doors and frames in manner to protect from inclement weather, water

and damage. Cover all prefinished steel surfaces with protective masking. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.1.1 All metal doors and frames herein shall be manufactured by S.W. Fleming,

Macotta or Daybar Industries Ltd.

SECTION 08 13 13 Page 3 STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Date: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.1.2 Minimum specification for products specified herein shall be Canadian Steel

Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association. 2.2 MATERIALS 2.2.1 Sheet Steel:

Wipe coated galvanized steel to requirements of ASTM A526-80 with zinc designation ZF075 to ASTM A525-81 for interior doors and frames. Zinc coating designation Z275 to ASTM A525 for exterior doors and frames. Minimum core thickness for sheet steel components shall be in accordance with CSDFMA Specifications except as follows:

THICKNESS

a. Frames & closure angles 1.52 mm b. Frames for openings larger than

1200 x 2200 mm 1.90 mm c. Frames within residential suites 0.76 mm d. Residential suite entrance frames 1.52 mm e. Frame reinforcement &

extension channels 1.90 mm f. Where extension channels

extend more than 600 mm above tops of frames; 2.71 mm

g. Standard Door and panel

Surface Sheets 1.21 mm h. Surface sheets for doors

greater than 1200 x 2200 mm and Medium Duty doors 1.52 mm

i. Surface sheets for

Heavy Duty doors 1.91 mm j. Metal jamb anchors occurring in exterior walls shall be fabricated from hot

dipped galvanized sheet steel. 2.2.2 Core: a. In addition to CSDFMA specifications, interior non-rated doors; resin

impregnated pre-expanded Kraft honeycomb core, or semi-rigid glass fibre insulation at 48.6 kg/m3 [3 lb/ft3] to requirements of CSA A101-M1977, Type 1 are acceptable. Maximum opening of honeycomb shall be 20 mm. [3/4".]

SECTION 08 13 13 Page 4 STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Date: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA b. Interior fire-rated doors; mineral or semi-rigid glass fibre insulation having

min. density of 48.6 kg/m3 [3 lb/ft3] [or calcium silicate] to meet requirements of ULC or UL as applicable. Temperature Rise Rated (TRR) cores; composition to limit temperature rise on unexposed side of door to 250oC at 30 or 60 minutes, as determined by governing building code requirements. Core shall be tested as part of a complete door assembly in accordance with CAN4-S104, ASTM E152 or NFPA 252, covering the Standard Method of Tests of Door Assemblies, and shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing agency having a factory inspection service.

c. Exterior doors; self-extinguishing, solid slab of polyurethane or polystyrene

only. 2.2.3 Touch-Up Primer: Zinc rich primer conforming to CGSB 1-GP-181M for

galvanized surfaces; CISC/CPMA 2-75 for plain steel or wipe coated surfaces. Acceptable zinc-rich primers; "Sealtight Galvafroid Zinc Rich Coating" by W.R. Meadows Ltd., "Zinc Clad No. 7 Organic Zinc Rich Primer" by Sherwin Williams Co. of Canada Ltd., "Glid-Zinc 100" by Glidden Co. Division of SCM (Canada) Limited, or other acceptable manufacturer.

2.2.4 Adhesives: a. Honeycomb Cores and Steel Components: Heat resistant, sprayable

grade, resin reinforced neoprene/rubber (polychloroprene) based, low viscosity, contact cement.

b. Polystyrene and Polyurethane Cores: Heat resistant, epoxy resin based,

low viscosity, contact cement. c. Adhesive For Lock Seam Edges: 2 component, fire-resistant RRPC type

designed to maintain doors faces in permanently locked position at mechanically interlocked edge seam, and having the ability to hold paint.

2.2.5 Metal Filler: Two component, paintable epoxy type. 2.2.6 Phosphatizing: CGSB 31-GP-105a. 2.2.7 Miscellaneous: a. Door Bumpers/Silencers: Single stud rubber/neoprene type; acceptable

type, Glynn-Johnson #64, black. b. Frame Thermal Break: Interlocking extrusion of polyvinyl chloride (PVC)

conforming to CGSB 41-GP-19Ma. c. Exterior Top Caps: Where designated; rigid extrusion of polyvinyl chloride

(PVC) conforming to CGSB 41-GP-19Ma. d. Rigid Electrical Conduit For Electronically Controlled Doors: Rigid

galvanized steel of 19 mm [3/4"] diameter with locknuts, bushings and fittings, and continuous nylon pull cord.

SECTION 08 13 13 Page 5 STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Date: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA e. Panel Fasteners: Concealed fasteners of hot dip galvanized steel, type to

provide accurate, secure installation. 2.3 WELDING 2.3.1 Ensure welds are continuous, free from intrusions, porosity, lack of fusion

penetration, uneven contour, undercuts and cracks. Remove weld spatter on exposed surfaces.

2.4 FABRICATION - FRAMES 2.4.1 Form profiles accurately to details indicated. All frames shall have mitred

and welded corners. Knock-down frames are acceptable non-rated, simple door openings for this project.

2.4.2 Prepare frames and doors for hardware using appropriate templates. At

closer locations required, reinforce door frames with reinforcement plates. Supply removable portion of stop and frame where required for overhead concealed door closers, and properly connect to frame and prepare for attachment to closer prior to shipment.

2.4.3 Fill all exposed surface depressions and all joints resulting from fabrication

of frames with metallic filler and sand to a smooth, uniform finish. 2.4.4 Prepare each door frame for bumpers unless indicated otherwise. Provide

and install 3 bumpers on strike jamb of each single leaf door frame and 2 bumpers on head of double leaf door frame.

2.4.5 Ship each frame complete with easily removable metal channel or angle

shaped spreaders. 2.4.6 Terminate all door frames at top of concrete slab, or at sub-slab where such

exists. Provide floor plates for anchorage to slab. At exterior frames scheduled to be back filled with insulation, provide jamb anchors spaced at maximum 400 mm [16"] oc up each jamb.

2.4.7 Reinforce door heads for frames with door openings exceeding width of 1500

mm [5'-0"] with internal formed steel channel or hot rolled angle sections and extending for full width of frames. Weld all reinforcement to frame in a manner to realize total strength potential. This reinforcement shall not be considered as a lintel.

2.4.8 Provide frames with integral base at locations indicated. 2.4.9 Provide continuous closure angles welded to frames as detailed. 2.4.10 Furnish tightly fitted mortar boxes at all penetration points of frames,

including those at electrical devices. 2.4.11 Include pressed steel frames for glazed screens throughout building,

constructed as per steel door frames, except as follows: a. Minimum thickness of frames; 1.52 mm. [16 ga - 0.0598".]

SECTION 08 13 13 Page 6 STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Date: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA b. Utilize all-welded construction with mechanical field joints for oversized

frames determined by transportation limitations and accessibility to locations within building.

c. Equip glazed lites with removable stops accurately fitted and secured in

place from the secure side of room with countersunk, oval head screws. d. Construct thermally broken frames in 2 separate sections, structurally joined

and simultaneously having metal surfaces separated with an integral PVC thermal break. The connecting of metal sections by use of mechanical through-fasteners such as screws, grommets, bolts or other similar fasteners is prohibited. Thermally broken frames shall meet or exceed requirements of CGSB 82-GP-5M.

e. Fabricate exterior pressed steel window frames from galvanized sheet steel,

and in thermally broken configuration similar to thermally broken door frames.

2.5 FABRICATION - SLAB DOORS AND PANELS 2.5.1 Except as otherwise specified hereinafter, construct all standard flush

doors and panels of honeycomb core construction without face seams, including fire-rated, non-insulated and non-sound rated doors. Provide continuous mechanically interlocked and adhesive filled non-standard, spot welded at 300 mm [12"] oc, and filled and dressed vertical edge seams of doors, with top and bottom voids filled with 1.91 mm thick [14 ga] steel channels tack welded in position.

2.5.2 At medium duty doors in which face sheets are 1.52 mm [16 ga] and

thicker, and doors up to 2400 mm [8'-0"] in height, construct as per standard doors, but provide continuous mechanically interlocked and spot welded at 300 mm [12"] oc, and filled and dressed vertical edge seams to doors.

2.5.3 Construct doors designated on Door Schedule as security or heavy duty

types, doors containing electronic controls or conduit, and doors greater than 2400 mm [8'-0"] in height of greater than 1000 mm [40"] in width of hollow steel stiffened construction with 0.91 mm thick [20 ga] internal full height, spot welded vertical stiffeners at 150 mm [6"] oc, with continuously welded, ground and dressed vertical edge seams of doors, with top and bottom voids filled with 1.91 mm thick [14 ga] steel channels tack welded in position. Form each face from a single sheet of metal. Weld all joints continuously, dress and fill.

2.5.4 Construct exterior doors of full steel faces as per honeycomb doors, but

fully laminated to core material which completely fills all voids. Provide continuously welded, ground and dressed vertical edge seams of doors, with top and bottom voids filled with 1.91 mm thick [14 ga] steel channels tack welded in position, and a cap welded over top edge of door. Form each face from a single sheet of metal.

2.5.5 Provide doors with provisions for glass and/or louvers as detailed. Provide

closely fitted steel glass stops with mitred corners where required, set flush

SECTION 08 13 13 Page 7 STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Date: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

and true. Drill and countersink fasteners symmetrically at 150 mm [6"] oc, and place on secure side of frame. Screw stops in place, or snap in place as applicable.

2.5.6 Minimum Core Thicknesses for Component Parts: Requirements of

CSDFMA Standard shall govern except as specified following: a. Glazing stops and lite trim: 1 mm [20 ga] steel. b. Top cap for exterior doors: 1.2 mm [18 ga] steel, set flush with top of door,

sealed and totally concealed from face of door. Provide continuous metal closure at bottom of doors.

c. Hardware reinforcing:

.1 Butts and Pivots: 3.5 mm [10 ga] steel.

.2 Panic Bars: 3.5 mm [10 ga] steel.

.3 Locks: 2.5 mm [12 ga] steel.

.4 Closers: 3.5 mm [10 ga] steel.

.5 Mortar Boxes: 1 mm [20 ga] steel. 2.5.7 Provide fire-rated/labelled doors to ULC requirements, including applicable

time-temperature requirements, and provide ULC labels for all fire-rated door frames and glazed screens. For designated oversized doors, provide letter attesting that construction is equivalent to that of a rated door.

2.5.8 Reinforce doors to ensure that the maximum corner-to-corner racking of

doors does not exceed 1.5 mm. [1/16".] 2.5.9 Factory prepare and reinforce doors for hardware as per frame

requirements, including weatherstripping. Where pairs of doors occur, prepare meeting edge to form integral astragal at exterior locations, and to receive mortised flat bar astragal for interior locations, or where no astragal, to a 55 mm [2 1/4"] radius. Refer to Hardware Schedule for removable mullions, astragals and the like for fire-rated doors. Provide permanent astragals in accordance with ULC requirements and Door Schedule.

2.5.10 Bevel strike edges of doors 1.5 mm [1/16"] maximum per 50 mm [2"]

thickness. 2.5.11 Clean doors of all deleterious substances and contaminants, sand, flood

coat with air drying paste filler, and again sand to eliminate all unevenness or irregularities including dimpling resulting from welding.

2.6 SHOP FINISHING 2.6.1 Chemically treat metal surfaces of doors and frames and touch up as per

Standard. 2.7 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 2.7.1 Incorporate provisions for electrical controls and wiring for security and

smoke control doors by forming and welding rigid conduit to backs of door frames and interiors of door slabs only for openings so scheduled.

SECTION 08 13 13 Page 8 STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Date: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Supply frames, accessories and instruction to Site for appropriate trades to

set in place and build in. 3.2 CLEANING 3.2.1 Remove all marks and soil from surfaces attributable to Work of this Section,

by cleaning in a safe and thorough manner. END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 14 16 PAGE 1 WOOD DOORS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included:

Supply wood doors. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Installation of wood doors and hardware: Section 06 20 00, Interior Finish

Carpentry; b. Supply of hardware: Section 08 70 00, Hardware; c. Glazing of wood doors: Section 08 80 00, Glazing: 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

Conform to the requirements of the following: a. CSA 0132.2-Series 90, General Requirements for Wood Flush Doors. b. Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada "Quality

Standards for Architectural Woodwork".(AWMAC). 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Shop Drawings:

Submit shop drawings. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 Do not deliver doors to Site until work of wet trades is complete and moisture

readings of surfaces in proposed storage area are less than 18%. 1.5.2 Store doors flat on level surface in dry, well ventilated area inside building. 1.5.3 Cover top of pile with waterproof covering, but allow air circulation at sides. 1.6 WARRANTY 1.6.1 Warrant the work of this Section against defect for a total of Three Years. 1.6.2 Make good defects during warranty period by replacing defective doors in

finish to match adjacent similar doors or of original door finish. Defects shall

SECTION 08 14 16 PAGE 2 WOOD DOORS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

include, but not be limited to bubbling, delamination of faces or edges, warp, twist bow exceeding 6mm, and telegraphing of core. "Replace" as used herein includes installing hardware, finishing, hanging and fitting.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Conform to CSA 0132.2 for materials, except as specified otherwise herein. 2.1.2 Core Materials for Solid Core Doors:

Solid Eastern White Pine or Western Red Cedar or particle board conforming to CAN3-0188.1-M78, Grade R. Must comply with ULC.

2.1.3. Adhesive: CSA 0122 Series M1977, Type III. 2.1.4 Sealers: Varnish, CGSB 1-GP-36M, Type 1. 2.1.5 Face For Painted or Stained Doors: Birch 2.2 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE 2.2.1 General: a. Conform to CSA 0132.2 for solid and hollow core flush doors, except as

specified otherwise herein. b. Provide hollow core doors only where scheduled specifically. c. Size doors for 2mm clearance of heads and jambs and 10mm at sills. 2.2.2 Flush Doors: a. Core: Laminated wood framed or unframed core construction comprising

narrow kiln dried wood strips not less than 40mm wide, grain running vertically and joints well staggered, electronically glue bonded; or laminated wood framed core construction comprising solid particle board core with minimum total thickness of stiles, top and bottom rails including hardwood edging 100mm and 60mm respectively.

b. Edges: 19mm minimum thickness one piece full length Birch for painted

doors. c. Sealing: Seal top and bottom edges with one coat of varnish applied in door

manufacturer's plant. d. Cutouts: Prepare doors in factory for any openings required. Fit loose

stops and tack in place. e. Stops: For painted doors- Birch.

SECTION 08 14 16 PAGE 3 WOOD DOORS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Supply wood doors to Section 06 20 23, Finish Carpentry, for installation. END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 70 00 PAGE 1 FINISH HARDWARE DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included: a. Supply finish hardware, key cabinets to Section 06 20 23 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Finish hardware except as below. b. Hinges for steel doors supplied by this Section, installed by Section 08 13 13. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Qualifications of Hardware Consultant:

Be an A.H.C. certified finish Hardware Consultant. 1.3.2 Qualifications of Supplier:

Be responsible for the administration and servicing of the hardware contract with suitable qualifications and experience relative to this type of work. Suitable qualifications shall be that of an A.H.C. or equal experience.

1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Hardware List: a. A Hardware Schedule is provided. b. The successful hardware supplier to prepare and supply a completely

itemized hardware schedule which lists all doors by number (in sequence) and location, with complete details of the hardware to be supplied. Incorporate the catalogue numbers of hardware as specified and all alternatives which have been accepted in the schedule.

c. It is the responsibility of the successful hardware supplier to examine the

Drawings and Schedule to determine the final dimensions, size and quantity of the required hardware items, and ensure that the hardware listed will fit

SECTION 08 70 00 PAGE 2 FINISH HARDWARE DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

and operate properly. Report all unsatisfactory conditions immediately to the Contractor before commencing work. All hardware to be approved by owner and architect.

1.4.2 Samples: a. Provide catalogue cuts of all hardware items. b. Complete samples of hardware items shall be submitted to the Consultant

for approval, if so required. 1.4.3 Templates: a. Upon award of a contract, the Hardware Supplier shall check the schedule

of hardware and all applicable Drawings and Specifications and furnish promptly to the applicable trades all templates and information required for proper preparation for and applications of hardware, in ample time to facilitate the progress of the work.

1.4.4 Operating Manuals and Reference Data: a. Submit Operating Manuals and Reference Data to Section 01 33 00, as

specified therein. b. Include one set of wrenches for door closers and locksets. c. Provide 3 sets of installation instructions for all hardware. d. Include 3 sets of manufacturer’s instructions in regard to proper care of

hardware including lubrication of locksets. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 Each item of hardware shall be clearly itemized and labelled in accordance

with the schedule, and delivered in the original manufacturer's containers. 1.5.2 Hardware Supplier shall be responsible for arranging delivery time and date

to the Site or door manufacturer of all hardware, so that all work may progress without delay or interruptions. The Hardware Supplier and hardware installer together shall check in detail hardware delivered to the Site to prevent discrepancies for shortages or omissions.

1.5.3 Storage and protection of the hardware is the responsibility of the hardware

installer. A room shall be provided with ample temporary shelving for the laying out of the hardware. This room is to be locked at all times and only responsible personnel to have access. All hardware not installed at


completion of each day shall be returned to storage room to prevent any loss.

1.6 WARRANTIES 1.6.1 Warrant all hardware for two years from the date of Substantial Performance

in a form satisfactory to the Consultant. The warranty shall state expressly that all moving parts of locks, closers, panic sets etc., will be replaced in part or in whole at no cost to the Owner in the event of breakage or other defect occurring. Wilful damage excluded.

1.6.2 Warrant door closers for five years to the same extent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 General:

Hardware shall conform to the following as a minimum standard: a. CGSB 69-GP-1M, Hinges, Hardware, Builders; b. CGSB 69-GP-2M, Door Closers, Overhead, Surface Mounted; c. CGSB 69-GP-6M, Door Hardware, Builders, Miscellaneous; d. CGSB 69-GP-7M, Window and Transom Hardware, Builders; e. CGSB 69-GP-8M, Cabinet, Cupboard and Shelf Hardware, Builders; f. CGSB 69-GP-9M, Door Closers, Concealed-In-Door, Exposed Arm; g. CGSB 69-GP-10M, Door Closers, Rectangular, Overhead, Surface Mounted

(Excluding Top Jamb Application); h. CGSB 69-GP-11M, Door Closers, Rectangular, Overhead, Surface Mounted

(Top Jamb Application); i. CGSB 69-GP-13M, Lock and Latch Sets, Mortise, Heavy Duty; j. CGSB 69-GP-14M, Lock and Latch Sets, Mortise, Standard Duty; k. CGSB 69.17-M86, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 2.1.2 Acceptable Products:

SECTION 08 70 00 PAGE 4 FINISH HARDWARE DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA a. Refer to Hardware Schedule. a. All hardware shall be supplied with all necessary screws, bolts, expansion

shields, etc., as may be required for a complete installation. b. All door pulls shall be mounted with oval head thru bolts and cup washers

on doors where no push plate is specified. Where door pulls are specified on one side with push plates on the other, install with flathead thru bolts, countersunk flush with face of door so that push plates will cover the bolts.

2.2 ABBREVIATIONS USED 2.2.1 Fastening Device Abbreviations:

FTMS Full Template Machine Screws FMS Full Machine Screws MS Machine Screws FWS Full Wood Screws WS Wood Screws 1/2 MS or 1/2 WS Indicates that half of the required screws shall be of the type

designed, the remaining half shall be regularly packed. STMS Strike to template with machine screws STS Self Tapping Screws AMS Arm Machine Screw (Door closers & holders) FH Flat Head (Screws) GN Grommet Nut LS Lead Shields OH Oval Head SNB Sex Nut and Bolt SA Self Adhesive TB Through Bolts TN/GN Through Bolts and Grommet Nuts TMS To Template with Machine Screws WS/LS Wood Screws and Lead Expansion Shields BTB Back to Back

2.2.2 Door and Hardware Abbreviations:

ADJ Adjustable AJB Angle Jamb Bracket ASA American Standards Association BB Ball Bearing BS Backset (of lock) Distance from front to centre of knob or

cylinder.


CFC Cut for Cylinder CI Channel Iron (Door Frame) CYL Cylinder (of a lock) DR Door DA Double Acting EK Emergency Key FR Frame HM Hollow Metal HO Hold Open KAL Kalamein LBR Less Bottom Rod (of a vertical rod type exit device) LH Left hand LHR Left hand reverse NRP Non Removable Pin (in hinges) OBS Open Back Strike PA Parallel Arm (on a closing device) PR Pair PS Pressed Steel (door frame) RM Removable Mullion RH Right hand RHR Right hand reverse SGLE Single WD Wood WBX Wrought Box Strike

2.2.3 Finish Symbol Abbreviations:

C14 Polished Nickel Plated C15 Satin Nickel Plated C26 Polished Chrome C26D Satin Chrome C32D Satin Stainless Steel SB Silver Aluminum Lacquer AL Satin Aluminum BN Bright Nickel DBL Dull Black Lacquered (match Kawneer #29) DB Dull Black (match Kawneer #29) SN Satin Nickel SZ Satin Zinc

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 KEYING INSTRUCTIONS 3.1.1 All locksets, panic sets, cylinders etc., on this project shall be Grand Master

Key - C; Exterior Doors MK-A; Interior Doors MK-B.

SECTION 08 70 00 PAGE 6 FINISH HARDWARE DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 3.1.2 All above locksets, cylinders etc. shall be registered to a new Master Key

System (MK) to be known as:

101 Exchange Avenue 3.1.3 All Master Keys to be stamped "Do Not Duplicate". 3.1.4 All other keys shall be properly identified in individual envelopes by the lock

manufacturer noting door number, locations and key coding. 3.1.5 Provide the following quantity of keys:

4 - Master Keys 12 - Construction Master Keys

a. Provide a keyed alike group to operate all public rooms. b. Provide a separate staff service master for all building service rooms. c. Final keying instructions will be furnished at a later date. 3.2 INSTALLATION HEIGHTS 3.2.1 Hardware shall be installed under other Sections at the following mounting

heights: a. Lockets: 975 mm from centre of knob to finished floor. b. Deadlocks: 1125 mm from centre of cylinder to finished floor or as directed. c. Mortise Night Latches: 1125 mm from centre of cylinder to finished floor or

as directed. d. Panic Bolts: 1000 mm from centre of crossbar to finished floor. e. Push Plates: 1100 mm from centre of plates to finished floor. f. Guard Bars: 1050 mm from centre of bar to finished floor. g. Door Pulls: 1100 mm from centre of pull to finished floor. h. Blank Strike: 1500 mm from centre of strike to finished floor. i. Blank Fronts: 1500 mm from centre of strike to finished floor. j. Door Closer Arms: to allow maximum degree to swing.

SECTION 08 70 00 PAGE 7 FINISH HARDWARE DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA k. Floor Stops: to allow maximum degree of swing. 3.2.2 The hardware installer shall carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions

and the following Detail for installation of all finishing hardware. 3.3. INSPECTIONS AND SUPERVISION 3.3.1 The Hardware Supplier shall provide a qualified Architectural Hardware

Specialist who shall co-operate with the Contractor and Hardware Installer and clarify the location and/or installation methods of particular items if so requested.

3.3.2 The Architectural Hardware Specialist shall make periodic inspections of the

hardware installations and report improper or unsatisfactory conditions to the Contractor and shall expedite the replacement or correction of faulty hardware. This Specialist shall attend site meetings when so requested.

END OF SECTION

Toronto and Region Conservation Authority - Interim Head Office

Heading 001

Each Assembly to have:

1 SET TRACK TYPE C "EXTRA WIDTH" POCKET DOOR COMPLETE KIT KNC

1 EA SLIDING DOOR PULL C-40 626 KNC

2 EA DOOR STOP C-100-HD KNC

1 EA GUIDE C-913 KNC

1 EA GUIDE CHANNEL C-914 (PER FT) KNC

Heading 002

Each Assembly to have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 127 X 114 652 IVE

1 EA PASSAGE OR CLOSET 8215 LNA 626 SAR

1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 ST-1974 689 LCN

1 EA MOUNTING PLATE 1460-18 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE CBH 903 200 X 40MM LDW 630 CBH

Heading 003

Each Assembly to have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 127 X 114 NRP 652 IVE


1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 EDA 689 LCN


1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE

1 PD DOOR(S) G107 KITCHEN / KITCHEN 1000 X 2150 X 45 X WD X HMF X NONRTD

1 SGL DOOR(S) G116 CORRIDOR / FIELD STAFF STORAGE RH 1000 X 2150 X 45 X HMD X HMF X NONRTD

1 SGL DOOR(S) G117 MAIL / CENTRAL STORAGE LHR 1000 X 2150 X 45 X WD X HMF X NONRTD


Heading 004




Heading 005

Each Assembly to have: 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 127 X 114 652 IVE


1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 DEL EDA 689 LCN



Heading 006




1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 682 IVE

1 SGL DOOR(S) G135 CORRIDOR / QUITE ROOM RH 1000 X 2150 X 45 X WD X HMF X NONRTD

1 SGL DOOR(S) G137 FOYER / OFFICE LHR 1000 X 2150 X 45 X WD X HMF X NONRTD

1 SGL DOOR(S) G151 OFFICE / STAFF MEETING ROOM LH 1 SGL DOOR(S) G152 OFFICE / WORK ROOM LH 1000 X 2150 X 45 X WD X HMF X NONRTD


Heading 007




1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 682 IVE

Heading 008





Heading 009


2 EA ROLLER LATCH RL32 626 IVE

2 EA SGL DUMMY W/LOCKBODY 8295 LNA 626 SAR


1 SGL DOOR(S) G153 OFFICE / OFFICE LH 1 SGL DOOR(S) G154 OFFICE / OFFICE RH 1 SGL DOOR(S) G155 OFFICE / OFFICE RH 1 SGL DOOR(S) G156 OFFICE / OFFICE RH 1000 X 2150 X 45 X WD X HMF X NONRTD

1 SGL DOOR(S) G167 CORRIDOR / WATERFRONT ROOM A LH 1 SGL DOOR(S) G168 CORRIDOR / HUMBER ROOM B RH 1000 X 2150 X 45 X WD X HMF X NONRTD

1 PR DOOR(S) S237 CORRIDOR / CLOSET RHRA 2/818 X 2150 X 45 X WD X HMF X NONRTD


Heading 010


1 EA STOREROOM OR CLOSET LA-8204 LNA 626 SAR

1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE CON 630 VON


1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 689 LCN

1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM BLK SCE

1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE

1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 LGR SCE

1 EA PROX READER BY OTHERS UNK

1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-192 VON

1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6 VON

Heading 011





1 SGL DOOR(S) S250 IT WORK ROOM / SERVER ROOM LH 1000 X 2150 X 45 X HMD X HMF X NONRTD

1 SGL DOOR(S) S252 IT WORK ROOM / STORAGE LH 1000 X 2150 X 45 X HMD X HMF X NONRTD

SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 1 GLAZING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included: a. Glaze hollow metal screens and doors and wood doors where called for, by

Sections 08 13 13 & 08 14 16; b. Mirrors not framed in metal; 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Glazing units supplied by this Section installed by Section 08525, Aluminum

Windows, and Section 08410, Aluminum Entrances, in conformance with this Section;

b. Hollow metal frames and screens supplied by Section 08 13 13, Standard

Steel Doors and Frames, and Section 06 20 23, Interior Finish Carpentry; c. Metal doors installed by Section 06 20 30, Finish Carpentry, glazed by this

Section; d. Sealants and sealing shall conform to Section 07 92 13, Joint Sealants; 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Conform to the requirements of the following: a. Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units, published by

the Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada (IGMAC). b. Glazing Sealing Systems Manual, published by the Flat Glass Marketing

Association, U.S.A. c. Part 4, Design, of the Ontario Building Code. d. NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows, published by National Fire Protection

Association Inc. e. Requirements for Listed fire doors and screens, Underwriters' Laboratories

of Canada, List of Equipment and Materials, Volume II, Building Construction, as amended to date.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 Provide adequate protection to glass, glazing units, mirrors and other

materials until received by Sections installing same or until installation

SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 2 GLAZING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

completed by this Section. Provide protection of mirrors until total completion of the Work. Use strippable coatings if necessary.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS 1.5.1 Co-ordination With Other Trades:

Co-ordinate with work of related trades into which glass of this Section will be installed. Exchange shop drawings with such trades, and ensure that conditions are suitable to accept glazing while meeting requirements of this Specification.

1.6 WARRANTY 1.6.1 Warrant insulating glass units against internal condensation or seal failure

for five years. 1.6.2 Warrant mirrors against spoilage of silvering for ten years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Standard Glass: Float glass, min. 5mm thick, conforming to CAN 2-12.3-

M76. 2.1.2 Low-E Glass: Float glass, min. 5mm conforming to CAN2-12.3M76 with a

coating of metal oxide on one side, with a strong characteristic of low emission of heat energy in both directions.

2.1.3 Wired Glass: Except as otherwise indicated; 6mm thick, clear Georgian

wired glass, conforming to CAN 2-12.11-M76, Type 1 (polished both sides), Style 3 (square).

2.1.4 Safety Glass: Except as otherwise indicated: 6mm thick, conforming to CAN 2-12.1-M79, Type 1, laminated, or Type 2, tempered as specifically indicated, Class B, float glass. 2.1.5 Insulating Glass Units: Double glazing units conforming to CAN 2-12.8-

M76, consisting of an outer pane of Low-E glass and an inner pane of clear glass separated by 12.5mm dehydrated and hermetically sealed air space. Spacer to have desiccant.

2.1.6 Mirrors: Silvered, except as otherwise indicated; 6mm thick, conforming to Can2-12.5-M86, Type 1A, polished float, polished edges if not framed.

2.1.7 Joint Sealers In Conformance with Section 07900: a. Shim Tape: Sealer Type 10. Exterior or compression glazed glazing

systems. b. Glazing Gasket: Sealer Type 11.

SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 3 GLAZING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA c. Sealant for Exterior Glazing: Sealer Type 8. d. Plain Glazing Tape: Sealer Type 9. Interior glazing only. 2.1.8 Setting Blocks: e. Setting Blocks for Fire-Rated Screens and Doors: Full length of glazed

opening by width to span from fixed stop to other side of glass, thickness to suit glass, bite and opening.

f. Setting Blocks for Non-Fire-Rated Screen, Doors and Windows:

EPDM 90 durometer, 100mm long by width to span from fixed stop to other side of glass, thickness to suit glass, bite and opening.

2.2 FABRICATION 2.2.1 Label each light of glass with the registered name of the product and the

weight and quality of the glass. 2.2.2 Job check dimensions before cutting materials. 2.2.3 Minimum bite or lap of glass on stops and rabbets as recommended by

glass manufacturer. 2.2.4 Provide pre-cut single glazing and insulated flat glass units to work of

Sections 06200, Finish Carpentry, 08410, Aluminum Entrances, and 08525, Aluminum Windows, for installation thereunder. Furnish glass to sizes determined by work of such Sections in conformance with thickness and safety requirements of Drawings and OBC Tables 9.6.5A and 9.7.3A.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 Openings shall be free from moisture, frost, rust, dirt and foreign matter. 3.1.2 Clean surface to receive sealant with a clean cloth dampened with xylol or a

50-50 mixture of acetone and xylol. Wipe dry with a clean, dry cloth. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Windows: Glaze in conformance with IGMAC Detail entitled 'Pre-Shim

Tape Exterior, Series H2', except omit heel bead. 3.2.2 Exterior Hollow Metal Doors: Glaze in conformance with IGMAC Detail

entitled 'Pre-Shim Tape Interior, Series H2'. 3.2.3 Interior Doors and Screens: Glaze in conformance with FGMA Setting

No. 43 (setting blocks, plain glazing tape both sides, one removable stop). 3.2.4 Install wired glass with wires parallel to sides of opening.

SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 4 GLAZING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 3.2.5 Glaze using compound, or glazing tapes, or gaskets to secure glass in frame

and render airtight and vibration free. 3.2.6 Replace loose stops in their original positions, tighten all screws. 3.3. GLAZING SCHEDULE 3.3.1 Windows: a. Openers: Single glass units, clear float, outside lite with Low-E coating. b. Fixed Lites: Insulating glass units, clear float.

Low-E glass at Loft Building as per 2.1.5. 3.3.2 Exterior Doors and Screens: Insulating glass units, clear float and Low-

E glass, both panes tempered to min. 1100mm above floor level. 3.3.3 Interior Fire-Rated Metal Doors and Screens: Wired glass installed

using approved ULC setting blocks. 3.3.4 Interior Non-Fire-Rated Wood and Metal Doors and Screens:

Tempered safety glass installed using rubber setting blocks. 3.3.5 Mirrors: a. See Section 10800 for metal framed mirrors. b. Mirrors to be located by Consultant. Refer to drawings. c. Install mirrors using adhesive recommended by mirror manufacturer. END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 12 00 PAGE 1 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART I. GENERAL A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. B. DESCRIPTION 1. Work Included:

Provide suspension system to support gypsum board ceilings and acoustic ceilings.

2. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Overhead structure provided by Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete; b. Gypsum wallboard assemblies provided by Section 09 25 00, Gypsum

Wallboard; c. Acoustic ceilings provided by Section 09 51 00, Acoustic Ceilings; 3. Description of Systems: a. Provide suspension systems for all ceilings not secured directly to the

structure; b. Provide systems of vertical hangers at max. 1.2m centres each way from

structure to level of carrying channels for gypsum board assemblies and grid of acoustic ceilings;

c. Design Loads: Suspension system for ceilings shall be capable of

supporting a ceiling and all superimposed loads applied by mechanical and electrical equipment attached to or bearing on ceiling;

d. Fire-rated Designs: Provide support for fire-rated gypsum board ceilings

where called for on the Drawings, Schedules or in Section 09250. e. Attach suspension systems to concrete structure above only by approved

fasteners. Under no circumstances attach to structure above with powder-activated devices.

C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Requirement of Regulatory Agencies: Conform to the requirements of: 2. Qualifications of Subcontractors:

Work of this Section shall be performed by or supervised by personnel with at least five years' experience with ceiling suspension systems.

3. Allowable Tolerances:

SECTION 09 12 00 PAGE 2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

Hangers to be vertical and located to within 12mm per 1m of drop of requirements of Sections 09250 and 09513. Hangers shall be so installed as to permit installation of gypsum board and acoustic ceilings to within a tolerance of 3mm in 3.5m, or 6mm overall in any space.

D. SUBMITTALS 1. Subcontractor to submit in writing confirmation, including data published by

materials manufacturers, that suspension system is capable of supporting design loads, including adequate support for electrical fixtures as required by the Electrical Inspection Department of Ontario Hydro.

E. JOB CONDITIONS 1. Co-ordination:

Co-ordinate with Section 09 25 00 and 09 51 00, and exchange shop drawings to determine correct location of hangers.

PART II. PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS 1. Hangers:

Min. 2.68mm steel wire, mild steel rod or mild steel strip. 2. Purlins:

CSA-S136-M89, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, or ASTM A283-81, Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars.

3. Hanger Anchoring Devices:

Phillips Red Head by Phillips Drill Company of Canada Ltd.: T32, self-drilling for use in concrete deck.

4. Galvanizing:

All sheet materials to be galvanized to Z275. All irregular products to be galvanized in accordance with CSA G164-M1981.

PART III. EXECUTION A. GENERAL 1. Install ceiling suspension system to meet specified requirements of ASTM

Specification C636.

SECTION 09 12 00 PAGE 3 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA B. INSTALLATION 1. Space hangers for metal grid ceiling to support grillages independent of

walls, pipes and ducts, on a max. 1.2m x 1.2m grid and not more than 150mm from walls.

2. Space hangers for acoustic ceilings to the requirements of Ontario Hydro, to

align with main grid members, in co-ordination with Section 09510 to support grillages independent of walls, pipes and ducts.

3. Install hanger anchoring devices in appropriately drilled holes in concrete

construction. 4. Bend down tops of hangers over rod in anchoring devices and securely tie.

Double hangers over purlins or joists chords and securely tie. 5. Leave this work fully prepared for receiving Sections. END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 21 16 PAGE 1 GYPSUM BOARD & CEMENT BOARD DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included: a. Gypsum board and cement board walls, bulkheads and ceilings, fire-rated

where called for and supporting grillage and furring for the above. b. Gypsum board air barrier on exterior walls. This must be in place prior to

the installation of the fan coil units. c. Cement board soffits over insulation. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Hangers for suspended gypsum board assemblies provided by Section 09 12 00, Ceiling Suspension Systems; b. Sprinklers in gypsum board ceilings provided by Division 15, Mechanical; c. Ceramic Tile provided be Section 09 30 13, Ceramic Tile; d. Suspended acoustic ceilings provided by Section 09 51 23, Acoustic

Ceilings; e. Painting and finishing other than vinyl covered gypsum board provided by

Section 09 91 23, Interior Painting; 1.2.3 Definitions:

Drywall, Gypsum wall board: Gypsum Board. 1.2.4 Description of System: Provide fire resistance ratings in assemblies as called for on the Drawings in

accordance with the specified standards. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies

Conform to the requirements of: a. CSA A82.21-M1978, Gypsum and Terms Relating to Gypsum Products; b. CSA A82.27-M1977, Gypsum Board Products; c. CSA A82.31-M1980, Gypsum Board Application;

SECTION 09 21 16 PAGE 2 GYPSUM BOARD & CEMENT BOARD DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA d. The Supplement to the National Building Code of Canada, Chapter 2, Fire

Performance Ratings; e. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada List of Equipment and Materials,

Volume II, latest edition as amended to date as per ULC designs called for on Drawings.

1.3.2 Allowable Tolerances: a. Gypsum board walls shall be straight, vertical, flat and true to building lines

to within 3mm in 3m. b. Suspended gypsum board assemblies shall be level to within 10mm in 3m. 1.3.3 Air Barrier Mock-up:

Provide complete installation of gypsum board air barrier in designated area. Adjust products and application techniques and provide further mock-ups until system is approved by Consultant. Approved system will become standard for all further such work.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 No outside storage permitted. Do not remove wrappings until ready for use. 1.4.2 Stack gypsum board flat on clean, level and dry surface without overhanging

boards. Protect bagged products from excessive moisture or wetting. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS 1.5.1 Temporary heat is provided by Section 01500, General Work. Commence

this work only after air temperature has been maintained at 13°C to 21°C for at least 24 hours before and can be maintained at same until joint cement and adhesives are fully cured, with proper ventilation to provide dry condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Gypsum Board:

Conforming to CSA A82.27-M1977, standard board, core board, and special fire-rated board for fire-rated assemblies, 1.2m wide by longest lengths practicable. Thickness, unless specified otherwise:

SECTION 09 21 16 PAGE 3 GYPSUM BOARD & CEMENT BOARD DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

Standard board: 12.7mm Fire-rated board: 15.9mm

2.1.2 Fire-Rated Gypsum Board: Fire code or Fire code "C" as manufactured by

Canadian Gypsum Company Ltd., with tapered edges, classified for fire hazard by Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada, and labelled in conformance with the ULC Label Service for the application specified.

2.1.3 Water Resistant Gypsum Board: With tapered edges. 2.1.4 Water Resistant Fire-Rated Gypsum Board: W/R Fire Code "C" as

manufactured by Canadian Gypsum Company Limited, Incorporated, and labelled in conformance with the UL Label Service for the application specified. 2.1.5 Foil back gypsum board panels 12.7 mm, vapour permeance of 0.006 perms.

2.1.7 Portland Cement Board:

11mm thick, composed of Portland cement and fine aggregate core with non-corroding mesh reinforced high density concrete faces, acceptable products, Wonderboard by Roc-crete Industries Ltd. or Durock by Canadian Gypsum Company, Limited.

2.1.8 Steel Studs: Min 0.53mm core, Z275 galvanized, with min. 31.8mm

knurled faces and min 6mm return, knock-outs in web for horizontal services and bracing, increase core thickness for heights over 2400mm to manufacturer's recommendation, 92.1mm wide for walls, 63mm wide for shafts and chases.

2.1.9 Stud Runner Channels: As per studs with min. 25mm flange, widths to

suit. 2.1.10 Furring Channels: 22.2mm deep, 35mm knurled face, min. o.53 core,

Z275 galvanized. 2.1.11 Ceiling Carrying Channels: Cold rolled, 0.606 kg/m, 38mm x 15mm min.,

Z275 galvanized. 2.1.12 Tie Wire: Min. 1.588mm soft annealed galvanized steel. 2.1.13 Corner and Casing Bead: Min 0.38 mm core, Z275 galvanized, perforated

flanges. 2.1.14 Metal Trim at board perimeter (to receive sealant): CGC 400 series metal

trim; at tops and bottoms of boards to receive sealant in air barrier and vapour retarder systems.

2.1.15 Screws: Self drilling, self-tapping, gypsum wallboard screws, 25mm x #6

for single board application, longer for double board application. 2.1.16 Reinforcing Tape: As recommended by board manufacturer.

SECTION 09 21 16 PAGE 4 GYPSUM BOARD & CEMENT BOARD DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.1.17 Joint Treatment Cement: Joint, topping and laminating compounds as

recommended by board manufacturer. 2.1.18 Wire Mesh: 25mm x 25mm x 1.588mm steel wire mesh, Z275 galvanized. 2.1.19 Control Joint: Of min. 0.53mm steel core, Z275 galavanized, perforated

flanges as manufactured by Canadian Gypsum Limited of Universal Sections.

2.1.19 Acoustical Insulation 76 mm thick, 635 mm wide faced or unfaced

fibrous glass batts as appropriate: Red Top Sound Attenuation batts by Canadian Gypsum Co., or Fiberglas Noise Stop Blanket by Fiberglas Canada.

2.1.21 Air Barrier Sealant: Sealant Type 5, Section 07900. 2.1.22 Air Barrier Gap Sealer: Sealant Type 2, Section 07900. 2.1.23 Board Masonry Adhesive: Durabond 90 Compound by CGC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 General: a. Conform to CSA A82.31-M1980, except as otherwise specified herein. b. Co-operate with mechanical, electrical and other trades to accommodate

fixtures, fittings and other items in wallboard areas. 3.1.2 Metal Stud Framing a. Install metal studs at 400mm maximum spacing and at every 400mm centre

across any wall surface. b. Install true, straight and square with wall plane. c. Provide full stud framing around all openings. d. Provide double studs each side of all openings and infill studs above and

below openings as per "a." above. e. Provide double studs at head and sill of all openings over 1200mm wide. f. Fabricate wall panels with screwed on top and bottom runner channels. g. Brace with secured cross-bridging at every 1200mm vertically all walls that

exceed 2700mm. h. Brace as above walls between 2400mm high and 2700mm high with one row

of cross-bracing at mid-height.

SECTION 09 21 16 PAGE 5 GYPSUM BOARD & CEMENT BOARD DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA i. At acoustical walls, bed perimeter studs and runners in bead of sealant Type

5 (Section 07900). k. Install in each grab bar location anchorage to withstand a force of 2224 N in

all directions. Attach to framing adequate reinforcing members to support the load of, and withstand withdrawal and shear forces imposed by items installed by other forces such as coat hooks, washroom accessories, handrail anchors, wall-hung cabinets, drapery grounds, minor mechanical and electrical equipment, and other such fitments.

l. Provide bulkheads over doors, frames, screens and changes in ceiling level;

pipe spaces and as indicated on Drawings. 3.1.3 Stud Wall Expansion Joint a. Stud walls are not intended to receive or accommodate vertical structural

loads from structural elements above walls. It can be assumed that overhead concrete structural elements may settle and deflect downward by 12mm. This deflection must be accommodated with a 12mm expansion joint between the top of metal stud walls and the structure above. For spans exceeding 7m increase depth of expansion joint accordingly.

b. Do not span steel studs full height of space to structure as above. Cut studs

15 mm short. Provide channel runners top and bottom of panels. c. Secure a second, separate runner channel to underside of structure above.

Tuck top of stud panel into upper runner channel. Do not screw the two top runner channels, leave loose nested together.

d. Secure stud panel bottom runner track to floor slab. 3.1.4 Ceiling Framing: a. Carrying Channels: Where ducts are large or where combination of ducts,

or combination of ducts and other items interfere so that hanger spacing exceeds 1200mm, increase size of main runner channels accordingly to sustain increased loading and span. Space channels at max. 1200mm o.c. and not more than 150mm from boundary walls, interruptions of continuity and changes in direction. Where splices are necessary, lap members at least 200mm and wire each end with min. double strand of tie wire. Avoid clustering or lining up splices. Attach channels to rod hangers by bending hanger sharply under bottom flange of runner and securely wire in place with a saddle tie.

b. Cross Furring: Erect wallboard furring channels at right angles to carrying

channels. Space wallboard furring channels at 600mm o.c. and not more than 150mm from boundary walls, interruptions in ceiling continuity and changes in direction. Secure wallboard furring channels to each support with a double strand of tie wire or with clip approved by manufacturer of furring components. Splice joints by nesting and tying channels together.

3.1.5 Gypsum Board; Application:

SECTION 09 21 16 PAGE 6 GYPSUM BOARD & CEMENT BOARD DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA a. Ceilings and Bulkheads: Apply gypsum board and to framing members

or furring with screws. Erect wallboard with long dimension at right angles to supports. Locate end joints over supporting members. Space screws at 200mm o.c., 150mm o.c. in fire-rated ceilings and bulkheads.

b. Walls: Apply gypsum board to studs with screws. Erect board with long

dimension at right angles to supports. Locate end joints over supporting members. Locate vertical joints at least 300mm from the jamb lines of openings. Space screws at 200mm o.c. at board edges and 300mm o.c. on board field. Leave minimum 10mm gap between top of board and structure above to accommodate deflection of structure.

c. Fire Protection of Beams and Ducts: Where called for shall be 2 layers

of 15.9mm fire rated board on studs or furring at 400mm max. spacing with board secured to framing with screws at max. 150mm centres and wire mesh between layers of board if required.

d. Ceiling and Partition Fasteners: Perimeter screws shall be not less than

9mm nor more than 13mm from edges and ends, and shall be opposite the screws on adjacent boards. Screws shall be driven with a power screw gun and set with countersunk head slightly below the surface of the board.

e. Air Barrier Sealing: In exterior walls where gypsum board acts as air

barrier; set bottom runners in two continuous beads of air barrier sealant or 25 mm x 3 mm sealant tape; at top runner seal with closed cell compressible urethane rod. At board edges install and tape-in CGC 400 metal trim at top and bottom edges; seal all edges of board against shear walls and slabs and opening framing with sealant. Seal larger gaps with Air Barrier Gap Sealer. Render wall airtight and have inspected and approved before installing interior board walls or ceilings.

f. Portland Cement Board:

Use Portland Cement board for exterior work and for bath tub and shower enclosures.

3.1.6 Access Doors: a. Doors supplied by Division 15, and herein shall be built-in by this Section

where required in wallboard installations, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, to match and blend with surrounding surfaces if exposed.

3.1.7 Acoustical Isolation: a. Install acoustic insulation in acoustical walls called for on the Drawings. 3.1.8 Control Joints: a. In the absence of Drawing notations, provide control joints in the following

approved locations: (i) Where gypsum board is installed over masonry control joints, (ii) Abutting structural elements,

SECTION 09 21 16 PAGE 7 GYPSUM BOARD & CEMENT BOARD DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA (iii) Dissimilar walls and ceilings, (iv) Changes in substrate construction, (v) Approximate 9145 mm ( 30'- 0") spacing on long partition runs, (vi) Approximate 15240 mm ( 50' - 0") spacing on large ceilings, and (vii) Changes in superficial area. b. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. c. Double furring members or studs at control joints, placing one furring

member or stud on each side of control joint. 3.1.9 Openings in Fire Rated Assemblies: a. Regardless of what is shown on the Drawings, completely wrap wood jamb

and head members at all wall and roof openings with the same gypsum board protection as adjacent assembly.

b. Provide extra gypsum board if required to meet detailing of finished work as

shown on the Drawings. 3.1.10 Finishing: a. Finish all joints except in vinyl-covered board walls. b. Casing Beads: Install casing beads where gypsum wallboard butts against

a surface having no form concealing its juncture, and where shown. Erect casing beads plumb or level with minimum number of joints. Do not use scrap pieces.

c. Joint Treatment: Filling shall be done either manually, using the tools of

the trade, or by a mechanical taping and filling machine of proven efficiency. Apply joint filler, tape and topping cement according to manufacturer's directions. The finish work shall be smooth, seamless, plumb, true and flush, having square, neat corners.

d. Finish Portland Cement board to receive tile as per gypsum board. Fill all

gaps with Portland cement board joint compound. Embed Portland cement board reinforcing tape in Portland cement board joint compound centered on joints and finish smooth.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 30 13 PAGE 1 CERAMIC TILE DATE: 29 Oct 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included a. Provide ceramic tile, and integral waterproofing at ceramic tile. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere a. Final cleaning and polishing provided by Section 01 74 13. b. Sealing of control joints provided by Section 07 92 13. c. Portland cement board backing provided by Section 09 21 16. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Qualifications of Applicator: Be a member company in good standing of

the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada with a minimum of 5 years of successful Work in projects of comparable or larger size.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 1.4.1 Environmental Conditions: Execute Work of this Section while temperature

is maintained between 10oC and 22oC for period of 72 h before commencement, during and following installation. Avoid concentrated or irregular heating during curing period.

1.4.2 Protection: Protect Work of this Section against damage by other trades for

min. 72 h after application of grouting by prohibiting passage of traffic over tile. Do not immerse in water and protect tilework from freezing for at least 28 days after installation.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 Protect all containers from freezing during transportation and storage.

Store materials in warm dry area 24 h before use on Site. 1.6 SUBMITTALS 1.6.1 Samples: a. Submit for review in accordance with Section 01300, 3 - 300 mm [12"] square

SECTION 09 30 13 PAGE 2 CERAMIC TILE DATE: 29 Oct 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

or a minimum of 4 tiles, whichever the greater, identified sample boards of each colour and type of tile, mounted on suitable backing material with specified adhesive and grout. Include samples of base, trim and accessories, separately.

b. Samples shall be representative of permissible colour range. 1.6.2 Extra Stock: At completion of Work, furnish to Owner as directed, extra

stock of tile and trim in colours, patterns and sizes furnished to the project. Wrap in original protective containers, permanently labelled as to exact contents, in quantities as follows:

Wall Tile - 80 tiles Floor Tile - 80 tiles

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Tile: Conform to CAN2-75.1-M88. 2.1.2 Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile : a. 108 x 108 mm where indicated on Finish Schedule, ribbed or keyed backs,

cushion edge, Type 5 glazed modular wall tile, Class MR 4 in accordance with requirements of CAN2-75.1-M88.

b. Four colours to be selected. 2.1.3 Ceramic Floor Tile : a. 150 x 150 x 10 mm square edge, modular unglazed tile, Class MR 1 in

accordance with requirements of CAN2-75.1-M88, where indicated on Finish Schedule.

2.1.4 Floor/Wall Tile Setting Systems: a. Installation of Wall Tile over Portland Cement Board at bathtub and

Shower walls: Thin set Method to specified detail of TTMAC Detail No. 200-5B.

b. Installation of Wall Tile over gypsum wall board: Thin-set method to

specified requirements of TTMAC Detail No. 200-5A. c. Installation of Wall Tile over concrete block masonry: Thin-set method

to specified requirements of TTMAC Detail No. 200-4A. d. Installation of floor tile: On cement mortar bonded to structural slab by

slurry coat, to specified requirements of TTMAC Detail No. 200-14A e. Primer/Sealer: "Planicrete 50" by Mapei Canada Inc., or type

recommended by accepted adhesive manufacturer. At areas over concrete, add Portland cement to mix.

SECTION 09 30 13 PAGE 3 CERAMIC TILE DATE: 29 Oct 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.1.5 Grouts: a. For Ceramic Floor and Wall Tile: Except as otherwise specified,

"Keracolor" by Mapei Canada Inc., or H.B. Fuller high density, non-shrinking, stain resistant factory pigmented and sanded Portland cement grout; H.B. Fuller "Coloured Grout", latex modified. Where joint widths are greater than 3 mm, [1/8",] use "Plastijoint" additive by Mapei Canada Inc.

b. Latex Grout Additive: "868" by H.B. Fuller or "Laticrete 3701" by Laticrete

International Ltd., or "Plastijoint Grout Additive" by Mapei Canada Inc. Grout colours will be selected by Consultant. Special colours may be selected. Use sanded mix for floors; non-sanded for walls.

2.1.6 Sealant: Type À' in accordance with requirements of Section 07900. 2.1.7 Self-Levelling Underlayment: For levelling substrate variations up to 6

mm, [1/4",] "Planicrete 20" by Mapei Canada Inc., or "Laticrete Underlayment" by Laticrete International; for variations of 6 mm [1/4"] and greater, "Planicrete 50" by Mapei Canada Inc., or

2.1.8 Cement: Portland cement conforming to CAN3-A5-M83, white and grey. 2.1.9 Sand: CAN3-A23.1-M77 for setting bed; to CSA A82-57-M77, for grout.

White silica sand for white and light coloured grout. 2.1.10 Water: Potable, non-staining, from domestic water supply. 2.1.11 Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206-79 or C207-79, Type S. 2.1.12 Cleavage Plane: Polyethylene film to CGSB 51.34-M86. 2.1.13 Expansion Joint Flexible Membrane: At Contractor's option, either

Hydrotech "Heavy Duty Elastosheet 6146" or 1 mm [40 mil] PVC sheet, type of which is compatible with and has proven adhesive qualities when used with particular integral waterproofing system selected.

2.1.22 Waterproof Membrane: Laticrete 9235 as manufactured by Laticrete

International Inc. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.1.1 Ensure compatibility of adhesives, waterproofing, reinforcing and fillers

supplied under this Section, and which bear contact with substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Wall Surfaces: a. Remove all foreign matter such as loose mortar, plaster, visible laitance,

cement, form release agents, dust and the like which would otherwise impede bonding of levelling coat or mortars.

b. Prime very dry gypsum, wood or porous concrete with specified primer,


brush or roller applied at full strength. 3.2.2 Floor Surfaces: a. Completely remove oil, grease, waste and existing resilient floor finishes

from floor areas scheduled to receive new ceramic tile. b. Levelling Underlayment: Where substrate varies beyond limitations as set

forth hereinafter, prime substrate, mix and apply underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide underlayment at shower stalls to build up ramp access areas for the disabled.

3.2.3 Mixing: a. General: Mix mortars, additives and grouts in strict accordance with

manufacturer's requirements. b. Pail Batch Mixing with Low Revolution Drill Mixers as follows: (i) Premix separately prior to adding to the latex additive. (ii) Pour latex additive into clean mixing vessel and add dry materials slowly

while mixing into a homogeneous and smooth consistency. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 3.3.1 Prepare materials and set tile in accordance with Terrazzo, Tile and Marble

Association of Canada's Manual No. 200-1979 and as specified herein. 3.3.2 Set all tile in pattern as indicated on Drawings. 3.3.3 Except where tiles have setting tabs, and except for expansion, control and

isolation joints, maintain 1.5 mm joints for all ceramic mosaic tile, 3 mm for ceramic tile up to 100 x 100 mm size, and 6 mm, for ceramic and quarry tile over 100 mm in size.

3.3.4 Set tile flat and level with uniform joints throughout, properly aligned.

Provide uniform slopes to floor drains. 3.3.5 Lay out tile Work so tiles less than 1/2 the least dimension do not occur and

with minimum amount of cutting. 3.3.6 Back up tile coves, curbs and other shaped pieces solid with mortar. Rigidly

set, reinforce or otherwise make firm and secure such pieces. 3.3.7 Keep face of tile and joints clean of setting compound. 3.3.8 Do necessary cutting and drilling of fixtures, fittings, and built-in or

penetrating units without marring the tile. Replace all cracked or damaged tile.

3.3.9 Installation, grouting and curing shall only occur when ambient temperature


is above 7oC but not exceeding 29oC. Observe recommended working temperatures of additives and bonding agents.

3.3.10 Extend tiles behind mirrors, cabinets, cupboards and other fixed objects at

walls, except as otherwise detailed. 3.3.11 Form external angles with round edge tile extending over edge of square

edge adjacent tile. Internal angles shall be formed square, carrying 1 flat tile past edge of other.

3.3.12 Provide strings, caps, coves, corners, angles and other moulded pieces to

suit requirements of job. Ensure that striping and joints are in alignment. 3.3.13 Apply tiles coloured differently than field, in straight rows either horizontally

or vertically or both horizontally and vertically without extra cost. 3.3.14 Lay out borders and defined lines, wherever they occur, prior to setting of

adjacent tile. Keep inner edges of borders against fields or wall panels straight.

3.3.15 Cut tiles to conform with irregularities in wall lines and vertical planes along

outer edges. Smooth cut edges with carborundum block or by other means to provide clean straight edge.

3.3.16 Re-point joints after cleaning to eliminate imperfections. Avoid scratching tile

surfaces. 3.3.17 Ensure that substrate is clean, sound, well cured, and has required slope to

drains. Provide levelling coat where required to bring surfaces to true even plane within 1:800 for walls and 1:1000 for floors. Allow levelling coat to completely cure prior to installation of tile finish.

3.3.18 Provide control joints equal to width of interior quarry tile joints in floors and

walls at perimeters of floor and at 5000 to 6000 mm oc by raking out joints to full depth of tile and cleaning joints for application of sealant by Section 07900.

3.3.19 Place expansion joints accurately where shown; mitre corners and double

mitre tees. 3.3.20 Clean tilework progressively. Do not allow tinted grout to stain absorbent

tile. Do not use acids for cleaning. Seal grout in accordance with TTMAC certified products only.

3.3.21 Waterproofing: Install waterproofing membrane over entire area to receive

waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install with as few joints as possible and seal joints watertight with recommended adhesive.

3.4 PRIMER 3.4.1 Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, apply primer to substrate


before installation commences. Surface shall be dry, free from dust, dirt and grease. Remove standing water, and vacuum until dry.

3.5 SETTING FLOOR AND WALL TILE 3.5.1 Set tile and base with setting method as specified in Part 2. Refer to

materials and Drawings. 3.5.2 Unless otherwise specified herein, materials, tools and workmanship shall

comply with the recommendations and directions of the manufacturer whose system is being used to set tile and base.

3.5.3 Prior to commencement of application, arrange to have adhesive

manufacturer's technical representative visit Site and discuss procedures to be adopted, to analyze conditions under which Work will be done, and inspect surfaces to be covered in order that alternative recommendations may be made should adverse conditions exist.

3.5.4 Ensure no traffic is allowed on freshly laid tile for at least 72 h and until full

set is achieved. Verify set prior to grouting. 3.6 GROUTING 3.6.1 Apply grout in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.7 CAULKING: 3.7.1 Caulk joints between tile and lavatories, water closet bowls, tubs, with

silicone sealant to specified requirements of Section 07900. END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 30 13 PAGE 1 CERAMIC TILE DATE: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included a. Provide and install ceramic tile. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere a. Final cleaning and polishing provided by Section 01 74 13. b. Sealing of control joints provided by Section 07 92 13. c. Portland cement board backing provided by Section 09 21 16. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Qualifications of Applicator: Be a member company in good standing of

the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada with a minimum of 5 years of successful Work in projects of comparable or larger size.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 1.4.1 Environmental Conditions: Execute Work of this Section while temperature

is maintained between 10oC and 22oC for period of 72 h before commencement, during and following installation. Avoid concentrated or irregular heating during curing period.

1.4.2 Protection: Protect Work of this Section against damage by other trades for

min. 72 h after application of grouting by prohibiting passage of traffic over tile. Do not immerse in water and protect tilework from freezing for at least 28 days after installation.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 Protect all containers from freezing during transportation and storage.

Store materials in warm dry area 24 h before use on Site. 1.6 SUBMITTALS 1.6.1 Samples: a. Submit for review in accordance with Section 01300, 3 - 300 mm [12"] square

or a minimum of 4 tiles, whichever the greater, identified sample boards of each colour and type of tile, mounted on suitable backing material with specified adhesive and grout. Include samples of base, trim and accessories, separately.

SECTION 09 30 13 PAGE 2 CERAMIC TILE DATE: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA b. Samples shall be representative of permissible colour range. 1.6.2 Extra Stock: At completion of Work, furnish to Owner as directed, extra

stock of tile and trim in colours, patterns and sizes furnished to the project. Wrap in original protective containers, permanently labelled as to exact contents, in quantities as follows:

Wall Tile - 20 tiles Floor Tile - 20 tiles

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Tile: 2.1.2 Ceramic Wall Tile (CWT) : a. Manufacturer: Olympia Tile Collection: Unicolour Series Surface Texture: Matte Size 12” x 24” Code: OV.UN.WHT.1224.MT.OS Colour: Super White Installation: Stacked Horizontally 2.1.3 Ceramic Floor Tile at Shower Floor (CMT) : a. Manufacturer: Olympia Tile Collection: Quebec Collection Surface Texture: Matte, unglazed Size 2” x 2”, sheet size, 12” x12” Code: OD.QC.ATF.0202.FS Colour: Anthracite Fleck 2.1.4 Porcelain Floor Tile (POR) : a. Manufacturer: Olympia Tile Collection: Regal Series Surface Texture: Matte Size 12” x 12” Code: NY.RG.GRY.1212.MT Colour: Grey Matte 2.1.5 Metal edge at end of wall tile: a. Schluter JOLLY, 1/4”-1/2”, aluminium

SECTION 09 30 13 PAGE 3 CERAMIC TILE DATE: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.1.6 Floor/Wall Tile Setting Systems: a. Installation of Wall Tile over Portland Cement Board at bathtub and

Shower walls: Thin set Method to specified detail of TTMAC Detail No. 200-5B.

b. Installation of Wall Tile over gypsum wall board: Thin-set method to

specified requirements of TTMAC Detail No. 200-5A. c. Installation of Wall Tile over concrete block masonry: Thin-set method

to specified requirements of TTMAC Detail No. 200-4A. d. Installation of floor tile: On cement mortar bonded to structural slab by

slurry coat, to specified requirements of TTMAC Detail No. 200-14A e. Primer/Sealer: "Planicrete 50" by Mapei Canada Inc., or type

recommended by accepted adhesive manufacturer. At areas over concrete, add Portland cement to mix.

2.1.7 Grouts: a. For Ceramic Floor and Wall Tile: Except as otherwise specified,

"Keracolor" by Mapei Canada Inc., or H.B. Fuller high density, non-shrinking, stain resistant factory pigmented and sanded Portland cement grout; H.B. Fuller "Coloured Grout", latex modified. Where joint widths are greater than 3 mm, [1/8",] use "Plastijoint" additive by Mapei Canada Inc.

b. Latex Grout Additive: "868" by H.B. Fuller or "Laticrete 3701" by Laticrete

International Ltd., or "Plastijoint Grout Additive" by Mapei Canada Inc. Grout colours will be selected by Consultant. Special colours may be selected. Use sanded mix for floors; non-sanded for walls.

2.1.8 Sealant: Type À' in accordance with requirements of Section 07900. 2.1.9 Self-Levelling Underlayment: For levelling substrate variations up to 6

mm, [1/4",] "Planicrete 20" by Mapei Canada Inc., or "Laticrete Underlayment" by Laticrete International; for variations of 6 mm [1/4"] and greater, "Planicrete 50" by Mapei Canada Inc., or

2.1.10 Cement: Portland cement conforming to CAN3-A5-M83, white and grey. 2.1.11 Sand: CAN3-A23.1-M77 for setting bed; to CSA A82-57-M77, for grout.

White silica sand for white and light coloured grout. 2.1.12 Water: Potable, non-staining, from domestic water supply. 2.1.13 Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206-79 or C207-79, Type S. 2.1.14 Cleavage Plane: Polyethylene film to CGSB 51.34-M86. 2.1.15 Expansion Joint Flexible Membrane: At Contractor's option, either

Hydrotech "Heavy Duty Elastosheet 6146" or 1 mm [40 mil] PVC sheet, type of which is compatible with and has proven adhesive qualities when used with particular integral waterproofing system selected.

SECTION 09 30 13 PAGE 4 CERAMIC TILE DATE: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.1.16 Waterproof Membrane: Laticrete 9235 as manufactured by Laticrete

International Inc. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.1.1 Ensure compatibility of adhesives, waterproofing, reinforcing and fillers

supplied under this Section, and which bear contact with substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Wall Surfaces: a. Remove all foreign matter such as loose mortar, plaster, visible laitance,

cement, form release agents, dust and the like which would otherwise impede bonding of levelling coat or mortars.

b. Prime very dry gypsum, wood or porous concrete with specified primer,

brush or roller applied at full strength. 3.2.2 Floor Surfaces: a. Completely remove oil, grease, waste and existing resilient floor finishes

from floor areas scheduled to receive new ceramic tile. b. Levelling Underlayment: Where substrate varies beyond limitations as set

forth hereinafter, prime substrate, mix and apply underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide underlayment at shower stalls to build up ramp access areas for the disabled.

3.2.3 Mixing: a. General: Mix mortars, additives and grouts in strict accordance with

manufacturer's requirements. b. Pail Batch Mixing with Low Revolution Drill Mixers as follows: (i) Premix separately prior to adding to the latex additive. (ii) Pour latex additive into clean mixing vessel and add dry materials slowly

while mixing into a homogeneous and smooth consistency. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 3.3.1 Prepare materials and set tile in accordance with Terrazzo, Tile and Marble

Association of Canada's Manual No. 200-1979 and as specified herein. 3.3.2 Set all tile in pattern as indicated on Drawings. 3.3.3 Except where tiles have setting tabs, and except for expansion, control and

isolation joints, maintain 1.5 mm joints for all ceramic mosaic tile, 3 mm for ceramic tile up to 100 x 100 mm size, and 6 mm, for ceramic and quarry tile

SECTION 09 30 13 PAGE 5 CERAMIC TILE DATE: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

over 100 mm in size. 3.3.4 Set tile flat and level with uniform joints throughout, properly aligned.

Provide uniform slopes to floor drains. 3.3.5 Lay out tile Work so tiles less than 1/2 the least dimension do not occur and

with minimum amount of cutting. 3.3.6 Back up tile coves, curbs and other shaped pieces solid with mortar. Rigidly

set, reinforce or otherwise make firm and secure such pieces. 3.3.7 Keep face of tile and joints clean of setting compound. 3.3.8 Do necessary cutting and drilling of fixtures, fittings, and built-in or

penetrating units without marring the tile. Replace all cracked or damaged tile.

3.3.9 Installation, grouting and curing shall only occur when ambient temperature

is above 7oC but not exceeding 29oC. Observe recommended working temperatures of additives and bonding agents.

3.3.10 Extend tiles behind mirrors, cabinets, cupboards and other fixed objects at

walls, except as otherwise detailed. 3.3.11 Form external angles with round edge tile extending over edge of square

edge adjacent tile. Internal angles shall be formed square, carrying 1 flat tile past edge of other.

3.3.12 Provide strings, caps, coves, corners, angles and other moulded pieces to

suit requirements of job. Ensure that striping and joints are in alignment. 3.3.13 Apply tiles coloured differently than field, in straight rows either horizontally

or vertically or both horizontally and vertically without extra cost. 3.3.14 Lay out borders and defined lines, wherever they occur, prior to setting of

adjacent tile. Keep inner edges of borders against fields or wall panels straight.

3.3.15 Cut tiles to conform with irregularities in wall lines and vertical planes along

outer edges. Smooth cut edges with carborundum block or by other means to provide clean straight edge.

3.3.16 Re-point joints after cleaning to eliminate imperfections. Avoid scratching tile

surfaces. 3.3.17 Ensure that substrate is clean, sound, well cured, and has required slope to

drains. Provide levelling coat where required to bring surfaces to true even plane within 1:800 for walls and 1:1000 for floors. Allow levelling coat to completely cure prior to installation of tile finish.

3.3.18 Provide control joints equal to width of interior quarry tile joints in floors and

walls at perimeters of floor and at 5000 to 6000 mm oc by raking out joints

SECTION 09 30 13 PAGE 6 CERAMIC TILE DATE: 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

to full depth of tile and cleaning joints for application of sealant by Section 07900.

3.3.19 Place expansion joints accurately where shown; mitre corners and double

mitre tees. 3.3.20 Clean tilework progressively. Do not allow tinted grout to stain absorbent

tile. Do not use acids for cleaning. Seal grout in accordance with TTMAC certified products only.

3.3.21 Waterproofing: Install waterproofing membrane over entire area to receive

waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install with as few joints as possible and seal joints watertight with recommended adhesive.

3.4 PRIMER 3.4.1 Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, apply primer to substrate

before installation commences. Surface shall be dry, free from dust, dirt and grease. Remove standing water, and vacuum until dry.

3.5 SETTING FLOOR AND WALL TILE 3.5.1 Set tile and base with setting method as specified in Part 2. Refer to

materials and Drawings. 3.5.2 Unless otherwise specified herein, materials, tools and workmanship shall

comply with the recommendations and directions of the manufacturer whose system is being used to set tile and base.

3.5.3 Prior to commencement of application, arrange to have adhesive

manufacturer's technical representative visit Site and discuss procedures to be adopted, to analyze conditions under which Work will be done, and inspect surfaces to be covered in order that alternative recommendations may be made should adverse conditions exist.

3.5.4 Ensure no traffic is allowed on freshly laid tile for at least 72 h and until full

set is achieved. Verify set prior to grouting. 3.6 GROUTING 3.6.1 Apply grout in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.7 CAULKING: 3.7.1 Caulk joints between tile and lavatories, water closet bowls, tubs, with

silicone sealant to specified requirements of Section 07900. END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 51 23 PAGE 1 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS DATE O7 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

PART I. GENERAL A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. B. DESCRIPTION 1. Work Included:

Provide ceiling framing, tee grid and tile for a complete acoustic ceiling where called for on the Drawings, and Room Finish Schedule.

2. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Hangers at 1200mm centres each way provided by Section 09 12 00, Ceiling

Suspension Systems; b. Gypsum board ceilings provided by Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board; c. Sprinklers in acoustic ceilings provided by Division 23, Mechanical; d. Ducts, grilles and other mechanical equipment provided by Division 23,

Mechanical; e. Light fixtures and other electrical equipment provided by Division 26,

Electrical; C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Requirement of Regulatory Agencies: a. Conform to the requirements of the Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada

List of Equipment and Materials, Volume II, Building Construction as amended to date.

D. SUBMITTALS 1. Samples:

Submit samples of all acoustic units to Consultant for his approval. 2. Maintenance Materials:

Supply 1.5% extra acoustic tiles and grid components, packed in commercial shipping grade cardboard cartons, marked with manufacturer and product name, for future repairs and place where direct by the Consultant.

3. Reference Data:

Provide finish materials catalogue cuts and maintenance instructions etc. to, insertion in Operating Manuals and Reference Data, Section 01300.

SECTION 09 51 23 PAGE 2 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS DATE O7 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1. Deliver materials in their original wrappings or containers with

manufacturer's labels and seals intact, and store in a dry area under cover and clear of the ground.

2. Ship grid members and mouldings in rigid crates and avoid damage.

Remove bent or deformed materials from the Site. PART II. PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS 1. Manufacturer: CertainTeed Saint-GobainCeilings or approved

alternative. a. Acoustic Units Type 1:

Type; Mineral Fibre Acoustic Pattern: Performa Fine Fissured HHF-2067 Bioshield, Safetone Class A Colour: white Edge: square Thickness: 19 mm Size: 508 mm x 1524 mm x 16 mm [ 20”x60”x5/8”]

2. Tee Grid System: Manufacturer: CertainTeed Ceilings, CGC Interiors

Ltd. or approved alternative manufacturer.

All metal products shall be steel galvanized to Z275. All exposed surfaces shall first receive a prepaint treatment, CGSB 31-GP-116M, and then a baked-on factory finish with satin sheen enamel in white to match acoustic tile.

Acoustic units and grid system area called up in metric dimensions. The general contractor must co-ordinate with the selected light fixtures to ensure compatibility. If imperial fixtures are selected the ceiling systems should be changed accordingly.

3. Main Tees:

Nominal 3600mm long, with fire expansion joint provided in each piece, rectangular bulb at top of web, 38mm high web, 23.8mm face width designed to lock into consecutive lengths to function structurally as a single unit with face at joint perfectly aligned and presenting a tight inconspicuous seam, punched every 600mm to receive cross tees.

4. Cross Tees:

1200mm long, same design as main tee, except designed to connect at main tee to form positive lock without play, loss or gain in grid dimensions with

SECTION 09 51 23 PAGE 3 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS DATE O7 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

offset over-ride of face over main tee face flange to provide flush tee faces at joints.

5. Edge Moulding:

Shadow moulding, of min. of 0.46mm thick steel, 22mm wide legs, capable of supporting all superimposed loads.

6. Hold-Down Clips:

Of 0.42mm thick spring steel as recommended by acoustic tile manufacturer, and special access clips where specified.

7. Tie Wire:

Min. 1.59mm soft annealed steel wire. PART III. EXECUTION A. PREPARATION 1. Co-ordinate with Section 09120 to ensure adequate and properly placed

hangers. 2. Co-operate with mechanical, electrical and other trades to accommodate

fixtures, fittings and other items in acoustic ceilings. B. INSTALLATION 1. Install acoustic ceilings using tradesmen skilled in this work, in strict

accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. 2. Neatly and symmetrically fit and run suspended ceiling to true lines, evenly

balance in all areas to pattern shown on the Drawings or as directed. 3. Centre ceiling system on room axis where shown on Drawings leaving

equal border tiles or panels not less than 1/2 a full width. 4. Recessed items shall replace or be centred on acoustical panels, except

where indicated otherwise. Consult with mechanical and electrical trades to co-ordinate the work. Provide support where required.

5. Hangers:

Turn bottom of hanger rods or straps upwards at tees and securely wrap 3 times with tie wire, or wrap hanger wire around tees and double twist tie.

6. Run main tees at right angles to length of light fixtures. 7. Space main tees 1200mm o.c. in one direction and securely tie to hangers. 8. Space cross tees 600mm o.c. at right angles to the main tees and properly

lock at intersections.

SECTION 09 51 23 PAGE 4 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS DATE O7 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 9. Level the suspended systems with a maximum tolerance of 3mm over

3600mm and 6mm over all. 10. Use the longest practical lengths of tees, furring and running channels to

minimize joints. Make joints square, tight, flush and reinforced with concealed splines. Assemble framework to form a rigid and interlocking system.

11. Design suspension system to accommodate movement caused by

thermal expansion or contraction. 12. Use edge moulding where ceiling abuts vertical surface. 13. Use corner moulding along external edges at ceiling steps. 14. Join abutting sections of main tees to unify sections structurally and

present an unnoticeable joint. 15. Intersections of all tees and edge moulding shall be flush on the exposed

surface. 16. Provide hold-down clips on lay-in panel where called for by ULC, in areas

where differential air pressure occurs, within 6m of an exterior door and in corridors.

17. Provide special access clips for perimeter tiles in each space. END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 54 26 PAGE 1 LINEAR WOOD WALL FINISH 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 .1

WORK INCLUDED

Concealed suspension system for linear wood wall panels. .2 Linear wood wall panels .3 Trim and accessories

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

.1 Acoustic Ceilings Section 09 51 23 .2 HVAC Equipment Division 23 .3 Electrical Equipment Division 26


.1 ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.

.2 ASTM C 423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method

.3 ASTMC C 635 Standard Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile Lay-In Panel Ceilings

.4 ASTM C 636 Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels

.5 ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Materials

.6 ASTM E 580 Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint

.7 AWI (QSI) Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated

.8 CISCA Ceiling Systems Handbook.

1.4 .1

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer shall be approved by wood panel manufacturer, and shall have successfully Installed wood panels similar in design and scope of work to this Project.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Conform to Section 01 33 00.

.2 Submit product data sheets for all products.

.3 Submit wood samples for colour selection. After colour is selected, submit sample finished wood panel for verification of exposed finish; size 300mm x 450mm. All panels subsequently used on the job shall match the approved sample.

.4 Submit samples of suspension system members when so requested by the Consultant.

ward99 Architects Page 1 of 4

SECTION 09 54 26 PAGE 2 LINEAR WOOD WALL FINISH 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

.5 Provide Shop Drawings for all panel and product details. Show linear wood panel layout and installation details. Coordinate wood panels and suspension system components with other construction elements that penetrate ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components, etc. Show all perimeter conditions.

1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 Transport, handle and store material in manner to prevent damage to edges and surfaces

in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Store material in warm, dry place away from water and the elements. Protect against undue loading stresses and shock.

.3 All packaged material shall be delivered in original manufacturers' wrappers and containers

with labels and seals intact.

.4 Acclimatization: Before installing wood panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content (at least 72 hours)

1.7 PROTECTION

.1 Exercise care in the execution of work under this Section to prevent damage to finished

surfaces and adjacent work, and mechanical and electrical installations.

1.8 EXTRA PANELS

.1 Provide 2 typical panels for use in maintenance work. Obtain receipt from the Owner’s representative on site.

.2 Do not use panels supplied to Owner for maintenance work to make good any damaged

or removed tile required by Contract.

1.9 SPECIAL CLEANING

.1 Clean, repair or replace damaged, discoloured or defective units or exposed suspension members to Consultant's satisfaction.

1.10 WARRANTY

.1 The Warranty stipulated in the General Conditions of the Contract shall be deemed to

include the following definition in reference to Work specified in this Section. The following will be considered defects, without being limited thereto:

.1 Failure of the suspension system to remain level. .2 Lifting or sagging of panels between supports. .3 Development of corrosion of galvanized ferrous metal. .4 Failure of hanging wire anchorage.


SECTION 09 54 26 PAGE 3 LINEAR WOOD WALL FINISH 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Linear Wood Wall Panels

.1 Wood panels shall be series 1100 Cross Piece Backer, as manufactured by 9Wood,

Inc.

.2 Wood Panels:

.1 model: 1112-8 Cross Piece B k .2 Species: Hemlock

.3 Member Size: 16mm W by 35mm high

.4 Edge Profile: Square

.5 Members: 8 Members/305mm

.6 Assembly: Cross Piece Backer

.7 Panel Sizes: Nominal 305mm wide by 2440mm long, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

.8 Fire Rating: Class 1(A) Fire Rating

.9 Finish: Clear Interior Finish

.10 Reveal Scrim: Black reveal scrim

.2 Suspension Systems

.1 Refer to details on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine substrates and structural framing to which panels attach or abut for compliance with

requirements specified in this and other sections that affect the installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of the work of this section shall be deemed as acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install linear wood panels in conformance with the layout shown on the drawings

included in the reviewed Shop Drawings. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders.

.2 Employ skilled mechanics and install work in strict accordance with the system


SECTION 09 54 26 PAGE 4 LINEAR WOOD WALL FINISH DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

manufacturer's printed directions. Installation shall be straight, level, and free from dropping, warping, soiled or damaged panels. All work shall conform with local codes and Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

.3 Installation of suspension system to conform to Section 09 51 00, as for acoustic tile

ceilings. .1 Number of members and spacing shall be as required for the wood panels;

confirm requirements with wood ceiling system manufacturer. .2 Suspend hangers from building's structural members. .3 Install, align, brace, tie-off, mount, handle interferences, and space suspension

T-grid in accordance with suspension manufacturer’s instructions. .4 Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked

with one another.

.4 Install linear wood panels in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and in compliance with all local codes. .1 Install with undamaged edges and fitted accurately to suspension system

runners and edge moldings. .2 Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,

precise fit, as required.

3.3 CLEANING

.1 Upon completion, clean and touch up finish on wood ceiling panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Clean grid of all finger marks and other defacements.

.2 Remove and replace wood components that cannot be successfully cleaned and

repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

.3 Remove all accumulated rubbish and excess materials from the site.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09 65 19 PAGE 1 RESILIENT FLOORING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward 99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. GENERAL

.1 Acceptable standards and methods specified in codes are not repeated here.

.2 Proceed with floor laying only when surfaces, materials and air temperatures have been maintained between 21 and 32 deg. C during installation and for 7 days following.

.3 Barricade areas where flooring is completed and otherwise protect newly installed flooring until adhesive has set.

.4 After floor has set, and until project completion, co-ordinate work to ensure that floors are not damaged by traffic. Ensure that flooring is not subjected to any static loading during the week following installation.

2. PRODUCTS

.1 Flooring: Provide material from same production run for one area, and from same manufacturer for entire project. Vinyl Tile: Type A, 3.2mm thick 300mm x 300mm units. Johnsonite, A Tarkett Company. Collection: The Azrock Collection, Standard Price Colours: VCT1 – V-207 Silver Mist VCT2 – V-2626 Silver Dust

.2 Base: Tightlock for Resilient Topset (Coved), TDCR-XX (Rubber) 6mm /1/4” thick wedge shaped profile with toe (coved), 114mm/4.5”: in height

.3 Filler: As recommended by adhesive and flooring manufacturer for applicable subfloor.

.4 Primer and Adhesive: As recommended by flooring manufacturer for each subfloor condition. Use clear adhesive for vinyl polymer flooring.

.5 Cleaner: Neutral chemical compound that will not damage tile or affect its colour.

.6 Edge reducer strips; one piece clear anodized aluminium at carpet. 3. EXECUTION

.1 Examine subfloor to ensure that moisture content is not in excess of maximum limit specified by adhesive manufacturer and that surfaces and environmental conditions are satisfactory. Defective work resulting from satisfactory surfaces or conditions will be considered responsibility of those performing the work of this section, and rectified by same.

.2 Clean subfloor to remove soil and deposits which would lessen adhesive bonding, and foreign materials which would telegraph through flooring. Fill joints, cracks and holes and level irregularities with filler.

.3 Prime subfloor as recommended by adhesive manufacturer and allow to dry.

.4 Apply adhesive in an even coat cover entire subfloor area with notched trowels, and lay tile before it sets; do not lay flooring over hardened adhesive.

.5 Lay flooring as specified by manufacturer with joints on room axis unless indicated otherwise on drawings, and with no tiles of less than half size except where minor room irregularities make it impossible. Lay grain in one direction.

.6 Butt joints closely and cut fit flooring around door frames, openings in floor and at heavy equipment bases.

.7 Install bases in lengths as long as possible, not in runs made up of short lengths. Cut and mitre internal corners. Accurately scribe around door frames, openings and similar wall breaks. In areas where bases are indicated, install them also on columns and fitments within the area.

.8 Install bevelled reducer strips at junctions and different thickness floorings and at junctions of resilient flooring with Quarry Tile:

.9 Clean off excess adhesive before it sets.

.10 Clean flooring no sooner than 48 hours following installation. END OF SECTION 09650

SECTION 09 68 16 PAGE 1 CARPET DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included: a. Carpeting to all spaces called for on the Room Finish Schedule; 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Removal of existing carpet and tile, Section 02 41 13, Selective Demolition. Installer to coordinate with this Section. Installer may choose to provide a

skim coat to make the floor level and smooth in preparation for the installation of the new carpet.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Qualifications of Subcontractor:

Be approved by the carpet manufacturer for this work. 1.3.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: a. CGSB 4-GP-129, Carpets, Commercial; b. CGSB 4-GP-156, Direct Glue Down Carpet, Guide to Selection and

Installation; 1.3.3 Allowable Tolerances:

Yarn face weight shall be within +5% of face weight specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Samples: a. Prior to ordering carpet, submit samples of carpet and accessories to the

Consultant for approval, minimum 500mm x 600mm for each type and colour of carpet to be used;

1.4.2 Lettering Approval: Submit letter from carpet manufacturer stating his

approval of Subcontractor for this work. 1.4.3 Maintenance Materials:

Deliver and store where directed; a. 1.5% extra stock of carpet proportioned to, and of, colours and textures

installed;

SECTION 09 68 16 PAGE 2 CARPET DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 Delivery:

Deliver carpet to Site clearly tagged to show installation location suited for best colour matching.

1.5.2 Storage:

Store all items in a heated area maintained at minimum temperature of 10oC, or at such temperature as recommended by the product manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY:

Submit a warranty for the Work of this section for five (5) years beyond the expiration of the warranty period specified in the General Conditions of the Contract.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS 1.7.1 Protection:

Restrict traffic by other Sections during installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL: Provide carpet in colour and pattern selected: 2.1.1 Carpet 1: a. Location: all areas

Style: InterfaceFlor, Walk the Plank Size: 25cm x 100cm Backing System: GlasBac Tile Yarn System: 100% Recycled Content, Type 6 Nylon Yarn Manufacturer: Aquafil Colour System: 100% Solution Dye Construction: Tufted Sheared Lifetime Antimicrobial: Intersept Soil/Stain Protection: Proteckt2 Pile Thickness: 0.157 in., 4.0mm Pile Density: 5,962 Total Recycled Content: 62% Cri Green Label Plus: GLPo820

Installation: Ashlar 2.1.3 Colour: a. 8762 Cyprus. b. Provide uniform colour throughout full order.

SECTION 09 68 16 PAGE 3 CARPET DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 2.1.4 Base for Carpet: Rubber Manufacturer: Johnsonite, A Tarkett Company Tightlock for Carpet (Straight), TDC-XX (Rubber) 6mm /1/4” thick wedge shaped profile, 114mm/4.5”: in height Colour: Burnt Umber B 2.1.5 Installation System: InterfaceFlor TacTile: www.interfaceflor.com.au 2.1.6 Thresholds:

Schluter RENO-RAMP/K or Aluminum, screw-down type as recommended by carpet manufacturer, colours selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range.

At carpet and VCT. At carpet and porcelain tile. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.1.1 Examine work of other Sections affecting work of this Section, and report

any defects or discrepancies to the Consultant. 3.1.2 Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of

substrates as satisfactory. 3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Floor shall be clean and free of cracks and protrusions. 3.2.2 Fill gaps or cracks more than 2mm wide and minor depressions with latex

compound. Grind protrusions smooth. 3.2.3 Vacuum clean floors prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION: TACTILE METHOD 3.3.1 Refer to Drawings and Room Finish Schedule for areas where carpet is to

be installed. 3.3.2 Install work of this Section after all Sections have completed their work

and just prior to completion of the project, unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant.

3.3.3 TacTile Installation: Install in accordance with instructions from

InterfaceFLOR. Refer to 2.1.5. .1 Install 75mm x 75mm (3”x3”) stickers on each carpet plank. One sticker

at each corner and 4 in the centre of each carpet plank. 3.3.4 Roll carpet with 56.70 kg roller to ensure complete contact of the adhesive

stickers with the substrate.

SECTION 09 68 16 PAGE 4 CARPET DATE 07 NOV 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 3.3.5 Pile in any one area shall be in the same direction. 3.3.6 Cut carpet to exact fit, completely covering all designated areas. 3.3.7 Neatly cut carpet for floor outlets, trench ducts and similar items. 3.3.8 Protect exposed edges of carpet with edging binder bars. 3.3.9 Position edges of carpet in door openings under door in its closed position. 3.5 ADJUST AND CLEAN 3.5.1 Cleaning: a. Immediately following installation, inspection and approval of work,

vacuum-clean carpet and remove debris. 3.3.3 Protection of Completed Work:

a. Cover the entire carpeted area with plastic covering held in place by

masking tape. b. Use heavy gauge 0.152mm plastic covering when the uncompleted

Sections activity is extensive and large quantities of furniture, equipment and partitions are being moved. Use 6mm thick plywood on circulation paths of carpets where furniture and office equipment are being moved;

c. Do not remove carpet protection until directed by the Consultant; d. Work shall be handed over to the Owner free of blemishes and in perfect

condition.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 91 23 PAGE 1 INTERIOR PAINTING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED: .1 This section of work shall include all labour, materials, tools, scaffolds and other

equipment, services and supervision required to cover with paint the surfaces of the building or structure, the building services and accessories not otherwise protected or covered, as shown on the "Finish Schedule", to the full intent of the drawings and specifications. Paint parking garage surfaces to colours and extent called for in Toronto By-law 73-68 amended by By-law 294-88.

.2 Refer to drawings and schedules for type, location and extent of finishes required,

and include all field painting necessary to complete work shown, scheduled or specified, including backpriming.

.3 Surface preparation to receive painting and finishing is not included under this

section of work, except for specific pretreatments as follows or specified in the Canadian Painting Contractors Architectural Painting Specification Manual (Association Manual) and the Painting & Finishing Schedule.

Woodwork and Millwork: Clean and remove all foreign matter prior to prime coat application and sealing of knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections with sealer. Puttying of nail holes, minimal cracks after prime has dried and sanding between prime and following coats except final coat. Backpriming to interior and exterior woodwork.

Concrete Floors: Etching of floors before paint application. (if Applicable)

Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metal: (Steel Supplier/Erector)

Galvanized Steel and Iron: Washing (Etching if necessary)

Metal Doors and Frames, Windows and Frames: (Fabricator/Supplier)

Plaster: Minimal cracks, holes and imperfections shall be filled with patching plaster and smoothed off to match adjoining surfaces by the Plastering Contractor after the prime coat has been applied. Washing and neutralizing high alkali surfaces where they occur. Moisture testing.

Masonry, Concrete, Stucco and Cement Render: Surfaces which are very smooth or have traces of form oil or parting compounds shall be treated with acid-detergent treatment and washed with water. Powder, chalking, oxidizing to be removed.

Drywall: Surfaces shall be in a ready condition to paint. Any imperfection showing after application of the prime coat shall be corrected by the Drywall Contractor.

SECTION 09 91 23 PAGE 2 INTERIOR PAINTING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1.01.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: .1 Preparation of surfaces to receive finish under this section of work, except as

specifically called for in Painting and Finishing Schedule. .2 Shop painting of Structural, Miscellaneous and Ornamental Metal. .3 Painting and finishing of elevator equipment. .4 Shop coating of metal doors, windows and frames and steel fittings. .5 Copper, aluminum, stainless steel, bronze, brass or nickel surfaces. .6 Glazed, rubber asphalt, vinyl or acoustical tile. .7 Complete factory applied paints and finish systems. .8 Removal of shop coatings - Removal, cleaning surfaces and reapplying damaged

and/or nonconforming shop coats of paint, other than minimal spot touch-up. .9 Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing Systems: Painting and finishing of these

sections of work where they are included under the Painting and Finishing Schedule only.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS:

.1 Qualification of Manufacturer: The paint products of the Paint Manufacturer shall be as listed In the Association Manual, latest edition, under "Paint Product Recommendation" section, or approved equivalent.

.2 Qualifications of Applicators:

This contractor shall have a minimum of ten (1 0) years proven satisfactory experience. This contractor shall maintain a qualified crew of painters throughout duration of the work who shall be qualified to fully satisfy the requirements of this specification.

1.05 SUBMITTALS: .1 Approvals:

Submit a written request to the Architect for approval of equivalent products , listing each of the materials proposed, surfaces to be covered. State clearly manufacturer's name and brand name of material.

.2 Samples & Colours:

Paint colours shall be as selected by Architect.

Before any work is commenced, the Architect will furnish a minimum of two sets of colour cards and a schedule showing where the various colours and finishes shall be applied. Prepare with type of paint and application specified, 8 1/2" x 1 1 " samples at the

SECTION 09 91 23 PAGE 3 INTERIOR PAINTING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

job as required until colours and textures are satisfactory and approved. .3 General Colour Requirements:

Refer to the Finish Schedule for type and extent of finishes and as herein indicated.

1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING: I Delivery of Materials:

Paint materials shall be delivered to the job site in sealed original labelled containers bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, colour designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing.

.2 Storage of Materials:

This Subcontractor shall be provided with adequate storage facilities. Paint materials shall be stored at a minimum ambient temperature of 7 degrees C. in a well ventilated and heated single designated area.

.3 Fire Hazard & Safety:

Take all necessary precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.

.4 Toxic Materials:

Where toxic materials, and both toxic and explosive solvents are used, appropriate precautions and no smoking must be taken as a regular procedure.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: 1 Temperature and Humidity:

Temperatures, humidity, and moisture content of the surfaces shall conform to the following:

Temperatures - No painting shall be performed when temperatures on the surfaces, or the air in the vicinity of the painting work are below 5 degrees C. The minimum temperatures allowed for Latex paints shall be 7 degrees C. (interior work) and 10 degrees C. (exterior work) UNLESS specifically approved by the specifying body

Relative Humidity - Shall not be higher than 85%.

Moisture of Surfaces - Tests shall be by electronic Moisture Meter.

Plaster and Wallboard - Maximum moisture content 12%. Masonry Concrete/Concrete Block - Maximum moisture content 12%.

Masonry surfaces may be tested for alkalinity.

Note: Masonry and Concrete Blocks must be installed at least 28 days prior to painting and must be visually dry on both sides before painting commences. This is not to be construed as Including a "wetting down" process for Latex.


Wood - Maximum moisture content 15%.

Concrete Floors - Shall be tested for moisture by a simple "cover patch test". .2 Lighting:

Painting and decorating work shall not proceed unless a minimum of 15 candle power/sq.ft. lighting is provided on the surfaces to be painted. Adequate lighting facilities shall be provided by the General Contractor.

.3 Ventilation:

All areas where painting and decorating work is proceeding require adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 7 degrees C. for 24 hours before and after paint application. Required heat and ventilation shall be provided for the Painting Subcontractor.

1.09 PROTECTION: .1 General:

Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage and make good any damage caused by failure to provide suitable protection, but will not be responsible for any damage caused by others.

.2 Drop Cloths:

Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or dropping from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within the storage and preparation area.

.3 Removal of Flammable Rubbish:

Cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal containers and removed daily from the site.

.4 Removal of hardware:

Remove all electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings, prior to painting operations. These items shall be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. No solvent shall be used to clean hardware that will remove the permanent lacquer finish on some of these items.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: .1 Paint, varnish, stain, enamel, lacquer, and fillers shall be of a type and brand

herein specified and listed under "Paint Product Recommendations" as covered in the Association Manual, latest edition, for specific purposes.

Paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, etc., and any of the above materials not specifically mentioned herein but required for first class work with the finish specified shall be the highest quality product of an approved manufacturer. All coating material shall be compatible.

2.02 MIXING:


I Paints shall be ready-mixed unless otherwise specified, except that any coating in paste or powder form, or to be field-catalysed shall be field-mixed in accordance with the directions of its manufacturer. Pigments shall be fully ground and shall maintain a soft paste consistency in the vehicle during storage that can and shall be dispersed readily and uniformly by paddle to a complete homogeneous mixture.

.2 The paint shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure

free of sags, etc. to yield the desired finish specified. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL: .1 Factory Tests: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES:

1 Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine all surfaces scheduled to be painted.

Report in writing to the Contractor and the Architect any condition adversely affecting this work.

No painting work shall proceed until all such defects have been corrected and surfaces are acceptable to the Painting Sub Contractor.

.2 Commencement of work shall not be held to imply acceptance of surfaces except

as qualified herein.

On drywall, plaster, structural steel and miscellaneous metal surfaces, such surfaces shall not be the responsibility of the Painting Subcontractor.

This Subcontractor shall not be responsible for the condition of the substrate, or for correcting defects and deficiencies in the substrate which may adversely affect the painting work except minimal work normally performed by this trade Subcontractor.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: Refer to the Association Manual for surface preparations not included in the following: .I Mildew Removal:

Scrub with solution of T.S.P and bleach, rinse with clear water and allow surface to dry completely

.2 Aluminum (excluding anodized aluminum):

Remove surface contamination by steam, high pressure water or xylene solvent washing. Apply etching type primer (or acid etching) then paint immediately, as per Manufacturers' Direction.

.3 Asbestos Cement (Board, Siding, Piping, Shingles, etc.):


Remove dirt, powdery residue and other foreign matter, then paint both sides of board as .4 Asphalt, Creosote, Tar & Bituminous Surfaces (excluding road marking):

Remove dirt, oil, grease, sand if necessary for adhesion key. Apply Latex based sealer or primer.

.5 Canvas & Cotton Insulated Coverings:

Remove dirt, grease and oil, test for moisture content of 12% or less. .6 Concrete Floors (New):

Remove contamination, acid etch and rinse with clear water (if required) and assure acid-alkali balance, let dry.

.7 Copper (to be painted):

Prepare as for Aluminum (above) including Vinyl Etch Primer. .8 Copper (to be oxidized):

Remove contamination, apply oxidizing solution of copper acetate and ammonium chloride in acetic acid, and rub on repeatedly for correct effect. Finally, rinse well with clear water and let dry.

.9 Drywall:

Remove contamination, prime surface to show defects if any (defects to be repaired by others, not painters responsibility). After defects remedied carry on with paint coatings.

.10 Galvanized Steel:

Remove surface contamination, wash metal with xylene solvent and apply coat of an approved etching type primer.

.11 Zinc Coated Steel:

Remove surface contamination and prepare surface to material manufacturer's instructions for priming.

.12 Masonry Surfaces (Brick, Concrete & Concrete Block, Stucco, Cement Render, etc.):

Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, powder and other foreign matter. Oil and grease to be removed by solution containing T.S.P, then rinse and let dry. This is NOT to be construed to include cleaning, chipping or grinding of protrusions or filling of "honeycomb" holes, etc.

Concrete stains caused by weathering of corroding metals shall be removed with solution of sodium metasilicate after being thoroughly wetted with water. Let dry. This shall be corrected at no cost to the painting Subcontractor

.13 Plaster:

Hairline cracks, small holes and imperfections shall be corrected by the Plastering Contractor. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces where they occur

.14 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel (Factory Primed):

Specify individual items to be painted. Surfaces shall be in a proper condition to receive paint finish with grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust removed by others. Where steel and iron have a heavy coating of scale, it shall be removed by wire brushing, sandblasting,


etc., as necessary by others. All steel surfaces must be satisfactory before paint finishing. Preparatory work shall be the responsibility of the steel supplier/erector.

.15 Structural Steel: NOTE: See C.P.C.A. Manual, Chapter 3, for conditions that may apply .16 Wood & Plywood & Millwork:

All wood surfaces shall be clean and dry with a moisture reading of less than 15%. Remove all foreign matter prior to prime coat; knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections shall be spot coated with sealer. Fill all nail holes and fine cracks after primer has dried and sanded between coats.

3.03 APPLICATION: .1 General:

Method of paint application shall be generally by the accepted trade method.

Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied in strict accordance to recommendations.

Apply each coat at the proper consistency.

Each coat of paint, shall be slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.

Sand lightly between coats to achieve an anchor for the required finish.

Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry.

Each coat of finish should be dry and hard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise. (See polyurethane coatings).

Tint filler to match wood when clear finishes are specified; work filler well into the grain and before it has set wipe the excess from the surface.

On exterior work do not paint during temperatures under 5 degrees C. or immediately following rain, frost or dew; on interiors do not paint during temperatures under 5 degrees C. or on surfaces where condensation has formed or is likely to form (unless specially formulated paints are used). The minimum temperatures allowed for Latex paints shall be 7 degrees C. (interior work) and 1 0 degrees C. (exterior work) UNLESS specifically approved by the specifying body

.2 Priming and Backpriming:

Exterior woodwork which is to receive a paint finish shall be back-primed upon arrival at the job site with exterior primer paint, stain or varnish, depending on the finish.

Interior woodwork which is to receive a paint or enamel finish shall be backprimed upon arrival at the job site with enamel undercoating paint.

Stain, or gloss varnish reduce as per manufacturers directions.

Top and bottom edges of wood and metal doors shall be primed with undercoating, stain


or varnish, depending on the finish specified. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: .1 Alkali Content Tests:

Use pink Iitmus paper for testing surfaces for alkalinity. Where extreme alkali conditions occur surfaces are to be neutralized by washing. Wash shall consist of a 4% solution of Zinc Sulphate. (NOT ON SURFACES THAT ARE TO RECEIVE LATEX PAINTS).

.2 Alkali content tests, and such other tests as shall be necessary, (eg. moisture content,

lighting, 3.05 CLEANING: .1 Promptly as the work proceeds and on completion of the work, remove all paint where

spilled, splashed or spattered; during the progress of the work keep the premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris; at the conclusion of the work leave the premises neat and clean to the satisfaction of the Paint Inspector, Architect and/or Owner

3.06 PAINTING & FINISHING SCHEDULE The following titles and code numbers refer to the Canadian Painting Contractors Architectural [CPCA) Painting Specification Manual, latest edition, unless otherwise Indicated for type of coating, grade, named products and their manufacturers. .1 EXTERIOR PAINTING & FINISHING SCHEDULE - Reference CPCA - Chapter 4A 1. WOODWORK

Custom Grade

EX. 1 -C SEMI TRANSPARENT STAIN FINISH EX. Refer to Colour Schedule

2. CONCRETE,

Custom Grade

EX.6-A LATEX FINISH 4. GALVANIZED METAL

Do not paint. .2 INTERIOR PAINTING & FINISHING SCHEDULE - Reference CPCA - Chapter 4B

SECTION 09 91 23 PAGE 9 INTERIOR PAINTING DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA 1. WOOD (Baseboards, doors, door frames, plywood,

Custom Grade

IN. 1 -A ALKYD FINISH (GLOSS AS SPECIFIED) 2. WOOD (Natural Finish)

Custom Grade

IN. 1D SEMI-TRANSPARENT STAIN, POLYURETHANE FINISH 3. PLASTER - DRYWALL

Custom Grade

IN. 4-B LATEX FINISH (FLAT)

Refer to Colour Schedule 4. PLASTER - DRYWALL

Custom Grade

IN. 4-a ALKYDFINISH (EGGSHELL)

Refer to Colour Schedule 5. CANVAS AND COTTON INSULATION COVERINGS (Pipes, ductwork, boilers etc.)

Custom Grade

IN. 5-A ALKYD FINISH

6. CONCRETE, CONCRETE BLOCK, MASONRY, STUCCO AND STONE

Custom Grade

IN. 7-B ALKYD FINISH (SEMI-GLOSS) 7. CONCRETE BLOCKS AND CONCRETE BRICK

Custom Grade

IN, 8-B ALKYD FINISH (SEMI-GLOSS) 8. CONCRETE FLOORS

Custom Grade


IN. 9-B ALKYD FINISH 9. STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL

Custom Grade

IN. 12-A ALKYD FINISH (SEMI-GLOSS) 10. GALVANIZED METAL ZINC COATED STEEL

Custom Grade

13-A ALKYD FINISH (SEMI-GLOSS) 11. ALUMINUM

Custom Grade

IN. 15-A ALKYD FINISH (SEMI-GLOSS)

END OF SECTION

09 95 00 ELT EasyGreen® Specification Vertical Living Wall System

SPECIFICATION ELT EasyGreen® - Living Wall System

This specification describes the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System designed to provide a vegetative cover on vertical surfaces. This specification is intended to be included in Section 09950 – Wall Covering.

SECTION 09950 – WALL COVERING

PART I – GENERAL:

1. RELATED SECTIONS

1.1. Section [02810] – [Irrigation Systems] 1.2. Section [07620] – [Sheet Metal Flashing]

2. INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR

2.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System must be installed by ELT Certified Contractor to

qualify for ELT System Warranties.

3. APPROVALS

3.1. Permits if required are the responsibility of the client. 3.2. Architectural and engineering evaluations need to be obtained and provided to the

client and the contractor prior to installation to ensure compliance with any and all building codes the project will be subject to.

4. PLANS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

4.1. The client must provide scale drawings for quotation and design purposes. 4.2. If acceptable scale drawings are not available, ELT or approved alternate will be required

to produce said drawings at the client’s expense. 4.3. Shop drawings to client showing all material terminations, transitions and penetrations

may be provided by an ELT Certified Contractor upon request.

5. ACCESSORIES

5.1. All other living wall components or accessories must be approved or provided by ELT to ensure viability and performance of the system as per the specifications.

6. LEAD TIME

6.1. .Lead times depend on the availability of the specified plant list. Check with ELT Certified

Contractors to determine time lines.

7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

7.1. A contract should be in place with an ELT Certified Contractor to guarantee delivery times.

7.2. A one year maintenance contract should be included as part of the contract.

1 ELT Canada Limited Edition: 08202011


PART II – WARRANTIES AND MAINTENANCE:

1. WARRANTY ON WORKMANSHIP

1.1. ELT Certified Contractors offer a 5 (five) year workmanship warranty at no additional charge.

2. WARRANTY ON COMPONENTS

2.1. ELT warranties on supplied products that make up the ELT systems are published in the

most current ELT Warranty Program. 2.2. Term of warranties can be found on the published data sheet for the specific product.

3. 1 YEAR WARRANTY ON VEGETATION

3.1. Warranties on vegetation are provided to the client by the certified ELT contractor. A

1year warranty from the date of project completion is standard and is subject to the terms, conditions and limitations contained herein.

3.2. An ELT Certified Contractor must warrant the vegetation installed on the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall to be of good quality and grown to meet ELT's published physical properties and quality control standards. Based on the information collected in the warranty application, the vegetation is to be suitable for growth in the installed conditions.

3.3. The recommended one (1) year vegetation warranty is subject to the minimum requirements and terms and conditions in the current ELT Warranty Program year.

3.4. ELT Living Wall vegetation warranties are supported by the ELT Certified Contractors Network. ELT Certified Contractors are to be engaged in the installation and maintenance programs of ELT projects to ensure quality control measures are adequate.

4. ELT EXTENDED SYSTEM WARRANTY

4.1. An extended system warranty can be purchased for the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall

System subject to ELT Warranty minimum requirements. 4.2. ELT extended system warranties are supported by the ELT Certified Contractors Network.

ELT Certified Contractors are to be engaged in the installation and maintenance programs for warranty approval.

4.3. ELT may deny warranty approval if it is deemed the client has not met the minimum requirements for ELT EasyGreen® system warranties.

4.4. Request information for the ELT EasyGreen® Warranty Program from ELT or an ELT Certified Contractor to ensure your living wall will qualify.

5. MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

5.1. A maintenance program from an ELT Certified Contractor is required to support all offered

Warranties. Maintenance performed by non-certified contractor will void ELT Warranties. 5.2. A maintenance contract must be in effect detailing schedules and tasks to be

performed. 5.3. Controllers and mechanical equipment used in the maintenance of the wall must be in

an area accessible to maintenance personnel. This provision should be included in the design of the living wall project.

5.4. Other provisions to be considered: • Access to the wall itself for plant or panel replacement • Application equipment for nutritional requirements and pest management • Time of day that maintenance is to be performed and possible interference with work

schedules etc.



PART III – SYSTEM:

1. DESCRIPTION

1.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System is made up of modular panels 30 cm (12 inches) by

30 cm (12 inches) including overlap areas or 30 cm (12 inches) by 30 cm (12 inches) of vegetation area that are delivered as a pre-assembled product to the site for installation. The plants may be pre-grown into the modules. The ability to customize and accessorize the system with various options is possible, provided the design has been approved by ELT or Certified Contractor.

1.2. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall panels need to be mounted on a stand alone or stand off structure or can be mounted directly to existing walls or vertical barriers. The mounting of the panels require either ELT brackets or mounting strips to be affixed to the supporting structure securely in order for the panels to mount properly.

2. REQUIRED COMPONENTS

2.1. ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Panels

2.1.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Panel must be provided by ELT and meet or exceed the following: • Made of high density polyethylene (HDPE) • Class “B” fire rating • UV resistant • Temperature range -40°C (-40°F) to 80º C (176°F).

2.1.2. There are a total of 10 individual cells in each living wall panel. Each cell is set on a 30 degree angle and has a depth of 18 centimetres from the front of the panel to the back. Each cell also has notches in the bottom surface of the cell to allow for drainage and aeration. The notches do not extend completely to the back of the cell; this provides a water retention zone in each cell reducing the irrigation requirements.

2.1.3. There is a collection chamber at the top of each panel to collect water from the irrigation emitter line and direct it into each of the panel cells. There is a drip edge at the bottom of each panel to allow for excess water to drain away. The drip edge of each panel nests over top of the collection chamber of the lower panel and the water that is drained from the top panel is then collected and used by the lower panel. It is important to check that the spacing between the drip edge of the top panel and the collection chamber of the lower panel is not more than 4 millimetres. If this distance is greater then water from above panel may be able to find a path to the back of the panels and drip down behind the panel rather than continue on a course through the growth medium profile of each panel.



2.1.4. There are four (4) fastener channels down each side of the living wall panel to provide an access point for fasteners to be used in securing the living wall panel to mounting hardware.

2.1.5. Each panel has a horizontal support channel formed into the back to carry and disperse the weight evenly across the panel. This channel is configured with a 30 degree angle, essentially using gravity for greater stability once mounted.

2.1.6. There are two tubes or cylendrical holes formed into the centre of the panel as another meanes of affixing the panels to a wall. This allows the panels to be used on curved wall applications where the mounting strip fastening detail would not work. These are required for use with the vertical support stanchions to be used in regions prone to high wind or earthquake forces.

2.2. ELT EasyGreen® Mounting Hardware

2.2.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System has several options for mounting hardware

depending on the application. All brackets used must be manufactured or approved by ELT for use with the ELT EasyGreen® System. Any mounting system or product other than those included in this specification require approval from ELT as well Engineer approved drawings. Mounting hardware is listed below along with the acceptable applications for each.

2.2.2. The Mounting strip method of affixing the panels to a wall is subject to approval by

the client. This method requires the mounting strips to be fastend to the wall. The wall must be able to carry the load of the living wall panels. (See illustration a.)

2.2.3. The vertical stanchion mounting system will carry four (4) panel per stanchion and is

used to mitigate the risk of detachment associated with certain applications or regions due to either design or environmental factors.

2.3. ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Irrigation System

2.3.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System comes complete with a standard irrigation system fully integrated within the panels.

2.3.2. An irrigation water source must be provided in the area of the living wall with a shut- off valve installed by others.

2.3.3. Grey water or rainwater irrigation water is encouraged for use with the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System subject to compliance with any and all codes; compliance with any codes is the responsibility of the client.

2.3.4. The use of grey water may require specialized irrigation equipment. Check with ELT for specifications regarding grey water.

2.3.5. Water quantity and quality must be approved by ELT prior to installation. 2.3.6. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall irrigation system is completely integrated with the

living wall panels. An 8 millimetre emitter line is placed and run continuously in the collection chamber of each living wall panel. The collection chamber protects the emitter line from being pinched as well as secures it in place. The panels are able to distribute the water that moves from the collection chamber into the cells evenly throughout the panel. The emitter spacing is 9 centimetres apart providing 2 (two) per panel. Each emitter has an output of 30 l/h at 30 psi (an operating range of 0.7 to 2.7 bars or 10 to 40 psi is acceptable).

2.3.7. A static loop system must be used in applications where the irrigation emitter lines

have to deliver water in a run greater than 20 meters. The emitter lines have a maximum operating run length of 30 meters. A static loop equalizes the pressure in the emitter lines requiring fewer zones to irrigate the wall.



3. ELT EasyGreen® Fertilizer Applicator

3.1. An injection applicator is required to be installed for nutrient management as well as integrated pest control. The injection applicator injects nutrients and soil amendments into the irrigation feeder lines in a controlled manner at the rates specified by ELT.

4. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED COMPONENTS

4.1. ELT Growth Medium

4.1.1. Growth mediums must be approved or provided by ELT to ensure viability and

performance of the system. Use of growth mediums not approved by ELT will void ELT Living Wall System Warranties.

4.1.2. Standard growth mediums consist of both organic and inorganic components formulated to culture micro-organisms beneficial to plant performance while maintaining growth medium structure and stability.

4.1.3. ELT EasyGreen® Growth Mediums are formulated to maximize longevity, promote drainage and aeration of growth medium. Check with ELT for growth medium percolation rates and performance specifications.

4.1.4. Growth medium components may be sourced locally if the components available are able to meet both the ELT performance requirements and the ELT sustainability standards.

4.2. ELT Approved Vegetation

4.2.1. The plant list and design must be approved by ELT to ensure viability and

performance of the system. 4.2.2. Vegetation specifications depend on the following variables:

• Interior versus Exterior • Climatic zones • Micro Climates that exist on the project • Loading and structural issues • Water availability • Design considerations • Maintenance budget of the client

4.2.3. Plant replacement requirements will vary depending on the plants specified as well as the climatic conditions of the project. Plant replacements deemed to be part of the natural processes of the vegetation specified are to be included in the maintenance contract and schedules provided by ELT Certified Contractors. Plant replacement targets are set and approved by ELT when the project information sheet is submitted. Replacement needs that fall within these targets are part of the maintenance contract for the project. Replacement needs that are in excess of these targets would be cause for a claim by the client.

4.2.4 Planted indoor media with a mix of indoor tropical plants.

4.3. Lighting

4.3.1. Most indoor living walls (with tropical plants) need plenty of natural light to perform

optimally. Living walls under a skylight, near a large window may have adequate lighting. A test using a light meter is required by ELT to quantify the lighting levels existing in the proposed location for the living wall.

4.3.2. ELT will require artificial lighting for indoor living walls with inadequate natural light for warranty approval.

4.3.3. Ambient and artificial light can be measured with a light meter (Luxmeter). A minimum rating of 1800 lux will work in most applications that are using tropical plants. As an example the use of a 600 watt metal halide HID light installed in a spacing interval of 3 linear metres apart and 3 meters distance between the vegetation and the lights, would in most cases achieve a rating greater than 1800



lux. Five hours of exposure to grow lights every day is sufficient to keep most tropical plants healthy. Start by getting plants used to the light by exposing them one hour a day for the first week before their normal lighting schedule.

4.3.4. Building codes may require grow lights to be enclosed in a reflector casing with a glass window to protect the bulb. This will eliminate the risk of the light bulb breaking or exploding as a result of direct contact with hard objects or other substances like water that may have the same damaging result due to thermal shock. Installation of artificial lights is subject to the local building codes and compliance with these codes is the responsibility of the client.

4.3.5. Grow lights can emit a lot of heat and light. The excess heat or light generated may have an effect on the indoor environment and therefore it is important to manage lighting requirements in a manner that meets the needs of the vegetation while maintaining a comfortable indoor environment. Grow lights are to be controlled with an automatic timer. This makes it possible to provide the additional lighting at times of the day where there are not people present to be affected by any excess heat or light generated.

4.3.6. Exterior living walls generally have sufficient access to natural light but not always. Identify the amount of direct sunlight received by the wall each day to determine an acceptable plant list.

5. OPTIONAL COMPONENTS

5.1. ELT EasyGreen® Edging Details

5.1.1. The panels may be edged with wood, metal, plastic or other materials to match the

proposed or existing façade of the building. 5.1.2. All edging must be approved by ELT for use with the ELT EasyGreen® system. 5.1.3. Vegetated corner panels are available as a custom fabricated product to provide a

vegetated corner. The panel provides for a completely vegetated corner that eliminates the need for flashing covering other wise required to cover exposed sides of the living wall panels.

5.2. ELT EasyGreen® Irrigation Diversion Channels

5.2.1. Irrigation diversion channel diverts any water that may drip from panels that are

mounted over doorways, windows or other features of the wall that must be protected from exposure to water. The diversion channel snaps on to the last cell of the living wall panel. The offset double ‘J’ formation keeps the channel in place as well as collects and diverts the water received from the drip edge of the living wall panel.

5.2.2. Diversion channels come in 1.25 metre lengths and can be joined to extend to any length required. This is an overlap joint and the overlap must be no less than 15 cm. Two beads of Firestone Water Block is to be applied around the exterior of the diversion channel that will be inserted into the adjacent diversion channel. It is important to note that the diversion channel moving the water to the next channel is the male fitting and the next channel that is taking the flow of the water is to be the female fitting to ensure water is shedding past the connections.

5.2.3. Stoppers are available to provide a termination at the end of the diversion channels if required. They are a rubber block that is placed inside the end of the diversion channel. A bead of Water Block mastic is to be applied before inserting the Water Diversion Channel Stopper into the diversion channel.

5.3. ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Growth Medium Stabilizers

5.3.1.1. Growth Medium Stabilizers are sometimes required in applications where the

vegetation specified and/or the growth medium specified is prone to erosion



or becomes unstable due to the structure of the medium. They may also be required in instances where the plants were not transplanted and grown into the panels long enough for proper establishment prior to installation.

5.3.1.2. The Stabilizer is a series of vertical aluminum rods designed to be pressed into the notches located on the lower shelf of each cell.

5.3.1.3. Coconut coir should be used inconjunction with the stabilizers to provide a completely protected growth medium fascia that still provided the benefits of an open fascia where aeration can still occur in the growth medium and the vegetation can spread, root and propagate as it would in a natural environment.

5.3.1.4. The Stabilizer rods can be easily removed for general maintenace purposes.

5.4. ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Panel Extension

5.4.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Extensions may be needed where the vegetation specification requires deeper depths of growth medium.

5.4.2. The extension mounts to the panel in the same manner as the growth medium stabilizers. It also has the same angled fin feature as the stabilizers allowing it to provide this functionality as well.

5.4.3. Notched features on the front of the fins allow for roots and water to move from cell to cell and panel to panel.

PART IV – EXECUTION:

1. DELIVERY

1.1. Co-ordination of delivery timelines are the responsibility of the contractor installing the

system; 2 (two) weeks advance notice to the Grower is necessary to ensure there are no delays.

1.2. The pre-grown panels will be loaded on carts and/or skids and delivered to site on the date of installation, unless otherwise specified by the contractor.

2. STORAGE

2.1. Vegetation materials must be stored in a secure, cool, shady environment out of direct

sunlight prior to installation. Vegetation must be protected from rapid temperature changes of more than 15°C (59°F)/hour. All vegetation is to be installed within 2 (two) days of being delivered. If this is not possible contact ELT for further care instructions.

2.2. All other materials (non-living) should be stored in a dry location out of direct sunlight with original packaging and documentation left intact prior to installation.

3. INSTALLATION

3.1. The wall surface must be free and clear of any obstructions prior to the installation of the

living wall brackets or support structure. 3.2. Waterproofing or vapour barriers that may have been specified should be applied or

installed prior to any mounting brackets or stand off structure being installed. 3.3. The brackets or support structure must be mounted to the wall using appropriate fasteners

to support the load of the living wall when fully saturated. All brackets or structures must be perfectly level to ensure even water distribution through out the panels.

3.4. Installations should begin from the bottom of the wall and work across and then upward. 3.5. The LW panels can then be picked up and hung from the levelled brackets or support

structure. 3.6. Irrigation emitter lines should be installed along the collection chamber of each panel

before the above row of panels is installed. 3.7. The panels must overlap by the Z shaped portion on the top and bottom of each panel,

making sure to leave a 6 millimetres (¼ inches) gap for expansion.



3.8. Secondary fasteners should be installed in the holes provided; 2 (two) per panel are required as panels are hung.

3.9. The fasteners must be such that they can be removed if access to the surface behind the system becomes necessary.

3.10. .All edging and accessories should be installed as per the most recent plan drawings. Report any discrepancies to ELT and/or designer immediately upon discovery.

3.11. Irrigation source lines are to be installed around the perimeter and inbetween zone perimeters for the emitter lines to be connected to.

3.12. Irrigation controllers, check valves, pressure reducers and evacuation ports should be installed once main lines and emitter lines are connected on the wall.

3.13. An irrigation test must be performed after installation to check that the system is functioning properly.

For more information on the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System you may contact the ELT Technical Support Department.

ELT Canada Limited. (ELT) 245 King George Rd., Suite 320 Brantford Ontario Canada N3R 7N7 p: 1.866.306.7773 · f: 519.458.8208 www.elteasygreen.com [email protected]


http://www.elteasygreen.com/



PART V - DETAILS


TECHNICAL INFORMATION SHEET

ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Panel

DESCRIPTION: The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall panel is a modular living wall panel that can be either pre- grown or planted in place. The panel has a rectangular shape consisting of a total of 10 individual cells. Each cell is independently designed to contain enough space to add growing medium and to sustain water supply to the roots, maintaining a healthy and growing plant.

FUNCTION:

The modular ELT Living Wall Panel provides the following functions needed for a successful living wall system: drainage, erosion control, water retention, carry growth medium and vegetation, protection for the waterproof membrane, root anchoring for vegetation and irrigation/water distribution.

COMPONENTS:

The ELT Living Wall Panel is a combination of multiple components:

• High density polyethylene (HPDE) • 10 individual cells • Collection chamber • Two (4) fastener channel • 2 Horizontal support channels • 2 panel mounting channels

METHOD OF APPLICATION:

1. The brackets or support structure must be

mounted to the wall using appropriate fasteners to support the load of the living wall when fully saturated.

2. The Living Wall Panel’s are picked up and hung directly on the appropriate brackets or support structure and fastened.

Please contact ELT EasyGreen® Technical Support for additional information.

PRODUCT DATA

PHYSICAL PROPRETIES:

Fire Rating: Class “B” UV Resistance: Approved Thermal resistance: -40°C (-40°F) to 80ºC (176°F)

PRODUCT DATA: HPDE Living Wall Panel Material: 100% recyclable black High

density polyethylene (HDPE) panel.

Color: Black Size: 12” (300 mm) x 12’’ (300 mm) x

4” (12 mm)

Warranty Period: 15 years warranty program on the module.

STORAGE: Store the panels in a dry location out of direct sunlight with original packaging.

PRECAUTIONS:

1. Exercise caution when lifting, moving,

transporting and handling the panel to avoid damage on the living wall panel components.

2. Please refer to your ELT EasyGreen® Certified Contractor for specific recommendations regarding the installation procedures.

ELT Living Walls (ELT) 245 King George Rd., Suite 320 Brantford Ontario Canada N3R 7N7 p: 1.866.306.7773 f: 416.479.094 www.elteasygreen.com



This section is related to optional components that can be added to the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Systems.

ELT EasyGreen®

Living Wall System

DESCRIPTION:

The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System is made out of the ELT EasyGreen® modular living wall panel product (refer to ELT Living Wall panel for description). The living wall system can be in installed in both indoors and outdoors projects. The easy application of the living wall module makes it simple to design the most creative and customized systems.

FUNCTION:

The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System provides numerous of benefits: from energy savings by cooling down the interior of a building to protecting the structure of the wall from weather and sun light damage. The vegetated modules provides temperature regulation, reduction of storm water run off, air improvements such as reducing the Urban Heat Island Effect in cities as well as benefits for the environment by creating ecological habitats.

COMPONENTS:

The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System is a combination of multiple components:

• HDPE Living Wall Panel • Mounting hardware • Irrigation system • Growth Medium • Vegetation

OPTIONAL COMPONENTS:

• ELT EasyGreen® Edging Details • ELT EasyGreen® Irrigation Diversion

Chanel • ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Growth

Medium Stabilizers • ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Panel

Extension • Grow Lights




2. The Living Wall Panel’s are picked up and hung directly on the appropriate brackets or support structure.

3. Irrigation emitter is installed along the collection chamber on each panel.

4. Fasteners are installed in the fastener channel as required.

***ELT Living Wall panels are pre-vegetated before installation. ***


PRODUCT DATA

Fire Rating: Class “B” UV Resistance: Approved Thermal resistance: -40°C (-40°F) to 80ºC (176°F) Water Retention: Dimension: 12” (300 mm) x 12” (300 mm) x

4” (18 mm) Saturated Weight: Average: 15 lbs/ft2

Warranty Period : Annually renewable full system warranty and maintenance (including vegetation) program available through ELT approved contractors.

STORAGE:

Store the panels in a dry location out of direct sunlight with original packaging. Vegetated panels must be protected from rapid temperature changes of more than 15°C/hour (59°F/hour). All vegetation is to be installed within two (2) days of being delivered

*If storage is not possible, section above, please contact ELT EasyGreen® for further instructions.

PRECAUTIONS:


transporting and handling the panel to avoid damage on the vegetation carrier components.



PRODUCT DATA


'

GROWTH MEDIUM

";1 :.... ..•• \ .....

;J t7.\j {1:).:}·I

HOPE SHOCK/CORROSION RESISTANT WAL!. PANEL

"'· :·::::. (117/8"x 117/8"x 3 112")

- d;'1i'

:OMPLETE PLANTED LMNGWALL PANa (251be SATURATED WEIGHT)

... .. ... :-...

· "" ., ..,·:

.. ..... +·.· .....

., ..... .... •

..,.:.: . -,·--·

--·.

......-....-.... -- ... ··

...-:: ---- i

r_,-. I j

0 100 200 400 800 MM

1. NSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETEDIN

2.DRAWINGS AREININTERNATIONAL

3.FOR PRODUCT ANDCOMPANY

WWW.ELTEASYGREEN.COM

P: 1.416.479.0942

[email protected]

Tll'RE DU DE881N /DRAWING Till£

ELT Easy Green 300 x 300 Living Wall Planted PanelAssembly

IMTE

2011-01-01

Da161£ IWI/ DRAWlol 8'f

J.G•. t<:HELLE ISCAIE

not to scale

WAIFltPARICll!QCEDBY

ELT Eaav Gl9en

http://www/

http://www/

Mounting --.... cleat

For concrete wall use 11/2" grade 8 tap-con saews with anchors. For wood wall use 1 112" wood screws

Fastene'r :' _j screws with anchors

0-ring

Water proof membrane

10 90mm long horizontal aluminum mounting cleats are to be spaced 300mm apart for each row of panels

m:::-

Concrete wall (Installation onto wood wallor sheet rock would bethe same except for thetype of fasteners)

Water proof membrane to be applieCI to structural wall priorto installing vegetated panels (EPDM,Blueskin or other approved membrane)

• An 0-ring and a bead of water block mastic is applied to the back of the aluminum mounting cleat to seal each protrusion.

• Mounting cleats should be level and there should be 3 fasteners per 3 cleat. • A space between the lower panel and the one above it should be there but should

not exceed 20mm.

10

NOTES 1. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN

ACCORDANCE WITI-1MANUFACT\JRERS SPECIFICATIONS.

2. DRAWINGS ARE ININTERNATIONAL MElRIC SYSTEM

INFORMATION VISIT WWW.ELTEASYGREEN.COM

ELT Easy Green®

ELT SASYOREEN HEAD OFFICE 245 King Geolge RD,Suite 320, Branlf'ord,ON, Canada N3R 7N7

P: 1.416A79.0942 F: 1.416A79.0943 [email protected] www.e1te98wreen.com

$Pl!CIFICATIONI SPECIFICATION

ELT Easy Graen Living Wall SpecificationI EllEasy Greendevis et specifications pour murvegetal.

1111EDUDES81N/DRAWING nnE

ELT Easy Green300 x 300 Living Wall Direct Cleat to Wall mounang Method

TE

2011-01-01

DE881NEPAR/ DRAWNBY

J.G.• tcltBJ.E/8Cll!E

not toacale

'i£RIA PM/ Ct£CllED BY

ELT i='A.4.W Gl98n NDDB88N/DWONU-

LW2011-02



http://www.e1te98wreen.com/

U channel vertical stanchion

9/16" round Dowel

Guide tabfor joinin the upper andlower stanchions with the right SPBC?ing

Panels slide onto dowels and nest over one another

LO N CN

The verticalStanchion with the dowel that slides through the receiver hole in the middle of the panel is the method we use to secure the panels in applications where there may be higher risk factors such as highwind or earthquake zones.

Represents a water proof membrane

.

2.DRAWINGS AREIN INTERNATIONAL

METRIC SYSTEM 3.FOR PRODUCTAND COMPANY

INFORMATION VISIT

,k

245 King George RD, Suite 320,

T11R': lllJ DE68tl /DRAWING TIRE

ELT Easy Green 300 x 300 Living Wall Vertical Stanchion wilh dowels mounting method

TE

2011-01-01

DEBSINit PAR IDRAYM BY

J.G. i!c:Ha.L.E/ BCAl..E

not to scale

WRIF PAR IctECKBJ BY

ELT Easv Green NO DEBStl IllWQ NUMBER

LW2011-02

http://www.etteasygreen.oom/

o

Copper feed from domestic water source terminated with a 1/2" ball valve supplied by client.

NOTES 1. INSTALLATllJN TD BE ClllPLETED IN

llCClltMNCE 'WITH MllNIFllCTUAERS SPECJFlCi\TmNS,

!.DRAWINGS ME IN JNTERNi\TmNi\L IETRIC SYSTEM

3.Flla PAlllllJCT AND Cll4PANY JWCRMATIDN VISIT VW.ELTE'ASYliREEN.Clll

12 volt Zone Valve with acu-set pressure regulator

/ Ceiling above exterior living wall

Irrigation Controller . Opens and closes 12 lgt sso•nletono1ld1 voaulvtele.t.

J /In llne fllter

,/ P rxt.pipe,supply line for interior --, ion o supply line.

I

'--Shark-bite 1/2"qulck connector to go from exterior poly pipe to pex-pipe for interior plumbing.

114" ln-llna emitter llna

114" Quick connect elbow insertsinto 112" poly-pipe supply Una on the exterior wall where the living wall sytem is located.

112' po1Y P••P• supply line

ELT EaayGreen SpecifiedIrrigation Detailfor exteriOr LivingWallSyatem

Mlt: I llESSINt PM I lllAW JIY

2011-07-25 J.G.. llllHl..L£ I V PM I

CHECICED IV

-•- ELT Eas Green NJ ll£SSIM I IMi tUdER

NOTE: 112 copper feed llne terminated with a ball valve tupplled by cllent. Irrigation control system located in bulk head above exterior living wall. Pox pipe mupply llne uHdIn bulk head and run to the exterior of bulldln11 to the poly supply llne. In-line emitter lineis connected to poly supply line with HOPE quick connect elbow& for dripIrrigation ayatem. Thiala not a aoaled drawing••

Fo, l y Green® 11

ELT EASY GREEN HEAD OFFICE 245 King Geolge RD, Suite 320, Bnmtrord, ON, Cenada N3R 7N7

P:1A16A79.0942 F:1.416A79.0943 [email protected] www.elteasygreen.com

SptCJFlCjlffmN 'SPECIFICllTllJN

ELT Easy Green Living Wall Irrigation Diagram usingin-line emitter system



L\./IR U-01

ELT EasyGreen® 2011 Warranty Program ELT Canada Limited (ELT) warranties are an important part of the service offering provided by the ELT EasyGreen® Network.

Through this program we offer assurances to our clients and our agents that every ELT EasyGreen® system will be a long term success.

ELT EasyGreen® product warranties and system warranties are included in this program.

ELT Canada Limited 245 King George Rd., Suite 320, Brantford, ON N3R 7N7

p: 866.306.7773 or 416.479.0942 • f: 416.479.0943 • w: www.elteasygreen.com


1. ELT EasyGreen® Material Warranties

1.1 ELT Canada Limited warrants ELT EasyGreen® products to be of good quality and manufactured to meet published data sheets and quality control standards as per the “Limited Material Warranty” document posted at course.elteasygreen.com website.

1.2 Published Data sheets provide information on approve usage and handling and identifies warranty duration.

2. ELT EasyGreen® System Warranties

2.1 Recommended Minimum Requirements ELT recommends that the following items be listed as minimum requirements for a system warranty supplied to the client from approved contractors:

1. Installation of the system must be carried out by an ELT Certified Contractor who has maintained an active status with ELT.

2. All system parts and materials must be purchased through ELt or an ELT approved agent. This includes but is not limited to, growth mediums, plants, irrigation equipment, containers, support structures etc.

3. A maintenance contract between the Owner and an active ELT Certified Contractor must be in effect for the complete term of the warranty.

4. The maintenance contract must describe the proposed maintenance schedule and procedures, and be in compliance with ELT standard maintenance contracts and best management practices.

5. Required documentation must be filled out and kept in the client/contractor binder. Documentation includes the project information sheet, irrigation specs and programs, pictures of completed project, list of vegetation used and maintenance program Documentation must be received by ELT prior to 30 days after the completion date.

6. All work and execution on the project must be in accordance with the ELT specification that was current at the time of project completion.

3. Maintenance Protocols 3.1 Maintenance is a part of every ELT EasyGreen® system and a maintenance contract is

required to support any system warranty. 3.2 Maintenance should meet or exceed “Best Management Practices” established by ELT. 3.3 Maintenance performed by non-ELT Certified Contractors does not support ELT

EasyGreen® Warranties. 3.4 Maintenance schedules outlining all tasks must be submitted to the owner. 3.5 Growth medium amendments like inoculation, nutrient applications or pest control may

from time to time be required to maintain plant vigour and system performance. These are to be recommended by the Certified Contractor and included in the maintenance contract.

3.6 A maintenance report must be completed after each visit and signed off by the owner and the contractor. A copy of each report must be kept with the contractor and the owner to create a project history log.

4. Plant Viability and Replacement Factors 4.1 Different systems will have different plant replacement factors. Plant replacement factors

identify the amount of vegetation expected to be replaced over the term of the

ELT Canada Limited

245 King George Rd., Suite 320, Brantford, ON N3R 7N7 p: 866.306.7773 or 416.479.0942 • f: 416.479.0943 • w: www.elteasygreen.com


maintenance contract as part of the normal operation of the system. Plant replacement factors are identified in the maintenance program and are part of the maintenance costs.

4.2 Plant replacement factors vary depending on variables like type of plants specified or type of system. A claim may be triggered if plant replacement exceeds the replacement factor.

5. Exclusions 5.1 Any components of a system not included in the “Listed Components” chart in the warranty

document are not covered by the system warranty. 5.2 Growth medium amendments or nutrient applications may be required depending on the

system spec and are part of the maintenance program and therefore are not subject to any warranty claims.

5.3 Any system failure due to breach of the maintenance contract by the owner will render the warranty null and void.

5.4 To qualify for either warranty purchases or to make a warranty claim the owner must be within the payment terms of the ELT Certified Contractor.

5.5 There is no warranty against system failure due to micro-climates not identified in the project information sheet.

6. Warranty Approval 6.1 Required documents in 2.1.5 must be properly filled out and kept in the Client Contractor

binder which is to be kept on site. 6.2 Clients should confirm all documentation is compliant with ELT’s recommended programs

and best management practises listed on the courses.elteasygreen.com web site. 6.4 If the Contractor is unable to meet the criteria required by ELT for the warranty, ELT may if it

wishes, take any actions needed to meet the criteria needed to qualify the project for ELT warranty programs.

7. Warranty Transfer 7.1 System warranties may be transferred provided the previous owner, has from the effective

date of the warranty, to the time of transfer, been in compliance with the terms and conditions of the warranty.

8. Claims 8.1 Any claims on ELT products or systems must be made directly to ELT Canada Limited by

mail at 245 King George Road, Suite 320 Brantford Ontario, Canada, N3R 7N7, or by Facsimile at 416.479.0943.

8.2 The following documents will be required before ELT can process any claims: • Photos of project and areas of reported loss • Project history report including inspection logs and reports • All Maintenance contracts and time lines • Copies of all past and current warranty documents • Original design and specifications of project

8.3 The ELT Warranty for ELT products and components is posted on the courses.elteasygreen.com website.

8.4 ELT may wish to send a company representative to inspect the area of loss claimed before granting approval to the claim, and would do so 30 days from the date the claim was received.




9. Pricing 9.2 System warranties are purchased from an ELT Certified Contractor. 9.3 Pricing is subject to the type of system and plant specifications and is part of the

maintenance program.




1/1/2011 ELT Canada Limited

Limited Material Warranty Green Roof & Living Walls (ELT Product Only)

General. Subject to the terms, conditions, and limitations set forth herein, ELT Canada Limited, a Canadian limited liability company (“ELT”), warrants to the original owner and to any party to whom the original owner transfers ownership as permitted herein (“Owner”) that its ELT certified products; ELT living roof vegetation mat, ELT Living Roof drainage mat, ELT Living Wall Module (collectively referred to herein as the “Products”) will be free from manufacturing defects that cause buckling or cracking leaks when subject to normal use and conditions for the period called out on the products data sheet (“Warranty Period”), provided the Owner establishes to ELT’s satisfaction (i) the date of purchase of the Products; (ii) the original cost of the defective Products; (iii) proof that the Owner is either the original owner or transferee permitted hereunder; and (iv) proof of damage to the Products covered hereby (“Permitted Claim”).

Coverage. If an Owner submits to ELT a Permitted Claim, ELT will at its sole option either (i) provide replacement Products to either repair the affected portions of the roof/wall or replace the entire roof/wall as set forth below, or (ii) refund the original purchase price that the Owner paid for the Products (does not include growth medium or vegetation). The refund is strictly limited to only the amount originally paid for the Products, and does not include among other costs, cost of tear off, flashing, metal work, underlayment, related work or related materials or labor costs of any kind. The Owner must establish the number of roof mats/wall panels involved in any Permitted Claim to ELT’s satisfaction. Owner agrees that any Permitted Claim shall not be deemed to constitute an admission of any past, present or future liability or wrongdoing by ELT.

Wind Limitation. ELT shall have no liability under this Limited Warranty for damage resulting from or any way related to exposure to winds (i) in excess of ninety (90) mph (as confirmed by the National Weather Service); (ii) any time after the Products have been exposed to winds in excess of ninety (90) mph.

Duration. Notwithstanding the provisions of the Section of this Limited Warranty entitled "Coverage”, after two thirds (2/3) of the Warranty Period from the date of application of the Products, the amount ELT will pay for replacement Products in the event of a Permitted Claim will be reduced by dividing the number of months remaining in the Warranty Period by the number of months in the Warranty Period and multiplying the resulting percentage by the actual original price paid for the affected Products.

No Extension. Any Permitted Claim and/or replacement Products provided by ELT under this Limited Warranty will not extend the Warranty Period. Any replacement Products shall be warranted only for the balance of the Warranty Period remaining at the time the Products were replaced.

Insurable Risks. In the event of damage caused by any insurable risk during the Warranty Period, before any coverage shall apply under this Limited Warranty, the Owner must first pursue the cost of replacement or repair of all damaged Products through the Owner’s insurance coverage. Any costs incurred by the Owner in excess of the insurance contribution (excluding insurance deductibles) will be reimbursed by ELT only to the extent such costs are otherwise a Permitted Claim, provided ELT’s liability shall be limited in the manner set forth in the section of this Limited Warranty entitled “Coverage”.

Transferability. This Limited Warranty may be transferred once within the first five (5) years after the original owner buys the Products. To maintain coverage under this Limited Warranty, the transferee must provide the following to ELT at the address below within thirty (30) days of the transfer: (i) transfer of ownership documents; (ii) proof of the purchase date of the Products; (iii) proof that the transfer is taking place within five (5) years of the original purchase; and (iv) any fees required in order to process the transfer. Failure to adhere to the above shall void this Limited Warranty as of the date of the transfer. The coverage provided by this Limited Warranty automatically terminates upon such time that the original owner or a transferee permitted hereunder is no longer the owner of the Products.

Limitations. The following is a list of circumstances that will not give rise to a Permitted Claim; it is not intended to be all-inclusive:

➢ Misuse, abuse, neglect or improper handling or storage of the Products;






➢ Defects related to installation other than in strict accordance with ELT’s instructions, including but not limited to defects arising from faulty or improperly installed underlayment, decking or other components;

➢ Impact of foreign objects, fire, earthquake, flood, hail, lightening, hurricane, tornado or any other casualty or act of God;

➢ Discoloration or staining related to shading or sap from trees, bushes, plants or any other natural vegetation;

➢ Discoloration or damage related to chimney exhaust (including, but not limited to, ash); ➢ Exposure to chemicals, including copper, zinc or any other metal that might discolor; ➢ Damage related to insects, or animals; ➢ Damage related to chemicals, paints or other solvents; ➢ Inappropriate roof applications; ➢ Failure to meet local building codes; ➢ Normal wear and tear; ➢ Damage related to construction and/or maintenance activities, including, but not limited to, persons and/or

equipment coming in contact with the roof related to work on chimneys, ventilation systems, satellite dishes, HVAC, etc.;

➢ Vandalism or acts of war; ➢ Installation of Products in temperatures less than 20 degrees Fahrenheit; ➢ Gloss or color difference of any repair or replacement panels related to normal weathering of existing

panels; ➢ Distortion or warping related to additional or unusual heat sources, including without limitation, reflections

from windows or metallic surfaces and heat buildup caused by non-compliance with local building codes covering roof ventilation;

➢ Discoloration or other damage related to air pollution (including but not limited to metallic oxides or metallic particles), mildew and acid rain);

➢ Discoloration and fading resulting from exposure to the elements; and ➢ Any other cause not involving inherent manufacturing defects in the material supplied by ELT.

The severity of any condition depends on the geographical location of the building, the cleanliness of the air in the area, and many other influences over which ELT has no control.

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER ORAL OR WRITTEN WARRANTIES, LIABILITIES, OR OBLIGATIONS OF ELT AND SHALL CONSTITUTE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR THE FAILURE OF THE PRODUCTS. ELT HEREBY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ELT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING ANY DAMAGES TO THE BUILDING ON WHICH THE PRODUCTS ARE INSTALLED, ITS CONTENTS OR ANY PERSONS THEREIN, RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY. ELT DOES NOT AUTHORIZE ITS FIELD REPRESENTATIVES, EMPLOYEES (other than the CEO or CFO), DISTRIBUTORS OR DEALERS TO MAKE ANY CHANGES IN OR MODIFICATIONS TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON, OR THE EXCLUSION OF, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Severability. To the extent any provision contained herein is deemed invalid under applicable law, such determination shall have no affect on the remaining portions of this Limited Warranty, which shall continue in full force and effect. Any cause of action for breach of this Limited Warranty must be brought within one (1) year after the cause of action has accrued.

Notification. The Owner must notify ELT in writing within thirty (30) days of discovery of, or upon such time that Owner should have reasonably discovered, any Permitted Claim. All notifications should be sent to:

ELT Canada Limited






245 King George Rd, Suite 320 Brantford Ontario Canada N3R 7N7

Outstanding Charges; Samples. ELT shall be under no obligation to provide service under this Limited Warranty if there are outstanding charges for the Products to which this Limited Warranty may apply. The Owner may be required to submit samples of any defective material to ELT for laboratory analysis.

Products not Produced by ELT. This Limited Warranty does not apply to any products, goods, instruments, components, or accessories not produced by ELT, including but not limited to gutters, underlayment, fasteners, or insulation.

Dispute Resolution. This Limited Warranty shall be interpreted and enforced in accordance with the laws of Ontario Canada. Any dispute arising from the terms of this Limited Warranty shall be resolved in the District Court for Ontario, Canada. By submitting a Permitted Claim, Owner agrees that it will not contest to the jurisdiction of the District Court for Ontario, Canada to resolve any dispute related to this Limited Warranty.




ELT EasyGreen® 2011 System Warranty ELT Approved Contractor hereby warrants to the Owner that for a period of 5 years from the project completion date and subject to the terms, conditions and limitations of the ELT EasyGreen® 2011 Warranty Program, ELT Approved Contractor will warrant the performance of the listed components of the ELT EasyGreen® system.

Project: System Type: Interior Living wall

Certified Contractor: ELT Canada ELT Certification #:

General Contractor: Completi on Date: Sept 11, 2009

Owner: Specifier:

Listed Components:

ELT Approved Contractor warrants ELT EasyGreen® listed components to be of good quality and manufactured to meet published data sheets and quality control standards.

ELT Approved Contractor will for a fee warrant for a period of 5 years from date of completion, the products in sufficient quantity, to replace any products proven to be defective when installed, maintained, repaired, modified and used in accordance with ELT EasyGreen® system specification 01202011 and the 2011 ELT EasyGreen® System Warranty Program.

THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND ELT CANADA LIMITED MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABIL Y, IN RESPECT OF LIVING WALL SYSTEMS, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN. ELT CANADA LIMITED SHALL NOT BE LIABLE OR OBLIGATED FOR ANY LOSS OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGE ARISING, DIRECTLY OR IN- DIRECTLY, IN RESPECT OF LIVING WALL MATERIALS OR THE USE OR FAILURE THEREOF, WHETHER BASED ON BREACH OF WARRANTY OR NEGLIGENCE.

Other required document check list:

The warranty applies to ELT EasyGreen® system components as used on this project applied by the certified ELT Contractor identified above as per the ELT EasyGreen® Specification 01202011.

Name Date President ELT Approved Contractor

I have the authority to bind the company.


p: 866.306.7773 or 416.479.0943 • f: 416.479.0943 • www.elteasygreen.com

Component Name Product Code

Living Wall Panels G06WMA001

Growth Medium


Plants (tropicals)


Required Documents Status Project Information Sheet Received Maintenance Contract Received Irrigation Spec and Programs Received Proof of Purchase Received

Required Documents Status Project Picture Received Maintenance Program Received List of Vegetation Used on Project Received


.

/

'

\

,,,,·...../ /

.·

!=,bT._ Y Green® Maintenance Chec klist

Date of Inspection: _ Project Name:

_

Contrac tor:

_ Site Contact:

_

/ , /

Travel Time: _ Date of Next Inspection (week of) : _

Tas ks f or next inspection: _

Current Irrigation Program: -----------------------------

A dditional Comments: _

Site Conta ct Signature: ------------------------------

Elevated Landscape Technologies Inc. 245 King George Rd.. Suite 319, Brantford, ON N3R 7N7



ELT EasyGreen® Maintenance Contract

This agreement is between Certified Contractors Name (ELT Certified Contractor) and Clients Name for the maintenance of the Living Wall/Green Roof located at Enter Project Name and installed on the following date (MM/DD/YYYY) by Installers Name Here.

If this contract is an extension on an existing contract, proof of the existing contract must be provided (original agreement and maintenance reports).

This contract will be in place from (MM/DD/YYYY) until (MM/DD/YYYY)

. The maintenance will be done on a basis, for a total of visits per year. This will be called out on the Maintenance Schedule which must accompany this document.

Maintenance may include but not be limited to, inspection of plant health, removal of foreign objects/invasive species, setting/adjusting the irrigation in accord with climatic changes, pruning of vegetation and ensuring any areas designated as vegetation free zones are vegetation free.

A record of each visit must be kept by ELT/Certified Contractor (Maintenance Checklist) and one provided to the client. These will be required should there be any warranty claims.

ELT/ Certified Contractor:

Client Representative:

Elevated Landscape Technologies 245 King George Rd., Suite 319, Brantford, ON N3R 7N7




SPECIFICATION ELT EasyGreen® - Living Wall System

This specification describes the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System designed to provide a vegetative cover on vertical surfaces. This specification is intended to be included in Section 09950 – Wall Covering.

SECTION 09950 – WALL COVERING

PART I – GENERAL:

1. RELATED SECTIONS

1.1. Section [02810] – [Irrigation Systems] 1.2. Section [07620] – [Sheet Metal Flashing]

2. INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR

2.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System must be installed by ELT Certified Contractor to

qualify for ELT System Warranties.

3. APPROVALS

3.1. Permits if required are the responsibility of the client. 3.2. Architectural and engineering evaluations need to be obtained and provided to the

client and the contractor prior to installation to ensure compliance with any and all building codes the project will be subject to.

4. PLANS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

4.1. The client must provide scale drawings for quotation and design purposes. 4.2. If acceptable scale drawings are not available, ELT or approved alternate will be required

to produce said drawings at the client’s expense. 4.3. Shop drawings to client showing all material terminations, transitions and penetrations

may be provided by an ELT Certified Contractor upon request.

5. ACCESSORIES

5.1. All other living wall components or accessories must be approved or provided by ELT to ensure viability and performance of the system as per the specifications.

6. LEAD TIME

6.1. .Lead times depend on the availability of the specified plant list. Check with ELT Certified

Contractors to determine time lines.

7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

7.1. A contract should be in place with an ELT Certified Contractor to guarantee delivery times.

7.2. A one year maintenance contract should be included as part of the contract.



PART II – WARRANTIES AND MAINTENANCE:

1. WARRANTY ON WORKMANSHIP

1.1. ELT Certified Contractors offer a 5 (five) year workmanship warranty at no additional charge.

2. WARRANTY ON COMPONENTS

2.1. ELT warranties on supplied products that make up the ELT systems are published in the

most current ELT Warranty Program. 2.2. Term of warranties can be found on the published data sheet for the specific product.

3. 1 YEAR WARRANTY ON VEGETATION

3.1. Warranties on vegetation are provided to the client by the certified ELT contractor. A

1year warranty from the date of project completion is standard and is subject to the terms, conditions and limitations contained herein.

3.2. An ELT Certified Contractor must warrant the vegetation installed on the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall to be of good quality and grown to meet ELT's published physical properties and quality control standards. Based on the information collected in the warranty application, the vegetation is to be suitable for growth in the installed conditions.

3.3. The recommended one (1) year vegetation warranty is subject to the minimum requirements and terms and conditions in the current ELT Warranty Program year.

3.4. ELT Living Wall vegetation warranties are supported by the ELT Certified Contractors Network. ELT Certified Contractors are to be engaged in the installation and maintenance programs of ELT projects to ensure quality control measures are adequate.

4. ELT EXTENDED SYSTEM WARRANTY

4.1. An extended system warranty can be purchased for the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall

System subject to ELT Warranty minimum requirements. 4.2. ELT extended system warranties are supported by the ELT Certified Contractors Network.

ELT Certified Contractors are to be engaged in the installation and maintenance programs for warranty approval.

4.3. ELT may deny warranty approval if it is deemed the client has not met the minimum requirements for ELT EasyGreen® system warranties.

4.4. Request information for the ELT EasyGreen® Warranty Program from ELT or an ELT Certified Contractor to ensure your living wall will qualify.

5. MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

5.1. A maintenance program from an ELT Certified Contractor is required to support all offered

Warranties. Maintenance performed by non-certified contractor will void ELT Warranties. 5.2. A maintenance contract must be in effect detailing schedules and tasks to be

performed. 5.3. Controllers and mechanical equipment used in the maintenance of the wall must be in

an area accessible to maintenance personnel. This provision should be included in the design of the living wall project.

5.4. Other provisions to be considered: • Access to the wall itself for plant or panel replacement • Application equipment for nutritional requirements and pest management • Time of day that maintenance is to be performed and possible interference with work

schedules etc.



PART III – SYSTEM:

1. DESCRIPTION

1.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System is made up of modular panels 30 cm (12 inches) by

30 cm (12 inches) including overlap areas or 30 cm (12 inches) by 30 cm (12 inches) of vegetation area that are delivered as a pre-assembled product to the site for installation. The plants may be pre-grown into the modules. The ability to customize and accessorize the system with various options is possible, provided the design has been approved by ELT or Certified Contractor.

1.2. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall panels need to be mounted on a stand alone or stand off structure or can be mounted directly to existing walls or vertical barriers. The mounting of the panels require either ELT brackets or mounting strips to be affixed to the supporting structure securely in order for the panels to mount properly.

2. REQUIRED COMPONENTS

2.1. ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Panels

2.1.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Panel must be provided by ELT and meet or exceed the following: • Made of high density polyethylene (HDPE) • Class “B” fire rating • UV resistant • Temperature range -40°C (-40°F) to 80º C (176°F).

2.1.2. There are a total of 10 individual cells in each living wall panel. Each cell is set on a 30 degree angle and has a depth of 18 centimetres from the front of the panel to the back. Each cell also has notches in the bottom surface of the cell to allow for drainage and aeration. The notches do not extend completely to the back of the cell; this provides a water retention zone in each cell reducing the irrigation requirements.

2.1.3. There is a collection chamber at the top of each panel to collect water from the irrigation emitter line and direct it into each of the panel cells. There is a drip edge at the bottom of each panel to allow for excess water to drain away. The drip edge of each panel nests over top of the collection chamber of the lower panel and the water that is drained from the top panel is then collected and used by the lower panel. It is important to check that the spacing between the drip edge of the top panel and the collection chamber of the lower panel is not more than 4 millimetres. If this distance is greater then water from above panel may be able to find a path to the back of the panels and drip down behind the panel rather than continue on a course through the growth medium profile of each panel.



2.1.4. There are four (4) fastener channels down each side of the living wall panel to provide an access point for fasteners to be used in securing the living wall panel to mounting hardware.

2.1.5. Each panel has a horizontal support channel formed into the back to carry and disperse the weight evenly across the panel. This channel is configured with a 30 degree angle, essentially using gravity for greater stability once mounted.

2.1.6. There are two tubes or cylendrical holes formed into the centre of the panel as another meanes of affixing the panels to a wall. This allows the panels to be used on curved wall applications where the mounting strip fastening detail would not work. These are required for use with the vertical support stanchions to be used in regions prone to high wind or earthquake forces.

2.2. ELT EasyGreen® Mounting Hardware

2.2.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System has several options for mounting hardware

depending on the application. All brackets used must be manufactured or approved by ELT for use with the ELT EasyGreen® System. Any mounting system or product other than those included in this specification require approval from ELT as well Engineer approved drawings. Mounting hardware is listed below along with the acceptable applications for each.

2.2.2. The Mounting strip method of affixing the panels to a wall is subject to approval by

the client. This method requires the mounting strips to be fastend to the wall. The wall must be able to carry the load of the living wall panels. (See illustration a.)

2.2.3. The vertical stanchion mounting system will carry four (4) panel per stanchion and is

used to mitigate the risk of detachment associated with certain applications or regions due to either design or environmental factors.

2.3. ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Irrigation System

2.3.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System comes complete with a standard irrigation system fully integrated within the panels.

2.3.2. An irrigation water source must be provided in the area of the living wall with a shut- off valve installed by others.

2.3.3. Grey water or rainwater irrigation water is encouraged for use with the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System subject to compliance with any and all codes; compliance with any codes is the responsibility of the client.

2.3.4. The use of grey water may require specialized irrigation equipment. Check with ELT for specifications regarding grey water.

2.3.5. Water quantity and quality must be approved by ELT prior to installation. 2.3.6. The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall irrigation system is completely integrated with the

living wall panels. An 8 millimetre emitter line is placed and run continuously in the collection chamber of each living wall panel. The collection chamber protects the emitter line from being pinched as well as secures it in place. The panels are able to distribute the water that moves from the collection chamber into the cells evenly throughout the panel. The emitter spacing is 9 centimetres apart providing 2 (two) per panel. Each emitter has an output of 30 l/h at 30 psi (an operating range of 0.7 to 2.7 bars or 10 to 40 psi is acceptable).

2.3.7. A static loop system must be used in applications where the irrigation emitter lines

have to deliver water in a run greater than 20 meters. The emitter lines have a maximum operating run length of 30 meters. A static loop equalizes the pressure in the emitter lines requiring fewer zones to irrigate the wall.



3. ELT EasyGreen® Fertilizer Applicator

3.1. An injection applicator is required to be installed for nutrient management as well as integrated pest control. The injection applicator injects nutrients and soil amendments into the irrigation feeder lines in a controlled manner at the rates specified by ELT.

4. ADDITIONAL REQUIRED COMPONENTS

4.1. ELT Growth Medium

4.1.1. Growth mediums must be approved or provided by ELT to ensure viability and

performance of the system. Use of growth mediums not approved by ELT will void ELT Living Wall System Warranties.

4.1.2. Standard growth mediums consist of both organic and inorganic components formulated to culture micro-organisms beneficial to plant performance while maintaining growth medium structure and stability.

4.1.3. ELT EasyGreen® Growth Mediums are formulated to maximize longevity, promote drainage and aeration of growth medium. Check with ELT for growth medium percolation rates and performance specifications.

4.1.4. Growth medium components may be sourced locally if the components available are able to meet both the ELT performance requirements and the ELT sustainability standards.

4.2. ELT Approved Vegetation

4.2.1. The plant list and design must be approved by ELT to ensure viability and

performance of the system. 4.2.2. Vegetation specifications depend on the following variables:

• Interior versus Exterior • Climatic zones • Micro Climates that exist on the project • Loading and structural issues • Water availability • Design considerations • Maintenance budget of the client

4.2.3. Plant replacement requirements will vary depending on the plants specified as well as the climatic conditions of the project. Plant replacements deemed to be part of the natural processes of the vegetation specified are to be included in the maintenance contract and schedules provided by ELT Certified Contractors. Plant replacement targets are set and approved by ELT when the project information sheet is submitted. Replacement needs that fall within these targets are part of the maintenance contract for the project. Replacement needs that are in excess of these targets would be cause for a claim by the client.

4.3. Lighting

4.3.1. Most indoor living walls (with tropical plants) need plenty of natural light to perform

optimally. Living walls under a skylight, near a large window may have adequate lighting. A test using a light meter is required by ELT to quantify the lighting levels existing in the proposed location for the living wall.

4.3.2. ELT will require artificial lighting for indoor living walls with inadequate natural light for warranty approval.

4.3.3. Ambient and artificial light can be measured with a light meter (Luxmeter). A minimum rating of 1800 lux will work in most applications that are using tropical plants. As an example the use of a 600 watt metal halide HID light installed in a spacing interval of 3 linear metres apart and 3 meters distance between the vegetation and the lights, would in most cases achieve a rating greater than 1800



lux. Five hours of exposure to grow lights every day is sufficient to keep most tropical plants healthy. Start by getting plants used to the light by exposing them one hour a day for the first week before their normal lighting schedule.

4.3.4. Building codes may require grow lights to be enclosed in a reflector casing with a glass window to protect the bulb. This will eliminate the risk of the light bulb breaking or exploding as a result of direct contact with hard objects or other substances like water that may have the same damaging result due to thermal shock. Installation of artificial lights is subject to the local building codes and compliance with these codes is the responsibility of the client.

4.3.5. Grow lights can emit a lot of heat and light. The excess heat or light generated may have an effect on the indoor environment and therefore it is important to manage lighting requirements in a manner that meets the needs of the vegetation while maintaining a comfortable indoor environment. Grow lights are to be controlled with an automatic timer. This makes it possible to provide the additional lighting at times of the day where there are not people present to be affected by any excess heat or light generated.

4.3.6. Exterior living walls generally have sufficient access to natural light but not always. Identify the amount of direct sunlight received by the wall each day to determine an acceptable plant list.

5. OPTIONAL COMPONENTS

5.1. ELT EasyGreen® Edging Details

5.1.1. The panels may be edged with wood, metal, plastic or other materials to match the

proposed or existing façade of the building. 5.1.2. All edging must be approved by ELT for use with the ELT EasyGreen® system. 5.1.3. Vegetated corner panels are available as a custom fabricated product to provide a

vegetated corner. The panel provides for a completely vegetated corner that eliminates the need for flashing covering other wise required to cover exposed sides of the living wall panels.

5.2. ELT EasyGreen® Irrigation Diversion Channels

5.2.1. Irrigation diversion channel diverts any water that may drip from panels that are

mounted over doorways, windows or other features of the wall that must be protected from exposure to water. The diversion channel snaps on to the last cell of the living wall panel. The offset double ‘J’ formation keeps the channel in place as well as collects and diverts the water received from the drip edge of the living wall panel.

5.2.2. Diversion channels come in 1.25 metre lengths and can be joined to extend to any length required. This is an overlap joint and the overlap must be no less than 15 cm. Two beads of Firestone Water Block is to be applied around the exterior of the diversion channel that will be inserted into the adjacent diversion channel. It is important to note that the diversion channel moving the water to the next channel is the male fitting and the next channel that is taking the flow of the water is to be the female fitting to ensure water is shedding past the connections.

5.2.3. Stoppers are available to provide a termination at the end of the diversion channels if required. They are a rubber block that is placed inside the end of the diversion channel. A bead of Water Block mastic is to be applied before inserting the Water Diversion Channel Stopper into the diversion channel.

5.3. ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Growth Medium Stabilizers

5.3.1.1. Growth Medium Stabilizers are sometimes required in applications where the

vegetation specified and/or the growth medium specified is prone to erosion



or becomes unstable due to the structure of the medium. They may also be required in instances where the plants were not transplanted and grown into the panels long enough for proper establishment prior to installation.

5.3.1.2. The Stabilizer is a series of vertical aluminum rods designed to be pressed into the notches located on the lower shelf of each cell.

5.3.1.3. Coconut coir should be used inconjunction with the stabilizers to provide a completely protected growth medium fascia that still provided the benefits of an open fascia where aeration can still occur in the growth medium and the vegetation can spread, root and propagate as it would in a natural environment.

5.3.1.4. The Stabilizer rods can be easily removed for general maintenace purposes.

5.4. ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Panel Extension

5.4.1. The ELT EasyGreen® Extensions may be needed where the vegetation specification requires deeper depths of growth medium.

5.4.2. The extension mounts to the panel in the same manner as the growth medium stabilizers. It also has the same angled fin feature as the stabilizers allowing it to provide this functionality as well.

5.4.3. Notched features on the front of the fins allow for roots and water to move from cell to cell and panel to panel.

PART IV – EXECUTION:

1. DELIVERY

1.1. Co-ordination of delivery timelines are the responsibility of the contractor installing the

system; 2 (two) weeks advance notice to the Grower is necessary to ensure there are no delays.

1.2. The pre-grown panels will be loaded on carts and/or skids and delivered to site on the date of installation, unless otherwise specified by the contractor.

2. STORAGE

2.1. Vegetation materials must be stored in a secure, cool, shady environment out of direct

sunlight prior to installation. Vegetation must be protected from rapid temperature changes of more than 15°C (59°F)/hour. All vegetation is to be installed within 2 (two) days of being delivered. If this is not possible contact ELT for further care instructions.

2.2. All other materials (non-living) should be stored in a dry location out of direct sunlight with original packaging and documentation left intact prior to installation.

3. INSTALLATION

3.1. The wall surface must be free and clear of any obstructions prior to the installation of the

living wall brackets or support structure. 3.2. Waterproofing or vapour barriers that may have been specified should be applied or

installed prior to any mounting brackets or stand off structure being installed. 3.3. The brackets or support structure must be mounted to the wall using appropriate fasteners

to support the load of the living wall when fully saturated. All brackets or structures must be perfectly level to ensure even water distribution through out the panels.

3.4. Installations should begin from the bottom of the wall and work across and then upward. 3.5. The LW panels can then be picked up and hung from the levelled brackets or support

structure. 3.6. Irrigation emitter lines should be installed along the collection chamber of each panel

before the above row of panels is installed. 3.7. The panels must overlap by the Z shaped portion on the top and bottom of each panel,

making sure to leave a 6 millimetres (¼ inches) gap for expansion.



3.8. Secondary fasteners should be installed in the holes provided; 2 (two) per panel are required as panels are hung.

3.9. The fasteners must be such that they can be removed if access to the surface behind the system becomes necessary.

3.10. .All edging and accessories should be installed as per the most recent plan drawings. Report any discrepancies to ELT and/or designer immediately upon discovery.

3.11. Irrigation source lines are to be installed around the perimeter and inbetween zone perimeters for the emitter lines to be connected to.

3.12. Irrigation controllers, check valves, pressure reducers and evacuation ports should be installed once main lines and emitter lines are connected on the wall.

3.13. An irrigation test must be performed after installation to check that the system is functioning properly.

For more information on the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System you may contact the ELT Technical Support Department.

ELT Canada Limited. (ELT) 245 King George Rd., Suite 320 Brantford Ontario Canada N3R 7N7 p: 1.866.306.7773 · f: 519.458.8208 www.elteasygreen.com [email protected]





PART V - DETAILS



ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Panel

DESCRIPTION: The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall panel is a modular living wall panel that can be either pre- grown or planted in place. The panel has a rectangular shape consisting of a total of 10 individual cells. Each cell is independently designed to contain enough space to add growing medium and to sustain water supply to the roots, maintaining a healthy and growing plant.

FUNCTION:

The modular ELT Living Wall Panel provides the following functions needed for a successful living wall system: drainage, erosion control, water retention, carry growth medium and vegetation, protection for the waterproof membrane, root anchoring for vegetation and irrigation/water distribution.

COMPONENTS:

The ELT Living Wall Panel is a combination of multiple components:

• High density polyethylene (HPDE) • 10 individual cells • Collection chamber • Two (4) fastener channel • 2 Horizontal support channels • 2 panel mounting channels




2. The Living Wall Panel’s are picked up and hung directly on the appropriate brackets or support structure and fastened.


PRODUCT DATA

PHYSICAL PROPRETIES:

Fire Rating: Class “B” UV Resistance: Approved Thermal resistance: -40°C (-40°F) to 80ºC (176°F)

PRODUCT DATA: HPDE Living Wall Panel Material: 100% recyclable black High

density polyethylene (HDPE) panel.

Color: Black Size: 12” (300 mm) x 12’’ (300 mm) x

4” (12 mm)

Warranty Period: 15 years warranty program on the module.

STORAGE: Store the panels in a dry location out of direct sunlight with original packaging.

PRECAUTIONS:


transporting and handling the panel to avoid damage on the living wall panel components.





This section is related to optional components that can be added to the ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Systems.

ELT EasyGreen®

Living Wall System

DESCRIPTION:

The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System is made out of the ELT EasyGreen® modular living wall panel product (refer to ELT Living Wall panel for description). The living wall system can be in installed in both indoors and outdoors projects. The easy application of the living wall module makes it simple to design the most creative and customized systems.

FUNCTION:

The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System provides numerous of benefits: from energy savings by cooling down the interior of a building to protecting the structure of the wall from weather and sun light damage. The vegetated modules provides temperature regulation, reduction of storm water run off, air improvements such as reducing the Urban Heat Island Effect in cities as well as benefits for the environment by creating ecological habitats.

COMPONENTS:

The ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall System is a combination of multiple components:

• HDPE Living Wall Panel • Mounting hardware • Irrigation system • Growth Medium • Vegetation

OPTIONAL COMPONENTS:

• ELT EasyGreen® Edging Details • ELT EasyGreen® Irrigation Diversion

Chanel • ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Growth

Medium Stabilizers • ELT EasyGreen® Living Wall Panel

Extension • Grow Lights




2. The Living Wall Panel’s are picked up and hung directly on the appropriate brackets or support structure.

3. Irrigation emitter is installed along the collection chamber on each panel.

4. Fasteners are installed in the fastener channel as required.

***ELT Living Wall panels are pre-vegetated before installation. ***


PRODUCT DATA

Fire Rating: Class “B” UV Resistance: Approved Thermal resistance: -40°C (-40°F) to 80ºC (176°F) Water Retention: Dimension: 12” (300 mm) x 12” (300 mm) x

4” (18 mm) Saturated Weight: Average: 15 lbs/ft2

Warranty Period : Annually renewable full system warranty and maintenance (including vegetation) program available through ELT approved contractors.

STORAGE:

Store the panels in a dry location out of direct sunlight with original packaging. Vegetated panels must be protected from rapid temperature changes of more than 15°C/hour (59°F/hour). All vegetation is to be installed within two (2) days of being delivered

*If storage is not possible, section above, please contact ELT EasyGreen® for further instructions.

PRECAUTIONS:


transporting and handling the panel to avoid damage on the vegetation carrier components.



PRODUCT DATA


'

GROWTH MEDIUM

";1 :.... ..•• \ .....

;J t7.\j {1:).:}·I

HOPE SHOCK/CORROSION RESISTANT WAL!. PANEL

"'· :·::::. (117/8"x 117/8"x 3 112")

- d;'1i'

:OMPLETE PLANTED LMNGWALL PANa (251be SATURATED WEIGHT)

... .. ... :-...

· "" ., ..,·:

.. ..... +·.· .....

., ..... .... •

..,.:.: . -,·--·

--·.

......-....-.... -- ... ··

...-:: ---- i

r_,-. I j

0 100 200 400 800 MM

1. NSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETEDIN

2.DRAWINGS AREININTERNATIONAL

3.FOR PRODUCT ANDCOMPANY

WWW.ELTEASYGREEN.COM

P: 1.416.479.0942

[email protected]

Tll'RE DU DE881N /DRAWING Till£

ELT Easy Green 300 x 300 Living Wall Planted PanelAssembly

IMTE

2011-01-01

Da161£ IWI/ DRAWlol 8'f

J.G•. t<:HELLE ISCAIE

not to scale

WAIFltPARICll!QCEDBY

ELT Eaav Gl9en

http://www/

http://www/

Mounting --.... cleat

For concrete wall use 11/2" grade 8 tap-con saews with anchors. For wood wall use 1 112" wood screws

Fastene'r :' _j screws with anchors

0-ring

Water proof membrane

10 90mm long horizontal aluminum mounting cleats are to be spaced 300mm apart for each row of panels

m:::-

Concrete wall (Installation onto wood wallor sheet rock would bethe same except for thetype of fasteners)

Water proof membrane to be applieCI to structural wall priorto installing vegetated panels (EPDM,Blueskin or other approved membrane)

• An 0-ring and a bead of water block mastic is applied to the back of the aluminum mounting cleat to seal each protrusion.

• Mounting cleats should be level and there should be 3 fasteners per 3 cleat. • A space between the lower panel and the one above it should be there but should

not exceed 20mm.

10

NOTES 1. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN

ACCORDANCE WITI-1MANUFACT\JRERS SPECIFICATIONS.

2. DRAWINGS ARE ININTERNATIONAL MElRIC SYSTEM

INFORMATION VISIT WWW.ELTEASYGREEN.COM

ELT Easy Green®

ELT SASYOREEN HEAD OFFICE 245 King Geolge RD,Suite 320, Branlf'ord,ON, Canada N3R 7N7

P: 1.416A79.0942 F: 1.416A79.0943 [email protected] www.e1te98wreen.com

$Pl!CIFICATIONI SPECIFICATION

ELT Easy Graen Living Wall SpecificationI EllEasy Greendevis et specifications pour murvegetal.

1111EDUDES81N/DRAWING nnE

ELT Easy Green300 x 300 Living Wall Direct Cleat to Wall mounang Method

TE

2011-01-01

DE881NEPAR/ DRAWNBY

J.G.• tcltBJ.E/8Cll!E

not toacale

'i£RIA PM/ Ct£CllED BY

ELT i='A.4.W Gl98n NDDB88N/DWONU-

LW2011-02



http://www.e1te98wreen.com/

U channel vertical stanchion

9/16" round Dowel

Guide tabfor joinin the upper andlower stanchions with the right SPBC?ing

Panels slide onto dowels and nest over one another

LO N CN

The verticalStanchion with the dowel that slides through the receiver hole in the middle of the panel is the method we use to secure the panels in applications where there may be higher risk factors such as highwind or earthquake zones.

Represents a water proof membrane

.

2.DRAWINGS AREIN INTERNATIONAL

METRIC SYSTEM 3.FOR PRODUCTAND COMPANY

INFORMATION VISIT

,k

245 King George RD, Suite 320,

T11R': lllJ DE68tl /DRAWING TIRE

ELT Easy Green 300 x 300 Living Wall Vertical Stanchion wilh dowels mounting method

TE

2011-01-01

DEBSINit PAR IDRAYM BY

J.G. i!c:Ha.L.E/ BCAl..E

not to scale

WRIF PAR IctECKBJ BY

ELT Easv Green NO DEBStl IllWQ NUMBER

LW2011-02

http://www.etteasygreen.oom/

o

Copper feed from domestic water source terminated with a 1/2" ball valve supplied by client.

NOTES 1. INSTALLATllJN TD BE ClllPLETED IN

llCClltMNCE 'WITH MllNIFllCTUAERS SPECJFlCi\TmNS,

!.DRAWINGS ME IN JNTERNi\TmNi\L IETRIC SYSTEM

3.Flla PAlllllJCT AND Cll4PANY JWCRMATIDN VISIT VW.ELTE'ASYliREEN.Clll

12 volt Zone Valve with acu-set pressure regulator

/ Ceiling above exterior living wall

Irrigation Controller . Opens and closes 12 lgt sso•nletono1ld1 voaulvtele.t.

J /In llne fllter

,/ P rxt.pipe,supply line for interior --, ion o supply line.

I

'--Shark-bite 1/2"qulck connector to go from exterior poly pipe to pex-pipe for interior plumbing.

114" ln-llna emitter llna

114" Quick connect elbow insertsinto 112" poly-pipe supply Una on the exterior wall where the living wall sytem is located.

112' po1Y P••P• supply line

ELT EaayGreen SpecifiedIrrigation Detailfor exteriOr LivingWallSyatem

Mlt: I llESSINt PM I lllAW JIY

2011-07-25 J.G.. llllHl..L£ I V PM I

CHECICED IV

-•- ELT Eas Green NJ ll£SSIM I IMi tUdER

NOTE: 112 copper feed llne terminated with a ball valve tupplled by cllent. Irrigation control system located in bulk head above exterior living wall. Pox pipe mupply llne uHdIn bulk head and run to the exterior of bulldln11 to the poly supply llne. In-line emitter lineis connected to poly supply line with HOPE quick connect elbow& for dripIrrigation ayatem. Thiala not a aoaled drawing••

Fo, l y Green® 11

ELT EASY GREEN HEAD OFFICE 245 King Geolge RD, Suite 320, Bnmtrord, ON, Cenada N3R 7N7

P:1A16A79.0942 F:1.416A79.0943 [email protected] www.elteasygreen.com

SptCJFlCjlffmN 'SPECIFICllTllJN

ELT Easy Green Living Wall Irrigation Diagram usingin-line emitter system



L\./IR U-01

ELT EasyGreen® 2011 Warranty Program ELT Canada Limited (ELT) warranties are an important part of the service offering provided by the ELT EasyGreen® Network.

Through this program we offer assurances to our clients and our agents that every ELT EasyGreen® system will be a long term success.

ELT EasyGreen® product warranties and system warranties are included in this program.




1. ELT EasyGreen® Material Warranties

1.1 ELT Canada Limited warrants ELT EasyGreen® products to be of good quality and manufactured to meet published data sheets and quality control standards as per the “Limited Material Warranty” document posted at course.elteasygreen.com website.

1.2 Published Data sheets provide information on approve usage and handling and identifies warranty duration.

2. ELT EasyGreen® System Warranties

2.1 Recommended Minimum Requirements ELT recommends that the following items be listed as minimum requirements for a system warranty supplied to the client from approved contractors:

1. Installation of the system must be carried out by an ELT Certified Contractor who has maintained an active status with ELT.

2. All system parts and materials must be purchased through ELt or an ELT approved agent. This includes but is not limited to, growth mediums, plants, irrigation equipment, containers, support structures etc.

3. A maintenance contract between the Owner and an active ELT Certified Contractor must be in effect for the complete term of the warranty.

4. The maintenance contract must describe the proposed maintenance schedule and procedures, and be in compliance with ELT standard maintenance contracts and best management practices.

5. Required documentation must be filled out and kept in the client/contractor binder. Documentation includes the project information sheet, irrigation specs and programs, pictures of completed project, list of vegetation used and maintenance program Documentation must be received by ELT prior to 30 days after the completion date.

6. All work and execution on the project must be in accordance with the ELT specification that was current at the time of project completion.

3. Maintenance Protocols 3.1 Maintenance is a part of every ELT EasyGreen® system and a maintenance contract is

required to support any system warranty. 3.2 Maintenance should meet or exceed “Best Management Practices” established by ELT. 3.3 Maintenance performed by non-ELT Certified Contractors does not support ELT

EasyGreen® Warranties. 3.4 Maintenance schedules outlining all tasks must be submitted to the owner. 3.5 Growth medium amendments like inoculation, nutrient applications or pest control may

from time to time be required to maintain plant vigour and system performance. These are to be recommended by the Certified Contractor and included in the maintenance contract.

3.6 A maintenance report must be completed after each visit and signed off by the owner and the contractor. A copy of each report must be kept with the contractor and the owner to create a project history log.

4. Plant Viability and Replacement Factors 4.1 Different systems will have different plant replacement factors. Plant replacement factors

identify the amount of vegetation expected to be replaced over the term of the

ELT Canada Limited

245 King George Rd., Suite 320, Brantford, ON N3R 7N7 p: 866.306.7773 or 416.479.0942 • f: 416.479.0943 • w: www.elteasygreen.com


maintenance contract as part of the normal operation of the system. Plant replacement factors are identified in the maintenance program and are part of the maintenance costs.

4.2 Plant replacement factors vary depending on variables like type of plants specified or type of system. A claim may be triggered if plant replacement exceeds the replacement factor.

5. Exclusions 5.1 Any components of a system not included in the “Listed Components” chart in the warranty

document are not covered by the system warranty. 5.2 Growth medium amendments or nutrient applications may be required depending on the

system spec and are part of the maintenance program and therefore are not subject to any warranty claims.

5.3 Any system failure due to breach of the maintenance contract by the owner will render the warranty null and void.

5.4 To qualify for either warranty purchases or to make a warranty claim the owner must be within the payment terms of the ELT Certified Contractor.

5.5 There is no warranty against system failure due to micro-climates not identified in the project information sheet.

6. Warranty Approval 6.1 Required documents in 2.1.5 must be properly filled out and kept in the Client Contractor

binder which is to be kept on site. 6.2 Clients should confirm all documentation is compliant with ELT’s recommended programs

and best management practises listed on the courses.elteasygreen.com web site. 6.4 If the Contractor is unable to meet the criteria required by ELT for the warranty, ELT may if it

wishes, take any actions needed to meet the criteria needed to qualify the project for ELT warranty programs.

7. Warranty Transfer 7.1 System warranties may be transferred provided the previous owner, has from the effective

date of the warranty, to the time of transfer, been in compliance with the terms and conditions of the warranty.

8. Claims 8.1 Any claims on ELT products or systems must be made directly to ELT Canada Limited by

mail at 245 King George Road, Suite 320 Brantford Ontario, Canada, N3R 7N7, or by Facsimile at 416.479.0943.

8.2 The following documents will be required before ELT can process any claims: • Photos of project and areas of reported loss • Project history report including inspection logs and reports • All Maintenance contracts and time lines • Copies of all past and current warranty documents • Original design and specifications of project

8.3 The ELT Warranty for ELT products and components is posted on the courses.elteasygreen.com website.

8.4 ELT may wish to send a company representative to inspect the area of loss claimed before granting approval to the claim, and would do so 30 days from the date the claim was received.




9. Pricing 9.2 System warranties are purchased from an ELT Certified Contractor. 9.3 Pricing is subject to the type of system and plant specifications and is part of the

maintenance program.






General. Subject to the terms, conditions, and limitations set forth herein, ELT Canada Limited, a Canadian limited liability company (“ELT”), warrants to the original owner and to any party to whom the original owner transfers ownership as permitted herein (“Owner”) that its ELT certified products; ELT living roof vegetation mat, ELT Living Roof drainage mat, ELT Living Wall Module (collectively referred to herein as the “Products”) will be free from manufacturing defects that cause buckling or cracking leaks when subject to normal use and conditions for the period called out on the products data sheet (“Warranty Period”), provided the Owner establishes to ELT’s satisfaction (i) the date of purchase of the Products; (ii) the original cost of the defective Products; (iii) proof that the Owner is either the original owner or transferee permitted hereunder; and (iv) proof of damage to the Products covered hereby (“Permitted Claim”).

Coverage. If an Owner submits to ELT a Permitted Claim, ELT will at its sole option either (i) provide replacement Products to either repair the affected portions of the roof/wall or replace the entire roof/wall as set forth below, or (ii) refund the original purchase price that the Owner paid for the Products (does not include growth medium or vegetation). The refund is strictly limited to only the amount originally paid for the Products, and does not include among other costs, cost of tear off, flashing, metal work, underlayment, related work or related materials or labor costs of any kind. The Owner must establish the number of roof mats/wall panels involved in any Permitted Claim to ELT’s satisfaction. Owner agrees that any Permitted Claim shall not be deemed to constitute an admission of any past, present or future liability or wrongdoing by ELT.

Wind Limitation. ELT shall have no liability under this Limited Warranty for damage resulting from or any way related to exposure to winds (i) in excess of ninety (90) mph (as confirmed by the National Weather Service); (ii) any time after the Products have been exposed to winds in excess of ninety (90) mph.

Duration. Notwithstanding the provisions of the Section of this Limited Warranty entitled "Coverage”, after two thirds (2/3) of the Warranty Period from the date of application of the Products, the amount ELT will pay for replacement Products in the event of a Permitted Claim will be reduced by dividing the number of months remaining in the Warranty Period by the number of months in the Warranty Period and multiplying the resulting percentage by the actual original price paid for the affected Products.

No Extension. Any Permitted Claim and/or replacement Products provided by ELT under this Limited Warranty will not extend the Warranty Period. Any replacement Products shall be warranted only for the balance of the Warranty Period remaining at the time the Products were replaced.

Insurable Risks. In the event of damage caused by any insurable risk during the Warranty Period, before any coverage shall apply under this Limited Warranty, the Owner must first pursue the cost of replacement or repair of all damaged Products through the Owner’s insurance coverage. Any costs incurred by the Owner in excess of the insurance contribution (excluding insurance deductibles) will be reimbursed by ELT only to the extent such costs are otherwise a Permitted Claim, provided ELT’s liability shall be limited in the manner set forth in the section of this Limited Warranty entitled “Coverage”.

Transferability. This Limited Warranty may be transferred once within the first five (5) years after the original owner buys the Products. To maintain coverage under this Limited Warranty, the transferee must provide the following to ELT at the address below within thirty (30) days of the transfer: (i) transfer of ownership documents; (ii) proof of the purchase date of the Products; (iii) proof that the transfer is taking place within five (5) years of the original purchase; and (iv) any fees required in order to process the transfer. Failure to adhere to the above shall void this Limited Warranty as of the date of the transfer. The coverage provided by this Limited Warranty automatically terminates upon such time that the original owner or a transferee permitted hereunder is no longer the owner of the Products.

Limitations. The following is a list of circumstances that will not give rise to a Permitted Claim; it is not intended to be all-inclusive:

➢ Misuse, abuse, neglect or improper handling or storage of the Products;






➢ Defects related to installation other than in strict accordance with ELT’s instructions, including but not limited to defects arising from faulty or improperly installed underlayment, decking or other components;

➢ Impact of foreign objects, fire, earthquake, flood, hail, lightening, hurricane, tornado or any other casualty or act of God;

➢ Discoloration or staining related to shading or sap from trees, bushes, plants or any other natural vegetation;

➢ Discoloration or damage related to chimney exhaust (including, but not limited to, ash); ➢ Exposure to chemicals, including copper, zinc or any other metal that might discolor; ➢ Damage related to insects, or animals; ➢ Damage related to chemicals, paints or other solvents; ➢ Inappropriate roof applications; ➢ Failure to meet local building codes; ➢ Normal wear and tear; ➢ Damage related to construction and/or maintenance activities, including, but not limited to, persons and/or

equipment coming in contact with the roof related to work on chimneys, ventilation systems, satellite dishes, HVAC, etc.;

➢ Vandalism or acts of war; ➢ Installation of Products in temperatures less than 20 degrees Fahrenheit; ➢ Gloss or color difference of any repair or replacement panels related to normal weathering of existing

panels; ➢ Distortion or warping related to additional or unusual heat sources, including without limitation, reflections

from windows or metallic surfaces and heat buildup caused by non-compliance with local building codes covering roof ventilation;

➢ Discoloration or other damage related to air pollution (including but not limited to metallic oxides or metallic particles), mildew and acid rain);

➢ Discoloration and fading resulting from exposure to the elements; and ➢ Any other cause not involving inherent manufacturing defects in the material supplied by ELT.

The severity of any condition depends on the geographical location of the building, the cleanliness of the air in the area, and many other influences over which ELT has no control.

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER ORAL OR WRITTEN WARRANTIES, LIABILITIES, OR OBLIGATIONS OF ELT AND SHALL CONSTITUTE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR THE FAILURE OF THE PRODUCTS. ELT HEREBY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ELT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING ANY DAMAGES TO THE BUILDING ON WHICH THE PRODUCTS ARE INSTALLED, ITS CONTENTS OR ANY PERSONS THEREIN, RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY. ELT DOES NOT AUTHORIZE ITS FIELD REPRESENTATIVES, EMPLOYEES (other than the CEO or CFO), DISTRIBUTORS OR DEALERS TO MAKE ANY CHANGES IN OR MODIFICATIONS TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON, OR THE EXCLUSION OF, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Severability. To the extent any provision contained herein is deemed invalid under applicable law, such determination shall have no affect on the remaining portions of this Limited Warranty, which shall continue in full force and effect. Any cause of action for breach of this Limited Warranty must be brought within one (1) year after the cause of action has accrued.

Notification. The Owner must notify ELT in writing within thirty (30) days of discovery of, or upon such time that Owner should have reasonably discovered, any Permitted Claim. All notifications should be sent to:

ELT Canada Limited






245 King George Rd, Suite 320 Brantford Ontario Canada N3R 7N7

Outstanding Charges; Samples. ELT shall be under no obligation to provide service under this Limited Warranty if there are outstanding charges for the Products to which this Limited Warranty may apply. The Owner may be required to submit samples of any defective material to ELT for laboratory analysis.

Products not Produced by ELT. This Limited Warranty does not apply to any products, goods, instruments, components, or accessories not produced by ELT, including but not limited to gutters, underlayment, fasteners, or insulation.

Dispute Resolution. This Limited Warranty shall be interpreted and enforced in accordance with the laws of Ontario Canada. Any dispute arising from the terms of this Limited Warranty shall be resolved in the District Court for Ontario, Canada. By submitting a Permitted Claim, Owner agrees that it will not contest to the jurisdiction of the District Court for Ontario, Canada to resolve any dispute related to this Limited Warranty.




ELT EasyGreen® 2011 System Warranty ELT Approved Contractor hereby warrants to the Owner that for a period of 5 years from the project completion date and subject to the terms, conditions and limitations of the ELT EasyGreen® 2011 Warranty Program, ELT Approved Contractor will warrant the performance of the listed components of the ELT EasyGreen® system.

Project: System Type: Interior Living wall

Certified Contractor: ELT Canada ELT Certification #:

General Contractor: Completi on Date: Sept 11, 2009

Owner: Specifier:

Listed Components:

ELT Approved Contractor warrants ELT EasyGreen® listed components to be of good quality and manufactured to meet published data sheets and quality control standards.

ELT Approved Contractor will for a fee warrant for a period of 5 years from date of completion, the products in sufficient quantity, to replace any products proven to be defective when installed, maintained, repaired, modified and used in accordance with ELT EasyGreen® system specification 01202011 and the 2011 ELT EasyGreen® System Warranty Program.

THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND ELT CANADA LIMITED MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABIL Y, IN RESPECT OF LIVING WALL SYSTEMS, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN. ELT CANADA LIMITED SHALL NOT BE LIABLE OR OBLIGATED FOR ANY LOSS OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGE ARISING, DIRECTLY OR IN- DIRECTLY, IN RESPECT OF LIVING WALL MATERIALS OR THE USE OR FAILURE THEREOF, WHETHER BASED ON BREACH OF WARRANTY OR NEGLIGENCE.

Other required document check list:

The warranty applies to ELT EasyGreen® system components as used on this project applied by the certified ELT Contractor identified above as per the ELT EasyGreen® Specification 01202011.

Name Date President ELT Approved Contractor

I have the authority to bind the company.


p: 866.306.7773 or 416.479.0943 • f: 416.479.0943 • www.elteasygreen.com


Living Wall Panels G06WMA001

Growth Medium


Plants (tropicals)


Required Documents Status Project Information Sheet Received Maintenance Contract Received Irrigation Spec and Programs Received Proof of Purchase Received

Required Documents Status Project Picture Received Maintenance Program Received List of Vegetation Used on Project Received


.

/

'

\

,,,,·...../ /

.·

!=,bT._ Y Green® Maintenance Chec klist

Date of Inspection: _ Project Name:

_

Contrac tor:

_ Site Contact:

_

/ , /

Travel Time: _ Date of Next Inspection (week of) : _

Tas ks f or next inspection: _

Current Irrigation Program: -----------------------------

A dditional Comments: _

Site Conta ct Signature: ------------------------------

Elevated Landscape Technologies Inc. 245 King George Rd.. Suite 319, Brantford, ON N3R 7N7



ELT EasyGreen® Maintenance Contract

This agreement is between Certified Contractors Name (ELT Certified Contractor) and Clients Name for the maintenance of the Living Wall/Green Roof located at Enter Project Name and installed on the following date (MM/DD/YYYY) by Installers Name Here.

If this contract is an extension on an existing contract, proof of the existing contract must be provided (original agreement and maintenance reports).

This contract will be in place from (MM/DD/YYYY) until (MM/DD/YYYY)

. The maintenance will be done on a basis, for a total of visits per year. This will be called out on the Maintenance Schedule which must accompany this document.

Maintenance may include but not be limited to, inspection of plant health, removal of foreign objects/invasive species, setting/adjusting the irrigation in accord with climatic changes, pruning of vegetation and ensuring any areas designated as vegetation free zones are vegetation free.

A record of each visit must be kept by ELT/Certified Contractor (Maintenance Checklist) and one provided to the client. These will be required should there be any warranty claims.

ELT/ Certified Contractor:

Client Representative:

Elevated Landscape Technologies 245 King George Rd., Suite 319, Brantford, ON N3R 7N7



SECTION 10 01 00 PAGE.1 MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES DATE 29 Oct 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA ` PART I. GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included: a. Supply manufactured specialties and accessories as listed herein and

shown on the Drawings. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Products supplied by this Section installed by Section 06 20 23, Interior

Finish Carpentry b. Openings and recesses in, and installation of anchors for products of this

Section in masonry walls provided by Section 04200, Unit Masonry, Shop Drawings and anchors for same provided by this Section.

c. Openings and recesses in gypsum board walls for products of this Section

provided by Section 09250, Gypsum Board; Shop Drawings for same by this Section;

1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Shop Drawings:

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 30 00. 1.3.2 Templates:

Submit templates and instructions where recesses, openings, fastenings or anchors have to be built in by others.

1.3.3 Samples:

Promptly submit samples of products upon request. PART II. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Products: a. Incorporate reinforcing, fastenings and anchorage required for building in of

products. b. Insulate between dissimilar metals, and metal and masonry materials, to

prevent electrolysis.

SECTION 10 01 00 PAGE.2 MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES DATE 29 Oct 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA ` c. Conform to specified requirement of Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications,

for Prime paint on steel, and galvanizing requirements. 2.1.2 xx:

x

xlock. x Finish x Size: x

PART III. EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Install manufactured specialties to manufacturer's instructions and

templates, true, tightly fitted, level and flush to adjacent finishes. END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 11 10 PAGE 1 MARKERBOARDS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Supply and installation of new markerboards.

.2 Trim and Accessories


.1 Division 1 ‐ General Requirements.

.2 Section 06 10 00 ‐ Rough Carpentry.

.3 Section 06 20 23 ‐ Interior Finish Carpentry.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 AAMA‐611‐98, Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

.2 ASTM‐A653/A653M‐97, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc‐Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc‐Iron Alloy‐Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot‐Dip Process.

.3 ASTM‐A924/A924M‐96a, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic‐Coated by the Hot‐Dip Process.

.4 CAN/CSA‐A247‐M86 (R1996), Insulating Fibreboard.

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 ‐ Submittals.

.2 Indicate location, type, size, panel arrangement, backing, hardware, anchor or mounting details, frame or trim and accessories.

1.05 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 ‐ General Requirements: Submittals. .2 Submit samples if requested by the Consultant.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into the manual

specified in Section 01 77 19 ‐ General Requirements: Contract Closeout. .2 Affix removable maintenance instruction labels to markerboards.

1.07 WARRANTY

.1 Submit a warranty for markerboard writing surfaces in accordance with the

General Conditions but for a period of 10 years. .2 The warranty shall cover defects other than those due to normal wear and usage,

and shall include fading, crazing, peeling, chipping and the surface becoming slick, glassy or otherwise unsuitable for use.

SECTION 10 11 10 PAGE 2 MARKERBOARDS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Architectural School Products. (ASP)

.2 Delta Products Ltd. (DPL).

.3 Global School Products (GSP).

.4 Martack Specialities Ltd. (MSL).

2.02 MATERIALS

.1 Laminating Adhesive: to manufacturer=s standards.

.2 Joint Reinforcement: concealed mechanical jointing system to provide straight, rigid, continuously supported, tight butt, flush joints at surface.

.3 Anchor Clips, Brackets and Fasteners: concealed type for fixed mounting.

.4 Facings: .1 Steel sheet: 0.7mm thickness, commercial quality to ASTM‐A653/A653M,

pre‐cleaned and treated to ensure maximum adhesion of an acid resistant type A (for Markerboard), porcelain enamel.

.2 Core: Fibreboard, to CAN/CSA A247, 11mm thick, impregnated type.

.3 Backing: Galvanized, 0.4mm thick steel, with Z275 zinc coating to ASTM‐A924/A924M.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS AND COMPONENTS

.1 The components listed below are selected from the Product line of Architectural

School Products (ASP). Equivalent components supplied by the other companies listed in article 2.01 above are also acceptable.

.2 Markerboards: ASP, Vit‐Rite White Porcelain Enamel Markerboard.

.3 Extruded Aluminum: Aluminum Association alloy AA6063‐T5. Minimum 1.5mm thick. .4 Perimeter Trim: ASP, No. 205. .5 Divider/Joiner Trim: ASP, No. 207. .6 Maprail: ASP, No. 206, across entire width of chalkboards and markerboards. .7 Chalktray: ASP, No. 212. .8 Chalktray ‐ Single Blade (for mounting above millwork): ASP, No. 264. .9 Concealed Mechanical Joining System: Integral, slotted PVC insert laminated into

ends of panels and 25mm wide, 2mm thick galvanized steel spline.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

.1 Manufacturer’s standard accessories.

.2 Roller Map Hooks: two for each 1830mm length of maprail.

.3 End Stops: At each end of maprail.

.4 End Closures: At each end of chalktray.

.5 Cork Insert: Natural grain cork, continuous at maprail.

2.05 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate markerboard panels to sizes indicated.

SECTION 10 11 10 PAGE 3 MARKERBOARDS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

.2 Factory laminate markerboards, consisting of 0.7mm thick facing sheet with 11mm core and 0.4mm thick backing sheet. Adhesive shall be in accordance with manufacturer=s recommendations.

.3 Make finished panels flat and rigid and fit with joint reinforcement.

.4 Fit joints between abutting panels with joint reinforcement except where covering trim is required.

.5 Install trim on panels in factory. Make mitres and joints to hair‐line fit, free of rough edges. Use concealed brackets to reinforce and hold joints tight and flush. No exposed fasteners are permitted.

.6 Overlap trim 6mm onto panels. Provide closed ends for chalktrays and open‐end extrusions.

.7 Factory fit assemblies too large for shipment to site in one piece, disassemble for delivery and site assemble.

2.06 FINISHES

.1 Porcelain Enamel: To Porcelain Enamel Institute Standards PEI S104 with

regards to durability, smoothness of texture, colour continuity. Gloss factor of 6‐8 as measured by 45 degree glossometer. Surface finish for dry erasable markers and suitable for use as a projection screen: white colour.

.2 Aluminum Trim Finishes: Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum components in accordance with AAMA‐611, clear satin anodic finish, AA‐A41.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

.1 In addition to the specified Products, the work of this section shall also include the installation of markerboards supplied by the Owner. Refer to Drawings.

.2 Installation of materials shall not commence until overhead work such as mechanical, electrical, ceiling and painting is completed.

.3 Millwork that co‐ordinates with markerboards shall be in place before material is installed. .4 Install markerboards in accordance with manufacturer=s instructions, parallel to

floor with uniform vertical surface, plumb and level, to provide rigid, secure writing surface.

.5 Joints in adjoining markerboards shall be tight, hairline, butt joints properly aligned by means of continuous steel splines, let into slotted PVC inserts.

.6 Mechanical Attachment: .1 To concrete or solid masonry use lag screw and expansion bolts or screws

and fibre plugs as appropriate for stresses involved. .2 To hollow masonry use toggle bolts or equivalent. .3 To wood or sheet metal studs use screws. Secure into solid framing members

built‐in to stud partitions.

3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

.1 Adjust all operating hardware to provide smooth operation.

SECTION 10 11 10 PAGE 4 MARKERBOARDS DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

.2 Clean surfaces after installation using manufacturer=s recommended cleaning procedures.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 22 26 PAGE 1 OPERABLE PARTITIONS 07 Nov 2014

ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Structural Steel Section 05 12 23

1.2 WORK REQUIRED BY CONTRACTOR

.1 Provide all headers, blocking, support structures, jambs, track enclosures, surrounding insulation, and sound baffles as required in quality assurance.

.2 Coordinate pre-punching of support structure in accordance with approved shop drawings.

.3 Prepare opening for operable partitions. Any deviation of site conditions contrary to approved shop

drawings must be called to the attention of the Consultant.

.4 Paint or otherwise finishing all trim and other materials adjoining head and jamb of operable partitions.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 23. Drawings to note complete

construction details, dimensions, locations of supports, etc. Indicate loading which will be placed on structural support. Show imbedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support beam punching template. Show details of track, trolleys, hardware, anchorage, caulking, finishes, writing boards, and accessories. Indicate method of stacking.

.2 Submit samples of all materials as required by the Consultant.

.3 Two operating handles shall be provided to owner’s representative. Obtain signed receipt;

submit copy of receipt with maintenance data.

.4 Provide operations and maintenance data for inclusion in Maintenance Manuals specified in Section 01 33 00.

.5 Shop Drawings must bear the seal of a registered professional engineer, who shall be

responsible for the design of the partition suspension, from the building structure.


.1 Comply with all National and Local Building By-Laws and Regulations, and all Fire Marshall requirements, applicable to the Work of this Section.

.2 Fire hazard classification : ASTM E84.

.3 Sound transmission classification: ASTM E90.

.4 Noise insulation classification : ASTM E336, ASTM E413.

.5 Install in accordance with ASTM E557



1.5

.1

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per ASTM E557 Standard Practice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions.

1.6 PROTECTION

.1 Protect the Work of this Section and that of other trades from damage due to these operations. This Contractor shall make good any such damage at his own expense and to the approval of the Consultant.

1.7 WARRANTY

.1 Extend the Warranty of the Work of this Section for a period of five (5) years from completion and acceptance of work.

1.8 TRAINING

.1 Installer shall demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to owner’s representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PARTITION

.1 Omni-Directional Operable Partitions to be 5600 Series as manufactured by Corflex Inc.

.2 Partition shall have a guaranteed minimum Sound Transmission Classification of 50 or better in

accordance with ASTM- E90.

.3 Panel Construction Folding Partition: .1 Panels shall be nominally 92mm thick full perimeter extruded aluminum frame with

interlocking construction, in manufacturer’s standard widths up to1230mm. .2 Panel skins shall be of Class “A” rated material laminated to appropriate structural and

acoustical backing, mounted in full perimeter protective steel frames. Panel faces must be removable and replaceable on site. Channels made of 18 gauge steel to be installed horizontally inside every panel spaced at 610mm to 762mm c/c. Channel dimensions to be 51mm x 51mm and will insure a higher impact and torsional capacity.

.3 Frames shall fully enclose and protect all edges of the surface material. The panels framing will be made of steel with beige, grey, brown or black powder coated finish.

.4 Vertical sound seals between panels will be tongue and groove configuration consisting of steel astragals incorporating vinyl acoustical seals. An alignment moulding made of unbreakable PVC to be installed on the edge of each panel in order to insure proper alignment when setting up the panels as well as a good acoustical seal.

.5 Retractable top and bottom seals to be made from formed steel, incorporating 6mm vinyl strips for proper acoustical seal upon activating.

.6 Provide Keyed lock.



.4 Weight of the panels shall not exceed 59 kg/sq.m.

.5 Suspension system: .1 Suspension system shall consist of anodized thermally treated architectural grade extruded

aluminum track connected to the structural support by pairs of threaded rods.

.2 Each panel shall be supported by two dual horizontal wheel trolley assemblies made of glass-reinforced, self lubricating nylon with steel precision ground bearings. Carrier design shall use a counter rotating concept to move panels along the track and through 90 degree “L”, “T”, & “X” intersections. Carriers using friction discs are not permitted.

.3 Built-in ceiling trim shall be of anodized aluminum finish providing enclosure of plenum sound

barrier on both sides of track for maximum sound control.

.4 A section of track will be removable in order to make it possible for a panel to be removed from the track for later maintenance.

.6 Finishes

.1 Panel faces shall be factory applied and selected from the manufacturer’s standards.

.2 Frame colour shall be Clear Anodized Aluminum.

.3 Aluminum track and soffit shall be clear anodized.

2.2 OPERATION

.1 Panels shall be manually operated, top supported, moved individually from the storage area, positioned in the opening, and seals set.

.2 Retractable Top and Bottom Seals .1 Retractable Mechanical Top and Bottom seals shall be activated by a removable operating

handle located approximately 1050 mm from the floor in the panel edge. .2 Seal activation shall not require more than one rotation of the removable handle.

.3 Partition Closure

.1 Final partition closure to be by Lever Closure Panel. Lever panel construction to be the same as basic panels but provided with an expanding jamb operated by a removable handle. Panel shall be capable of compensating for minor out-of-plumb wall conditions and provide a positive vertical seal between partition and building structure.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE

.1 Acoustical performance shall be tested at an accredited, independent laboratory in accordance with

ASTM E90-99 or more recent Test Standards. Standard panel construction shall have obtained a minimum STC rating of 50.

.2 Copies of the written test report are to be made available upon request. Tests must have been

conducted at a laboratory available for verification of results.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND MEASUREMENT

.1 When the job is sufficiently advanced to permit the installation of folding partition, visit the Site and check the actual conditions where the partition is to be installed, to ascertain whether or not the preparation work by the preceding trades is acceptable.

.2 Check and record all dimensions which effect the manufacture and installation of the units.

Incorporate these dimensions into the Shop Drawings.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 Wipe all track and panel surfaces clean and free of handprints, grease, and soil.

.2 Remove packing and other installation debris from the job site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Do all installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, reviewed Shop Drawings and ASTM-E557.

.2 Installer must be approved by manufacturer.

3.4 TRAINING

.1 Installer shall demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's

representative.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 22 39 PAGE 1 GLASS PARTITIONS 07 Nov 2014


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Concrete Unit Masonry Section 04 22 00

1.2 WORK REQUIRED BY CONTRACTOR

.1 Provide all headers, blocking, support structures, jambs, track enclosures, surrounding insulation, and sound baffles as required in quality assurance.

.2 Coordinate pre-punching of support structure in accordance with approved shop drawings.

.3 Prepare opening for operable partitions. Any deviation of site conditions contrary to approved shop

drawings must be called to the attention of the Consultant.

.4 Paint or otherwise finishing all trim and other materials adjoining head and jamb of operable partitions.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 23. Drawings to note complete

construction details, dimensions, locations of supports, etc. Indicate loading which will be placed on structural support. Show imbedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support beam punching template. Show details of track, trolleys, hardware, anchorage, caulking, finishes, writing boards, and accessories. Indicate method of stacking.

.2 Submit samples of all materials as required by the Consultant.

.3 Two operating handles shall be provided to owner’s representative. Obtain signed receipt; submit

copy of receipt with maintenance data.

.4 Provide operations and maintenance data for inclusion in Maintenance Manuals specified in Section 01 33 00.

.5 Shop Drawings must bear the seal of a registered professional engineer, who shall be

responsible for the design of the partition suspension, from the building structure.


.1 Comply with all National and Local Building By-Laws and Regulations, and all Fire Marshall requirements, applicable to the Work of this Section.

.2 Fire hazard classification : ASTM E84.

.3 Sound transmission classification: ASTM E90.

.4 Noise insulation classification : ASTM E336, ASTM E413.

.5 Install in accordance with ASTM E557

SECTION 10 22 39 PAGE 2 GLASS PARTITIONS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

1.5

.1

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per ASTM E557 Standard Practice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions.

1.6 PROTECTION

.1 Protect the Work of this Section and that of other trades from damage due to these operations. This Contractor shall make good any such damage at his own expense and to the approval of the Consultant.

1.7 WARRANTY

.1 Extend the Warranty of the Work of this Section for a period of five (5) years from completion and acceptance of work.

1.8 TRAINING

.1 Installer shal l demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to owner’s representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PARTITION

.1 Operable Glazed Folding Partitions to be Corflex Inc. Model G-701 Series Acoustical Glasswall or

Moderco Inc. Crystal Acoustical Glass Panels

.2 Partition shall have a guaranteed minimum Sound Transmission Classification of 44 or better in accordance with ASTM E90.

.3 Panel Construction Glazed Folding Partition:

.1 Panels shall be nominally 75mm thick full perimeter extruded aluminum frame with interlocking construction, in manufacturer’s standard widths up to1230mm.

.2 Panels faces shall be thermo type glass consisting of two tempered glass panels mechanically fastened to the frame.

.3 Frames shall be a composite of steel and aluminum alloys, formed to protect the panel edges and face material.

.4 Interlocking vertical seals between the panels shall consist of tongue and groove aluminum and vinyl astragals creating a shock-absorbing, deep nesting, impact resistant acoustical interlock between panels.

.5 Horizontal bottom seals shall be mechanically retractable, providing 25mm - 50mm operating clearance, and exert downward force when extended.

.6 Horizontal top seals shall be retractable and operate simultaneously with the bottom seals. Top seals shall not make contact with the track soffit or ceiling during movement of the panels.

.7 Reinforced concealed steel corner brackets, snap-on glazing seals and gasket.

.8 Glass to be factory installed, single glazed unit with 12mm thick tempered glass.

.9 Provide Keyed lock.

SECTION 10 22 39 PAGE 3 GLASS PARTITIONS 07 Nov 2014


.4 Weight of the panels shall not exceed 59 kg/sq.m.

.5 Suspension system: .1 Track shall be clear anodized extruded aluminum with soffit trim of clear anodized

aluminum providing a transition to the ceiling. Track shall include support brackets and hanger rods, spaced to manufacturer’s standards.

.2 Each panel shall be supported by two dual horizontal wheel trolley assemblies made of glass-

reinforced, self-lubricating nylon with steel precision ground bearings. Carrier design shall use a counter rotating concept to move panels along the track and through 90 degree “L”, “T”, & “X” intersections. Carriers using friction discs are not permitted.

.3 Built-in ceiling trim shall be of anodized aluminum finish providing enclosure of plenum sound

barrier on both sides of track for maximum sound control.

.4 A section of track will be removable in order to make it possible for a panel to be removed from the track for later maintenance.

.6 Finishes

.1 Glass to be transparent finish. Decorative translucent film to be applied to the glazing is included as part of the cash allowance.

.2 Frame colour shall be Clear Anodized Aluminum.

.3 Aluminum track and soffit shall be clear anodized.

2.2 OPERATION

.1 Panels shall be manually operated, top supported, moved individually from the storage area, positioned in the opening, and seals set.

.2 Retractable Top and Bottom Seals .1 Retractable Mechanical Top and Bottom seals shall be activated by a removable operating

handle located approximately 1050 mm from the floor in the panel edge. .2 Seal activation shall not require more than one rotation of the removable handle.

.3 Partition Closure

.1 Provide telescopic closure panel incorporating an expanding jamb member operated from either side of the panel with a removable handle. Panel shall be capable of compensating for minor out-of-plumb wall conditions and provide a positive vertical seal between partition and building structure.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE

.1 Acoustical performance shall be tested at an accredited, independent laboratory in accordance with

ASTM E90-99 or more recent Test Standards. Standard panel construction shall have obtained a minimum STC rating of 44.

.2 Copies of the written test report are to be made available upon request. Tests must have been

conducted at a laboratory available for verification of results.

SECTION 10 22 39 PAGE 4 GLASS PARTITIONS 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND MEASUREMENT

.1 When the job is sufficiently advanced to permit the installation of folding partition, visit the Site and check the actual conditions where the partition is to be installed, to ascertain whether or not the preparation work by the preceding trades is acceptable.

.2 Check and record all dimensions which effect the manufacture and installation of the units.

Incorporate these dimensions into the Shop Drawings.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 Wipe all track and panel surfaces clean and free of handprints, grease, and soil.

.2 Remove packing and other installation debris from the job site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Do all installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, reviewed Shop Drawings and ASTM-E557.

.2 Installer must be approved by manufacturer.

3.4 TRAINING

.1 Installer shall demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's

representative.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 22 39 PAGE.1 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS DATE: 29 Oct14 ward99 architects Project 14019-TRCA

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Manually operated, paired panel operable partitions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Refer to Drawing A8. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified in writing by the operable partition manufacturer, as qualified to install the manufacturer's partition systems for work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Acoustical Performance: Test operable partitions in an independent acoustical laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90 test procedure to attain no less than the STC rating specified. Provide a complete and unedited written test report by the testing laboratory upon request. C. Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per ASTM E557 "Standard Practice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, finishes, installation details, and operating instructions for each type of operable partition, component, and accessory specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of operable partitions. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other construction, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, weights, conditions at openings, and at storage areas, and required installation, storage, and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, including floor tolerances required and direction of travel. Indicate blocking to be provided by others. C. Setting Drawings: Show imbedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support beam punching template. D. Samples: Color samples demonstrating full range of finishes available to architect. Verification samples will be available in same thickness and material indicated for the work.


1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering systems used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels. B. Protect panels during delivery, storage, and handling to comply with manufacturer's direction and as required to prevent damage. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty by manufacturer of operable partitions agreeing to repair or replace any components with manufacturing defects. B. Warranty period: Two (2) years from date of shipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, PRODUCTS, AND OPERATION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Modernfold, Inc. – Base Specification 2. Corflex or other manufacturers subject to approval by the architect B. Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product: 1. Acousti-Seal #932 manually operated paired panel operable partition. 2.2 OPERATION A. Acousti-Seal #932: Series of paired flat panels hinged together in pairs, manually operated, top supported with operable floor seals. B. Final Closure: 1. Hinged panel closure 2.3 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. Nominal 3-inch (76mm) thick panels in manufacturer's standard 48-inch (1220mm) widths. All panel horizontal and vertical framing members fabricated from minimum 18-gauge formed steel with overlapped and welded corners for rigidity. Top channel is reinforced to support suspension system components. Frame is designed so that full vertical edges of panels are of formed steel and provide concealed protection of the edges of the panel skin. B. Panel Skin:


1. 0.50-inch (13mm) tackable fire core C gypsum board, class "A" rated single material or composite layers continuously bonded to panel frame. Acoustical ratings of panels with this construction: a. 50 STC C. Hinges for Panels: 1. Full leaf butt hinges, attached directly to panel frame with welded hinge anchor plates within panel to further support hinge mounting to frame. Hinges mounted into panel edge or vertical astragal are not acceptable. D. Panel Trim: No vertical trim required or allowed on edges of panels; minimal groove appearance at panel joints. E. Panel Weights: Non-Steel Skin with White Boards 1. 50 STC - 9 lbs./square foot 2.4 PANEL FINISHES – Refer to drawings for extent of finishes A. Panel Finish: Factory applied, Class "A" rated material. Finish shall be: : 1. Corkboard / Tackboard: Minimum 0.25-inch (6.35mm) cork, Forbo – Charcoal Grey 2204, horizontal trim without exposed fasteners. Trim is not acceptable on vertical edges. and 2. Partial height steel work surfaces : Dry-erase Markerboard: White enamel on steel, bonded to the face of the panel with horizontal trim without exposed fasteners. Trim is not acceptable on vertical edges to provide uninterrupted work surface. Magnetic capability. B. Panel Trim: Exposed panel trim of one consistent color (Smoke Gray). 2.5 SOUND SEALS A. Vertical Interlocking Sound Seals between panels: Roll-formed steel astragals, with reversible tongue and groove configuration in each panel edge for universal panel operation. Rigid plastic astragals or astragals in only one panel edge are not acceptable.


B. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous contact extruded vinyl bulb shape with pairs of non-contacting vinyl fingers to prevent distortion without the need for mechanically operated parts. C. Horizontal Bottom Seals shall be : 1. Modernfold IA2 Bottom seal. Automatic operable seals providing nominal 2-inch (51mm) operating clearance with an operating range of +0.50-inch (13mm) to -1.50-inch (38mm) which automatically drop as panels are positioned, without the need for tools or cranks. 2.6 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. #17 Suspension System 1. Suspension Tracks: Minimum 11-gauge, 0.12-inch (3.04mm) roll-formed steel track, suitable for either direct mounting to a wood header or supported by adjustable steel hanger brackets, supporting the load-bearing surface of the track, connected to structural support by pairs of 0.38-inch (10mm) diameter threaded rods. Aluminum track is not acceptable. a. Exposed track soffit: Steel, integral to track, and pre-painted off-white. 2. Carriers: One all-steel trolley with steel tired ball bearing wheels per panel (except hinged panels). Non-steel tires are not acceptable. 2.7 ACCESSORIES 1. Recessed shelf – both sides PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM E557, operable partition manufacturer's written installation instructions, Drawings and approved Shop Drawings. B. Install operable partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting have been completed. C. Match operable partitions by installing panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed or unmatched panels are not acceptable. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean partition surfaces upon completing installation of operable partitions to remove dust, dirt, adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer and


installer that insure operable partitions are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable partitions to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 3.4 EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable partitions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's representative. B. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual to Owner's representative.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 28 13 PAGE 1 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project TRCA-14019 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Work Included: a. Supply Shower Room and Wellness Room curtains and tracks as listed

herein and shown on the Drawings. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Products supplied by this Section installed by Section 06 20 23, Finish

Carpentry. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Shop Drawings:

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Incorporate drawings into operation and maintenance manuals 1.3.2 Templates:

Submit templates and instructions where fastenings or anchors have to be built in by others.

1.3.3 Samples:

Promptly submit samples of products upon request. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Products: a. Incorporate reinforcing, fastenings and anchorage required for building in of

products. b. Insulate between dissimilar metals, and metal and masonry materials, to

prevent electrolysis. 2.1.2 Shower Curtain and Rail System:

a. Shower Curtain: anti-bacterial, fire-resistant, self-extinguishing shower

curtain, 10% wider than opening covered. Provide curtain hold-back hooks and chains at each curtain.

b. Acceptable Product: Quality Stage Drapery Ltd., Trail Shower and Cubicle Curtain, colour to be selected by the Consultant.

SECTION 10 28 13 PAGE 2 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects Project TRCA-14019

c. Shower Curtain Rail System: Suspended hospital type curtain track,

anodized extruded aluminium, length and configuration as shown on drawings. Provide complete with suspension tubing anchored to slab and all required fittings and hardware.

d. Tracks shall be ceiling mounted directly to the suspended T-bar system

using appropriate clip and fasteners.

e. Acceptable Product: Quality Stage Drapery Ltd., Series 2000 Suspended Cubicle Curtain Track System

2.1.3 Privacy Curtain and Track: a. Track - Acceptable Manufacturer: Quality Stage Drapery Ltd. (QSD). Celling mounted track, QSD, Model No. 2001, anodized extruded aluminium. b. Tracks shall be ceiling mounted directly to the suspended T-bar system

using appropriate clip and fasteners. QSD Model No. 2005 nylon roller carriers with swivel hooks shall be supplied 150mm on centre. QSD Model No. 2007 removable end stop with pull out for adding carriers shall be installed at one end of the track. A QSD Model No. 2015 end stop shall be installed at the other end of the track.

c. Privacy Curtain – Acceptable Manufacturer: Quality Stage Drapery Ltd.

(QSD). d. Curtain shall be manufactured in QSD Trenton fabric, 100% Treveria

Polyester, 201/2 oz. per linear yard, inherently flame proofed, Colour will be selected by the Consultant. The fabric shall be railroaded and seamless in one piece knit construction woven with an integral mesh. The header shall be manufactured from a 100mm fabric into a triple header and grommeted 150mm o.c. with No. 1 nickel plated grommets. The sides and bottom hems shall be 25mm double turned. The height of the curtain shall extend from just below the bottom of the track to within 400mm of the floor. The curtain shall be manufactured 10% wider than the track. Curtains shall be supplied with a permanent sew-in label indicating the height and width of each drape. The sewing workmanship of privacy curtains to be equal or surpass industry standards.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Install manufactured specialties to manufacturer's instructions and

templates, true, tightly fitted, level and flush to adjacent finishes. 3.1.2 Locate accessories where indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 1 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

1.1.1 Comply with requirements of Division 1.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

1.2.1 Supply all faucets, pre-rinse fixtures, pot fillers, pressure reducing valves, check valves, anti-syphon devices and backflow preventers as required to conform to applicable codes.

1.2.2 Supply equipment complete with all electrical equipment, motors, control devices, electrical pony panels, motor starting switches complete with thermal overload protective devices, disconnect switches, heating elements, receptacles complete with stainless steel cover plates, junction boxes, pilot light, light fixtures, light bulbs, wiring materials, supply cords complete with attachment on portable equipment as shown on drawings and hereinafter specified and as may be required to form fully operative and approved equipment.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

1.3.1 Division 16 00 00: Supply wiring and circuit breakers as specified in Division 16 00 00 for all Food Service Equipment, through to the junction box, load centre or wiring terminal located on the equipment. Remotely located motor starting switches required for equipment mounted, wired and connected.

1.3.2 Division 15 00 00: Mechanical service connections to equipment complete with shut-off valves for each item, traps, floor drains, elbows, etc. All labour that may be required by any union agreement to handle this equipment.

1.3.3 Division 15 00 00: Condensate drain lines from equipment c/w traps and cleanouts piped to discharge over open drains. (Excluding evaporator coils in refrigerated walk-in coolers).

1.3.4 Section 03300: Concrete curbs, pads and bases, condenser wood sleepers, depressed floor areas, expansion joints and floor insulation.

1.3.5 Section 09665: Resilient sheet or ceramic flooring in food service areas.

1.4 CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES

1.4.1 Co-operate with the General Contractor and other Contractors to permit proper execution of the work.

1.4.2 Give timely instructions and information in writing to the General Contractor of the requirements necessary for surfaces, materials or inserts prepared and/or supplied by other Trades which will affect the work of this Section.

1.4.3 Provide all roughing-in dimensions and information regarding Mechanical and Electrical connections, including floor drains, utility or special purpose receptacles and details of all depressed floor areas, curbs and bulkheads.

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 2 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1 The work of this section shall be executed by one of the following Food Service Equipment Contractors.

Nella Cutlery & Food Equipment Inc., Mississauga, Ont. Hendrix Food Service Equipment, Pickering, Ont. Williams Food Equipment, Windsor, Ont. P.V.A. Enterprises Inc., Concord, Ont. European Hotel & Restaurant Imports Ltd., Etobicoke Sani Metal Industries Ltd., Quebec, Quebec

1.6 SUBMITTALS

Submit (1) one set of shop drawings in PDF format on 11 x 17 paper size minimum to clearly show assembly, method and location of exposed fastenings and installation details for review. Reviewed and marked up PDF will be returned to the Contractor. Do not proceed with fabrication until respective shop drawings are reviewed. In preparing shop drawings the fabricator shall verify that all component parts and assembly of each item will support the superimposed loads without deflection detrimental to function, appearance, safety or in excess of applicable bylaws.

1.6.1 Items of equipment to be manufactured by this Section, or to be manufactured by others, shall be completely illustrated by shop drawings, or catalogue cuts and detailed description.

1.6.2 Review of the drawings shall be general and shall not be intended to serve as a check, and shall not relieve this Trade from responsibility or from furnishing the materials as required in the drawings and specification.

1.6.3 Submit roughing in drawings within 30 days of receiving the award or letter of intent.

1.6.4 Floor plans and roughing-in drawings shall not be less than 1:25 scale. Equipment drawings shall be 1:10 scale plan with sections at 1:10 in sufficient number to clearly illustrate construction. Details of fitments shall be half of full size. All welds, supports and fasteners shall be clearly indicated. Overall drawing size shall match Architectural drawings.

1.7 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

1.7.1 Electrical equipment shall comply with the requirements of the Canadian Standards Association and/or local code inspection requirements and each item of such equipment shall be accompanied by certificate or label of approval.

1.7.2 Equipment design shall comply with provincial and local municipal health department requirements and current Ontario Building Codes.

1.7.3 Steam equipment shall comply with the requirements of the inter provincial code covering such equipment as well as local requirements and shall be provided with a certificate or label of approval.

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 3 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA 1.7.4 Gas equipment shall comply with the requirements of the Canadian Gas

Association as well as requirements of the local authority and each item shall be provided with a CGA certificate or label of approval.

1.8 WARRANTY

1.8.1 Warrant the equipment against defects of materials or workmanship which may develop within a period of one year from the date of completion of the project. Replace defective equipment which cannot be made good.

1.9 INSPECTION

1.9.1 Inspection of the Food Service Equipment will be carried out by the Architect or his representative.

1.10 IDENTIFICATION

1.10.1 Provide pressure sensitive plastic labels to identify all controls. Lettering to be white on black.

1.10.2 Demonstrate the function of equipment to the Owner, at a time specified prior to opening of these facilities. Demonstration shall be carried out by a competent representative who shall also be present on the day designated for facilities start up.

1.10.3 Explain and demonstrate maintenance procedures for the equipment. Provide three (3) three complete sets of operating instructions and maintenance manuals and shop drawings of fabricated equipment, hard cover bound, itemized and in sequence according to plan, prior to opening demonstration.

1.11 SERVICES

1.11.1 Electrical supply available shall be as indicated on equipment schedule. Motors shall be 1200 or 1725 R.P.M. Outlets, conductors, shall be as specified under electrical section. Conductors shall be identified.

1.11.2 Fit portable electrical equipment with supply cords and attachment caps in accordance with the electrical characteristics and outlets specified for the equipment complete with necessary grounding conductor within the outer jacket of the supply cord.

1.11.3 Water will be supplied at local pressure. Provide pressure reducing valves where required for proper operation of the equipment.

1.12 PRICE BREAKDOWN

1.12.1 Submit itemized individual prices for each item of equipment herein specified together with all taxes applicable for each item.

1.12.2 Prices shall be tendered for the exact brand of manufactured items specified.

1.13 MATERIAL VARIATIONS

1.13.1 Throughout the specifications, types of materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer's name and model number in order to establish minimum standards of quality and performance. Unless specifically stated

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 4 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA

otherwise the phrase "or approved equal" may be assumed to apply. It is the responsibility of the bidder to prove such equality.

1.13.2 Proposed substitutions to equipment specified shall be listed under material variations on the tender form. Such listing shall indicate material, make and model and complete specifications where appropriate and shall state what difference, if any, will be made in the amount of the tender for each substitution should it be accepted. Later requests will not be considered.

1.14 DIMENSIONS

1.14.1 Unless specifically designated otherwise, all dimensions specified herein are expressed in millimetres.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS

2.1.1 Materials shall be new, first grade. Thickness herein specified shall be standard gauge for sheet and plates.

2.1.2 Wall thickness for tubular material shall be nominal and established after polishing.

2.1.3 Stainless steel shall be 18-8, type 302 or 304, number 4 finishes on exposed sides, unless otherwise specified. Hand ground finishes will not be acceptable.

2.1.4 Galvanized steel wherever specified shall be copperbearing sheet, 350 grams per square metre hot galvanized and finished with one coat of primer (conforming to C.G.S.B specification 85-GP-16M) and one coat of silver grey hammerloid.

2.1.5 Feet shall be bullet shaped stainless steel with minimum internal adjustment of 40 mm.

2.1.6 Hardware shallbe nickel chrome plated, .127 mm thickness minimum, bright finish, unless otherwise specified.

2.1.7 Fastenings, screws, bolts, nuts etc., shall be stainless steel, type 302 or 304.

2.1.8 Casters shall be stem or plate mounted as required, diameter of wheel as specified. Units with swivel casters shall have locking devices on two swivel casters (unless foot lock is specified). All casters to have non marking cushion rubber wheels with thread guards.

2.1.9 Faucets and valves shall be supplied including pre-rinse fixtures, pot fillers, pressure reducing valves, check valves and anti-syphon valves as required for the proper operation of equipment.

2.1.10 Insulation shall be glass fibre batts, 50 mm minimum thickness with minimum density of 17.6 kg. per cubic metre.

2.2 WELDING

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 5 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA 2.2.1 Method -electric seamless using low carbon filler rod containing sufficient

chromium and nickel to give approximately the same composition in welds as adjoining parts. Heli-arc welding method shall be used wherever practical. Welds shall be complete welds, strong and ductile.

2.2.2 Workmanship -free from pits, cracks, discolouration and other mechanical imperfections.

2.2.3 Joints - invisible butt welded, properly jigged and ground smooth.

2.2.4 Finish - ground smooth and polished to match adjacent surfaces. NOTE: Spot welding, rivetting or filling with solder not acceptable.

2.3 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

2.3.1 Surfaces of countertops, dish tables, drainboards, etc. shall be one piece construction. All joints, including field joints, shall be welded and polished.

2.3.2 Items shall be adequately reinforced and braced to support the expected superimposed loads and be absolutely rigid with no buckling or deflection.

2.3.3 Body front on cabinets shall be welded and polished to simulate one piece construction.

2.3.4 Finished work shall be true and plumb with no open seams or rough edges.

2.3.5 Openings for connections of plumbing and other services shall be die-stamped.

2.3.6 Plumbing and electrical service connections shall be made horizontal from the wall or bulkhead etc. at the highest point possible for a direct in line connection.

2.3.7 Obtain necessary information of china, trays, baskets, or pans and any other necessary information to determine exact dimensions of openings for trucks, dispensers, angle slides, compartment dish racks, etc.

2.3.8 Millwork cabinets shall be constructed of plastic laminate on 19 mm thick waterproof plywood dowelled, glued and screwed. (MDF board is not accepted) Interior of cabinets shall be finished with white plastic laminate throughout. Exterior finish shall be plastic laminate as selected.

2.4 WORK TABLE CONSTRUCTION

2.4.1 Top: 1.6 mm s.s. on galvanized sub top. Height: 890 mm from floor unless otherwise specified. Edges: Boxed: Turned down 40 mm and in 15 mm at 45 degrees. Dished and Boxed: Up 15 mm at 45 deg., out 25 mm and down 40 mm

and in 15 mm at 45 degrees. Down Flat: Turned down 40 mm. Splash: Up and Folded: Turned up height as shown and folded down 15 mm. Rolled up and Boxed: Rolled up on radius of 10 mm on horizontal plane

to height specified, turned out 25 mm and down 15 mm.

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 6 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA 2.4.2 Base: Legs and crossrails of 1.6 mm 42 mm (outside diameter) s.s.

tubing, mitred and welded. Inserted through saddle and welded. 2.4.3 Saddles: 2.0 mm s.s. 100 x 25 mm top hat type fully enclosed stud

welded to underside of table top. 2.4.4 Tables up to 2000 mm in length shall (4) four legs and longer tables 6,

unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings.

2.4.5 Undershelves: 1.6 mm s.s. as specified for individual items, removable in sections formed over crossrails at front and sides down 25 mm and in 15 mm at joint. Where side splash is specified the sides shall be turned up 75 mm and folded 15 mm. Shelves shall be 250 mm from the floor unless otherwise specified.

2.4.6 Overshelves: 1.6 mm s.s. turned down 25 mm and under 15 mm at 45 degrees front and sides.

2.4.7 Backsplash: Top shelf turned up 40 mm and out 30 mm over top of tube support and down 15 mm ends closed. Intermediate shelves turned up 40 mm and folded down 15 mm. Shelves supported on 25 x 25 mm x 1.6 mm s.s. square tube uprights with horizontal cantilever supports of 25 x 25 mm x 1.6 mm s.s. square tubing fully welded and polished. Uprights inserted through table splash fully welded around uprights at splash and fastened to saddle.

2.5 SINK CONSTRUCTION

2.5.1 Material: 2.0 mm s.s. drainboard and splash fully welded one piece.

2.5.2 Compartments: Vertical and bottom corners radiused 40 mm with bottom scored and sloped to drain.

2.5.3 Corner Drains: 38 mm dia. s.s. corner waste c/w 250 mm high brass chrome plated overflow tube with plastic seat. Assembly installed in sink corner c/w 1.2mm s.s. perforated guard removable on s.s. clips. Drain attached by means of lock nut and washer to die stamped recess. Drain outlet c/w brass tailpiece.

2.5.4 Lever drains: 38 mm dia. s.s. centre lever waste as manufactured by Klein or Kenco with s.s. crumb cup drain basket or s.s. perforated plate. Drain outlet c/w brass tail piece.

2.5.5 Legs and Crossrails: 40 mm (outside diameter) 1.6 mm s.s. tubing mitred and fully welded, feet as specified. Legs to be attached to sink by means of s.s. leg gussets.

2.5.6 Edges: Front and ends rolled up on 9 mm radius 65 mm to 75 mm, out 40 mm, down 40 mm and under 15 mm at 45 degrees.

2.5.7 Splash: Where shown rolled up on 10 mm radius to height of 250 mm and back 50 mm at 45 degrees and down 15 mm.

2.5.8 Drainboards: 826 mm from floor rolled up 63 mm at outside edge with 15 mm slope to sink. Front edge to be straight horizontal line.

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 7 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA 2.5.9 Faucets: Wall or deck mount commercial quality Kason, T&S, Encore or

Fisher as specified for individual items. All faucets shall be brass with nickel chrome plate on exposed parts and shall be complete with integral stops on wall mounted faucets s.s. valve stems, replaceable seats, tubular swing spouts and aerators and hooded lever handles.

2.6 COUNTER CONSTRUCTION

2.6.1 Top: 1.6 mm s.s. on galvanized sub top all welded formed down 40 mm and in 20 mm. Food well openings turned down 25 mm with corners welded and polished or 12 mm thick Solid Surface (as selected by Architect) on 19 mm plywood subtop.

2.6.2 Body: 1.0 mm s.s. turned in 40 mm, back 40 mm and returned 40 mm at openings, unless double wall is specified in which case omit 40 mm return. Where units occur on a curb base, toe space shall be 100 mm with overhang completely enclosed and sealed with clear colourless silicone sealant to 19-GP-18 M87.

2.6.3 Intermediate Shelf: 1.6 mm s.s. mounted on s.s. pilasters for adjustment on 25 mm centres. Pilasters to extend to within 50 mm of top and bottom. Shelf edge to turn down 25 mm and in 15 mm at front and sides with corners welded. Shelf rear turned up 75 mm and folded with 25 mm gap at rear of shelf and cabinet. At single gable pilasters shall be mounted on 40 mm s.s. fully enclosed channels for easy removal of shelf. Where removable undershelf is specified it shall be mounted on 100 mm long s.s. pilaster strip complete with s.s. clips for removal.

2.6.4 Bottom: 1.6 mm s.s. with rear and (2) two sides turned up 40 mm with corner welded, front turned down 40 mm and boxed.

2.6.5 Saddle: 2.0 mm galvanized 25 x 100 mm top hat type, fully enclosed.

2.6.6 Legs and Feet: 40 mm (outside diameter) s.s. tubing and adjustable feet as specified.

2.6.7 Overshelves: 1.6 mm s.s. turned down 25 mm and in 15 mm on all edges. Uprights 25 mm sq. s.s. tubing inserted through top and fully welded around upright at counter top.

2.6.8 Sneeze Guards: 9 mm tempered glass on s.s. square tube upright framing mounted as shown with 40 mm air gap at top and bottom.

2.6.9 Locks: Doors and drawers complete with chrome plated cylinder locks, keyed alike.

2.6.10 Lights: Low profile slim line fluorescent cool white tube light mounted to underside of overshelves c/w 1.0 mm s.s. light guard constructed as shown. Light wired through on/off switch mounted in control panel c/w s.s. cover plate. Furnish fixtures c/w lamps.

2.6.11 Sink Compartments: As specified for sink construction with s.s. crumbcup waste assembly.

2.7 HINGED DOOR

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 8 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA 2.7.1 Doors: 1.0 mm s.s. double pan construction with 15 mm honeycomb

interior deadening. Liner 1.0 mm s.s. #4 finish.

2.7.2 Handle: As specified for utility drawers.

2.7.3 Hinge: Continuous s.s. piano hinge 30 mm minimum.

2.7.4 Catch: Roller bearing friction catch.

2.7.5 Lock: Cylinder type as specified for drawers, keyed alike, chrome plated.

2.8 REMOVABLE PANELS

2.8.1 Material: 1.2 mm s.s. with all edges turned in 15 mm & boxed with corners rigidized with 100 x 100 x 2.5 mm s.s. gusset in each corner. Panel removable with friction catches at top & seating pins at bottom. Panels louvered as specified for individual items.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Supply, deliver and set in place all equipment in accordance with these specifications ready for service connections by mechanical and electrical trades.

3.2 DELIVERY

3.2.1 Unless specifically noted otherwise, items specified under this section shall be supplied to be built in as work progresses.

3.2.2 Protect with heavy suitable wrapping all work before delivery. Wrappings shall remain until final clean up.

3.3 JOB MEASUREMENTS

3.3.1 Visit the job and take measurements necessary to ensure accurate and proper fitting of this work into the building and around all obstructions or projections already in place and/or shown on the drawings and to suit the locations of service piping all as required to produce a neat, workmanlike installation.

3.3.2 Make up the equipment in sections which can easily be handled into and through the building to the final location without alteration or damage to the building or fitments already in place.

3.4 SUPERVISION

3.4.1 Provide a competent supervisor for the installation of the equipment capable of supplying such information as may be required by other trades for the proper connection and completion of this contract.

3.5 DEBRIS

3.5.1 Promptly remove from the site all debris and excess materials resulting from the work of this contract.

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 9 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA 3.6 CLEANING

3.6.1 Clean and wipe down equipment to a dust free state. 3.7 EXISTING EQUIPMENT

3.7.1 Existing equipment being reused is presently operational in the existing kitchen. Equipment scheduled for relocation shall be disconnected from existing mechanical and electrical services by General Contractor and stored in owner’s designated storage area. This section shall dismantle as required any equipment designated for rework or refurbish to exit the building, transport, rework as specified, and reinstall in new location ready for service connections.

3.7.2 It shall be the responsibility of the owners to ensure that existing equipment being reused is in operating and serviceable condition and satisfactory appearance. This contractor shall advise the owners in writing of any malfunction or deficiency observed during installation, rework or start-up of the existing equipment. Failure to report obvious malfunctions of existing equipment will be taken as assurance that all equipment is found to be operational and suitable for installation. This Section shall undertake responsibility and bear the costs to repair equipment found to be defective in the absence of such report.

3.8 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT

Item 1 Refrigerator (Reach-in) Quantity: 1 Size: 1375 x 750 x 1991 mm high. Type: True T Series reach in solid freezer model T-49R

c/w door locks and Celsius dial indicating thermometer.

Finish: Stainless Steel. Alt. Manufactures: Beverage Air, Kelvinator, Randell Item 2 Freezer (Reach-in) Quantity: 1 Type: True T Series reach in solid freezer model T-49F c/w

door locks and Celsius dial indicating thermometer. Finish: Stainless Steel. Alt. Manufactures: Beverage Air, Kelvinator, Randell Item 3 Storage Shelving Quantity: 1 Type: Metropolitan Wire adjustable Super Erecta wire

shelving. (1) - 760 x 356 x 2210 mm high. Extra: 125 mm dia. casters, (2) two c/w brakes. Alt. Manufacturer: Cambro Camshelving Element Series Item 4 Utility Cart

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 10 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA Quantity: 1 Type: Metro Wire myCart Series polymer utility cart model

MY2030. Construction: Polymer moulded shelves (3) three with nickel

chrome plated uprights 125 mm dia. casters. Colour: Gray. Item 5 Hand Wash Sink Quantity: 1 Size: 432 x 381 x 350 mm Type: Distex model THS-1 hand wash sink c/w T&S 1146

and 132X 104 centre goose neck wall mount faucet, duo strainer and wall bracket.

Towel Dispenser: Bobrick B263 wall mount paper towel dispenser. Soap dispenser: Bobrick B 2112 liquid wall mount soap dispenser. Note: Mount dispensers at rear wall above sink. Alt. Manufacturer: Tarrison Item 6 Dishwashing Table Quantity: 1 Size: 2775 x 750 x 890 mm high. Construction: S.s. all welded as specified for dishtable

construction. Top: 1.6 mm s.s. with front and right hand side dished

and boxed, at rear and left hand side, splash rolled up 200 mm and splayed and sealed to wall.

Sink Compartment: 450 x 550 x 300 mm deep sloped to centre waste. Drain Wastes: Lever waste assemblies in all compartments. Rail Assembly: (1) one set, 25 mm dia. s.s. tube rail assembly

removable and flanged to hang over sink compartment to allow movement of dish racks across compartment.

Pre-Rinse sink: (1) one 525 x 525 x 300 mm deep sloped to centre waste c/w crumb cup waste assembly.

Pre-Rinse Basket: (1) one (2) two piece 1.2 mm s.s. all welded with perforated bottom and solid sides c/w 12 mm dia. s.s. tube crossrails, basket 125 mm deep to hang over sink as shown.

Pre-Rinse Hose & Faucet: Splash mount pre-rinse faucet T & S model B-0133-

01 c/w “add a faucet” integral check valves, water saver spray valve, s.s flexible hose and wall hook.

Gussets, Saddles: Legs, Bracing As shown with bracing arranged for grease trap and

garbage can storage below. Item 6A Overshelf System Quantity: 2 sections

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 11 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA Size: (1) one 1219 mm long. (1) one 914 mm long. Type: Metro Smartwall shelf system consisting of the

following Components : (1) – SW36K3 Wall track (1) – SW48K3 Wall track (4) – SWU30K3 Uprights- 750 mm long (2) – PR1848NK3 shelves (2) – PR1836NK3 shelves (4) – SWS18K3 Single shelf support Installation: Anchor to rear wall 1524 mm A.F.F over

dishwashing table. Item 7 Dishwasher (Undercounter) Existing, re-use Type: Champion 401HT Item 8 Garbage Can & Dolly Quantity: 2 Type: Rubbermaid model 2620 garbage can and 2640

dolly.

Item 9 Grab & Go Merchandiser Quantity: 1 Size: 1524 x 826 x 2018 mm high. Type: Structural Concepts Oasis series Self Serve

Refrigerated Merchandiser model C057R. Unit c/w evaporator pan, lights and approved cord & plug.

Finish: Standard, black plastic laminate exterior panels Extra: - Retractable night curtain. - Clean Sweep coil cleaner. - Metal Shelves, lighted (LED) Item 10 Number not used. Item 11 Grease Interceptor N.I.C, By Division 15 00 00 Capacity: 35 G.P.M Item 12 Coffee/Tea Counter Quantity: 1 Size: 1800 x 950 x 864 mm high. Construction: Plastic laminate (to Architect’s Selection) on 18 mm

thick plywood glued and screwed as shown. Top: Plastic laminate (Nevamar, Silver Alu Metalx

)(MXT003 on 18 mm thick plywood with front and ends formed as shown with 38 mm wide edge, splash at rear rolled 100 mm and boxed.

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 12 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA Intermediate Shelf: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58)

on 18 mm thick plywood removable on pilaster strips.

Hinged Door: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) on 18 mm thick plywood doors c/w invisible hinges and integral finger pull as detailed.

Base: 38 x 100 mm built-up plywood perimeter base to support unit.

Kick plate: 1.2 mm s.s. removable finishing kick plate at front and sides scribed to floor.

Item 13 Hot Water Dispenser Existing, re-use Item 14 Number not used. Item 15 Thermal Coffee Servers Quantity: 4 Type: Bunn insulated thermal server coffee containers

2.5 litre capacity. Units to suit coffee maker item 16. Finish: Standard, black. Equipment: Standard, including brew through lid for cleaning and

direct coffee maker filling. Extras: Booster base Item 16 Coffee Brewer Quantity: 2 Size: 229 x 470 x 701 mm high. Type: Bunn Thermal Server Coffee Brewer model CWTF

TS c/w hot water faucet and approved cord and plug.

Installation: Install on counter item 18 as shown connected through water filter.

Water Filter: Everpure model QC71-4FC-S c/w #9692-31 cartridge water filter installed below item 18 in water supply line.

Item 17 Ice Maker Quantity: 1 Size: 600 x 700 x 990 mm high. Type: Ice-O-Matic model ICEU220 Self-Contained Cuber

with built-in storage bin to produce half cube ice. Automatic 251 lb ice production per 24 hrs with 73 lb. storage bin.

Finish: Standard for built in installation. Installation: Locate as shown below item 18 connected through


water filter specified for item 16. Alt. Manufacturers: Hoshizaki, Scotsman, Manitowoc Item 18 Back Bar Counter Quantity: 1 Size: 5400 approx. x 750 x 915 mm high. Construction: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58)

on 19 mm thick plywood glued and screwed as shown. Counter base cabinet open for ice maker at right hand end and open base for garbage can location (as shown).

Top: Plastic laminate (Nevamar, Silver Alu Metalx MXT003) on 19 mm plywood with front and ends formed as shown with 38 mm wide edge, splash at rear rolled 100 mm and boxed.

Sink Compartment: S.s sink bowl Aristaline Model LBS7510P-1, sloped to drain, c/w deck mount faucet and centre crump cup waste assembly.

Intermediate Shelf: Plastic laminate on 19 mm thick plywood removable on pilaster strips.

Hinged Door: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) on 19 mm thick plywood doors c/w invisible hinges, cylinder locks and s.s. pull.

Drawers: (3) three plastic laminated flush mount drawers to match doors as shown on heavy duty slides c/w cylinder locks and s.s. pulls.


Kick plate: 1.2 mm s.s. removable finishing kick plate scribed to floor.

Item 19 Rotary Toaster Quantity: 1 Size: 368 x 577 x 349 mm high. Type: Hatco model TQ400 conveyor bread and bun

toaster electrically operated 2.8 kw. 208/1/60. Unit c/w approved cord & plug.

Alt. Manufacturers: Hollman, Belleco Item 20, 21 Numbers not used Item 22 Panini Press Quantity: 1 Size: 610 x 432 x 550 mm high. Type: Sodir model Majestic electric Panini press c/w

smooth top and bottom plates at right and grooved top and bottom plates at left. Unit c/w Nema L6-30P cord and plug.

Item 23 Soup Warmer

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 14 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA Quantity: 2 Type: Wells model LLSC11 Soup Cooker/Warmer 11

quart capacity. c/w s.s. insert and lid. Extras: - 11 quart s.s. additional insert

- S.s. ladle. Item 24 Slicer Quantity: 1 Type: Globe G-Series Medium duty manual slicer model

G14. Blade: 350 mm dia. Equipment: Standard, knife sharpener and approved cord and

plug. Extra: Permanent knife safety guard. Alt. Manufacturers: Omega, Hobart Item 25 Microwave Oven Existing, re-use Item 26 Side Counter Quantity: 1 Size: 2725 x 750 x 915 mm high. Construction: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58)

on 19 mm thick plywood glued and screwed as shown. Counter base cabinet open for ice maker at right hand end and less base for garbage can location.

Top: Plastic laminate (Nevamar, Silver Alu Metalx MXT003) on 19 mm plywood with front and ends formed as shown with 38 mm wide edge, splash at rear rolled 100 mm and boxed.


Hinged Door: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) on 19 mm thick plywood doors c/w invisible hinges, cylinder locks and s.s. pull.



Item 27 Counter Top Bake Oven Quantity: 1 Size: 750 x 712 x 690 mm high. Type: Doyon DCO Series model DC05 Countertop electric

bake oven. Capacity: (5) five half sheet pans. Item 28 Pastry Display Case

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 15 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA Quantity: 1 Size: 650 x 600 x 500 mm high. Type: Hubert Counter Top Display Case model 65942 c/w

hinged flip up clear acrylic front doors and hinged rear loading doors.

Item 29 Front Service Counter Quantity: 1 Size: 5235 x 1050 x 864 mm high. Construction: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58)

on 19 mm thick plywood glued and screwed as shown. Counter base cabinet open for item 33.

Top: Plastic laminate Nevamar, Silver Alu Metalx MXT003) on 19 mm plywood with ends formed as shown with 38 mm wide edge. Top cut for item 32. At side wall, splash height to match item 26 splash height.


Electrical Outlets: (4) four Nema 5-15R receptacles recessed and mounted as shown c/w s.s. cover plates wired to electrical junction box mounted below.

Front Panels: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) on 19 mm thick plywood at front and side as shown c/w plastic laminate backing sheet. Front panel slotted at item 32 compressor location for ventilation – (10) 310mm x 12mm slots with 19mm spaces between slots. Slot edges to be painted black.

Cash Drawer: (1) one CHG stainless steel cash drawer assembly model no. S95-1000 c/w tray, integral handle and cylinder lock mounted at left hand end of counter.



Item 29A Overshelf/Breathshield Quantity: 1 Overshelf: 1450 mm long x 300 x 9 mm tempered glass

mounted on brackets with screws c/w rubber spacers and capped with chrome plated end caps.

Shelf Brackets: 25 x 50 mm s.s. all welded upright brackets c/w flanges as detailed secured to plastic laminate top with counter sunk screws.

Breathshield: 1450 mm long x 457 mm x 9 mm thick tempered glass secured to overshelf uprights with screws c/w rubber spacers and capped with chrome plated end caps.

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 16 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA Item 30,31 Numbers not used. Item 32 Refrigerated Pan (Built-in) Quantity: 1 Type: Hatco model CWB-3 Built-in self-rimming

refrigerated cold pan c/w pan drain and cord and plug.

Installation: Install cold pan in item 29 top opening to manufacturer’s installation instructions with drain terminating over open floor drain.

Alt. Manufacturing: Vollrath, Wells Manufacturing Item 32A Overshelf/Sneezegaurd Quantity: 1 Overshelf: 1325 mm long x 300 x 9 mm tempered glass

mounted on brackets with screws c/w rubber spacers and capped with chrome plated end caps.

Shelf Brackets: 25 x 50 mm s.s. all welded upright brackets c/w flanges as detailed secured to plastic laminate top with counter sunk screws.

Sneezegaurd: 1325 mm long x 135 mm x 9 mm thick tempered glass secured to overshelf uprights with screws c/w rubber spacers and capped with chrome plated end caps.

Item 33 Salad/Sandwich Refrigerator Quantity: 1 Size: 1229 x 787 x 934 mm high. Type: True model TSSU-48-12 solid door Sandwich/Salad

unit c/w (2) two doors self contained refrigerator front breathing with s.s. top and cutting board.

Pans: (12) twelve clear poly carbonate 150 mm deep pans. Equipment: Standard including casters. Unit c/w approved cord

and plug. Pan Lid: S.s. (2) two section framed clear hinged 50 mm high

low profile plexiglass lid in lieu of standard s.s. hinged lid as detailed in detail D-19.

Alt. Manufacturer: Beverage Air, Delfield, Silverking Item 34 Cash Register N.I.C, By Owner Item 35 Hinged Gate Size: 914 x 740 mm high. Construction: Plastic laminate to match item 29 on 32 mm

plywood hinged gate c/w framing, heavy duty double acting hinges. Gate to enclose opening between item 29 and wall.

Item 36 Storage Shelving

SECTION 11 40 00 PAGE 17 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 VanVelzen+Radchenko Design Associates Ltd. Project 14019-TRCA Quantity: 4 Type: Metropolitan Wire adjustable Super Erecta wire

shelving. (3) - 1524 x 457 x 2210 mm high. Sections: (1) - 1219 x 457 x 2210 mm high. Each section c/w (5) five shelves and uprights. Installation: Erect sections as shown. Alt. Manufacturer: Cambro Camshelving Element Series Item 37 Waste & Recycling Stations Quantity: 1 Size: 1350 x 650 x 1250 mm high. Construction: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) on

19 mm thick plywood constructed dowelled, glued and screwed rigid as shown on standard drawing D-108 in Foodservice specifications.

Top: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) on 19 mm thick plywood constructed as shown.

Openings: 2 (two) 100 mm s.s. rimmed openings as shown for glass and cans and 1 (one) s.s. rimmed 400 x 150 waste slot cut into front as shown.

Signs: Blue on white Coloured etched bakelite signs as selected for waste articles, denoting "glass" and "cans".

Doors: 19 mm thick plywood (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) flush mount hinged doors c/w interior catch sized to allow removal of garbage containers.

Body: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) exterior and gray plastic laminate interior throughout. Underside centre open for waste container placement as shown.

Bottom: Plastic laminate on 19 mm plywood base shelf to support recycling containers.

Waste Container: 1 (one) for each Rubbermaid model 3959 square waste containers built on s.s. frame dolly with 75 mm dia. casters.

Recycling Bins: 2 (two) only for each Rubbermaid model 3569-06 blue recycling containers less lids.

Base: 50 x 100 mm perimeter base to support unit with s.s. kickbase.

Item 38 Condiment Stand Quantity: 1 Size: 1350 x 650 x 890 mm high. Construction: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) on

19 mm thick plywood constructed dowelled, glued and screwed rigid as shown on standard drawing D-114 in Foodservice specifications.

Top: Plastic laminate (Nevamar, Silver Alu Metalx


MXT003) on 18 mm plywood with ends formed as shown with 38 mm wide edge.


Panels: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) on 19 mm thick plywood at back and sides c/w white plastic laminate interior.

Hinged Door: Plastic laminate (Formica, Mission White, 933-58) on 19 mm thick plywood doors c/w invisible hinges and integral finger pull as detailed.


Kick plate: 1.2 mm s.s. removable finishing kick plate at front and sides scribed to floor.

Item 39, 40 Numbers not used.

STANDARD DRAWINGS INCLUDED FORM PART OF THIS SECTION D-2 Edge details D-3 Table details D-5 Pre-Rinse Scrap Basket D-19 Salad/Sandwich Unit Low Profile Hinged Lid D-108 Waste/Recycling Station D-114 Condiment Stand

END OF SECTION

S.S. PIANO HINGEFASTENED TO BOTHSECTIONS OF LID

CORNERS REINF.W/ S.S. ANGLES

(1/4") 6mm THICKTEMP. GLASSC/W S.S. FRAME

S.S PIVOTHINGE FASTENEDTO BOTH SIDES

S.S. PULLHANDLE

6540(T

O S

UIT

PA

N O

PEN

ING

)

(TO SUIT PAN OPENING)

(TO SUIT PAN OPENING)

12 RAD.

DATE : SCALE :

DESIGN ASSOCIATES LIMITEDFood Service Consultants

VAN VELZEN + RADCHENKO

CHECKED BY :

NO :

DRAWN BY :

FCSIS TLGI .COSSA

N

L

CONSULTANTS

N

ED

AV

E

V N

FOOD

D.

OK

SERVICE

EHC

DARNEZ+

SALAD & SANDWICH UNIT LOWPROFILE HINGED LID D-19

PFB

TR

ISOMETRIC

ELEVATION

As Noted

PLAN1:10

1:10

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

CONTENTS

SECTIONS TITLE 104420 Fire Extinguishers 210501 Mechanical General Requirements 210720 Thermal Insulation for Piping 211201 Fire Sprinkler Systems 221010 Pumps 221118 Domestic Water Piping 221317 Drainage Waste and Vent Piping 224201 Plumbing Specialties and Accessories 224202 Plumbing Fixtures 230523 Valves 230529 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment 230554 Mechanical Identification 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 230713 Ductwork Insulation 230819 Fan Coil Units 231123 Facility Natural Gas Piping 232114 Hydronic Specialties 232116 Hydronic Systems, Steel 233114 Ductwork-Low Pressure Metallic to 500 PA 233300 Ductwork Accessories 233346 Flexible Ducts 233353 Duct Liners 233400 HVAC Fans 233600 Air Terminal Units 233713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 236510 Condensing Units

SECTION 10 44 20 Page 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN/ULC-S508-M90(R1995), Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers and Class "D" Extinguishing Media.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -

Submittal Procedures.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section

01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MULTI-PURPOSE DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHERS (FE)

.1 Cartridge operated type or Stored pressure rechargeable type with hose and shut-off nozzle, ULC labelled for A, B and C class protection. Sizes 3A-10BC.

2.2 ORDINARY DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHERS – KITCHEN AND SERVERY .1 ULC labelled for B and C class protection. Sizes 20BC.

2.3 IDENTIFICATION .1 Identify extinguishers in accordance with recommendations of ANSI/NFPA 10

CAN/ULC-S508.

.2 Attach tag or label to extinguishers, indicating month and year of installation. Provide space for service dates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Mount extinguishers on brackets to approval.

.2 Install fire safety blankets as indicated.

.3 Provide three (3) additional 3A-1OBC extinguishers and install at location as later directed on site.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 05 01 Page 1 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.

.1 This Section applies to and governs the Work of all Mechanical Sections. .2 Where other Mechanical Trades Sections conflict with requirements

specified in this Section the Specifications of that particular Section govern.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Conform to Section 26 01 00, Electrical General Requirements.

.2 Excavating, backfilling and rough grading for mechanical work: Section 31 23 10, Excavation and Backfill.

.3 Flashings for mechanical work located on or passing through roof except integral flashing collars on equipment and piping where available as standard or optional component: (Asphalt Roofing).

1.3 DESCRIPTION

.1 Provide work in accordance with the full intent and meaning of the Drawings and Specifications as required to result in complete operating systems.

1.4 APPORTIONMENT OF THE WORK

.1 Classify and apportion all materials and the performance of all labour to the several trades involved in accordance with all local customs, rules, regulations, jurisdictional awards, decisions, etc., insofar as they may apply and as required to efficiently execute the work involved in this Contract.

1.5 PERMITS AND FEES

.1 Obtain all permits required for the installation of mechanical trades work, arrange for inspections and tests therewith and pay all fees and costs for the permits, inspections and fees. Obtain permits immediately after notification of award of Contract.

.2 Obtain copies of Drawings from the Engineer for submission with application for

permits.


JAL No. 14-194

1.6 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

.1 Bear all costs for modification of curbs and floor/roof openings resulting from failure to notify the Engineer prior to the fabrication or construction of opening framing and curb.

1.7 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for items hereinafter listed which are exactly as specified. Supplement Shop Drawings with brochures where necessary or as required. The initial submission of Shop Drawings for any one trade shall include a checklist of all related specified items for that trade to ensure complete submittal and review.

.2 Stamp as follows: SHOP DRAWINGS FOR RECORD PURPOSES ONLY

- CHECKED FOR CONSTRUCTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

.3 Record purpose submissions shall include:

Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Specialties Piping Specialties

.4 Submit seven copies of such Drawings or Brochures to the Engineer, who

will review such Drawings or Brochures. If items are not as specified, re-submit five corrected copies.

.5 Submit Shop Drawings (1 sepia and 2 prints) for all other mechanical

equipment in accordance with the requirement outlined in the General Conditions of the Contract.

.6 Prepare Shop Drawings specifically for this work by qualified

drafters and in sufficient detail to avoid decisions being made in the shop or field.

.7 General Shop Drawings showing more than one size or model will not be

considered unless properly marked up. .8 Include performance data and characteristic curves with all fan and pump

Shop Drawings. .9 Submit Shop Drawings for suspension systems for all suspended equip-

ment. Indicate the location of suspension for the equipment, the maximum load at each of the suspension points, the size of suspension rods or members and details of supplementary structural steel framing members.


JAL No. 14-194

.10 Include wiring diagrams and schematics for all equipment which has electrical controls or devices furnished with the equipment. Wiring diagrams alone are not sufficient; schematic and interconnecting drawings, and sequence of operation of equipment are required for review.

.11 Clearly indicate the materials and/or equipment being supplied, all details

of construction, finish, accurate dimensions, capacities and performance on Shop Drawings and brochures. Have all drawings certified correct for construction by the manufacturer, before submission. Identify equipment Shop Drawings with designations as shown on the Drawings or in the Specifications. If not complied with, Shop Drawings will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor.

.12 Each Shop Drawing and/or brochure must bear the stamp and signature

of a responsible official in the Contractor's and the Subcontractor's organization for each submission as evidence that the drawing has been checked against the requirements as called for in the Specifications and Drawings. Also, in the case where the equipment attaches to and/or where there is external wiring connecting to other equipment, that it has been properly coordinated with this equipment, whether supplied under this or other contracts.

.13 Revisions to Shop Drawings will not be allowed after they are reviewed

unless further review and submission is required. .2 Record Drawings: Maintain an accurate dimensional record of all underground

piping and all deviations and changes in above ground piping, ductwork and equipment from the Contract Drawings. Transfer this information to two (2) sets of record drawings filed at the job site and submit to the Engineer at the completion of the job.

.3 Installation and Start-up Instructions: Furnish three copies of installation

instructions and three copies of start-up instructions for any item of equipment when requested by the Engineer.

.4 Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals

.1 Provide two copies of complete operating and maintenance instructions for equipment furnished under this Contract.

.2 Bind instructions in loose-leaf 3-ring binders. When only one volume is

required, provide a complete index. When more than one volume is required, include in the first book a complete index of all volumes and an individual index in each succeeding volume. Include the following manuals: Schematic diagram of electrical, or gas systems. List of contacts for all equipment suppliers Equipment Shop Drawings Equipment start up forms Valve tag charts


JAL No. 14-194

Balancing reports Control Shop Drawings and operating sequence including wiring

of components. Wiring diagram of control panels. Non-dimensional layout showing location of all electrical devices

on mechanical equipment. Operating instructions, including start-up and shut-down

procedure. Maintenance instructions including preventive maintenance

instructions for components of the equipment. Lubricating instructions and recommended cycle of lubrication for

each item of equipment, including various types of lubricants. Complete parts list of assemblies and their component parts,

showing manufacturer's name, catalogue number, and nearest replacement source.

List of recommended spare parts and quantity of each item to be stocked.

Manufacturers' warranties and guarantees. All the above applies to component parts of equipment whether

they are manufactured by the supplier of the equipment or are supplied as a component part of an item of equipment.

1.8 QUALITYASSURANCE .1 Regulatory Requirements

.1 Conform to governing Municipal or Federal Codes, Rules and

Regulations and/or Authorities having jurisdiction. .2 Codes and Standards referred to hereinafter are by inference, in each

case, the latest issue of the Specified Code or Standard, including all revisions and amendments thereto as adopted and published at date of tender closing.

.3 Do all work and supply all equipment in accordance with the requirements

and recommendations of the latest issue of the applicable standards and codes of the: National Standards of Canada (NS Can) Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Canadian Building Code O. Reg. 403/97, as amended Canadian Fire Code Ministry of Labour Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association

(SMACNA) National Research Coulcil Canada – Model Energy Code of

Canada for Buildings 1997 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning

Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard 90.1-2001 - Energy Standard For Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.


JAL No. 14-194

Ontario Building Code 0 Reg. 350/06 1.9 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS .1 General .1 Comply with the requirements of the Electrical Safety Code.

.2 All equipment specified in Mechanical Specification or shown on the Mechanical Drawings to be supplied and installed by the Mechanical Contractor and wired by the electrical contractor unless specifically indicated otherwise. Generally, all wiring above 50 volts by the electrical contractor and all low voltage control wiring below 50 volts by the mechanical contractor unless otherwise indicated.

.3 The nominal electrical service available for mechanical equipment is 208

volts 3 ph, 60 Hz, and 120 volts, 1 ph, 60 Hz, unless specifically stated otherwise on the Drawings.

.4 Provide motors with all electrically driven equipment furnished under this

Contract.

.2 Motors

.1 Provide motors of 0.37 kW and larger having a nameplate rating of 575 volts, 3 ph, 60 Hz, and motors of 0.25 kW and less with a nameplate rating of 115 volts, 1 ph, 60 Hz, unless otherwise specified hereinafter or otherwise shown on the Drawings.

.2 For types of motors required for this project refer to and comply with

requirements of Electrical Division. .3 Use motors of 0.7 kW and larger that are approved by the Canadian

Safety Code. .4 All motors must meet the minimum nominal efficiency requirements of

CSA C390-98. .5 Fan Motors must be capable of variable system flow as prescribed by

MNECB1997 and ASHRAE 90.1-2001. .3 Starters, Disconnects, Motor Control Centres, etc.: .1 Manual motor starter shall be toggle operated with following general

construction features: - Quick-Make, Quick-Break mechanism with double-break contracts. - Overload protection heaters, one per phase and speed. - Enclosure to suit application. - Pilot light, neon lamp. - Cover engraved with "On-Trip-Off".


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Magnetic motor starters shall comprise electrically-operated motor starters combined with disconnect switch with following general construction features: - Quick-Make, Quick-Break mechanism with double-break contacts. - Fuse holders to accept specified fuses, one per phase. - Adjustable overload relays, one per phase. - CEMA listed enclosure to suit application. Disconnect with

mechanical cover interlocks, line side barriers and switch operated electrical interlocks to disconnect external control voltage unless starter includes suitable approved enclosed contacts and connections.

- "Reset" button. - Pilot Lights of transformer type incandescent with amber safety

lens cap. - Control transformer with 120 volt fused secondary and sized to suit

current rating of associated control devices. - Scheduled cover mounted control devices with standard duty double

break contact blocks. - Minimum of two auxiliary contacts (unused "Seal-in" contact may be

included). .3 Contactors for non-motor applications shall be built similar to combination

magnetic starters, except less overload relays, and with Gould Shawmut AJT time delay HRC1-J fuses, Merson or Cooper Bussmann rated for load, and with enclosed continuous current rating of at least 125% of connected full load.

.4 "Double Voltage Relays" shall be CGE Model CR120 LXMC, Schneider or

Omron with general purpose enclosure, number of contacts required and "Mylar" shroud of enclosure of contacts, or approved equivalent.

.5 Pilot devices such as "Start-Stop" pushbuttons, "Hand-Off-Auto" selector

switches and indicating lights shall be of heavy-duty construction. Indicating lamps shall be transformer type incandescent with amber safety lens caps

.6 Each control unit shall be provided with engraved nameplates for

designation of device controlled and duty. See Subsection "Equipment Markers & Nameplates" for details.

.7 Safety control device such as flow switches, pressure switches, high and low

limited ("Fire" and "Freeze") shall not be shunted by "Hand" position of switch.

.8 Control wiring shall be 120 volt A.C. maximum. Provide control circuit

transformers where these are not included in motor starters. Secondaries of control transformers shall be fused with one side grounded and controls, safety devices and interlocks shall be connected in ungrounded conductor, excepting only integral starter overload devices.


JAL No. 14-194

.9 Single phase motors interlocked to start or operate with other equipment shall be provided with magnetic starters or suitable relays with necessary auxiliary contacts and double voltage relays or be otherwise electrically separated.

.10 Overload relay heaters for starters shall be selected and field adjusted to trip

at maximum value of 115% of actual nameplate full load amperes. Selection of heater elements shall be based on starter manufacturer's recommendations. Obtain data from Mechanical Division. Submit Motor Starter Schedule which shall list following for each motor: - Proposed equipment nameplate data - Actual full load amperes of motor - Speed of motor - Temperature Class in degrees Celsius rise and insulation class. - Circuit breaker or fuse type and proposed rating - Type of motor, duty and service factor.

.11 Overload relay heaters shall trip in 20 seconds or less from cold or

motor-locked rotar condition. .12 Where equipment is noted to be electrically interlocked, provide necessary

interlocks, double voltage relays (Mylar shroud accepted) to provide specified operation.

.13 Provide all fuses required to protect equipment. Fuses shall be proper size

blade type time delay HRC1-J current limiting. Supply three spare fuses of each size and type and obtain duplicate receipt for same. Fuse clips shall reject standard NEC fuses. Fuses shall be rated in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Fuses to be of one manufacturer throughout.

.4 Identification of Electrical Equipment: As specified in Section 21 05 01. .5 Identification of Motors: Provide all motors with brass tags attached by small

chain loop, bearing the equipment identification of the driven equipment as described on the Mechanical Equipment Schedules. Stamp or engrave identification information with lettering of 9 mm (d") high min.

.6 Wiring: Provide power and control wiring as defined under respective Sections of

Mechanical and Electrical Divisions.


JAL No. 14-194

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DRIVES ANDACCESSORIES .1 Drives .1 Select v-belt drives for 150 percent of the motor size rating. Provide

sheaves of cast iron construction with machined grooves. Provide sheaves of 75 mm (3") size and larger diameter with taper lock bushings. Statically and dynamically balance all sheaves as an operating unit. For multi-belt drives use matched sets. .2 Provide adjustable pitch sheaves on motors of less than 11 kW rating,

with diameter range selected to obtain specified RPM of the driven equipment at approximately the mid-point setting of the sheave.

.3 Provide solid type drive sheaves on motors of 11 kW and greater. Should

such sheaves not provide design requirements under operating conditions, supply and install a new drive sheave of proper size at no additional cost to the Minister.

.4 Submit drive data with Shop Drawings of each item of driven equipment.

.2 Lubricating Devices

.1 Furnish equipment with oil reservoirs with level indicators, or pressure grease fittings. Where fittings are not readily accessible, provide extended tubes to an accessible location. Grease fittings may be Zerk, Lincoln or Alemite but all fittings on the Project shall be one type.

2.2 PIPE SLEEVE SEALS .1 Thunderline "Link-Seal" Series LS .2 Fernco .3 Thermacor 2.3 BONDING AGENTS .1 Sika "Sikadur 32" Hi-Mod .2 Probond .3 Dupond 2.4 MOTORS, STARTERS, DISCONNETS

.1 Canadian General Electric

.2 Klockner Moeller


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Cutler hammer

.4 Furnas Electric

.5 Square ‘D’

2.5 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Acudor

.2 Titus

.3 Williams (S.M.S.)

.4 E.H. Price

2.6 ISOLATING UNIONS

1. Epco

2. Marpac "Petro"

3. Corrosion Service 2.7 CAULKING COMPOUNDS

1. Denso-Plast

2. Ecco Shield

3. CBR 2.8 ELECTRIC PIPE TRACING

.1 Electric pipe tracing shall be Raychem or Approval Equal for freeze protection

where noted. Provide 5XL-TRACE c/w thermostat for freeze protection and HWATT Plus for temperature maintenance purposes rated for 120/1/60 208V/1/60.

.2 Each tracing cable shall be in sections to suit pipe traced. Each total section

shall have splicing kit, thermostat, tee kit and end seals for cables s required.


JAL No. 14-194

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .1 General

Conform with applicable requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects, Ontario Regulation 213/91 Amended to O. Reg 527/00.

.2 Measurements and Deviations

.1 Where any parts of the mechanical work are specifically located by

dimensions on the Drawings, check and verify these dimensions on the site prior to installation.

.2 Before installing piping, review architectural, structural and electrical

drawings with mechanical drawings. Where interference may occur and departures from arrangements as shown are required, consult with other trades involved, come to agreement as to changed locations or elevations and obtain approval of the Engineer for proposed changes before proceeding with the work.

.3 Examine work of other trades or contractors, prior to commencement of

mechanical installations. Report in writing, to the Engineer, any discrepancies which will affect mechanical installations. Failure to do so shall be considered acceptance of the conditions.

.4 Where Site conditions require minor deviations from indicated

arrangements or locations, make such changes on approval of the Engineer without additional cost to the Engineer.

.5 Should any discrepancies occur during installation of mechanical work

which will necessitate major revisions to the mechanical trades work or the work of other trades or contractors, notify the Engineer immediately and obtain his written authorization before proceeding with the work.

.3 Scaffolding and Hoisting Equipment

.1 Refer to and comply with the requirements of 01 5100, Temporary Utilities

and Controls. .2 Do not drill, cut or weld the building steel or building structure for erection

of materials or equipment without prior written approval of the Engineer.

.4 Overloading

.1 During installation of mechanical work, do not load any part of the building structure with a load greater than it is capable of bearing. Bear full responsibility should any accident occur or damage result through the violation of this requirement.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Any temporary supports used during installation must be as strong as

permanent supports. .5 Attachment to Building Construction

.1 Use welding studs of size not larger than 10 mm for attaching miscellaneous materials and equipment to building steel. If the weight of materials or equipment require bolts or studs larger than 10 mm dia., use steel clips or brackets, secured to building steel by welding or bolting as approved by the Engineer.

.2 Use self drilling expansion type concrete inserts for securing

miscellaneous equipment and materials to masonry or concrete construction already in place, of sufficient number and size to prevent concrete from breaking away. The use of powder or power actuated fasteners will not be allowed unless prior written approval is obtained from the Engineer.

.3 Support rods for any suspended item must not be attached to or extended

through steel pan type roofs or through concrete slab roofs. .4 Furnish beam clamps of 2-bolt design and of such type that the rod load is

transmitted only concentrically to the beam web centreline. The use of "C" and "I" beam side clamps, etc., will not be allowed without written consent of the Engineer.

.5 Where the roof or floor framing consists of open web or long span steel

joists, ensure that hangers are located at or within 150 mm of the joist top or bottom chord panel points, otherwise provide additional structural steel as required where hanger spacing does not coincide with joist spacing. Design suspension assembly such that the hanger load is transmitted only concentrically to the supporting joist. Do not use "C" and "I" beam side clamps, brackets, etc., without written consent of the Engineer.

.6 Locate secondary structural steel members between joists at or within

150 mm of top or bottom chord panel points. Where the secondary structural steel member cannot be located at or near a joist panel point, provide additional diagonal structural steel web member/members designed for the applicable load to the nearest panel point in the opposite chord member. This condition may be waived if the load to be suspended between panel points is not in excess of 45 kg. Diagonal hangers which will induce lateral stresses in the chord members of the joist will not be permitted. Submit Shop Drawings of the suspension assembly indicating the location of suspension or support points, the maximum load at each suspension point, location and size of hangers, brackets and intermediate framing members when required, and also details of connection to building structure.


JAL No. 14-194

.6 Cutting, Patching, Excavation and Backfill .1 Cutting of holes up to 200 mm in diameter and related patching shall be

done under Mechanical Division. Holes and other openings larger than 200 mm in diameter, all chases, bulk-heads, furring and related patching shall be done under Division 1. Read same for detailed information regarding cutting and patching.

.2 Do not cut, remove or burn structural parts or sections of the building,

whether they are steel, concrete or masonry, without the written authorization of the Engineer.

.3 Should cutting, repairing, and patching of previously finished work of

other trades be required to allow installation of mechanical work, pay all costs for the trade concerned to perform the work.

.4 Perform necessary excavating for work of this Division. Ensure bottoms of

trenches are excavated so that full length of each pipe will be supported on solid bed of undisturbed earth. Build approved concrete pad, solid block or concrete piers properly reinforced under piping below grade where solid undisturbed earth bed is not obtainable to meet Plumbing Code.

.5 Remove excavated materials not used as backfill from site unless otherwise

directed. .6 See Soil Test Report re existing soil conditions. Support all piping on

approved earth or other foundation or hangers. Earth support must be minimum 90% density Modified Proctor (ASTM #D-1527) compaction and proven such conditions exist. Include for necessary soil tests to verify earth foundation will support drains as required at approximately 2400 mm centres. Provide supports to meeting Plumbing Code, Section 51 including piers where earth foundation or hangers are not acceptable to Engineer or authority having jurisdiction.

.7 Where permitted by authority having jurisdiction where pipe invert is less

than 900 mm below floor elevation steel clevis hangers, steel rods and continuous steel supports from floors at half normal spacing may be used. Paint all buried metal hanger work with 2 coats of Bakelite #110-14, Radyne and Ductile.

.8 Provide necessary shoring and support for trenching. Do all work in

conformity to Ontario Trench Excavator's Protection Act and Occupational Health & Safety Act, each as amended to date. Trench widths shall be kept to minimum dimension as directed & approved.

.9 Perform necessary pumping to maintain excavations free of water for work

of this Division until backfill is completed. .10 Provide 100 mm bed of 20 mm crusher run limestone compacted to 98%

Modified Proctor under all piping not laid in sandy ground or other approved bedding. For copper and plastic piping, bedding shall be clean sand.


JAL No. 14-194

.11 Backfill at least first 150 mm above top of piping with clean coarse sand

hand placed in 75 mm layers and compacted to 98% density Proctor Modified (ASTM #D1527). Note conditions and Details and conform thereto.

.12 Backfill inside building with M.T.C. granular 'B' or clean coarse sand in 150

mm layers mechanically compacted to give minimum of 98% density Modified Proctor (ASTM #D-1527 STD) compaction.

.13 For Landscape Areas: Backfill outside building with approved clean earth in

300 mm layers watered and compacted to 98% Modified Proctor. Do not use clay, rock, frozen earth, rubbish or other unapproved materials. Remove same from site and bring in approved earth or sand for use in this event.

.14 Backfill under all existing, new and future concreted, paved or gravelled

areas with M.T.C granular 'B' placed in 150 mm layers and compacted to 98% Modified Proctor Compaction to level of sub-base of paving or gravel.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION .1 General .1 Erect equipment in a compact, neat and workmanlike manner. Align, level

and adjust for satisfactory operation. Install in such a manner that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be madereadily and that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair.

.2 Install and start up items of equipment in complete accordance with the

manufacturer's printed installation and operating instructions. .2 Firestopping and smoke seal

.1 Be responsible for installation of firestopping and smoke seal inside mechanical assemblies (i.e. fire dampers).

.2 Firestopping and smoke seals around outside of mechanical assemblies,

where they penetrate fire rated separations shall be part of work of Section 07840, Firestopping nad Smoke Seals and shall be carried out under supervision of this Division.

.3 Be responsible for any additional cost incurred as a result of oversizing of

openings during cutting and patching operation of openings to be firestopped up to 200 mm (8") in diameter

.4 Install sheet steel covers supplied by Section 05500, Metal Fabrication

over temporarily unused sleeves provided in fire separations for future mechanical installations.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 Noise and Vibration: Select noise and vibration levels of equipment and systems to conform to design intent. If unnecessary noise or vibration should be created by any mechanical equipment and systems and transmitted to occupied portions of building or other mechanical work, make all necessary changes and additions as approved by the Engineer without additional cost.

.6 Lubrication: Lubricate all equipment prior to start up, in accordance with

the manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide all lubrication including sufficient quantity for drainage and refilling of oil sumps, etc., when required by manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Equipment Bases and Pads

.1 Verify size of bases shown on Drawings with actual requirements and advise the Engineer and the respective trades if change in size or shape of pad is required.

.2 Construct bases and pads at least 150 mm high unless specifically stated

or shown as less on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. Extend bases 75 mm beyond centreline of anchor bolts or to a minimum of 50 mm beyond equipment base. Chamfer all upper perimeter edges of base.

.3 Supply anchor bolts and sleeves to trade constructing bases in sufficient

time for setting in formwork prior to placing concrete and provide anchor bolt location drawing or template for locating anchor bolts. Check anchor bolt locations for proper position before concrete is poured.

3.3 PIPING CONSTRUCTION METHODS .1 General .1 Unless specified otherwise herein, construct and install all piping in

accordance with ANSI Sections B31.1 to B31.9 as applicable to service, except that soldered joints will not be permitted in compressed air piping. .2 To avoid unnecessary cutting of masonry, provide inserts, sleeves and

anchors to other trades for building in as the work proceeds. Arrange with other trades to leave openings, slots and chases to accommodate later installation of mechanical work.

.3 Inspect pipe and fittings for soundness and clean of all dirt and other

foreign matter immediately prior to installation. Reject all damaged items. .4 Install piping in the most direct, straight and functional manner possible.

Except where otherwise shown, install all vertical lines plumb, and run horizontal lines parallel to building walls. Install piping close to walls, partitions and ceilings. On multiple runs of piping, space piping to allow for installation of insulation and for proper servicing of valves.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 Ensure that trenches for piping below grade are dry and firm when laying pipe.

.6 In fill areas, provide a minimum clearance of 100 mm (4") on all sides of

the pipe passing under or through building grade beams to prevent possible damage from settling of building. If a greater settlement can be expected, increase the clearance to prevent possible damage.

.7 Conceal all piping in finished areas and rooms within walls or ceilings,

and in furred spaces elsewhere. Provide access doors or panels as hereinafter specified for access to concealed piping specialties etc.

.2 Expansion and Contraction

.1 Install all piping so as to be free from strain and distortion due to expansion and contraction and governed by requirements of Section 6, Chapter 3 of ANSI B31.1, except as hereinafter modified. Allow for expansion and contraction by offsets, expansion U-bends or loops. Do not use expansion joints of any type unless specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified under another Section of Mechanical Specifications for a particular installation.

.2 Base provision for expansion and contraction on 25 mm movement per

30 m of steel pipe and 38 mm movement per 30 m of copper or brass pipe for each 55 de C temperature difference from 21 deg C ambient. Fabricate expansion bends in steel pipe from pipe sections and long radius welding elbows.

.3 Use swing or swivel joints on all steam or hot water heating piping for

connections from mains to risers and from risers to radiation and other heating units. Use at least five fittings from main to riser including tee in main. Use at least four fittings from riser to heating unit including tee in riser.

.3 Lines, Grades and Slopes

.1 Install piping in conformity with elevations and grades indicated on the Drawings using axis lines and bench marks provided under General Construction; verify such axis lines and bench marks. Each trade shall lay out his work and be responsible for lines, elevations, measurements, etc., required for installation of his work.

.2 Slope piping drains and sewers as indicated on the drawings. Install so

that slope between elevations shown on the Drawings is even and constant.

.3 Install liquid and air lines free of pockets and pitch to drain at low points in

the line with valves or traps installed as required for drainage of the lines.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 When slope is not shown on the Drawings, install piping to the following slopes: Drainage piping - 1:50 on drains of NPS 3" size and less and

1:100 on drains of NPS 4" and larger. In special circumstances as provided for under the Codes and Regulations and the express approval of the Engineer, drains of NPS 4" size and larger may be laid at a lesser slope.

Domestic water lines - pitch to low points so that all lines may be completely drained. Natural gas - slope down 1:1000 in direction of flow.

.4 Immersion Wells and Sensing Bulbs

.1 Where a temperature sensing bulb or immersion well is installed in piping of NPS 22" size and less, increase the tee fitting and piping as required in which the bulb or well is inserted a minimum of one pipe size larger than the adjoining pipe to prevent restriction of flow of liquid.

.2 To improve heat transfer pack all immersion wells in piping for liquids up

to a temperature of 150 deg C with a mineral type grease prior to installation of sensing bulb.

.5 Pipe Joints

.1 Ream all pipe ends and thoroughly clean all dirt, cuttings and foreign

matter from pipe after cutting and threading. Thoroughly clean all fittings, valves and equipment before connections are made. Cut copper tubing with a tube cutter and clean the joining surfaces of the tubing and fitting with fine emery cloth. Wipe clean with a dry cloth.

.2 Make screwed joints with Teflon tape or Masters metallic compound with

the compound applied to the male threads only and particular care taken to prevent the compound from reaching the interior of the pipe or fittings.

.3 Install sleeve type couplings for cast iron plain end soil pipe, such as

Titan Foundry Type MJ, or Bibby MJ Series 2000 or Dayton in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

.4 Make joints on cast iron bell and spigot soil pipe with either neoprene

compression type preformed gaskets such as Bibby "Bi-seal", or lead and oakum with a minimum of 0.5 kg of lead per 25 mm of pipe diameter, and caulk in such a manner to produce a permanently tight joint. Cold caulking compound in cord form such as W.R. Meadows PC4 may also be used. Assemble preformed neoprene gaskets to manufacturer's printed instructions.

.5 Assemble mechanical joint on ductile iron pressure pipe with cast iron

gland, rubber sealing gasket and high strength malleable iron bolts in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.


JAL No. 14-194

.6 Install couplings, fittings, etc. on grooved end piping systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

.7 Make soldered joints on copper tubing in accordance with the following

usage:

Service Solder Type

.1 Dom. Hot and Cold water lead free with matching flux

.2 Drain, Waste, Vent 50/50 with matching flux

.3 Hot water heating 95/5 with matching flux .8 Do not use core type solder. Use solder conforming to ASTM

requirements. .9 Make carbon steel welded joints in compliance with latest acceptable

practices, either by electric arc welding, gas metal arc welding, or oxy-acetylene gas welding.

.10 Employ qualified welders holding a current up-to-date Provincial

Certificate for the process and rating involved as required by the Provincial Regulations.

.11 Conform to ANSI B31.1 Section IX for welding and be responsible to

ensure that supervisory staff, fitters and welders are fully conversant with the requirements laid down by that Standard prior to the commencement of welding.

.12 Unless more stringent methods of inspections are specified the Engineer

will visually inspect welded joints for fusion of metal, icicles, alignment, etc. Remove any defects and remake the joint to his satisfaction.

.13 For welding of materials other than carbon steel conform to the

requirements specified in the relevant section of the Specification. .14 Subject all steam, condensate, nitrogen and airlines to a 10% radiography

of welded joints in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V.

.15 If more than the allowable number of welds prove to be unacceptable pay

all costs for a complete radiographic test of all joints in the affected piping system.

.16 Re-weld and re-test unacceptable joints at no additional cost to the

Minister. .6 Unions and Flanges

.1 Provide unions or flanges in the following locations:

For bypasses around equipment or control valves or devices in piping systems.


JAL No. 14-194

At connection to steam traps and in by-passes around traps.

At connections to equipment. Locate between shut-off valve and equipment.

In screwed or solder joint drainage tubing at inlet side of trap. .2 Do not conceal unions in walls, partitions or ceilings unless access

thereto is provided. .3 Provide dielectric unions or isolating type companion flanges at all

connections between copper tubing and ferrous piping. .4 Assemble flanged joints with appropriate flanges, gaskets and bolting.

Provide clearance between flange faces such that the connections can be gasketed and bolted tight without undue strain on the piping system with flange faces parallel and bores concentric. Centre gaskets on the flange faces so as not to Project into the bore. Lubricate bolts before assembly to assure uniform bolt stressing. Machine off raised face flanges when joining to a flat companion flange and use a full face gasket.

.7 Fittings

.1 The use of couplings between fittings, valves or equipment, will not be permitted except on long runs in pipe sizes NPS 2" or smaller. Where the length of pipe between fittings requires a connection, make the joint by welding. Do not use running couplings in any pipeline.

.2 Fittings and ancillary items installed in systems operating at pressures in

excess of 103 kPa (15 psig) must be registered in accordance with CSA B51.

.3 Use eccentric reducing fittings in locations where piping changes size and

at connections to equipment and control valves, to provide proper drainage or venting of the lines. Do not use bushings.

.4 Tee connections in welded piping may utilize either of the following:

Factory fabricated standard buttweld fittings. Bonney Forge "Weldolets", "Thredolets" or "Sockolets".

.5 Mitering, notching or direct welding of branches to mains, will not be

permitted. .6 Use standard pipe fittings for changing direction of piping. No mitered

joints or field fabricated pipe bends are permitted. Use long radius welded steel elbows unless short radius elbows are specifically authorized by the Engineer.

.7 In copper tubing, direct connection of branch into main using "T-Drill"

method may be used where allowed by Ontario Building Code.


JAL No. 14-194

.8 Piping Connections to Mains

.1 Make branch connections of steam, gas and compressed air lines to respective horizontal piping of larger diameter to the upper quadrant of the larger pipe.

.2 Make down feed piping connections of all water piping to horizontal

supply and return mains to the bottom quadrant of the mains.

.9 Sleeves .1 Install sleeves where piping passes through foundations, above grade

floors and walls. Fabricate sleeves of Sch. 40 black steel pipe or type "K" copper tubing for installation in foundations or floors, and of 1 mm (20 ga.) galvanized sheet steel where installed in above grade walls.

.2 Sleeves for piping passing through roofs will be supplied and installed

under other Contracts or under Roofing Section, unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings.

.3 Make sleeves large enough to pass full thickness of pipe covering where

same is used, and with sufficient clearance between pipe and sleeve to allow for any lateral movement of piping due to expansion and contraction.

.4 Terminate sleeves flush with finished ceilings, walls and floors on grade.

For piping passing through floors above grade extend sleeve a minimum of 75 mm above the floor.

.5 For pipes entering structures from below grade, seal the annular space

between sleeve and pipe with prefabricated seals. .6 In the case of pipes passing through firewalls or through walls, partitions

or floors which are considered as serving as fire stops and in partitions around washrooms, seal the space around the pipe, in the sleeve.

.7 Fill sleeves for future use with lime mortar. .8 Assume all responsibility for the setting of all sleeves necessary for this

work in masonry walls during construction or in concrete forms before concrete is poured.

.9 Coat exterior surface of all sleeves of ferrous material with a heavy

asphalt emulsion. .10 Firestopping shall be installed and applied as required by NBCC and

FMOG-ENG-4003. Fire stopping shall be in accordance with CAN/ULC-5115: Fire tests of Firestop Systems.


JAL No. 14-194

.10 Escutcheon Plates

.1 Provide escutcheon plates on bare piping passing through finished walls or floors.

.2 Use escutcheon plates made of cast brass or stamped metal, either one

to be heavy chromium plated and, if constructed in two pieces, fitted with substantial hinges and positive latches. Provide plates with tempered springs to ensure positive attachment to the pipe.

.11 Valves

.1 Supply and install valves in all locations shown on the Drawings, at all piping connections to equipment, at all connections to control valves or control devices, and where required for sectionalizing a system or floor.

.2 Use gate or butterfly valves for shut-off purposes and globe or plug valves

for throttling purposes. .3 Install check valves wherever required to ensure flow of liquid in one

direction. .4 Provide drain valves with hose thread outlet connection or valve with long

nipple on outlet at all low points of each water system and above all riser or branch stop valves for proper drainage of lines.

.12 Piping Subject to Freezing

.1 Where horizontal or vertical piping is run along an outside building wall and concealed in a pipe space, circulation of interior air shall be maintained in the pipe space by means of air grille(s) located at the top and bottom of pipe space, facing the interior of building

.2 Where horizontal piping is run in a ceiling space under uninsulated roof,

the insulated pipe shall be encased in slab insulation on both sides and top and circulation of interior air shall be maintained in the encasement by means of air grilles located in the ceiling below, facing down into the interior of the building. The spacing of grilles shall be not less than 3000 mm o.c.

.13 Air Venting: Install all vents at high points of all water piping systems and

connect to nearest drain. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUSSTEEL .1 Painting and Cleaning .1 Touch up minor damage to finish on equipment with standard factory

applied baked enamel finish. If, in the Engineer's opinion, the damage is too extensive to be remedied by touch up, replace damaged equipment.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Clean steel by scraping, wire brushing or other effective means to remove base scale, rust, oil, dirt or other foreign matter.

.3 Apply one coat of zinc chromate iron oxide primer, conforming to CAN/CGSB-

1.40M to all miscellaneous steel. .4 In the field, touch up all bolt heads and nuts, previously unpainted connections

and surfaces damaged during erection with primer as hereinbefore specified. .5 Give two coats of primer to all surfaces which will be inaccessible after erection. .6 Thoroughly remove all foreign matter from steelwork on completion of

installation. 3.5 CONCRETE INSERTS .1 Install all inserts required for attachment of hangers, either for suspension of

piping or equipment.

.2 For masonry or poured concrete construction use expansion type units. Insert into the concrete after concrete has cured. Anchors or inserts installed by explosive means shall not be used.

3.6 FLASHINGS .1 Furnish and set all required counter-flashings for vent stacks.

.2 For safety vents, plumbing vents and all other pipes passing through roofs, stack flashings will be supplied and installed by roofing trade.

3.7 ACCESS DOORS .1 Access doors in ductwork are specified in Section 23 33 00 Ductwork

Accessories.

.2 Supply access doors for installation by other trades in walls or ceilings where accessibility is required for the operation and/or maintenance of concealed valves, traps, cleanouts, dampers and control equipment. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or in other divisions of the Specifications, or as required to replace or repair said equipment, provide access doors at least 200 mm x 200 mm (8" x 8") size, fabricated of bonderized steel, with concealed hinges and screwdriver lock. Provide doors of a type and fire rating to suit the particular type of wall or ceiling construction in which they are to be installed.

.3 All access panels and doors shall be Acudor BP58 Bauco Plus Access Doors or

equivalent from alternate manufacturers listed above. 3.8 PROTECTION .1 Protect all work and materials before and after erection from weather and other

hazards and keep in a clean and orderly manner.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Protect pipe ends, valves and parts of equipment left unconnected to prevent

damage or intrusion of foreign matter. Provide pipe caps for threaded male connections and plugs for threaded female connections.

.3 Protect plumbing fixtures or mechanical equipment having a baked enamel finish

by covering with polyethylene sheet securely held in place. 3.9 PAINTING .1 With the exception of prime painting of miscellaneous steel or any other specific

requirements as specified under the respective Sections of the Mechanical Trades Work, or equipment otherwise factory painted, all painting will be provided under General Trades Work.

3.10 STERILIZATION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS

.1 Flush each system after completion by allowing full flow of water through the

system for a period of fifteen minutes or longer when directed by the Engineer.

.2 After flushing of the system is completed, provide a 24 hour contact sterilization treatment by treating the water with 50 ppm of chlorine as recommended in AWWA Specification C-651. After sterilization period has elapsed, flush system to reduce chlorine content to an acceptable level.

3.11 PRESSURE TESTS .1 Make specified pressure tests on all piping included in this Contract. Furnish all

pumps, compressors, gauges and connectors necessary for the tests.

.2 Conduct tests in the presence of the Engineer and all other personnel of governing authorities having jurisdiction. Notify all parties in ample time to permit them to be present. Conduct tests before piping is painted, covered or concealed.

.3 Conduct hydrostatic tests for a minimum period of 2 hours, or longer when

requested by the Engineer or governing authority at the test pressure specified under the respective Section of the Specifications

.4 During this time the pressure shall remain constant and the exterior surfaces of

pipe or fittings shall not show any cracks or other form of leak. .5 For pneumatic tests, first pressurize the system with air to approximately one-half

the specified pressure but not to exceed 345 kPa (50 psig) and examine all joints for leaks with a soapsuds solution. After any repairs have been made and the soap test has been met satisfactorily, pressure the system with air to the test pressure specified under the respective Section of the Specifications.


JAL No. 14-194

.6 Conduct final tests on natural or propane gas piping in accordance with the requirements of the local Utility or governing authority. If feasible, make tests when ambient air temperature is approximately constant. Take into account corrections for pressure change due to temperature differential as approved by the Engineer.

.7 Disconnect pumps or compressors used for applying the test pressure, during

the test period. .8 Disconnect and/or remove equipment or specialties not designed to withstand

the test pressure during the test and reconnect same after completion of test. .9 Promptly correct any defects that develop through tests and re-test to the

complete satisfaction of the Engineer and other parties involved. .10 Forward copies of all final tests on all pressure and drainage piping and a copy of

governing authority approvals to the Engineer immediately on acceptance of tests and/or approvals.

.11 Final payment for the work will not be made until the above has been received.

3.12 PERFORMANCE TESTING AND BALANCING .1 Assume responsibility for testing, balancing and placing all air handling and liquid

systems in operation, prior to final acceptance in presence and under direction of Engineer. See Section 23 05 93Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

.2 Standard test sheets are appended to this Section. Fill out applicable sheets

during performance tests, start-up procedures, and commissioning procedures. Submit 3 copies to Engineer prior to acceptance.

.3 Provide all instruments required to test and balance systems. Install test probe

inlets in ductwork and equipment in locations selected by the Engineer. Balance systems in accordance with design requirements indicated on the Drawings. Report to the Engineer immediately any deficiencies in the systems or equipment performance resulting in design requirements being unobtainable.

.4 On completion of testing and balancing of all systems, submit to Engineer a

typewritten report (4 copies) of findings, including complete data of fan performance, static pressures, air quantities, final readings at all outlets, and ampere readings of all motors, taken at motor terminals when equipment is operating under full load conditions.

.5 Submit with each copy of the report, complete sets of duct layout prints neatly

marked in red ink, showing all locations at which test readings were taken, the air volume, velocity and static pressure in each supply and return duct, and the final reading at all outlets. Obtain duct layout prints for mark-up purposes from the Engineer.


JAL No. 14-194

3.13 CLEANING,TESTING AND APPROVAL RECORDS .1 Maintain records of all pressure tests and flushing and sterilization tests,

glycol/water concentrations, inspections and approvals by the Plumbing Inspector, etc. and forward these to the Minister on completion of the work. Provide Engineer with copy of records on completion of each test, cleaning operation, etc.

3.14 ELECTRIC PIPE TRACING

.1 Provide electronic pipe tracing to all pipes subject to freeze.

.2 Electrical Division will provide power supply to each section. Provide all other wiring and work to complete total system.

.3 Provide labels on completed covering at appropriate locations stating “Electric

Traced”. 3.15 ADJUSTMENT AND OPERATION OF SYSTEMS .1 When the work is complete, adjust all equipment items of the various systems for

proper operation within the framework of design intent, and the operating characteristics as published by the equipment manufacturer.

.2 Note: Additional instructions are specified under the respective Sections of this

Division. .3 The Engineer reserves the right to require the services of an authorized

representative of the manufacturer in the event that any item of equipment is not adjusted properly. Arrange for such services and bear all incurred costs thereof. After completion of adjustments, place the systems in full operating condition and advise the Engineer that the work is ready for acceptance.

3.16 COMMISSIONING .1 The mechanical contractor shall carry in his tender the cost for all performance

testing of equipment and systems in accordance with the Project Specification and manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.17 ACCEPTANCE .1 After all equipment has been installed and adjusted and all systems balanced,

conduct performance tests in the presence of the Engineer. Arrange the time for these tests at the convenience of the Engineer. Conduct tests under climatic circumstances to ensure complete and comprehensive tests and of such a manner and duration as the Engineer may deem necessary.

.2 During these tests, demonstrate the correct performance of all equipment items

and of the systems they comprise. Should any system or any equipment item fail to function as required, make such changes, adjustments or replacements necessary to meet the performance requirements. Repeat tests until these requirements have been fully satisfied and all systems accepted by Engineer.


JAL No. 14-194

3.18 INTERFERENCE & DETAIL DRAWINGS .1 Prepare and submit for approval, at least 6 copies of Interference and Detail Drawings,

minimum 1/50 scale, to co-ordinate work of this Division with all other Sections. .2 Make Interference Drawings in conjunction with all parties and trades concerned

showing sleeves and openings and passage of piping and ductwork through building structure. Drawings shall also show inserts, special hangers and other features to indicate routing through confined spaces, installation of silencers and other such items in such areas.

.3 Provide 1:25 scale Detail Drawings, fully dimensioned, of piping, ducts and equipment

in ceilings. Base equipment drawings on "Reviewed" Shop Drawings and include, but do not necessarily limit to, details pertaining to access, clearances, tappings, sleeves, electrical connections, drains and service spaces and integral control drawings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 07 20 Page 1 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to General Mechanical Requirements Section 23 05 00 as applicable. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Finish painting of insulated work: Section 09 91 10 Interior Painting. .2 Reinsulation of ductwork: Section 23 07 13 Ductwork Insulation. .3 Heat tracing: Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Before ordering any insulating materials, submit to the Engineer a

list of proposed insulation materials, exterior jackets and adhesive for the various services and equipment on the project. Deviation from the approved list will not be allowed.

.2 Samples: Before ordering any insulation materials, prepare a sample board with a

cross-section sample of all types of insulation, including exterior jacket, properly identified for the various services and equipment on the project and state types of adhesives used. Submit the sample board to the for his review and, after review and acceptance, the sample board will be kept in the 's site office for the duration of the project for reference. Deviation from the accepted samples will not be allowed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING .1 Fibrous glass split sectional pipe insulation of 25 mm (1") thickness with factory

applied vapour barrier jacket and self-seal lap joint. Acceptable Products Owens Corning Canada Inc. High Temp 1200 Manson Alley K with all purpose APT Jacket Fibrex Insulations Inc. Fibrex Coreplus 1200


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Fire retardant elastomeric closed cell foam or neoprene tubing of 10 mm (3/8") nom. thickness may be used instead of fibrous glass insulation on cold water runouts to plumbing fixtures, not exceeding 1.5 m (5'-0") in length, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions using the recommended adhesive Acceptable Products Armstrong AP/Armaflex Nomaco Therma-Cel Rubatex R-1800

2.2 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATING, RECIRCULATION AND BUILDING

HEATING SYSTEM .1 Fibrous glass split sectional pipe insulation of the thickness hereinafter specified

with factory applied vapour barrier jacket and self-seal lap joint. Acceptable Products Owens Corning Canada Inc. High Temp 1200 Manson Alley K with APT jacket Fibrex Insulations Inc. Fibrex Coreplus 1200 HOT WATER PIPING – Pipe Insulation Thickness Fluid Design Operating Temperature 0C

Insulation Conductivity

Pipe Size (mm) and Insulation Thickness (mm)

Conductivity W/m-K

Mean Rating Temp. 0C

<2 5

25 to <40

40 to <100

100 to <200

>20

>177 0.046-0.049 121 64 76 76 102 102 122-177 0.042-0.046 93 38 64 76 76 76 94-121 0.039-0.043 66 38 38 51 51 51 61-93 0.036-0.042 52 25 25 25 38 38 41-60 0.032-0.040 38 13 13 13 25 25

.2 Fire retardant elastomeric closed cell foam or neoprene tubing of 10 mm (3/8") nom.

thickness may be used instead of fibrous glass insulation on hot water runouts to plumbing fixtures, not exceeding 1.5 m (5'-0") in length, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions using the recommended adhesive. Acceptable Products Armstrong AP/Armaflex Nomaco Therma-Cel

2.3 SANITARY AND STORM DRAIN PIPING .1 Insulate above floor storm and sanitary drain piping within the building, with fibrous

glass split sectional pipe insulation of 25 mm (1") thickness with factory applied vapour barrier jacket and self-seal lap joint.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Insulate vertical sections of rainwater conductors between the body of the roof drain

and the horizontal section of the pipe in the same way, also any exposed vertical piping in high humidity areas such as locker and shower rooms.

.3 Insulate exposed waste pipe of all handicapped lavatories with fibrous glass split

sectional pipe insulation of 25 mm (1") thickness with factory applied vapour barrier jacket and self-seal lap joint. Acceptable Products Owens Corning Canada Inc. High Temp 1200 Manson Alley K all purpose with APT jacket Fibrex Insulations Inc. Fibrex Coreplus 1200

2.4 EQUIPMENT DRAIN LINES, SAFETY VALVE VENTS, ETC. .1 Insulate equipment drains carrying liquids at 38 C (100 F) or higher temperature,

and safety valve vent piping to a height of 2.4 m (8 ft.) above any floor, step, catwalk, or platform from which personnel would be within reach of such piping with 25 mm (1") thick insulation. Acceptable Products Owens Corning Canada Inc. 850 with ASJ Manson Alley K with APT jacket Fibrex Insulations Inc. Fibrex Coreplus 1200 Knauf Acceptable Products Mineral Wool Owens Corning Canada Inc. SSL II pipe Insulation Fibrex Insulations Inc. Fibrex Coreplus 1200 (metal jacket

2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION .1 Insulate DX refrigerant suction piping with 19 mm flexible foamed elastomeric

insulation with fittings and valves insulated to match. Weatherproof exterior insulation with two (2) coats of Armaflex white finish thoroughly sealed. Interior insulation shall be left ready for painting by Another Section. Insulate hot gas piping less than 2 m above floor. Also insulate hot gas control piping exterior to equipment.

.2 Acceptable Products Armaflex II Acwil “Therma-Cel” Aeroflex


JAL No. 14-194

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL .1 Perform insulation work using qualified insulation applicators, in accordance with

latest trade application methods and to the Engineer approval. .2 Clean all surfaces to be insulated to remove grime, grease, oil, moisture or other

matter to ensure that insulation is applied to clean dry surfaces. .3 Apply insulation under ambient temperature conditions in accordance with insulation

or adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. .4 Do not apply insulation until piping and heat tracing, has been tested, inspected,

verified, and accepted. .5 Apply insulation neatly and tightly in unbroken lengths and with ends of sections

firmly and squarely butted or engaged together. Lap canvas or other specified wrapping over all joints and thoroughly cement down with adhesive. Extend insulation through sleeves in walls (except fire walls) or other openings in building to make insulation and vapour barrier continuous and of uniform diameter.

.6 Terminate insulation at each side of fire walls and pack the space between wall

sleeve and duct or pipe as specified in Section 23 0500. .7 Where asbestos-containing insulation has been removed from existing piping,

reinsulate (to same extent as removal work) or (to extent as indicated on Drawings). Maintain same thermal value as existing.

.8 Replace insulation removed from existing piping to make tie-in connections with new

insulation. Cut back existing insulation a sufficient distance to make a neat and firm butt joint between old and new insulation.

.9 At expansion joints in piping, apply insulation over a sleeve of 1.6 mm (16 gauge)

metal, fabricated to fit around expansion joint without restricting its movement. Fabricate sleeve so it can be removed to allow for the repacking and lubrication of expansion joint without damaging the adjoining insulation. Extend sleeves a minimum of 75 mm (3") longer than expansion joint, fit with insulation retaining flanges and with a means of maintaining the position of sleeve over expansion joint.

.10 Where piping is specified to be heat traced, provide oversized insulation to

accommodate tracing cable specified in Electrical Specifications.


JAL No. 14-194

3.2 INSULATION PROTECTION BEARING PLATES .1 Each mechanical trade will supply and install bearing plates and temporary spacers

at each hanger and support on insulated cold piping or tubing as specified in Section 23 05 29 – Hangers Supports for Piping and Equipment.

.2 Remove temporary spacers and install a section of asbestos-free calcium silicate

insulation extending at least 150 mm (6") beyond each end of the bearing plate. .3 Bond insulation to the bearing plate with Foster 85-20 or Bakor 230-39 or polymer

waterproof adhesive and finish and seal the complete assembly with Foster 60-38 or Bakor 130-11 or polymer to form an unbroken vapour barrier.

.4 Reinstall or readjust any hanger or support which has been moved in any way to

carry out the above work. 3.3 EQUIPMENT DRAIN LINES AND SAFETY VALVE VENTS .1 Insulate flanges, valves, and fittings with segments of insulation of the same type

and thickness as the insulation on the pipe, secured in place with soft annealed galvanized wire. Finish with Partek Hilcote insulating and finishing cement, and cotton wrapping applied while the cement is still wet.

3.4 HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING .1 Apply 75 mm (3") wide butt strips of the same material as the factory applied jacket.

Seal both longitudinal and butt joint strips with Foster 85-20 or Bakor 230-39 or polymer vapour barrier fire resistive lap sealer, or secure with self seal lap joints where provided.

.2 Insulate fittings, flanges and valves with fibrous glass insulation of same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and finish with a pre-moulded PVC cover, securely fastened and sealed to adjoining pipe covering with Foster 85-75 or Bakor 230-39 or polymer to form a vapour proof joint.

.3 Do not insulate screwed unions and final connections to fixture. .4 Terminate insulation at each end of unions with Partek Hilcote insulating and

finishing cement, trowelled on bevel. 3.5 STORM AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING .1 Build up insulation at joints and fittings with two or more layers of insulation to form

an unbroken surface over joint, coupling or fitting.


JAL No. 14-194

3.6 SURFACE FINISHES .1 Cover exposed insulated piping, valves and fittings in Boiler Rooms, Mechanical

Rooms, Equipment Rooms, and areas where vehicular traffic, etc. could damage the insulation, with 220 g/m2 (6 oz.) canvas.

.2 Do not apply canvas to elastomeric closed cell foam or neoprene insulation, and

piping which will be concealed or furred in. .3 Securely paste canvas on with a two coat application of Foster 30-36 or Bakor 120-

18 fire resistive lagging adhesive over the entire surface. Apply canvas between coats of adhesive, while first coat is still wet. Stretch canvas tight and smooth with overlapping seams located where least visible. Apply second coat of adhesive immediately following application of canvas. Do not use metal bands.

.4 Finish piping, valves and fittings indoors and outdoors insulated with elastomeric

closed cell foam or neoprene with a full coating of white acrylic latex as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

.5 Finish all other insulated piping installed outdoors with a field or factory applied

metal jacket of 0.4 mm (26 ga.) aluminum, with longitudinal "snap-lock" or lapped joints and caulked and strapped butt joints secured with sheetmetal screws. Alternatively, finish pipe and fittings with glass fabric and Foster 65-07 or Bakor 110-26 or polymer fire resistive mastic as previously specified. Locate longitudinal joints in the bottom sector of horizontal lines and with laps positioned to shed any moisture.

.6 On single ply roofs extreme care must be taken when applying mastic sealers to

piping to ensure that no surplus mastic material remains in contact with the roof membrane. Any accidental spills must be cleaned up immediately. Provide temporary plastic drop sheets to protect roof around work area. Remove drop sheets on completion and clean-up of insulation work.

.7 Seal canvas with off-white sizing to leave a smooth non-porous surface ready to

receive paint application. .8 Finish exposed insulated piping within 2.4 m of finished floor level of clean process

areas with an exterior metal jacket of 0.4 mm (26 ga.) aluminum, with longitudinal "snap-lock" joints and strapped butt joints. Conceal longitudinal joints from view. The metal jacket may be field or factory applied.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 12 01 Page 1 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes

.1 Labour, products, equipment and services necessary to complete the work of this Section

.2 Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

.1 Design of automatic sprinkler systems

.2 Preparation of working Drawings

.3 Incorporation of facilities and equipment in an overall fire protection system

.4 Wet pipe sprinkler system(s)


.1 Comply with the latest edition of the following:

.1 National Fire Protection Association

.1 NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Design Submissions

.1 Prepare complete Shop Drawings to suit existing site condition and Architectural Drawings / Reflected ceiling Plans. Drawings shall include:

.1 Drawings and calculations bearing stamp of a Professional Engineer employed by the Fire Protection Company and who is registered as a member of the Association of Professional Engineers of the Province of Ontario.

.2 Submit four (4) copies of plans, hydraulic design calculation sheets, Shop Drawings and equipment submittals to Consultant for review prior to commencement or work.

.3 Submit reviewed Shop Drawings to local municipal authority and obtain their approval before proceeding with any work.

.4 Provide systems in accordance with approved Drawings, subject to inspection and testing requirements of Owner's Insurance Underwriter and Consultant.

.5 Revise Drawings incorporating all comments and submit eight (8) copies to all concerned trades.

.6 Provide fire protection system in consideration to all spaces and all details on architectural Drawings.

.7 System shall be design to authorities leaving jurisdiction.


JAL No. 14-194

.8 Include in Shop Drawings existing Sprinkler Layout of entire Ground and Second Floors, renovated or not. Show Existing System and Proposed System. Provide sprinkler protection to any deficient areas of the entire building. All existing information must be taken at the building and not from the drawings.

.2 Water Flow Test Data

.1 Perform water flow test and use as basis of hydraulic calculations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01330.

.2 Samples

.1 Submit samples for the following

.1 Each type of sprinkler.

.3 Maintenance Materials

.1 Provide the following materials at Project handover:

.1 Storage cabinet

.2 Sprinkler wrench

.3 Spare stock of eight sprinklers of each type. Include at least one head of each sprinkler type installed in system.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Qualifications

.1 An accredited member in good standing of the Canadian Automatic Sprinkler Association.

.2 Has done five (5) similar Projects.

1.6 CODES AND REGULATIONS, PERMITS, COSTS AND FEES

.1 Comply with Municipal or Provincial Codes, Rules and Regulations, Owner's Insurance underwater and/or Authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Apply for and obtain permits required for this work and pay costs levied for permits, inspections and fees.

.3 Comply with the Building Code.

.1 Revisions issue: latest version as amended to date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL .1 Unless otherwise noted, equipment and apparatus to be ULC listed and labelled,

and FM approved.


JAL No. 14-194

2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS

.1 Ratings

.1 ULC and FM listed for fire service.

.2 Intermediate and high temperature rating heads to suit local conditions.

.2 Type

.1 Indicated by type in accordance with the following

.2 No ceilings

.1 Upright, bronze body, bulb type

.3 T-bar ceilings

.1 Semi recessed bulb type.

.4 Spare heads and cabinet

.1 Each sprinkler system: ULC approved metal cabinet containing required number of spare sprinkler heads of each type and temperature rating.

.2 Wrench for removal and replacement of sprinkler heads.

.5 All sprinklers must match existing sprinklers present in the building.

.6 Acceptable Manufacturers

.1 Viking Sprinkler Company

.2 Tyco Fire

.3 Globe Sprinklers

2.3 PIPE & FITTINGS .1 Unburied mains and sprinkler piping: standard black steel Schedule #40 (ASTM

#A53) with black cast iron 1207 kPa WWP screwed or flanged fittings, U.L.C. approved. Victaulic or Couplox couplings and fittings with Butyl gaskets conforming to CSA #B242 may be used where approved by Insurance Underwriter and local authority.

.2 Where approved by Engineer and local authority and Underwriter, Schedule 10 pipe and factory fabricated welded assemblies using ANSI #B16.9 factory made fittings may be used. DO NOT THREAD SCHEDULE 10 PIPE.

2.4 PIPE HANGERS

.1 ULC listed for fire protection services in accordance with NFPA.

2.5 SIGNS .1 Attach properly lettered and approved metal signs to each valve and alarm device

to ANSI/NFPA 13.

.2 Permanently fix hydraulic design data nameplates to riser of each system.


JAL No. 14-194

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Apportionment of the Work

.1 Classify and apportion all materials and the performance of all labour to trades involved in accordance with all local customs, rules, regulations, jurisdictional awards, decisions, etc., insofar as they may apply and as required to efficiently execute the work involved in this Contract.

.2 Measurements and Deviations

.1 Examine existing work prior to commencement of fire protection installations.

.2 Where site conditions require deviations from indicated arrangements or locations, make changes on approval of Consultant without additional cost to Owner.

.3 Should discrepancies occur during installation of fire protection work which will necessitate major revisions, immediately notify Consultant and secure his authorization in writing before proceeding with the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Sprinkler Heads

.1 In T-bar ceilings, locate heads in centre of ceiling tile to present an orderly appearance and in coordination of existing Sprinkler Layout.

.2 Wet Pipe Systems

.1 Obtain Architect’s approval on site for all exposed pipes before proceeding with work.

.2 Provide sprinkler to all concealed spaces as per Site Conditions.

.3 Flushing of Piping

.1 Flush sprinkler system piping in accordance with NFPA requirements and local Authorities.

.2 Flush underground piping and lead-in connections before connection is made to sprinkler system risers and local Authorities.

3.3 PIPING

.1 General

.1 Hang or support piping with miscellaneous structural supports and braces as may be required, unless Drawings or other Sections of the Specifications state otherwise.

.2 Provide new pipe and fittings free from rust and scale of full weight, standard size and thickness, true and round with full cut threads. Cut pipes true with clean sharp pipe cutters. Ream and file ends of pipe and remove burrs from interior. Use reducing fittings instead of bushings wherever reductions in piping occur.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Provide new pipe and fittings free from rust and scale of full weight, standard size and thickness, true and round with full cut threads. Cut pipes true with clean sharp pipe cutters. Ream and file ends of pipe and remove burrs from interior. Use reducing fittings instead of bushings wherever reductions in piping occur.

.4 Remove all unused pipes, cap pipes at mains.

.2 Materials and Fabrication

.1 Conform to CAN/CSA-S16.1M for materials, design of details and execution of the work.

.2 Conform to CAN/CSA-G40.21-M grade 300W for structural shapes, plates, etc.

.3 Conform to the latest issue of the following CSA Specifications.

.1 CSA W47.1 - for qualification of welders

.2 CSA W48.1-M - for electrodes (only coated rods allowed)

.3 CSA W59-M - for design of connections and workmanship

.4 CAN/CSA W117.2-M - for safety

.3 Obtain Architect’s approval on site before installation of all exposed pipes.

3.4 TESTING

.1 Requirements

.1 Execute fire protection systems and equipment tests in accordance with NFPA requirements

.2 Minimum hydrostatic test of not less than 1380 kPa pressure for two hours, or at 345 kPa in excess of maximum static pressure developed in system, if maximum static pressure is in excess of 1034 kPa.

.3 Furnish pumps, gauges and other equipment required to complete test.

.4 Execute tests in presence of Consultant and Owner's authorized representative.

.5 Promptly repair defects which develop during tests, and then re-test system to complete satisfaction of authorized inspectors.

.6 Submit a certificate covering materials and tests to Underwriter's Inspection Authority, together with a request for inspection and approval of complete fire protection system. On receipt of approval, forward certificate to Owner.

3.5 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Take all existing information at building and include in Shop Drawings.

.2 Include in Shop Drawings existing Layout.

.3 Any deficient areas shall be rectified.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 Remove all unused pipes and material from site, not allowed to be accumulate become Contractor’s property and be removed from site immediately.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 10 10 Page 1 PUMPS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes

.1 Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary to complete the work of this Section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

.2 Shop Drawings


.3 Operation and Maintenance Data

.1 Submit printed operation instructions and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01330.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PUMPS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 The following are minimum construction requirements, unless specified elsewhere.

.4 Pump Casings

.1 Close grained cast iron or cast bronze as specified.

.2 Fitted with casing or impeller wear rings, or both.

.5 Impellers

.1 Enclosed bronze or duralloy.

.2 Dynamically balanced.

.3 Mounted on carbon steel shaft fitted with stainless steel or bronze sleeves.

.6 Seals

.1 Suction pressures less than 640 kPa: fitted with mechanical seals.

.2 Stuffing box pressure in excess of 690 kPa: balanced type seals.

.3 Pumps with packing glands: fitted with stainless steel shaft sleeves for full length of stuffing box.

.7 Performance

.1 Characteristic curve to be continuously rising from run-out to shut-off.

.2 Select pump to operate within flow range from 30% below point of maximum efficiency to 10% above that point for impeller diameter chosen.

.3 Installed impeller diameter not to exceed 90% of maximum impeller diameter catalogued for pump casing.

SECTION 21 10 10 Page 2 PUMPS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

.4 Motors to be sized for continuous operation without motor overload at runout condition for impeller size and rotational speed selected.

2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS - IN LINE CIRULATORS

.1 Construction

.5 Capacity: 0.3 L/s ( 5 gpm) 3.65 meters ( 12 ft.), 124 watts

.6 Working pressure: to 1200 kPa

.7 Bronze construction with alloy steel shaft.

.8 Shaft with integral thrust collar, mechanical seal, supported by two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.

.9 Resiliently mounted motor.

.10 Manual starter.

.8 Manufacturers

.1 S. A. Armstrong Limited

.2 ITT Fluid Products Canada (Bell & Gossett)

.3 Taco

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 In-line Circulators

1. Install with fluid flow direction as indicated by flow arrows on pump body.

2. Support piping and pump at flanges or near unions on connections to unit.

3. Install with bearing lubrication points accessible.

4. Check pump rotation.

5. Install gauges at suction and discharge.

6. Provide all wiring to complete the system and make operational.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 11 18 Page 1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES .1 ANSI B16.18-[1984], Cast Copper Alloy Lead Free Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .2 ASTM B88M-[89], Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric). .3 MSS-SP-80-[1987], Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 1.2 PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit Product data in accordance with Section 013330 .2 Submit data for valves. 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section

01770 - Operation and Maintenance Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING .1 Domestic hot, cold and recirc systems, within building. .2 Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M. .3 Buried or embedded: copper tube, soft annealed, type K: to ASTM B88M, in long

lengths and with no buried joints. 2.2 FITTINGS .1 Cast bronze threaded fittings, Class 125 and 250: to ANSI/ASME B16.15. .2 Cast copper, solder type: to ANSI B16.18. 2.3 JOINTS .1 Solder/brazing: lead free silver solder. .2 Teflon tape: for threaded joints. 2.4 GATE VALVES .1 NPS 2 and over, screwed: .1 Rising stem: to MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, screw-in

bonnet, solid wedge disc.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Acceptable material: Crane, Toyo, Red & White. 2.5 SWING CHECK VALVES .1 NPS 2 and under, soldered: .2 To MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in

cap,regrindable seat. .3 Acceptable material: Crane, Toyo, Red & White. 2.6 BALL VALVES .1 NPS 2 and under, soldered: .1 To ANSI B16.18, Class 150. .2 Bronze body, chrome plated brass ball, PTFE Teflon adjustable packing,

brass gland and [PTFE Teflon] [Buna N] seat, steel lever handle, with NPT to copper adaptors.

.3 Acceptable material: Crane, Toyo, Red & White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install in accordance with Canadian Plumbing Code Ontario Plumbing Code and

local authority having jurisdiction. .2 Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and

assemble without binding. .3 Assemble all piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards. Connect

water line to existing main serving existing building. .4 Install tubing close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve headroom

and space. Group exposed piping and run parallel to walls. .5 Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions

unless otherwise indicated. .6 Buried tubing: .1 Lay in well compacted washed sand in accordance with AWWA Class B

bedding. .2 Bend tubing without crimping or constriction. Minimize use of fittings.


JAL No. 14-194

.7 Balance recirculation system. 3.2 VALVES .1 Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with ball valves. .2 Balance recirculation system using lockshield globe valves. Mark settings and

record on as-built Drawings on completion. 3.3 DISINFECTION .1 Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to requirements of authority having

jurisdiction approval of Consultant and Local Plumbing Inspector. Upon completion, provide laboratory test reports on water quality to Consultant and submit to authorities having jursidiction.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 13 17 Page 1 DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 Section Includes:

.1 The installation of drainage waste and vent piping.

.2 Sustainable requirements for construction and verification.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).

.1 CSA B67-1972(R1996), Lead Service Pipe, Waste Pipe, Traps, Bends and Accessories.

.2 CAN/CSA-B70, Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Fittings and Means of Joining.

.3 CAN/CSA-B125, Plumbing Fittings.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Health and Safety:

.1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 30 - Health and Safety Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL

.1 Sustainable Requirements:

.1 Materials and resources in accordance with Section Sustainable Requirements.

2.2 PIPES .1 Buried:

.1 50 mm or smaller Type L copper with DWV solder fittings. 75 mm and larger 27.6 mPa clas cast iron soil pipe.

.2 Buried drains laid on approved solid bedding D.W.V. plastic P.V.C. solvent weld gravity sewer solvent weld pipe (CSA #B182.1) SDR-28 to 150 mm size and SDR-35 for larger sizes.

.2 Above Ground Piping

.1 Cast iron pipes 27.6 mPa CSA B-70 pipes in exposed location or in accessible pipe chases: cast iron body with straight threaded, coated plug having a tapered shoulder that seats against a lead seal.

.2 Copper stack piping in exposed locations or in accessible pipe chases: Bronze cleanout tee, bronze ferrule and cover, secured to ferrule by bronze cap screws.

.3 Access cover for cleanouts concealed in walls: type to suit wall surface and construction.

SECTION 22 13 17 Page 2 DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

.4 Cover for cleanouts at base of vertical sanitary stacks or rainwater leaders: bolted type, neoprene gasket, and brass cap screws or bolt studs, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with Ontario Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Vent line thru their roof shall have very minimum penetrations and minimum of 75 mm size extended 450mm above roof.

.3 Provide vent line to each fixture and trap in accordance with OBC requirement.

.4 Provide sanitary line to each fixture and connect to building sanitary line.

3.2 TESTING .1 Pressure test buried systems before backfilling.

.2 Hydraulically test to verify grades and freedom from obstructions.

3.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION .1 Cleanouts:

.1 Ensure accessible and that access doors are correctly located.

.2 Open, cover with linseed oil and re-seal.

.3 Verify that cleanout rods can probe as far as the next cleanout, at least.

.2 Test to ensure traps are fully and permanently primed.

.3 Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected to system and effectively vented.

.4 Affix applicable label (storm, sanitary, vent, pump discharge etc.) c/w directional arrows every floor or 4.5 m (whichever is less).

3.4 VERIFICATION .1 Verification requirements in accordance with Section 01 47 17 - Sustainable

Requirements: Contractor's Verification, include:

.1 Materials and resources.

.2 Storage and collection of recyclables.

.3 Construction waste management.

.4 Resource reuse.

.5 Local/regional materials.

.6 Low-emitting materials.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 42 01 Page 1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESORIES DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes

.1 Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary to complete the work of this Section

1.2 SUBMITTALS

.1 Shop Drawings


.2 .2 Operation and Maintenance Data


1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 Reduced pressure type backflow preventers: to CAN/CSA B64 standard

series

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS .1 General

.1 Acceptable Manufacturers:

.1 Watts

.2 Wilkins

.2 Vacuum Breakers, Pressure Type

.1 To CSA B64.1.2 for back-siphonage, no back pressure.


.3 Working temperature: to 60oC

.4 NPS ½ to NPS 2: Anti-siphon pressure vacuum breaker complete with bronze body and spring loaded single float and disc with independent first check, shut off valves and bronze type test cocks for winterization draining. Springs should be of stainless steel construction

.3 Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventer Assembly

.1 To CSA B64.4.

.2 Two independent check valves with captured springs, access for maintaining internals, replaceable valve seats, intermediate relief valve, shut-off valves and ball type test cocks.



JAL No. 14-194

.4 NPS ½ to NPS 2: complete with quarter turn shut-off valves and bronze strainer.

.5 NPS 2½ to NPS 10: complete with rising stem, shut-off gate valves and strainer.

.6 Backflow preventer test kit: pressure gauge, colour coded needle valves and hose, adaptors, replaceable hose filters and valve stem seals, carrying case.

2.2 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE .1 Spring loaded, field adjustable, strainer, replaceable seat. Access for servicing

internal components. Products from the following manufacturers are acceptable.

.1 Watts

.2 Zurn

.3 Conbraco

2.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS .1 Water hammer arrestors shall be PP In. or equal, sized and installed as per

Manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide unit in accordance with the following schedule:

Model Fixture Unit SC-500 Up to 11 SC-700 12 – 32 SC-1000 33 – 60 SC-1250 61 – 113

2.4 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 Floor Drains: to CSA B79

.2 Cast iron body square, adjustable head, stainless steel, integral seepage pan, and clamping collar.

.3 Combination funnel floor drain; cast iron body with integral seepage pan, clamping collar, nickel-bronze adjustable head strainer with integral funnel.

.4 Planters; cast-iron body with integral seepage pan, clamping collar, nickel-bronze adjustable head strainer, vandal-proof dome and standpipe, stainless steel screen.

.5 For seamless floor, provide surface clamp for each floor drain.

2.5 CLEANOUTS

.1 Cleanout Plugs: heavy cast iron male ferrule with brass screws and threaded brass or bronze plug. Sealing-caulked lead seat or neoprene gasket. Water operated outside alarm bell, weather protected.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Access Covers:

.1 Wall Access: face or wall type, polished stainless steel square cover with flush head securing screws, bevelled edge frame complete with anchoring lugs.

.2 Floor Access: round, cast iron body and frame with adjustable secured nickel bronze top, cast box with anchor lugs and:

.1 Plugs: bolted bronze with neoprene gasket.

.2 Cover for Unfinished Concrete Floors: stainless steel square, gasket, vandal-proof screws.

.3 Cover for Terrazzo Finish: polished stainless steel covers with recessed cover for filling with terrazzo, vandal-proof locking screws.

.4 Cover for Tile and Linoleum Floors: polished stainless steel covers with recessed cover for linoleum or tile infill, complete with vandal-proof locking screws.

.5 Cover for Carpeted Floors: polished stainless steel covers with deep flange cover for carpet infill, complete with carpet retainer vandal-proof locking screws.

.6 Seamless Floors: Similar to above fitted with surface clamping device.

.7 See Architectural Drawings for exact location of cleanout.

2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS

.1 NPS2 and over, semi-steel bodies, Class 125, flanged: to ASTM A126, Class B.

.2 Semi-steel spring chambers with bronze trim.

2.7 WATER METERS

.1 Comply with AWWA and as approved by local P.U.C.

.1 50 mm size for main domestic water supply with pulse reader.

.2 Accessories:

.1 Backflow preveneter

.2 Pressure reducing valve

.3 Shutoff valves at inlet and outlet

.4 Valve bypass line

2.8 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 Brass, with integral vacuum breaker, NPS1/2 solder ends, NPS1/2 drip line connection.


JAL No. 14-194

2.9 STRAINERS

.1 Y type with 20 mesh, monel, bronze or stainless steel removable screen.

.2 Bronze body, screwed ends, with brass cap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including Product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheet.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with provincial codes, and local authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.

3.3 CLEANOUTS

.1 Install cleanouts at base of soil and waste stacks, and rainwater leaders, at locations required code, and as indicated.

.2 Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor.

.3 Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS4.

3.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

.1 Install on branch supplies to fixtures or group of fixtures.

3.6 BACK FLOW PREVENTORS

.1 Install in accordance with CSA-B64 Series, where indicated and elsewhere as required by code at maximum 1500 mm AFF.

.2 Pipe discharge to terminate over nearest drain and or service sink.

.3 Submit on site test Certificates.

.4 Provide at downstream of water meter.

.5 Install backflow preventers where shown on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, and as follows:

.1 Locate reduced pressure principle backflow prevention devices at maximum 1200 mm above finished floor.

.2 Locate vacuum breaker devices exposed as close to fixture connection as possible.

.3 Provide drain collector at relief valves and NPS 3/4 drain from reduced pressure principle backflow prevention devices devices and run drain to nearest floor drain.


JAL No. 14-194

.6 Testing:

.1 Provide the services of an independent inspection agency to verify operation of all backflow prevention devices provided with testing ports.

.2 Provide inspection tag on each such device.

.3 Submit test results to Building Plumbing Inspector and Consultant.

3.7 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 Install for floor drains and each trap.

.2 Install on cold water supply to nearest frequently used plumbing fixture, in concealed space, to approval.

.3 Install soft copper tubing to floor drain.

3.8 STRAINERS

.1 Install with sufficient room to remove basket.

3.9 MAKE-UP WATER VALVES .1 Provide in domestic water lines to heating and cooling systems where shown c/w

backflow preventer.

3.10 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES .1 Locate in domestic water lines where pressure is more than 552 kPa.

.2 Provide pressure gauge on upstream and downstream side of PRV, complete with pet-cock.

.3 Provide pressure relief valve suitably sized and pipe to drain.

3.11 SHOCK ABSORBERS .1 Locate shock absorbers in hot and cold water lines:

.1 At far ends of mains

.2 At branch lines to each flush valve and quick closing valve

.3 At dead ends of branch piping or to groups of plumbing fixtures

.4 At isolated individual plumbing fixtures

3.12 START-UP

.1 General:

.1 In accordance with General Requirements.

.2 Timing: start-up only after:

.1 Pressure tests have been completed.

.2 Disinfection procedures have been completed.

.3 Certificate of static completion has been issued.

.4 Water treatment systems operational.

.3 Provide continuous supervision during start-up.


JAL No. 14-194

3.13 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

.1 General:

.1 In accordance with General Requirements, supplemented as specified.

.2 Timing:

.1 After start-up deficiencies rectified.

.2 After certificate of completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction.

.3 Adjustments:

.1 Verify that flow rate and pressure meet required criteria.

.2 Make adjustments while flow rate.

.4 Floor drains:

.1 Verify operation of trap seal primer.

.2 Prime, using trap primer. Adjust flow rate to suit site conditions.

.3 Check operations of flushing features.

.4 Check security, accessibility, removeability of strainer.

.5 Clean out baskets.

.6 Provide vent line to each floor drain and trap.

.5 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers, backwater valves:

.1 Test tightness, accessibility for O&M of cover and of valve.

.2 Simulate reverse flow and back-pressure conditions to test operation of vacuum breakers, backflow preventers.

.3 Verify visibility of discharge from open ports.

.6 Access doors:

.1 Verify size and location relative to items to be accessed.

.7 Cleanouts:

.1 Verify covers are gas-tight, secure, yet readily removable.

.8 Water hammer arrestors:

.1 Verify proper installation of correct type of water hammer arrester.

.9 Wall, Ground hydrants:

.1 Verify complete drainage, freeze protection.

.2 Verify operation of vacuum breakers.


JAL No. 14-194

.10 Pressure regulators, PRV assemblies:

.1 Adjust settings to suit locations, flow rates, pressure conditions.

.11 Strainers:

.1 Clean out repeatedly until clear.

.2 Verify accessibility of cleanout plug and basket.

.3 Verify that cleanout plug does not leak.

.12 Training:

.1 Training of O&M Personnel, supplemented as specified.

.2 Demonstrate full compliance with Design Criteria.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 42 02 Page 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes

.1 Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary to complete the work of this Section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

.1 Shop Drawings




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES

.1 General Requirements

.1 CSA approved plumbing fixtures and fittings, of make, type and size specified herein.

.2 Comply with the current water saving ratings of the Ontario Building Code, and ASHRAE/IEEE 90.1.

.1 Lavatories

.2 Shower heads

.3 Flow rates of fixtures as stated in each fixture description in paragraph.

.3 Plumbing supplies and fixture trim material to be of CSA approved plumbing brass with chrome plated finish, and of make and type specified.

.1 Each item to bear name of manufacturer or identifying trademark.

.4 Provide plumbing fixtures shown or noted complete with necessary fittings and escutcheons. Plastic escutcheons are not acceptable. Fixtures and fittings shall conform to C.S.A. B45.1, B45.4 and B125 amended to date.

.5 Alternate Equipment:

Sinks 1. Novani

.6 (S-1) Two Compartment S.S. Sink Kindred LBD6808, deep back ledge 18-8 18 gauge stainless steel, two

compartment, mirror finished ledge, self-rimming, counter mounted, with crumb cup strainer, sound deadening. `P' Trap cast brass, 38 mm with cleanout, union and escutcheon. Trim fitting Delta Model 26C3223, Faucet, deck mounted. 33T311 `P' Trap, Connect with S.S. flexible tubes and 12.7mm rough Stops on supply piping.

SECTION 22 42 02 Page 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

.7 (SH) Shower Symmons Model 1-100 safety mixing valve, 1.5 gpm showerhead arm

and flange. .8 Water Cooler Supplied by Owner installed by this Section. Provide water and drain

from adjacent sink and connect to water cooler.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Water Flow Rate

.1 Adjust to provide specified water flow rate based on manufacturers calibration data for valve open vs. inlet water pressure.

.2 Install each fixture to Manufacturer’s directions. Provide all accessories as required.

.3 Provide trap and vent line to each fixture.

.4 Run all services concealed in wall. Do not run any exposed pipes.

.5 Provide shut-off valves at each inlet and outlet of mixing valves.

.6 Verify each fixture with millwork provided by another Section. No extra will be allowed if revisions is required due to millwork provided by another Section.

.7 VERIFY mounting height of all fixtures with Architect BEFORE ROUGH-IN. Adjust flush valves to provide adequate flush with minimum water. Provide all wiring to electrically operated units from outlets provided by Division 16.

.8 Kitchen Equipment Section will provide Kitchen Equipment complete with faucets.

.9 Rough-in and connect up gas, hot, cold, high temperature water, waste and vent piping to Bar and Kitchen Equipment as indicated or required. Provide traps, stops, cocks, and piping required to complete entire installation. Provide drain piping to Floor Drains from equipment. Exposed piping shall be chrome plated.

.10 Kitchen Equipment Refrigeration Section will provide refrigeration equipment, coils, and fans complete. This Section will provide water, waste and condensate piping from main to each equipment c/w shut-off valve to approval.

.11 Provide on Dishwasher high temperature piping, 19 mm Watts #U5LP pressure reducing valve to reduce 0.63 L/s from 345 kPa to 140 kPa. Provide globe valve and strainer ahead of P.R.V. and 63 mm dial pressure gauge reading 0 to 700 kPa after P.R.V. Provide stop valve, #W5 Shock Stop and Watts #228A vacuum breaker on connection to Dishwasher. Provide Watts #909S backflow preventer on detergent dispenser.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 23 Page 1 VALVES DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Section 21 05 01 General Mechanical Requirements.


.1 232116 Section “Hydronic System, Steel”

.2 230554 Section "Mechanical Identification”

.3 230933 Section "Building Management System”

.4 232114 “Hydronic Specialties”

1.3 SUMMARY .1 This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

.1 Bronze gate valves.

.2 Cast-iron gate valves.

.3 Bronze globe valves.

.4 Cast-iron globe valves.

.5 Ball and plug valves.

.6 Butterfly valves. .2 This Section also includes: .1 Flow Measuring Equipment 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim

materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HOT WATER .1 All gate, globe throttling and check valves shall be Crane, Jenkins, Newman Hattersley,

Keystone, DeZurik or Toyo. Ball valves, plug valves, and butterfly valves shall be as listed below or approved equal. Shutoff valves for all general service purposes shall be ball valves, not gate valves.


JAL No. 14-194

Throttling, control or bypass valves: globe type, brass up to and including 50 mm size with stainless steel seats and discs. Larger size valves shall be butterfly valves as for shut-off valves but with manual gear operator.

Provide on piping to and from each hot water coil and unit heater necessary shut-off vales full size of line for isolating same on system side of unions.

Victaulic valves meeting above criteria may be used in grooved piping systems. Note that, balancing shall be achieved using specified circuit setter along with a ball or

butterfly shutoff valve. Where grooved piping systems are used, Victaulic Vic-300 (for steel piping systems)

and Series 608 (for copper piping systems) or Grinnel Gruvlok 7700 or 8000 GR butterfly valves may be used. Note that extended stem is required to allow proper insulation.

Armstrong 4 turn balancing valves may be used in lieu of B & G Circuit Setters or Taco. Valves shall be compatible with ethylene glycol. 2.2 FLOW MEASURING EQUIPMENT .1 Provide in each hot water branch pipe an S.A. Armstrong circuit balancing valve to

suit pipe size. Valves shall be equipped with ports to measure flow. .2 Fittings up to 2” size shall be Model CBVI screwed end circuit balancing fitting with

shutoff/balancing valve, drain connection and meter connections. Fittings over 2” size shall be Model CBV-11 flanged end circuit balancing fitting with valved meter connection and shutoff/balancing valve. Fittings shall be rated for 125 psi working pressure.

.3 Supply one Armstrong "Compuflow" digital meter complete with temperature probe,

carrying case, hoses and operating instructions. Turn over to Engineer on completion of system balancing.

.4 All balancing valves shall have 5 full 360o turn from open to closed position. .5 CBV’s shall be compatible with ethylene glycol. .6 Acceptable Products: .1 Taco Ltd. .2 Tour & Anderson .3 ITT Bell & Gossett PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION .1 Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Install valves with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

.3 Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. .4 Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. .5 Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. .6 Install drain valve at the low point of each zone. 3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION .1 Refer to Division 210501 Section "General Mechanical Requirements" for basic

piping joint construction. .2 Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant,

and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32,

lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ADJUSTING .1 Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into

service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 29 Page 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Section 21 05 01 Mechanical General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Conform to Section 23 21 16 Hydronic Systems, Steel. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit Shop Drawings for equipment covered by

this Section including upper, middle and pipe attachments, riser clamps, shields and saddles, and sway braces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL .1 Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1

and MSS SP58. .2 Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use for rigging or

erection purposes.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS .1 Finishes: .1 Pipe hangers and supports: painted with zinc-rich paint after manufacture. .2 Use electro-plating galvanizing process. .3 Ensure steel hangers in contact with copper piping are epoxy coated. .2 Upper attachment structural: suspension from lower flange of I-Beam: .1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: malleable iron C-clamp with hardened steel

cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip. .1 Rod: 9 mm UL listed. .3 Upper attachment structural: suspension from upper flange of I-Beam: .1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: ductile iron top-of-beam C-clamp with

hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip, UL listed.

.4 Hanger rods: threaded rod material to MSS SP58:

.1 Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement of pipework is anticipated.

.5 Pipe attachments: material to MSS SP58: .1 Attachments for steel piping: carbon steel black. .2 Attachments for copper piping: copper plated black steel. .3 Use insulation shields for hot pipework. .4 Oversize pipe hangers and supports. .6 Adjustable clevis: material to MSS SP69 UL listed, clevis bolt with nipple spacer

and vertical adjustment nuts above and below clevis. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL .1 General

.1 Supply and install miscellaneous structural supports, platforms and braces as may be required to hang or support piping unless Drawings or other Sections of Specifications state otherwise.

.2 Submit detailed Shop Drawings to Engineer for review before

commencing fabrication. .2 Materials and Fabrication

.1 Conform to CAN/CSA-S16 for materials, design of details and execution of work.

.2 Use welded construction wherever practicable, with bolted joints allowed

for field assembly using high strength steel bolts. Chip welds to remove slag, and grind smooth.

.3 Conform to latest issue of following CSA Specifications. CSA W47.1, for qualification of welders CSA W48.1-M, for electrodes (only coated rods allowed) CSA W59-M, for design of connections and workmanship CSA W117.2, for safety

.3 Painting and Cleaning

.1 Touch up minor damage to finish on equipment with standard factory applied baked enamel finish. If, in Engineer's opinion, damage is too extensive to be remedied by touch up, replace damaged equipment.

.2 Clean steel by scraping, wire brushing or other effective means to remove

base scale, rust, oil, dirt or other foreign matter. .3 Apply 1 coat of zinc chromate iron oxide primer, conforming to

CAN/CGSB-1.40-M to miscellaneous steel.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 In field, touch up bolt heads and nuts, previously unpainted connections

and surfaces damaged during erection with primer as herein before specified.

.5 Give 2 coats of primer to surfaces which will be inaccessible after

erection. .6 Remove foreign matter from steelwork on completion of installation. .7 With exception of prime painting of miscellaneous steel or any other

specific requirements as specified above or under respective Sections of Division 15, or equipment otherwise factory painted, painting will be provided under Division 9, Finishes.

2.4 CONCRETE INSERTS .1 Install inserts required for attachment of hangers, either for suspension of piping

or equipment. .2 For masonry or poured concrete construction use expansion type units. Insert

into concrete after concrete has cured. Anchors or inserts installed by explosive means shall not be used.

2.5 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS .1 Beam Clamps

Grinnell Myatt Hilti

.2 Pipe Hangers: Grinnell Myatt Hilti PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .1 Attachment to Building Construction

.1 Use welding studs of size not larger than 10 mm (3/8") for attaching miscellaneous materials and equipment to building steel. If weight of materials or equipment require bolts or studs larger than 10 mm (3/8") dia, use steel clips or brackets, secured to building steel by welding or bolting method of attachment as approved by Engineer.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Use self drilling expansion type concrete inserts for securing miscellaneous equipment and materials to masonry or concrete construction already in place, of sufficient number and size to prevent concrete from breaking away. Use of powder or power actuated fasteners will not be allowed unless prior written approval is obtained from Engineer.

.3 Support rods for any suspended item must not be attached to or extended

through steel pan type roofs or through concrete slab roofs. .4 Provide beam clamps of 2-bolt design and of such type that rod load is

transmitted only concentrically to beam web centreline. Use of "C" and "I" beam side clamps and other similar items will not be allowed without written consent of Engineer.

.5 Where roof or floor framing consists of open web or long span steel joists,

ensure that hangers are located at or within 150 mm (6") of joist top or bottom chord panel points, otherwise provide additional structural steel as required where hanger spacing does not coincide with joist spacing. Design suspension assembly such that hanger load is transmitted only concentrically to supporting joist. Do not use "C" and "I" beam side clamps, brackets and other similar, without written consent of Engineer.

3.2 PIPING CONSTRUCTION METHODS .1 General

.1 Unless specified otherwise herein, construct and install piping in

accordance with ANSI Sections B31.1 to B31.9 as applicable to service, except that soldered joints will not be permitted in compressed air piping.

.2 To avoid unnecessary cutting of masonry, provide inserts, sleeves and

anchors to other trades for building in as Work proceeds. Arrange with other trades to leave openings, slots and chases to accommodate later installation of mechanical work.

3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS .1 General

.1 Support or suspend piping with necessary hangers, structural supports

and/or brackets as indicated on Drawings and/or as required, to prevent sagging, warping and vibration and to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Place hangers and supports close to fittings, valves and/or other heavy parts.

.2 Do not allow loads of any nature to be transmitted through piping

connections to equipment not specifically designed for such loads. Where flexible connections are not called for at connections to equipment, support pipe by stands attached to both pipe and supporting structure so that force in any direction is not transmitted to equipment.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Provide suitably dampened spring hangers for first 3 supports from

equipment connection on piping subject to excessive movement or shock from any source, thermal expansion and contraction, selected in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Where it is evident that no undue loads will be transmitted to equipment by system concerned, i.e. small bore connections to comparatively large equipment, cold service piping not subject to shock, etc., then spring hangers may be omitted and standard hangers used.

.4 Use trapeze type hangers where pipes are grouped together, unless

specifically indicated otherwise on Drawings. Suspend horizontal member by adjustable rods with locking feature for maintaining level and slope. Space trapeze type hangers based on closest interval required by any pipe supported thereon. Provide any auxiliary steel required to support trapeze between building steel.

.5 Do not hang any pipe from another pipe unless specifically indicated on

Drawings. .2 Hangers

.1 For insulated piping up to NPS 4 carrying liquids at temperatures 10.5 deg C (51 deg F) and higher, use standard weight clevis steel hangers with level adjustment and locknut.

.2 For insulated lines of NPS 4 dia and larger carrying liquids at

temperatures 10.5 deg C (51 deg F) or higher, use adjustable roller type hangers with locknuts, and rollers of sufficient width to clear outside diameter of insulation on piping. Support rollers at both ends, either by yoke, swivel type hanger or by 2 adjustable rods with locknuts.

.3 For insulated piping carrying liquids at temperature of 10 deg C (50 deg

F) or less, use elongated clevis type steel hangers, with clevis of sufficient width to fit over insulation bearing plate.

.4 Provide insulation protection bearing plates at hangers and supports for

piping carrying liquids at temperature of 10 deg C (50 deg F) or less. Install temporary spacers between plate and pipe equal to thickness of insulation specified.

.5 Bearing plates may be either shop fabricated, or manufactured plates of

size required to properly fit outside diameter of pipe insulation.


JAL No. 14-194

.6 Fabricate bearing plates conforming to following table for various pipe sizes:

Length of Thickness of Pipe Size (NPS) P plate mm (in) Plate mm (ga) 13 mm thr. 138 mm 130 (5) 1.2 (18) 50 mm 150 (6) .52 (16) 63 mm 200 (8) 1.52 (16) 75 mm 230 (9) 1.52 (16) 100 mm and up 250 (10) 1.52 (16) .7 Form bearing plates to outside diameter of adjoining pipe insulation and

extend plate up to horizontal centre line of pipe. .8 For non-insulated piping use clevis type of wrought steel construction with

adjustable rod, level locking feature and backnuts. .9 For copper tubing provide copper coated hangers. Regulations of some

municipalities require that copper tubing be taped with plastic tape at hanger location, or hanger be provided with plastic insert. Meet these requirements when required, in which case copper coating may be omitted on hanger.

.10 Attach hanger rods to building structure by means of malleable iron beam

clamps, concrete inserts, and/or approved anchors as hereinbefore specified.

.3 Hanger Spacing

.1 For horizontal runs of plumbing and drainage piping comply with hanger spacing requirements of NBC.

.2 For horizontal runs of black or galvanized steel pipe, other than for

plumbing service, do not exceed max distances between supports and with min dia rods as follows:

Pipe Size (NPS) Distance m (ft) Dia. of Rod mm (in)

Up thru 32 mm 1.8 (6) 10 (3/8) 38 mm 1.8 (6) 10 (3/8) 50 mm 3.05 (10) 10 (3/8) 63 mm & 75 mm 3.66 (12) 12 (1/2) 100 mm 4.27 (14) 16 (5/8) 150 mm 5.18 (17) 19 (3/4) 200 mm 5.79 (19) 22 (7/8) 250 mm & 300 mm 6.71 (22) 22 (7/8)

.3 Provide additional hangers in locations where there are concentrated

loads such as valves, specialties and other such items.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 For horizontal runs of copper tubing for services other than plumbing, do not exceed 1.8 m (6 ft) between hangers for lines up to and including NPS 3/4 and 2.4 m (8 ft) for lines of NPS 1 and larger.

.5 For horizontal runs of piping fabricated of PVC, use hanger spacing as

recommended by manufacturer. .4 Vertical Piping Supports

.1 Support vertical plumbing and drainage piping as required by OBC,

unless more stringent requirements are specified herein. .2 Support cast iron soil pipe at every floor and other piping at every other

floor unless otherwise required by expansion conditions or otherwise specified.

.3 Support bottom of riser with base fitting set on concrete pier or by hanger

located at top of riser pipe as close to riser as possible. .4 For supports at intermediate floors, use Grinnell Fig. 261 or Myatt or

Crane steel extension pipe clamp, bolted securely to pipe. Rest ends of clamp on pipe sleeve or on floor.

.5 Provide lateral stability of vertical piping by fabricated brackets or

malleable iron, extension type split hangers. Run vertical piping at columns in column webs, on either or both sides of column, unless otherwise directed by Engineer.

.5 Anchors and Guides

.1 Supply and install anchors where indicated on Drawings and/or as required to maintain permanent location of pipe lines. Construct anchors for steel or galvanized pipe of approved steel straps and/or rods and for anchoring copper lines use copper plated anchors or provide insulation bands between tubing and clamps if steel straps or rods are used. Install anchors and guides in approved manner.

.2 Acceptable Materials:

.1 Crinnell .2 Myatt .3 Crane .4 Adsco .5 Hunt

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 54 Page 1 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Section 21 05 01 General mechanical Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK .1 Forced Air Heaters: 23 55 01. .2 Air to Air Energy Recovery Equipment Units: 23 72 13 .3 HVAC Fans: 23 34 24 .4 Evaporative Water Cooler: 23 65 11 .5 Heat Pump: 23 81 40 .6 Pumps: 23 21 23 .7 Hydronic Systems Steel : 23 21 16 .8 Thermal Insulation for Piping: 21 07 20 .9 Valves: 23 05 23 .10 Heating Boilers: 23 52 00 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit samples and lists of proposed wording for approval before ordering materials or engraving nameplates.

.2 Submit a full list of all services to be labeled and the colour and legend

proposed for each service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS .1 Pipe Labels, Identification Tapes and Tags

Brady Safety Supply Co. S.M.S. Revere-Seton


JAL No. 14-194

2.2 MANUFACTURERS NAMEPLATES

.1 Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened complete with raised or recessed letters.

.2 Indicate equipment tag number as indicated on Drawings and equipment size, model, manufacturer's name, serial number, performance rating, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors.

2.3 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES .1 Provide nameplates for all mechanical and electrical equipment installed under this

Division, adequately describing the function or use of the particular equipment involved and including equipment number and equipment name generally as listed on the Drawing Schedules. Submit list of nameplates to the Engineer for review. Do not commence fabrication of nameplates until after receipt of Engineer review.

.2 Fit nameplates to electrical equipment, including, but not limited to: motor starters,

pushbutton stations, control panels, time switches, disconnect switches, and contactors or relays in separate enclosures.

.3 Furnish nameplates of laminated phenolic plastic with white finish and minimum

10 mm (3/8") high black letters. 2.4 VALVE TAGS AND INDEXES .1 Upon completion of the work, furnish and install a 25 mm (1") dia. brass tag at each

valve bearing an Index Number designating the valve. Review valve designation with the Engineer before ordering.

.2 Provide in duplicate, a typewritten directory mounted in a glazed hardwood frame for

each system, giving the valve index number, size, make and Cat. No. and the "service" of each valve and the location of the valve.

2.5 PIPE IDENTIFICATION .1 Label all piping installed under this Division to indicate the content and direction of

flow. Include the operating pressure or vacuum, as applicable for piping carrying steam, compressed air or vacuum.

.2 Conform with CGSB 24.3 for primary label colour, and with legend and direction

arrows in black. Print legend in full wherever feasible, or a recognized abbreviation of the service involved.

.3 Where outside diameter of pipe (or insulation) exceeds 75 mm (3"). Provide labels

with a minimum width of 64 mm (2-1/2") and 50 mm (2") high letters. Where outside diameter of pipe (or insulation) is 75 mm (3") or less, provide labels of 29 mm (1-1/8") width and 25 mm (1") high lettering. Length of labels as dictated by legend.

.4 Provide labels of plastic coated tape with self-adhesive backing surface. For

installation on insulated pipe, provide adhesive suitable for this application.


JAL No. 14-194

2.6 CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION .1 Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls and sensors with nameplates

of laminated phenolic plastic with white finish and minimum 10 mm (3/8") high black letters.

2.7 SYSTEM NAMEPLATES

.1 Colours:

.1 Hazardous: red letters, white background.

.2 Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by applicable codes).

.2 Construction:

.1 3 mm thick [laminated plastic] [or] [white anodized aluminum], matte finish, with square corners, letters accurately aligned and machine engraved into core.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL .1 Clean all surfaces before painting or attaching adhesive labels. .2 Treat any surface which is "dusty" or "chalky" with a sodium silicate solution before

application of the labels. After application of labels, apply a clear lacquer, as approved by the Engineer, over the labels, and at least 25 mm (1") beyond perimeter of labels.

.3 Locate nameplates and identification in conspicuous location to facilitate easy

reading from operating floor. .4 Do not insulate or paint over nameplates. 3.2 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES .1 Securely fasten nameplates to the equipment with round-head cadmium plated steel

self-tapping screws. 3.3 VALVE TAGS AND INDEXES .1 Attach tags to valve handwheels or operators with a non-ferrous key chain. .2 Locate framed indexes where instructed by Engineer.


JAL No. 14-194

3.4 PIPE IDENTIFICATION .1 Locate labels as follows:

.1 At every end of every pipe run, adjacent to the valve or item of equipment serviced.

.2 At all valves, tees and changes of direction. .3 On each exposed pipe passing through a wall, partition or floor (one on each

side of such wall, partition or floor). .4 At intervals of 15 m (50'-0") along every exposed pipe run exceeding 15 m

(50'-0") in length. .5 At every access point on concealed piping.

.2 Locate labels so they are visible from 1.5 m (5'-0") above the adjacent floor or

platform.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 93 Page 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 TAB is used throughout this Section to describe the process, methods and

requirements of testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC.

.2 TAB means to test, adjust and balance to perform in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and to do other work as specified in this section.

.3 The work under this Section will be done under a Cash Allowance.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB PERSONNEL .1 Submit names of personnel to perform TAB to Engineer within 30 days of award

of Contract.

.2 Qualifications: personnel performing TAB current member in good standing of AABC and NEBB.

.3 Quality assurance: perform TAB under direction of supervisor qualified to standards of NEBB.

.4 Provide documentation confirming qualifications, successful experience.

.5 TAB: performed in accordance with the requirements of standard under which TAB Firm's qualifications are approved:

.1 Associated Air Balance Council, (AABC) National Standards for Total System Balance, MN-1-2002.

.2 National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) TABES, Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems-1998.

.3 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA), HVAC TAB HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing-2002.

.6 Use TAB Standard provisions, including checklists, and report forms to satisfy Contract requirements.

.7 Use TAB Standard for TAB, including qualifications for TAB Firm and Specialist and calibration of TAB instruments.

.8 Where instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in TAB Standard, use manufacturer's recommendations.


JAL No. 14-194

.9 TAB Standard quality assurance provisions such as performance guarantees form part of this Contract.

.1 For systems or system components not covered in TAB Standard, use TAB procedures developed by TAB Specialist.

.2 Where new procedures, and requirements, are applicable to Contract requirements have been published or adopted by body responsible for TAB Standard used (AABC, NEBB, or TABB), requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements are mandatory.

1.3 PURPOSE OF TAB .1 Test to verify proper and safe operation, determine actual point of performance,

evaluate qualitative and quantitative performance of equipment, systems and controls at design, average and low loads using actual or simulated loads

.2 Adjust and regulate equipment and systems to meet specified performance requirements and to achieve specified interaction with other related systems under normal and emergency loads and operating conditions.

.3 Balance systems and equipment to regulate flow rates to match load requirements over full operating ranges.

1.4 EXCEPTIONS .1 TAB of systems and equipment regulated by codes, standards to satisfaction of

authority having jurisdiction.

1.5 CO-ORDINATION .1 Schedule time required for TAB (including repairs, re-testing) into Project

construction and completion schedule to ensure completion before acceptance of Project.

.2 Do TAB of each system independently and subsequently, where interlocked with other systems, in unison with those systems.

1.6 PRE-TAB REVIEW .1 Review Contract documents before Project construction is started and confirm in

writing to Engineer adequacy of provisions for TAB and other aspects of design and installation pertinent to success of TAB.

.2 Review specified standards and report to Engineer in writing proposed procedures which vary from standard.

.3 During construction, co-ordinate location and installation of TAB devices, equipment, accessories, measurement ports and fittings.


JAL No. 14-194

1.7 START-UP .1 Follow start-up procedures as recommended by equipment manufacturer unless

specified otherwise.

.2 Follow special start-up procedures specified elsewhere in Division 15.

1.8 OPERATION OF SYSTEMS DURING TAB .1 Operate systems for length of time required for TAB and as required by Engineer

for verification of TAB reports.

1.9 START OF TAB .1 Notify Engineer 7 days prior to start of TAB.

.2 Start TAB when building is essentially completed, including:

.3 Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, other construction affecting TAB.

.4 Application of weatherstripping, sealing, and caulking.

.5 Pressure, leakage, other tests specified elsewhere Division 15.

.6 Provisions for TAB installed and operational.

.7 Start-up, verification for proper, normal and safe operation of mechanical and associated electrical and control systems affecting TAB including but not limited to:

.1 Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment.

.2 Air systems: .1 Filters in place, clean. .2 Duct systems clean. .3 Ducts, air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified

tolerances. .4 Correct fan rotation. .5 Fire, smoke, volume control dampers installed and open. .6 Coil fins combed, clean. .7 Access doors, installed, closed. .8 Outlets installed, volume control dampers open.

.3 Liquid systems: .1 Flushed, filled, vented. .2 Correct pump rotation. .3 Strainers in place, baskets clean. .4 Isolating and balancing valves installed, open. .5 Calibrated balancing valves installed, at factory settings. .6 Chemical treatment systems complete, operational.


JAL No. 14-194

1.10 APPLICATION TOLERANCES .1 Do TAB to following tolerances of design values:

.1 HVAC systems: plus 5%, minus 5%.

1.11 ACCURACY TOLERANCES .1 Measured values accurate to within plus or minus 5% of actual values.

1.12 INSTRUMENTS .1 Prior to TAB, submit to Engineer a list of instruments to be used together with

serial numbers.

.2 Calibrate in accordance with requirements of most stringent of referenced standard for either applicable system or HVAC system.

.3 Calibrate within 3 months of TAB. Provide certificate of calibration to Engineer.

1.13 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit, prior to commencement of TAB:

.2 Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB if different from referenced standard.

1.14 PRELIMINARY TAB REPORT .1 Submit for checking and approval of Engineer, prior to submission of formal TAB

report, sample of rough TAB sheets. Include:

.1 Details of instruments used.

.2 Details of TAB procedures employed.

.3 Calculations procedures.

.4 Summaries.

1.15 TAB REPORT .1 Format in accordance with referenced standard.

.2 TAB report to show results in SI units and to include:

.1 Project record drawings.

.2 System schematics.

.3 Submit 6 copies of TAB Report to Engineer for verification and approval, in English in D-ring binders, complete with index tabs.

1.16 VERIFICATION .1 Reported results subject to verification by Engineer.

.2 Provide personnel and instrumentation to verify up to 30% of reported results.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Number and location of verified results as directed by Engineer.

.4 Pay costs to repeat TAB as required to satisfaction of Engineer.

1.17 SETTINGS .1 After TAB is completed to satisfaction of Engineer, replace drive guards, close

access doors, lock devices in set positions, ensure sensors are at required settings.

.2 Permanently mark settings to allow restoration at any time during life of facility. Do not eradicate or cover markings.

1.18 COMPLETION OF TAB .1 TAB considered complete when final TAB Report received and approved by

Engineer.

1.19 AIR SYSTEMS .1 Standard: TAB to most stringent of TAB standards of AABC, NEBB and

SMACNA.

.2 Do TAB of following systems, equipment, components, controls:

.1 HVAC Units

.2 Heat Recovery Unit

.3 Dehumidifier

.4 Exhaust Fans

.5 Controls

.3 Measurements: to include as appropriate for systems, equipment, components, controls: air velocity, static pressure, flow rate, pressure drop (or loss), temperatures (dry bulb, wet bulb, dewpoint), duct cross-sectional area, RPM, electrical power, voltage, noise, vibration.

.4 Locations of equipment measurements: to include as appropriate:

.1 Inlet and outlet of dampers, filter, coil, humidifier, fan, other equipment causing changes in conditions.

.2 At controllers, controlled device.

.5 Locations of systems measurements to include as appropriate: main ducts, main branch, sub-branch, run-out (or grille, register or diffuser).

.6 Provide systems leakage tests to SMACNA Class 12 requirements.

1.20 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

.1 Standard: TAB to most string of TAB standards of AABC, NEBB & SMACNA.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Do TAB of following systems, equipment, components, controls

.1 Convectors

.3 Measurements to include as appropriate for systems, equipment, components control: water flow rate, pressure drop and temperature, RPM, electrical power, voltage, noise, vibration.

.4 Location of equipment measurement to include as appropriate:

.1 Balancing Valves .2 Controllers Controlled Devices. .5 Locations of system measurements to include as appropriate: .1 Main supply pipes .2 Branch pipes

.3 CBV at each heat pump.

.4 Triple daily value at pumps.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 07 13 Page 1 DUCTWORK INSULATION DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Section 21 05 01 General Mechanical Requirements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Ductwork – Low pressure metallic to 500 PA. Section 23 31 14 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Before ordering any insulating materials, submit to the Engineer

a list of proposed insulation materials, exterior jackets and adhesive for the various services and equipment on the project. Deviation from the approved list will not be allowed.

.2 Samples: Before ordering any insulation materials, prepare a sample board with

a cross-section sample of all types of insulation, including exterior jacket, properly identified for the various services and equipment on the project and state types of adhesives used. Submit the sample board to the Engineer for his review and, after review and acceptance, the sample board will be kept in the Engineer's site office for the duration of the Project for reference. Deviation from the accepted samples will not be allowed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION ON SHEETMETAL .1 Apply insulation to the following ductwork systems and components:

.2 Insulate 1800 mm from outlet (louvre, roof cap or roof exhauster) of exhasut

ductwork with flexible duct insulation of 12 kg/m3 (3/4 lb/cu.ft.) density, 25 mm (1") thickness, with reinforced foil flame resistant kraft facing.

.3 Insulate HVAC units concealed supply air duct with 25 mm thick glass fibre 72

kg/m3 density flexible insulating board with reinforced foil faced flame resistant kraft vapour barrier. Insulation shall have 0.03 perm rating minimum.

2.2 FIRE AND SMOKERATING

.1 In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102:

.1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.

2.3 JACKETS .1 Aluminum:

.1 To ASTM B209 without moisture barrier as scheduled in PART 3 of this section.

.2 Thickness: 0.50 mm sheet.

.3 Finish: Smooth.

.4 Jacket banding and mechanical seals: 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel.

2.4 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

Manson Alley Wrap FSK Fibrex Insulations Inc. Fibrex IF Flex 1230 FSK Knauf Fibre Glass Blanket Insulation with FSK Facing Johns Manville Duct Wrap Type 150 Micolite

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

.1 Perform insulation work using qualified insulation applicators, in accordance with latest trade application methods and to the Engineer's approval.

.2 Clean all surfaces to be insulated to remove grime, grease, oil, moisture or other

matter to ensure that insulation is applied to clean dry surfaces. .3 Apply insulation under ambient temperature conditions in accordance with

insulation or adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. .4 Do not apply insulation until ductwork has been tested, inspected, verified, and

accepted by the Engineer. .5 Apply insulation neatly and tightly in unbroken lengths and with ends of sections

firmly and squarely butted or engaged together. Lap canvas or other specified wrapping over all joints and thoroughly cement down with adhesive. Extend insulation through sleeves in walls (except fire walls) or other openings in building to make insulation and vapour barrier continuous and of uniform diameter.

.6 Where asbestos-containing insulation has been removed from existing ductwork,

reinsulate (to same extent as removal work) or (to extent as indicated on Drawings). Maintain same thermal value as existing.


JAL No. 14-194

.7 Terminate insulation at each side of fire walls and pack the space between wall sleeve and duct or pipe as specified in Section 21 05 01.

.8 Replace insulation removed from existing ductwork to make tie-in connections

with new insulation. Cut back existing insulation a sufficient distance to make a neat and firm butt joint between old and new insulation.

3.2 SHEETMETAL

.1 Secure insulation on exposed rectangular ductwork with welded impaling pins and speed washer type fasteners at 300 mm (12") centres. Provide a minimum of two rows of fasteners on each side of duct.

.2 In addition to mechanical fasteners, adhere insulation to the duct with Foster 85-

20 or Bakor 230-38 fire resistive adhesive applied to the duct in 150 mm (6") wide strips at 450 mm (18") centres. Tightly butt all joints and breaks in insulation and seal with Foster 30-35 or Bakor 130-11 fire resistive mastic and 75 mm (3") wide scrim foil pressure sensitive tape. Cut off protruding ends of welded pins and cover speed washers with same tape to ensure a smooth application of exterior jacket.

.3 Fasten insulation to concealed rectangular ductwork and to both concealed and

exposed round ductwork with Foster 85-20 or Bakor 230-38 adhesive, applied in 150 mm (6") wide strips at 300 mm (12") centres. Tightly butt all edges and joints and seal with Foster 30-35 or Bakor 130-11 fire resistive mastic and 75 mm (3") wide pressure sensitive scrim foil tape. Use tying cord only to temporarily secure insulation until adhesive has set. Remove prior to application of exterior jacket.

.4 Insulate access doors or removable panels in ductwork as separate units to

permit opening or removal without damage to adjoining insulation.


JAL No. 14-194

3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE .1 Insulation types and thicknesses: Conform to following table:

TIAC Code Vapour Retarder Thickness (mm)

Exhaust duct for 1800 mm from outlet of exhaust fan, all HVAC Units supply ducts. Fresh air, exhaust air, supply and return ducts of ERV.

C-1 no 25 (flexible)

Supply & Return air duct exposed to weather.

C-1 yes 3 layers of 25 mm (rigid) in aluminum cladding (R-12)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 08 19 Page 1 FAN COIL UNITS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Section 21 05 01 – Mechanical General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Noise and Vibration Section 23 05 48 .2 Building Management System 25 10 01 1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit Product data in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Ductless Fan Coil Unit

.1 Cabinet: steel, 1.2 mm thick cassette type. .2 Elements: stainless steel sheathed with corrosion protected aluminum fins

covering full length of element.

.3 Blower motors: one two-speed, single phase.

.4 Condensate pump: 4.8 litres/hr at 2 m head.

.5 Fan delay switch.

.6 On-Off switch.

.7 Two position selector switch.

.8 Filter: 25 mm pleated throwaway.

.9 Trim for flush installation.

.10 Finish: baked enamel with final coat grey colour.

.11 Assembly fully wired to one outlet location.

.12 Multiple knockouts for up to 38 mm diameter conduit.

SECTION 23 08 19 Page 2 FAN COIL UNITS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

.13 Manufacturers:

Carrier Trane McQuay Johnson Controls Daikin L.G.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Hang unit from building structure. .2 Make control connections. .3 Drain to nearest floor drain. .4 Wire to operate with condensing unit.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 11 23 Page 1 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Mechanical General Requirements Section 15010 as applicable. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Noise and vibration control: Section 21 05 01. .2 Hangers Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Section 23 05 29. .3 Testing, adjusting and balancing: Section 23 05 93. .4 Painting: Division 9 Finishes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit Shop Drawings for all equipment and

systems covered by this Section. .2 Record Drawings

.1 Record, as the Work progresses, on one set of white prints provided, all changes or deviations in location of piping, valves, specialties, and equipment and such other approved changes that occur during the progress of the Work.

.2 Provide at completion of Work, one final set of Drawings with all changes

correctly marked in red ink. .3 Operational and Maintenance Data: Provide equipment literature, operating

instructions, maintenance instructions, parts lists, and other pertinent data for all equipment and systems covered by this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES .1 Gas Piping: black steel pipe, Schedule #40, (ASTM #A53), with 1034 kPa black

malleable iron fittings. Install piping to conform to CSA and Provincial Gas Utilization Code both amended to date. Weld piping 63 mm and larger and all concealed piping using ANSI #B16.9 butt-welding or #B16.11 socket welding fittings and test to Code Regulations.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Gas Valves: CSA or ULC approved self-lubricated ball valve or lubricated plug

with greasing nipple, each with manual lever handle. Provide valve at each unit connection including equipment supplied by Engineer or Another Section.

2.2 PRESSURE REGULATORS

.1 Pressure regulators shall be Fisher Controls single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components, elevation compensator and atmospheric vent.

.2 NPS 2 and smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads .3 NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and

according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. .4 Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 with 5-psig minimum inlet pressure rating. .5 Appliance pressure regulators: ANSI Z21.18. Regulator may include vent limiting

device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. .6 Pressure regulator vents: Factory- or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen I

nopening if not connected to vent piping. .7 Provide pressure regulator for HVAC units, water heater, dehumidifier and gas fired

unit heater as shown on drawings. .8 Alternate Equipment 1. Canadian Meter Company 2. Schlumberger 3. National Meter Industries Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION .1 Install equipment as indicated and to manufacturers instructions. .2 Provide Flexonics #FLT, 200 series or Goodridge or Mason-Mercer C.G.A.

approved stainless steel braided hose connector on each exterior unit connection between each unit and its shutoff valve, minimum length 450 mm.


JAL No. 14-194

3.2 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION METHODS .1 General

.1 Applicable requirements specified in Section 23 05 00 form a part of this Section to the same extent as if stated herein in full.

3.3 FLUSHING AND STERILIZATION .1 Flush all piping as outlined in Section 21 05 01. .2 Blow out all gas piping with compressed air at sufficient pressure to blow out all

loose scale, dirt and cuttings from the entire length of the piping. .3 Thoroughly clean sections of new piping which cannot be isolated for flushing

purposes, prior to fabrication, and also where possible after welding of joints, by swabbing the interior of the pipe with swabs soaked with a caustic solution to remove all loose scale, oil and dirt from the entire length of the piping.

3.4 TESTING OF PIPING .1 General

.1 Test all piping in accordance with tests and test pressures hereinafter specified for various services.

.2 Lines may be tested in sections as authorized by the Engineer to

accommodate construction schedule. However, test complete systems on completion.

.2 Natural Gas: Conduct final tests on natural gas piping in accordance with the

Ontario Gas Utilization Code and with the requirements of the local Gas Company or governing authority.

.3 Pressure test gas piping with not less than 345 kPa air for at least 24 hours

without decrease in pressure. Check each joint with soap and water solution during test. Disconnect system during tests. Do not use oxygen for testing.


JAL No. 14-194

3.5 ARRANGEMENT WITH GAS COMPANY .1 Arrange and pay gas company for revising of existing service and replacement of

existing and gas meter/regulator assembly. Meter/regulator assembly shall be sized to provide natural gas at 5 psi for building services after metering and regulating.

The new gas load shall be 9 million BTU/hr.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 21 14 Page 1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to General Mechanical Requirements Section 21 05 01 as applicable. .3 All components shall be compatible with ethylene glycol. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Piping insulation: Section 21 07 20, Thermal Insulation for Piping. .2 Testing, Adjusting, Balancing and Recording - Section 23 05 93 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit shop drawings for all equipment and systems

covered by this Section in accordance with Section 01300 Administrative Requirements.

.2 Operational and Maintenance Data: Provide equipment literature, operating


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES .1 For types of pipe, fittings and valves for services in this Section refer to the following

Piping Standards attached to Section 21 05 01. Standard No. 006 Service Water Piping. 2.2 STRAINERS .1 "Y" type, Class 125 cast iron body strainer with removable monel screen and bolted

cleanout plug on flanged strainers and screwed cleanout on screwed strainers. Provide screwed strainers for sizes NPS 2 and smaller and flanged strainers for sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

.2 "Y" type, Class 250 semi-steel body strainer with removable monel screen and

bolted cleanout plug on flanged strainers and screwed cleanout on screwed strainers. Provide screwed strainers for sizes NPS 2 and smaller and flanged strainers for sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Provide strainers in equipment rooms and where shown in other locations, complete with NPS 3/4 blow-off globe valves.

.4 Furnish screen with perforations as follows: Type of ServiceScreen Perforation (dia) H.W. Heating1.6 mm (1/16") .5 Acceptable Products Spirax Sarco Armstrong Streamflo Colton 2.3 THERMOMETERS .1 The following Trerice figure numbers indicate the required construction and other

features. .2 Stem type thermometers: Trerice BX9 series Industrial (230 mm) (9") scale,

adjustable angle type, with red appearing mercury lens front tube, and cast aluminum case.

.3 Dial type thermometers: Trerice No. L80742 Series solid liquid filled, (114 mm) (4-

1/2") dial size, universal angle type, with linear scale, black cast aluminum case, chrome plated ring, bronze bushed brass movement with adjustable pointer.

.4 Select scale ranges to best suit the application and operating conditions, with graduations in both Fahrenheit and Celsius degrees for direct reading to 2F and 1C and an accuracy of 1% to 1-1/2%.

.5 Provide sensing bulbs suitable for the medium being measured. Furnish bulbs in

piping or equipment with stainless steel separable wells. .6 Approved Manufacturers: Trerice

Ashcroft Weiss Weksler

2.4 AIR VENTS .1 Approved Manufacturers

Maid-O-Mist No.7 Taco Hy-Vent Braukmann EA122 Spirax Saveo 13WS


JAL No. 14-194

2.5 DRAIN VALVES .1 Provide (13 mm) (1/2") brass sediment faucets with hose thread outlets. .2 Approved Manufacturers Crane

Emco Cambridge Brass

2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTIONS .1 Furnish flexible metal hoses on the piping connections to heating and cooling coils,

on the suction and discharge connections to pumps, and in piping systems where shown on the Drawings.

.2 At coils provide Flexonics RW-81 or RW-91 hoses suitable for a minimum working

pressure of (1034 kPa) (150 psig). .3 Furnish flexible hoses up to NPS 2 of braided bronze construction with screwed

ends and union nut and nipple. Hoses NPS 2-1/2 and over to be braided stainless steel construction with Class 150 flanges. Furnish the standard hose length for normal industrial vibration.

.4 At pumps provide Flexonics Model BBN hoses up to NPS 2 and BSF on piping NPS

2-1/2 and larger. .5 Approved Manufacturers

.1 Flexonics

.2 Piping Accessories of Canada

.3 Goodridge 2.7 DIAPHRAGM TYPE EXPANSION TANK .1 Horizontal galvanized steel pressurized diaphragm type expansion tank. .2 Capacity 38 L. .3 Size as indicated. .4 Diaphragm sealed in elastomer suitable for 115 degrees C operating

temperature. .5 Working pressure 860 kPa with ASME stamp and certification. .6 Air precharged to 84 kPa (initial fill pressure of system).


JAL No. 14-194

.7 Saddles for horizontal installation. .8 Alternate Equipment: Amtrol, Expanflex, Bell & Gossett 2.8 AIR SEPATOR – IN-LINE .1 Working pressure 860 kPa. .2 Size NPS 1 ½. .3 Alternate Equipment: Armstrong, ITT, Taco 2.9 COMBINATION LOW PRESSURE RELIEF AND REDUCING VALVE .1 Adjustable pressure setting 206 kPa relief, 55 kP. .2 Low inlet pressure check valve. .3 Removable strainer. .4 Alternate Equipment: Danfoss, Armstrong, Tyco 2.10 FLOW MEASURING EQUIPMENT .1 Fittings up to 50 mm size shall be screwed end circuit balancing fitting with

shutoff/balancing valve, drain connection and meter connections. Fittings over 50 mm size shall be flanged end circuit balancing fitting with valved meter connection and shutoff/balancing valve. Fittings shall be rated for 862 kPa working pressure.

.2 Provide one (1) portable flow measuring device c/w carrying case, fittings, connections

and pre-calibrated. .3 Alternate Equipment: .1 Taco .2 Delta `P' (Air Power Equipment) .3 Armstrong PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL .1 Applicable requirements specified in Section 210501 form a part of this Section to

the same extent as if stated herein in full.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Supply and install all miscellaneous structural supports, platforms, braces and tie-rods as may be required to hang or support all equipment, piping, etc., installed under this Section, in accordance with the drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer.

3.2 GAUGES, THERMOMETERS AND TEMPERATURE IMMERSION WELLS .1 Install pressure gauges and thermometers in all locations shown on drawings or

specified. Mount gauges not higher than (2.5 m) (8'-0") from the floor or operating platform.

.2 Install gauges and thermometers as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide

isolating petcocks on all pressure gauges. .3 Fill immersion wells with a high temperature mineral grease prior to insertion of

thermal bulb. .4 Install immersion wells so they do not restrict the flow of liquids in piping. Increase

size of piping as required to prevent restriction. 3.3 DRAIN VALVES .1 Install drain valves at low points of water systems in order to completely drain each

system, and also in any other location noted on Drawings. 3.4 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS .1 Install flexible metal hoses in piping systems where indicated on Drawings. .2 Firmly supply or guide piping adjacent to flexible connection to prevent pipes from

swaying. 3.5 AIR VENTS .1 Install automatic air vents at high points of glycol piping systems and also in any

other location noted on Drawings. .2 Install automatic air vents with 150 mm (6”) high, line size or NPS 4 size air

pocket, whichever is smaller, and NPS ¾ isolating gate valve and piping to inlet connection of air vent.

.3 Connect discharge to nearest funnel or hub drain or as shown on Drawings. .4 Provide manual air vent in locations noted on Drawings.


JAL No. 14-194

3.6 PRESSURE SAFETY RELIEF VALVES .1 Run discharge pipe to terminate above nearest drain. 3.7 EXPANSION TANK .1 Adjust expansion tank pressure to suit design criteria. .2 Install lockshield type valve at inlet to tank.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 21 16 Page 1 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS, STEEL DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Section 21 05 01 General Mechanical Requirements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 21 05 01 "General Mechanical Requirements” .2 Section 23 05 29 "Pipe Hangers and Supports" .3 Section 23 05 23 "Valves" .4 Section 23 21 14 "Hydronic Specialties" .5 Section 23 05 54 "Mechanical Identification"

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

.2 Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and

personnel. .3 Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.

Include the following: .1 Test procedures used. .2 Test results that comply with requirements. .3 Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.


.1 Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

.2 ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for

materials, products, and installation. 1.5 COORDINATION

.1 Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system

components with other construction, including light fixtures, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations. .3 Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related

Sections. .4 Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into

base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.

.5 Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and

floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

.2 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:

.1 Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings: 1. Central Sprinkler Company; Central Grooved Piping Products. 2. Grinnell Corporation. 3. Victaulic Company of Canada.

.2 Calibrated Balancing Valves: 1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 2. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. 3. Taco, Inc.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

.1 General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.

2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

.1 Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (furnace-butt welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.

.2 Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250. .3 Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300. .4 Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings (sprinklers only): ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.

.6 Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-

reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.

.7 Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.

.8 Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled;

and design temperatures and pressures. .9 Victaulic fittings may be used.

2.4 VALVES

.1 Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

.2 Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125-

psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.

2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING

.1 ACR hard copper with wrought copper fittings. .2 Joints shall be made with lead-free solder 95/5. .3 Vibration isolator on each pipe to DX coil and condensing unit. .4 R410A refrigerant or latest approved type. .5 All welded joints to be completed using continuous nitrogen flush. .6 Thermal expansion valve and solenoid valve for each circuit. .7 Pressure gauge connection on inlet to each compressor, condenser and

evaporative coil. .8 Drain pipe of Type ‘M’ hard copper with solder fittings for each fan coil unit.


JAL No. 14-194

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

.1 Hot Water, NPS 2 and Smaller: Aboveground, use Schedule 40 steel pipe with threadedjoints.

.2 Condensate Drain Lines: Schedule 40.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

.1 General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:

.1 Shutoff Duty: Ball, and butterfly valves. .2 Throttling Duty: Globe, ball, and butterfly valves.

.2 Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply

connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

.3 Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating

element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

.1 Refer to Division 210501 Section "General Mechanical Requirements" for basic piping installation requirements.

.2 Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation

and servicing of valves. .3 Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4

threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

.4 Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. .5 Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. .6 Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings

in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.


JAL No. 14-194

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

.1 Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

.2 Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

.3 Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. Clean system prior to filling.

.4 Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

.2 Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

.1 Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

.2 While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.

.3 Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

.4 After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

.5 Prepare written report of testing. 3.5 CLEANING

.1 On completion, clean complete heating using Dearborn #11 or equal cleaner for at least 48 hours at 20oF. Flush out each system, opening and cleaning each scale pocket and strainer. System must be flushed out before filling with clean water and Dearborn #545 molybdate corrosion inhibitor at 90 ppm.

.2 Provide written report to Engineer when cleaning is completed. Advise Engineer

at least 48 hours prior to cleanout so same can be witnessed. .3 The supplier of the chemical treatment equipment and chemicals will supervise

the entire cleaning and flushing operation of all the systems. .4 The supplier shall ensure the following:

.1 All systems are flushed of all sand, gravel and fillings before cleaner is added.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 The proper strength of cleaner is added and circulated for the prescribed time.

.3 Each system is thoroughly flushed again before chemicals are added.

.4 The proper dosage of chemicals is added.

.5 Cartridge filters are replaced at the proper intervals. .5 Provide written report to Engineer when cleaning is completed. Advise Engineer

at least 48 hours prior to cleanout so same can be witnessed. .6 Acceptable Products:

.1 Drew Chemical Co.

.2 Finnan Eng. Products Ltd. 3.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING

.1 After completion of refrigeration piping installation, test each piping system under nitrogen for leaks. Repair any leaks detected. Evacuate each system three times by vacuum pump to 508 mm Hg. Each system shall hold same for 24 hours without decrease in vacuum. Upon completion of testing and dehydration process, each system shall be charged with refrigerant. Halo Carbon inventor forms shall be completed.

.2 Provide all wiring necessary to complete each system including controls and

inter-wiring to condenser units and DX coil solenoid valves and hot gas bypass controls.

.3 Provide complete start-up service and instruct Building Operators in care and

maintenance of DX type Air Conditioning System. See 210501 – General Mechanical Requirements – Instructions to Operator.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 31 14 Page 1 DUCTWORK-LOW PRESSURE METALLIC TO 500 PA DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Mechanical General Requirements - Section 21 05 01 as applicable. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Thermal Insulation for Ducting: Section 23 07 03. .2 Ductwork accessories: Section 23 33 00. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01330. .2 Indicate design, construction and relevant details of sealant, tape and propriety

joints. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK - GENERAL .1 Furnish sheet metal work in accordance with material Specifications and

construction details specified herein, and conforming to standard and recommended practices as defined by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.

.2 Furnish all ductwork constructed to SMACNA 2" w.g. pressure classification,

unless noted otherwise on Drawings. .3 Furnish ductwork of galvanized steel sheet with Z-275 (G90) or ZF075 (A25)

designation zinc coating to ASTM A653/A653M. .4 Furnish ducts of sizes shown on Drawings. For acoustically lined ducts, adjust

duct size to accommodate liner thickness, with clear inside dimensions as shown on Drawings.

.5 Fabricate ductwork free from vibration, rattle or drumming under operating

conditions. Furnish necessary reinforcements, bracing, framing, gasketing, etc. to comply with performance criteria.

.6 Continuously solder or seal joints in exterior air intake duct to prevent dripping of

moisture through joints. Furnish 38 mm (1-1/2") drain flange in low point of such ductwork.


JAL No. 14-194

.7 Furnish sleeves at duct penetrations through walls and floors, fabricated from same material and thickness sheet material as for ductwork. Furnish closure plates each side of wall to cover sleeve.

.8 Furnish flanged joints and gaskets of neoprene or other resilient non-flammable

for duct connections to AC units, coils, etc. Fabricate flanges from mild steel angles to match equipment flanges.

.9 Furnish screens of 13 mm (1/2") mesh x 2.7 mm (0.105") diameter galvanized

wire for air intakes, exhausts and open ends of ductwork. .10 Rectangular Ductwork Type I - Low Pressure - Medium Pressure

.1 Fabricate rectangular ductwork to metal thickness and construction methods as specified herein for various size ranges of ducts. Given dimensions represent widest side of duct.

Galvanized Steel Gauges and Equivalent Thicknesses Gauge Low Medium Slip (gsg) mm Pressure Pressure 26 0.49 mm Up to 300 mm 24 0.64 mm 330 - 762 mm Up to 457 mm Up to 762 mm 22 0.84 mm 787 - 1372 mm 483-1219 mm 787-1524 mm 20 0.94 mm 1397-2134 mm 1245-1829 mm 1549 mm and

over 18 1.24 mm 2134 mm and over 1854 mm and over

.11 Supports and Hangers - Rectangular Ductwork

.1 Except where shown otherwise on Drawings, Furnish strap hangers of 3 mm x 25 mm (1/8" x 1") mild steel bar stock for ducts up through 760 mm (30") width. Bend strap hanger around bottom of duct for a minimum of 38 mm (1-1/2") and attach to sides and bottom of duct. Furnish mild steel rod hangers of 10 mm (3/8") dia. minimum size for ducts over 760 mm (30") in width and furnish 38 mm x 38 mm x 3 mm (1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8") steel angle across bottom of duct and attach hanger to angle (not the duct).

.12 Provide where shown, flexible air duct hoses. Secure hose to metal ducts with

attachment screws and band clamps and tape seal with Permascreen fiberglass duct tape. Minimum length 25% longer than measured distance. Maximum length 50% more than measured length (max. 2 m). Provide manual balancing damper in trunk duct at connection to each flexible duct. Balancing dampers shall be opposed blades TAMCO 1000, Ruskin or E.H. Price c/w access door. Provide TAMCO 1000 dampers on all fresh air branch ducts connected to heat pumps or supplied to Classrooms.

.13 Sound jacketing: Provide Barymat BM-1C noise control composite around supply

and return ducts from the equipment and all the way to the point the duct leaves or enters the Mechanical Room.


JAL No. 14-194

2.2 SEAL CLASSIFICATION .1 Classification as follows:

Maximum Pressure Pa SMACNA Seal Class 500 C 250 C 125 C

.2 Seal classification:

.1 Class A: longitudinal seams, transverse joints, duct wall penetrations and connections made airtight with sealant and tape.

.2 Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints and connections made airtight with sealant.

.3 Class C: transverse joints and connections made air tight with sealant.

.4 Unsealed seams and joints.

2.3 SEALANT .1 Sealant: oil resistant, water borne, polymer type flame resistant duct sealant.

Temperature range of minus 30 degrees C to plus 93 degrees C. 2.4 TAPE .1 Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fiberglass tape, 50 mm wide. 2.5 DUCT LEAKAGE .1 In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 2.6 FITTINGS .1 Fabrication: to SMACNA. .2 Radiused elbows.

.1 Rectangular: standard radius short radius with single thickness turning vanes Centreline radius: 1.5 times width of duct ___.

.2 Round: smooth radius five piece. Centreline radius: 1.5 times diameter.

.3 Mitred elbows, rectangular:

.1 To 400 mm: with single double thickness turning vanes.

.2 Over 400 mm: with double thickness turning vanes. .4 Branches:

.1 Rectangular main and branch: with radius on branch 1.5 times width of duct 45 degrees entry on branch.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Round main and branch: enter main duct at 45 degrees with conical connection.

.3 Provide volume control damper in branch duct near connection to main duct.

.4 Main duct branches: with splitter damper. .5 Transitions:

.1 Diverging: 20 degrees maximum included angle.

.2 Converging: 30 degrees maximum included angle. .6 Offsets: .1 Full short radiused elbows as indicated. .7 Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area. .1 Maximum included angles: as for transitions. 2.7 FIRE STOPPING .1 Retaining angles around duct, on both sides of fire separation in accordance with

Section 07840 - Firestopping. .2 Fire stopping material and installation must not distort duct. 2.8 GALVANIZED STEEL .1 Lock forming quality: to ASTM A653/A653M, Z90 zinc coating. .2 Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to SMACNA. .3 Joints: to SMACNA proprietary manufactured duct joint. Proprietary

manufactured flanged duct joint to be considered to be a class A seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL .1 Refer to and comply with applicable requirements specified in Section 21 05 01. .2 Install miscellaneous steel framing, supports, braces, etc. as may be required to

hang or support ductwork as specified herein, and as shown on Drawings. .3 Install ductwork in arrangement shown on Drawings in accordance with

standards and recommended practices off ASHRAE and SMACNA. Provide required offsets and transitions, whether specifically indicated or not, to facilitate duct arrangement and to avoid interference with building structure, piping, equipment and services.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 Install ductwork in locations and at elevations appropriate to ceiling height shown on Drawings. Where required to be concealed, install ductwork in furred spaces provided in walls and ceilings. Where there is no provision for concealed ductwork, install as close as possible to walls, partitions and overhead structures to attain maximum headroom and clearance.

.5 Install sleeves where ducts pass through walls or floors. Pack space between

duct and sleeve with mineral wool and seal both ends with non-inflammable fire resistant sealing compound. Install sheet metal closure plates on each side of wall to cover sleeve.

.6 At air intakes, exhausts and open ends in ductwork install removable galvanized

screens securely fastened in place. .7 Install gasketted flanged joints at duct connections to air conditioning units, coils,

etc. .8 Install beam clamps or supplementary steel to secure hanger rods, angles and

straps to structural steel framing. .9 Where shape of duct changes, install transition piece so that angle of side of

transition piece does not exceed 15 degrees from straight run of duct being connected, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.

.10 In office areas paint interior of ductwork for at least 600 mm (24") behind supply

and exhaust grilles with matte black paint so as to render ductwork invisible from occupied space.

.11 In areas having high humidity, slope exhaust ductwork up away from register and

without seams in bottom of duct for at least 3 m (10'-0") of duct run behind register.

.12 Slope fresh air intake ducts down at 1:100 to permit moisture induced by air

intake to be drained. Install 38 mm (1-1/2") drain flange in bottom of duct at low point and run drain line to nearest floor drain or as noted on Drawings.

3.2 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS – RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK .1 Install supports and hangers at intervals not over 2400mm (8'-0") centres for

ducts up to 1500 mm (5'-0") in width and at 1200 mm (4'-0") centres for ducts 1500 mm (5'-0") in width and over.

.2 Install miscellaneous steel angles or channels as required between joists or

building steel for structural support of duct where building framing spacing does not coincide with the required hanger spacing.

3.3 CLEANING AND TESTING OF DUCTWORK .1 Inspect and test ductwork for air leakage at joints and connections to equipment,

under normal operating conditions. Provide systems leakage tests to SMACNA Class 12 requirements.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Test ductwork before ducts are insulated, painted or concealed. .3 Immediately correct defects discovered during tests and retest systems to

complete satisfaction of Engineer. .4 Prior to start-up of fans, blow out complete systems of ductwork with high velocity

air for not less than two hours using where possible the installed air handling equipment to full capacity and by blanking off duct sections to achieve required velocity. Do not install air filters prior to blow- out of ductwork systems. Use auxiliary portable blowers for cleaning where installed fan systems are not adequate to blow out complete system free from dust and dirt.

.5 After duct systems have been blown out, clean register, grille or diffuser outlet

collars with industrial type vacuum cleaner. On completion of cleaning process, install filters before placing systems in final operation.

3.4 SEALING AND TAPING .1 Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of one coat of sealant to

manufacturers recommendations. 3.5 LEAKAGE TESTS .1 In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual and SMACNA

Class 12. .2 Do leakage tests in sections. .3 Make trial leakage tests as instructed to demonstrate workmanship. .4 Do not install additional ductwork until trial test has been passed. .5 Test section minimum of 30 m long with not less than three branch takeoffs and

two 90 degrees elbows. .6 Complete test before performance insulation or concealment Work.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 33 00 Page 1 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Mechanical General Requirements Section 21 05 01 as applicable. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Noise and Vibration Control: Section 23 05 48. .2 Thermal Insulation for Ducting: Section 23 07 13. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit Shop Drawings for all equipment and

systems covered by this section. .2 Operational and Maintenance Data: Provide equipment literature, operating


.3 See Sections 01330 and 01770. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

.1 Furnish flexible duct connections between fans and/or air handling units and connecting ductwork, between unit components, in ducts at building expansion joints, and in other locations shown on Drawings.

.2 Furnish flexible connectors of heavy glass fabric double coated with neoprene

and attached to 0.6 mm (24 ga) metal strips 75 mm (3") wide. Furnish flexible connectors with length of fabric between metal strips of minimum 75 mm (3") for ducts of maximum size in either dimension or diameter of 750 mm (30") or less, and 150 mm (6") for ducts of 775 mm (31") size and larger.

Acceptable Manufacturers Duro-Dyne "Grip-Loc Type SMFN" Ventfabrics "Ventglas" Hardcast


JAL No. 14-194

2.2 BALANCING DAMPERS .1 Furnish balancing dampers, manually operated opposed blade type, splitter type,

or butterfly blade type, fabricated from galvanized steel sheet of thicknesses specified herein and complete with standoffs and extensions to permit for installation of insulation on the damper.

.2 Furnish factory built opposed blade type balancing dampers, with galvanized

channel type frames, non-binding pre- lubricated type linkage, and blades fabricated of minimum 1.6 mm (16 ga) core thickness material. Furnish damper blades of 200 mm (8") maximum width, and of length coinciding with frame opening on horizontal plane to maximum length of 1200 mm (48").

.3 Furnish opposed blade balancing dampers complete with inter-connecting

linkage, manual operator and locking type quadrant as required for synchronous operation and setting of blades.

.4 Except where shown otherwise on Drawings, furnish splitter dampers in supply

and return ductwork where main ducts are split into two more trunks, and at branch duct connections to main or trunk ducts. Fabricate splitter dampers from same material and thickness as ducts in which they are to be installed, down to minimum of 0.8 mm (22 ga). Furnish splitters formed of double thickness of metal and with rounded surface at air entering edges. Furnish length of splitter at least 1-1/2 times width of smaller branch duct, but in no case less than 300 mm (12"). Provide splitter dampers with locking type quadrant.

.5 Furnish butterfly blade balancing dampers for round ducts (other than fume

exhaust system) fabricated of 1.6 mm (16 ga) metal and with locking type quadrant.

2.3 VOLUME EXTRACTORS .1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Titus, Nailor Hart, Kruger .2 Furnish extractors with #3 manual operator and mounting bracket, where noted

on Drawings. 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS .1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Controlled Air, Ruskin, Advanced Air .2 Furnish fire dampers of hinged, fusible link type with channel frames, blades and

housing, ULC labeled and conforming to NFPA 90A requirements. Furnish "Type B" fire dampers for rectangular or square ductwork and "Type C" fire dampers for round ductwork.

.3 Furnish fire dampers and frame constructed of same material as duct in which

they are installed.


JAL No. 14-194

2.5 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTWORK .1 Furnish access doors in ductwork and for plenums to allow servicing,

maintenance, and inspection of control dampers, fire detectors, both sides of fire dampers, control elements, bearings and as shown on Drawings. Furnish access doors at least 300 mm x 150 mm (12" x 6") unless duct dimensions prevent, or as required. Where motors are installed within unit or duct, furnish access door large enough to permit removal of same.

.2 For installation in insulated ductwork and plenums, furnish access doors of

0.8 mm (22 ga) thick galvanized steel sheet double panel construction with approved 25 mm (1") thick insulating filler, in flanged collar flush with face of finished insulation.

.3 Furnish access doors for installation in uninsulated ductwork and plenums from

18 gauge (1.2 mm) galvanized steel sheet, with door frames welded in place. .4 Furnish access doors in air conditioning and ventilation systems with heavy

continuous hinges, three heavy sash fasteners and sponge neoprene gaskets to ensure air-tight fit at operating pressure.

2.6 PROBE INLETS .1 Furnish probe inlets with Ventlok No. 699 or Duro-Dyne IP-1 or IP-2 or Ductmate

Test Opening Enclosures complete with locking cap, chain, gaskets, insulating plug, and extensions for insulated ductwork.

.2 Furnish probe inlets in main supply and return ducts, inlet and outlet side of fans,

and other locations as required by Testing and Balancing Trade, to permit testing, balancing and measurement of air quantities and static pressure in air handling systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install miscellaneous steel framing, supports, braces, etc. as may be required to

hang or support equipment and ductwork as specified herein, and as shown on Drawings.

.2 Flexible Duct Connections

.1 Install flexible connectors with fabric in folds, not drawn tight. .2 Install guides to prevent flexible connection from collapsing on suction

side of fans.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 For installation between sections of air handling units, install flexible connectors suitable for connecting to flanges of casings where so provided.

.3 Balancing Dampers .1 Install dampers at locations in supply and return ductwork where main

ducts are split into two more trunks, and at branch duct connections to main or trunk ducts.

.4 Fire Dampers

.1 Install fire dampers in accordance with suppliers instructions, complete with retaining angles on both sides of wall or floor and fastened to damper collars.

.2 Install fire dampers complete with adjacent access door as required to

permit re-opening of damper and replacement of fusible link. .5 Relief Dampers: Install steel angle or channel frames at wall openings as

required to mount relief damper (complete with fire damper) as shown on Drawings.

.6 Access Doors in Ductwork

.1 Install access doors in ductwork and in plenums to allow servicing, maintenance, and inspection of control dampers, fire dampers, fire detectors, control elements, bearings and as shown on Drawings.

.7 Probe Inlets

.1 Install probe inlets in ductwork at locations as specified under Part 2 -

Products. .2 Locate probe inlets sufficient distance from elbows or transition sections

to ensure stable readings of non-turbulent air and install 75 mm (3") from corners and at 150 mm (6") centres across long side of duct.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 33 46 Page 1 FLEXIBLE DUCTS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

.1 Conform to Section 21 05 01 Mechanical General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes: .1 Metallic insulated. .2 Materials and installation of flexible ductwork, joints and accessories.


.1 Section 23 33 00 – Ductwork Accessories.

.2 Section 23 36 60– Air Terminal Units

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.

.1 Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS for the following:

.1 Thermal properties.

.2 Friction loss.

.3 Acoustical loss.

.4 Leakage.

.5 Fire rating.

.2 Samples: submit samples with product data of different types of flexible duct being used in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALLIC - INSULATED

.1 Spiral wound flexible aluminum with factory applied, 37 mm thick flexible glass fibre thermal insulation with vapour barrier and vinyl jacket, as indicated.

.2 Performance:

1. Factory tested to 2.5 kPa without leakage. 2. Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.

SECTION 23 33 46 Page 2 FLEXIBLE DUCTS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION .1 Install in accordance with: SMACNA.

.2 Maximum length of flexible duct shall be 4 m.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 33 53 Page 1 DUCT LINERS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Section 21 05 01 Mechanical General Requirements.


.1 Section 23 31 14 – Ductwork – Low Pressure Metallic to 500 Pa.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT LINER .1 General

.1 Mineral Fibre duct liner: air surface coated.

.2 Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50 when tested in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102, NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

.3 Fungi resistance: to ASTM C1338.

.2 Flexible:

.1 Use on round or oval surfaces surfaces indicated.

.2 25 mm thick, to ASTM C1071 Type 1, fibrous glass blanket duct liner.

.3 Density: 24 kg/m3 minimum.

.4 Thermal resistance to be minimum 0.74 (m2.degrees C) /W for 25 mm thickness with ASTM C177, at 24 degrees C mean temperature.

.5 Maximum velocity on coated airside: 25.4 m/sec.

.6 Minimum NRC of 0.65 at 25 mm thickness based on Type A mounting to ASTM C423.

2.2 ADHESIVE

.1 Adhesive: to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

.2 Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50. Temperature range minus 29 degrees C to plus 93 degrees C.

.3 Water-based fire retardant type.

Section 23 33 53 DUCT LINERS Waterdown Library & Civic Centre Page 2

JAL NO. 11-259

2.3 FASTENERS

.1 Weld pins 2.0 mm diameter, length to suit thickness of insulation. Polymer retaining clips, 32 mm square.

2.4 JOINT TAPE

.1 Poly Vinyl treated open weave fiberglass membrane 50 mm wide.

2.5 SEALER

.1 Meet requirements of NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

.2 Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50. Temperature range minus 68 degrees C to plus 93 degrees C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Do work in accordance with SMACNA HVAC DCS and as indicated except as specified otherwise.

.2 Line inside of ducts where indicated.

.3 Duct dimensions, as indicated, are clear inside duct lining.

.4 Provide duct liner for all supply air ducts downstream of VAV boxes.

3.2 DUCT LINER

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows: .1 Fasten to interior sheet metal surface with 90 % coverage of adhesive to

ASTM C916. .2 Exposed leading edges and transverse joints to be factory coated or

coated with adhesive during fabrication. .2 In addition to adhesive, install weld pins not less than 2 rows per surface and not

more than 425 mm on centres impact driven mechanical fasteners to compress duct liner sufficiently to hold it firmly in place.

.3 Spacing of mechanical fasteners in accordance with SMAC HVAC DCS. In

systems, where air velocities exceeds 20.3 m/sec, install galvanized sheet metal noising to leading edges of duct liner.

SECTION 23 33 53 Page 3 DUCT LINERS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

3.3 JOINTS

.1 Seal butt joints, exposed edges, weld pin and clip penetrations and damaged areas of liner with joint tape and sealer. Install joint tape in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations, and as follows:

.1 Bed tape in sealer.

.2 Apply two coats of sealer over tape.

.2 Replace damaged areas of liner.

.3 Protect leading and trailing edges of duct sections with sheet metal nosing having 15 mm overlap and fastened to duct.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 34 00 Page 1 HVAC FANS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Mechanical General Requirements: Section 21 05 01 as applicable. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 23 05 48: Noise & Vibration Control

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Shop Drawings

1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01330.

2. Submit manufacturer's certified Shop Drawings to the Consultant and include:

1. Complete information on fan construction and performance.

2. Performance curves over full range from shut-off to free delivery.

3. Drive details.

4. Make, type and catalogue number of bearings.

5. State hour rating of bearings when specified.


.1 Submit printed operating instructions and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01770, as follows:

.3 Maintenance Materials

.1 Provide and turn-over to Owner at time of Substantial Completion one V-belt set for each size used.

1. Where more than one fan uses the same set size, provide only one set.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Performance Ratings

.1 Type, size and capacity shown on Drawings for each specific application and conforming to requirements of manufacture, operation and performance as specified.

.2 Select fan size, operating rpm and rating point on stable head flow curve with smooth characteristics.

.3 Operating at least 20% below first critical speed when operating at maximum speed for class of construction.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 Dynamically and statically balance wheels of free standing or unitary fans to acceptable tolerances relative to size and speed.

.5 Cleaning and Metal Protection

.6 Thoroughly clean interior and exterior surfaces of fans including screens, at factory with approved de-greasing agent to CGBS 1-GP-181M+ Amdt-Mar-78.

.7 Apply a coating of red oxide or zinc chromate primer unless special protective coating is specified.

1. Exception: fans constructed of galvanized steel or aluminium

.2 Materials

.1 Fan casings: heavy gauge steel or spun aluminium construction, as specified by model number.

.3 Bearings

.1 Service life

1. To L10 Life Standard in accordance with latest AFBMA Code.

.2 Type

1. Grease lubricated ball or roller type fan bearings with ample thrust provision to prevent end play during normal life of bearings.

2. Smaller than 36 mm diameter: cartridge type.

3. 36 mm diameter and larger: shaft adapter sleeve type bearings utilizing horizontally split pillow blocks and mechanical flinger type grease valves.

4. Shafts smaller than 56 mm diameter, interference fit bearings may be used in lieu of adapter sleeve type.

.3 Bearings in air stream

1. Well secured extended grease lubricating lines unless bearing is easily accessible through man-size access door.

2. Pack bearings with low temperature grease in factory.

.4 Grease fittings, for fans driven by motors 0.375 kW (1/2 HP) and larger

1. Provide bearings with Zerk or Alemite grease fittings, with provision for automatic relief of lubricant pressure to outside of fan, away from wheel and visible from maintenance location.

2. Use service fittings and relief fittings easily accessible from maintenance locations and at separate and opposite sides of bearing housing.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 Motors and Drives

.1 Motor ratings

1. Type, kW (HP) rating, motor speed and electrical characteristics shown on Drawings.

2. Capable of satisfactory operation over range of performance from shut-off to run-out at 110% of rated rpm at point of selection.

2.2 FAN TYPES .1 Each concealed ceiling cabinet type exhaust fan shall be complete with

acoustically lined fan housing, gravity backdraft damper, rubber mounted direct driven centrifugal fan with cord, plug and receptacle box, duct collars and wall cap as scheduled.

.2 Alternate Manufacturers: 1. Penn 2. Jenn Air 3. Carnes Corp. 4. Loren Cook

5. Greenheck

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

.1 Fan Installation

.1 Install fans complete with resilient mountings and restraining snubbers.

.2 Provide flexible connections on inlet and outlet ductwork.

.3 Align shafts, belt drive and motor, adjust belt tension and check motor rotation before start-up.

.4 Protect motors and fans during construction and rotate fans, by hand, every month between delivery and acceptance of building.

.5 Hang cabinet fans with vibration isolators from building structure.

.2 Air Balancing

.1 Adjust variable pitch fan/motor sheaves during balancing to achieve specified air quantities.

.2 Provide sheaves and belts for final air balance.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 07 13 Page 1 AIR TERMINAL UNITS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Section 21 05 01 Mechanical General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Painting: Section 09900, Painting and Finishing. .2 Ductwork: Section 23 33 00. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit Shop Drawings for all equipment and

systems covered by this section. .2 Record Drawings

.1 Record, as work progresses, on one set of white prints provided, all changes or deviations in location of ductwork, dampers, terminal equipment, and equipment and such other approved changes that occur during the progress of the Work.

.2 Provide at completion of work, one final set of Drawings with all changes correctly marked in red ink.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FAN POWERED BOXES .1 System Description

.1 Ceiling mounted, Metalaire Fan powered boxes, integral diffuser terminal unit. Manufacturer shall supply unit(s) of the design, number, size and performance shown on the contract drawings and schedule.

.2 Fan Powered Terminal Units .1 Parallel fan powered terminal units ahll be Metalire Model FVI-500. The units

shall be sized and capacity is outlined in the plans and specifications. .2 Air terminals shall be certified under the American Refrigeration Institute

(ARI) Standard 880-98 Certification Program will carry the ARI seal. All NC values shallb e calculated per ARI Standard 885-98. Units will NC values calculated per ARI 885-90 will not be accepted. Terminal unis shall either be ETL® or UL® listed as a complete assembly. Terminal electrical components, including motor and low voltage controls shall be UL® listed.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Primary air valve shall have structural beads machine formed into the tube.

One external bead shall be provided for the attachment of flexible duct primary valve flow sensor shall be multipoint quadrant averaging with flow sampling both velocity pressure and flow differential pressure from all four quadrants, and shall contain two control ports and two accessory ports. Flow sensors sampling only velocity pressure in all four quadrants are not acceptable. Sensors reading differential pressure with less than 8 measuring points are not acceptable. All piping connections to the flow sensor must be made with external ports that extend through damper tube. Units with piping connections make in the primary air stream are not acceptable. Flow sensors with plastic piping connections of any kind are not acceptable. At an inlet velocity of 2000 fpm, the differential static pressure required to operate any terminal size shall not exceed 0.14” w.g. for the primary air valve.

.4 all electrical components including both line voltage and low voltage shall be mounted in a metal control enclosure. Units shall have a single point field wiring connection. Units shall be manufactured and wired per UL 1995 and in accordance with the National Electric Code.

.5 All terminals shall be shipped as a single unit required no field assembly. Accessories, including hot water coils, electric heaters and fan motors assemblies shall be factory mounted.

.6 The air terminals shall be constructed of zinc coated steel. The casing shall be a minimum of 22 gauge. The terminal primary air inlet valve shall be a round inlet for field duct connection. The primary control damper shall be a single blade, round damper operating within a 20 gauge round tube. The terminal unit discharge shall allow for a rectangular flanged duct connection. Units shall have a universal control mounting panel constructed of 20 gauge steel. Panel shall include standoffs to allow controls to be mounted without penetrating the terminal casing. Fan mounting deck shall be a minimum of 18 gauge.

.7 Primary inlet valve assembly shall have a seamless butt weld on round inlet tube to minimize leakage and prevent the damper from binding or overlapping seam welds. Inlet tubers with overlapping welds or non-continuous welds are not acceptable.

Damper shaft shall rotate in a self-lubricating Keptial® (acetal resin material)

bearing. Damper shaft shall be die cast aluminum. Damper shaft end shall include a cast damper position indicator. End of shaft where actuator is installed shall be square to prevent actuator screw(s) from slipping. Round damper shaft ends are not acceptable. Damper tube shall be free of obstructions including damper stops to allow the free rotation of the damper. Mechanical damper stops located in the inlet tube are not acceptable. A flexible gasket mounted in the damper blade without adhesives shall provide damper seal. Damper gasket shall include slit partitioning around the perimeter slit partitioning are not acceptable. Damper shall be double thickness of 24 gauge steel leakage through the damper assembly shall be less that 1% of maximum CFM at 3” static pressure.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Acceptable Equipment: 1. E.H. Price 2. Titus

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FAN POWERED BOXES .1 Hang unit from building structure with vibration isolators. .2 Provide flexible connections between H.W. coil and has HWS and HWR lines. .3 Provide flexible connections between supply ducts and units.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 37 13 Page 1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Section 21 05 01 Mechanical General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Painting: Section 09900, Painting and Finishing. .2 Ductwork: Section 23 33 00. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit Shop Drawings for all equipment and

systems covered by this section. .2 Record Drawings

.1 Record, as work progresses, on one set of white prints provided, all changes or deviations in location of ductwork, dampers, terminal equipment, and equipment and such other approved changes that occur during the progress of the Work.

.2 Provide at completion of work, one final set of Drawings with all changes correctly marked in red ink.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES .1 General

.1 Refer to Drawings for neck size, dimensions, capacity, etc. of grilles, registers and diffusers.

.2 Catalogue numbers of first named supplier are listed in schedules on Drawings to show required type and style.

.3 Furnish supply diffusers and registers to deliver indicated air quantities shown with throw to reach intended space limits without increasing sound level of room. Furnish blank-off baffles where required. Furnish equalizing deflectors on diffusers and in other locations as shown or required.

.4 Coordinate placing of diffusers, registers and grilles in ceilings with electrical and ceiling installation trades and exact location to final approval of Engineer.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Diffusers .1 Supply linear diffusers shall be Model SDA with plenum extruded aluminum,

number of slots and length are shown on drawings continuous slot diffusers each complete with adjustable pattern control elements, end caps on both ends; hangers and blank-off strips as detailed and described herein. Finishes shall be baked enamel; off white on face, and black on interior parts. Provide end clip support and special frame. Return air linear diffusers shall be model SDR.

.2 Square ceiling diffusers shall be of steel construction and fit 500 mm O.C. T-bar suspended layin ceilings. Inner assembly shall be easily removable and adjustable. Diffuser face shall be 500 mm x 500 mm size unless otherwise noted. Verify exact size of diffusers on site prior to ordering them.

.3 Grilles, Registers

.1 Grilles shall be of aluminum construction (except where noted) with baked white enamel finish, except in walls where prime coat finish shall be supplied. Aluminum frames and bars shall be extruded from hard stock, free from pits and spots. Joints shall be ‘hairline’. Attachment shall be with stainless steel or C.P. screws with 6 mm thick urethane foam gasket set under flange.

.2 Exhaust air grilles, except where otherwise noted, shall be #530D/F/S/A/B12, with removable key operated volume damper.

.3 Perforated GWB shall be used for return air. See architectural specifications. .4 Acceptable Equipment .1 E.H. Price .2 Carnes .3 Titus .4 AirVector .5 Krueger PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Refer to and comply with applicable requirements specified in Section 21 05 01. .2 Install miscellaneous steel framing, supports, braces, etc. as may be required to

hang or support equipment and ductwork as specified herein, and as shown on Drawings.

.3 Install beam clamps or supplementary steel to secure hanger rods, angles and

straps to structural steel framing. .4 In suspended ceiling areas, adjust final location of grilles and diffusers to suit

reflected ceiling plan.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 Set and secure roof penthouse on roof curb and seal weatherproof.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 65 10 Page 1 CONDENSING UNITS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Conform to Section 21 05 01 Mechanical General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 25 30 01 – Building Automation System .2 Section 25 30 02 – Sequence of Operation 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01780 -

Closeout Submittals. .2 Indicate: .1 Brief description of unit, indexed, with details of function, operation, control,

and service for components. .3 Manufacturer's installation instructions shall govern and unless otherwise noted,

operation, maintenance and service of items. Include names and addresses of spare part suppliers.

.4 Include following: .1 Provide for units, manufacturer's name, type, year, number of units, and

capacity. 1.4 WARRANTY .1 For refrigeration compressors, the warranty period shall be 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL .1 Roof mounted, self-contained unit with DX refrigeration and bear label of CSA and

ULC. .2 Unit to consist of cabinet and frame, compressor, condenser coil and fans. Unit

shall be capable of operating at -20°C.

.3 Unit SEER shall exceed 10.


JAL No. 14-194

2.2 CABINET .1 Framing and supports: 2 mm thick welded steel, galvanized after manufacture,

with lifting lugs at top of unit . .2 Access: removable gasketted panels with screwdriver operated flush cam type

fasteners.

2.3 REFRIGERATION .1 Conform to CSA B52 and ANSI/UL 465 requirements, Federal Halocarbon

Regulations 2003. Environmental Code of Practice for Elimination of Fluorocarbon, Emissions from Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems (the Environment Canada “Refrigeration Code of Practice”) Report EPS1/RA/2.

.2 Compressor/condenser section:

.1 Hermetic compressor, vibration isolated with flexible suction and discharge connections, oil sight glass, oil pressure switch, crankcase heater, and automatic pump down system with control to liquid line solenoid valve.

.2 Fan[s]: propeller type with single piece spun venturi outlets and zinc plated guards. Motor[s] shall be sequenced for head pressure control.

.3 Electrical system shall have operating controls, oil and refrigerant pressure protection, motor overload protection, weatherproof electrical wiring with weatherproof, rain tight disconnect.

.4 Include refrigerant piping with sight glass, filter and valves.

.5 Condenser: staggered copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with sub-cooling rows.

.6 Capacity reduction: Provide fan control for head control for low ambient operation down to minus 200C ambient temperature.

.7 Refrigerant: R-407C, R-410A.

2.4 CONTROLS .1 Room thermostat to activate cooling relay in control circuit cycling

compressor. Provide safeties and pressure controls. Condenser fans to operate in sequence.

.2 As back pressure is reduced, hot gas bypass opens to maintain set back

pressure. .3 When call for cooling is satisfied, relay is de-energized closing liquid line

solenoid valve and pumps down. .4 The condensing unit shall be controlled from The BAS. Provide

necessary relays and dry contacts to compliment control system. .5 Acceptable manufacturers: Carrier, Johnson Controls, Trane, McQuay,

Daikin., L.G.


JAL No. 14-194

2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING .1 ACR hard copper with wrought copper fittings. .2 Joints shall be made with lead-free solder 95/5 .3 Vibration isolator on each pipe to DX coil and condensing unit. .4 R-410A or 407C refrigerant or latest approved type. .5 All welded joints to be completed using continuous nitrogen flush. .6 Drain pipe of Type ‘M’ hard copper with solder fittings or each fan coil unit. 7. Install a sper the manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install as per manufacturers' instructions on roof sleepers. .2 Manufacturer to certify installation, supervise start-up and commission unit. 3.2 START-UP .1 General: .1 In accordance with Section Start-up and Verification Testing – General

Requirements. .2 Verify accessibility, serviceability of components including motorized

dampers, filters coils, fans, motors, operators, humidifiers, sensors, electrical disconnects.

END OF SECTION

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAIN Jai n & A s soc ia t es L im i t ed (JAL 14- 197) Summer 2014

CONTENTS

SECTIONS TITLE 260100 Electrical General Requirements 260500 Basic Materials and Methods 261400 Wiring Devices 262300 Existing Power Generator Relocate 264100 Grounding 264400 Panelboards 264700 Disconnect Switches 265000 Lighting Equipment 265300 Emergency Lighting System 265400 Lighting Control System 267200 Fire Alarm System 267300 Telecommunication Raceway Systems

SECTION 26 01 00 Page 1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INVOLVED

.1 The entire Electrical Specifications (as applicable) applies for both Buildings:

1. 101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan

2. 5 Shoreham Drive, Downsview

1.2 REFERENCE SECTIONS .1 Comply with general conditions, supplementary conditions of the contract, and

section 26 01 05– Electrical General Requirements. Conform to Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. Supplement with the following requirements.

.2 Conform to the conditions stated in the Contract Form and Supplementary Conditions.

.3 This section of the specification is an integral part of the contract documents and shall be read accordingly. This Section applies to and is a part of all Sections of Electrical Division.

1.3 INTENT .1 Mention herein or indication on drawings of articles, materials, operations or

methods requires: supply of each item mentioned or indicated, of quality, or subject to qualifications noted; installation according to conditions stated and; performance of each operation prescribed with furnishing of necessary labour, equipment, tools, instruments, services and incidentals for Electrical Work, Division 26.

.2 Sections of these Electrical Specifications are not intended to delegate functions nor to delegate work and supply to any specific trade and the work shall include all labour, materials, equipment, tools and inspection required for a complete and working installation as described.

.3 The Specifications are integral with the Drawings which accompany them. Neither is to be used alone. Any item or subject omitted from one, but included in the other is properly specified.

.4 Wherever differences occur in the Contract Documents, the maximum conditions will govern and be allowed for in the Tender price. The item to be incorporated will be at the option of the Consultant.

1.4 DEFINITIONS .1 Where used, words "Section" and "Division" shall also include other Subcontractors

engaged on site to perform work to make building and site complete in all respects.

.2 Where used, the word “products” shall mean the material, equipment, component, machinery, or fixtures forming the completed work.

.3 Where used, word “connect” shall mean to supply and install all wiring and raceways and make all power connections to products.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 Where used, word "supply" shall mean to include all labour, materials and services to furnish to site in location required or directed complete with accessory parts, but is not intended to include installation.

.5 Where used, word "install" shall mean to include all labour, materials and services to secure in place products, including receiving, unloading, transporting, storage, uncrating, installing, connecting and performance of such testing and finish work as is compatible with degree of installation specified complete ready for use.

.6 Where used, word "provide" shall mean to supply and install as each is described above.

.7 Where used, word "commission” shall mean to startup and initial operation of products as required to demonstrate satisfactory operation of products and entire system including calibration of any instrumentation.

.8 Where used, word “work" shall mean the total construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labour, products and services.

.9 Where used, wordings such as "approved, to approval, as directed, permitted, permission, accepted, acceptance, report to", shall mean "approved, directed, permitted, accepted, report to", by Consultant.

1.5 BY-LAWS AND REGULATIONS .1 Conform to latest Government, Provincial and Municipal By-laws, regulations, Codes

and Standards and requirements of other authorities having jurisdiction in the area where work is to be performed. Minor changes required by an authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out without change to the Contract amount. Standards established by drawings and specifications shall not be reduced by applicable codes or regulations.

.2 Conform to the following applicable standards and regulations as minimum, but not limited to:

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standards Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) Standards Ontario Electrical Safety Code (OESC) and Bulletins Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) Requirements Canadian Underwriters Association (CUA) Standards Ontario Building Code (OBC) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC) Standards

1.6 TENDERS AND FORMS .1 State separate prices in the tender form for work indicated. Prices shall include the

complete cost of the work, i.e. all equipment, wiring, material, labour, incidentals, profit, overhead, etc, excluding taxes. It shall be the Owner’s option to delete from the Contract any of the work indicated at the prices stated.


JAL No. 14-194

1.7 PERMITS AND FEES .1 Apply for, obtain, and pay for permits, licences, certificates, connection charges and

inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction. Include any premiums applicable due to requirements for after office hours inspections.

.2 The first submission of plans and specifications to ESA will be made by the Consultant. From then on, this contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and complying with all the requirements of ESA.

.3 Submit all required documentation to the authorities for their approval and comments before starting any Work. Provide all additional drawings, details or information as may be required. Comply with any changes requested by authorities as part of the contract, but notify the consultant immediately of such changes.

1.8 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONDITIONS .1 Examine the site and local conditions. Examine carefully all Drawings and complete

Specifications to ensure that work and equipment will satisfy conditions and performance requirements as shown. Examine the work of other Contractors and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work, its completion or warranty. No allowance will be made later for any expense incurred through failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies and omissions in writing, five working days prior to tender closing.

.2 Submission of a Tender confirms that the Contract Documents and site conditions are completely understood and accepted without qualifications unless exceptions are specifically noted in the Tender.

1.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .1 The Contract Drawings of this Division are performance drawings and indicate the

scope and general arrangement of the Work. They are diagrammatic except where specific details are given. They shall be read in conjunction with Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and all other Division Drawings of the Contract.

.2 Obtain accurate dimensions from the architectural and structural drawings, or by site measurement. Locations and elevations of services are approximate and must be verified before construction is undertaken.

.3 Make changes required to accommodate structural conditions, (beams, columns caps, etc.). Obtain Consultant's approval before proceeding.

.4 Adjust the location of materials and/or equipment up to 3 meters in any direction as instructed without adjustment to contract price, provided that the instructions are given before installation and rough-in.

.5 The drawings do not show all conduit and/or wiring or all structural, mechanical and architectural details. Plan and install conduit runs respecting all applicable conditions including structural, mechanical and architectural details.

1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Prepare and submit shop drawings of all Products in accordance with Division 1-

General requirements as specified herein and in each section of Division 26.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Submit eight (8) copies of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall have a minimum 210 mm x 285 mm (8-1/2” x 11”) clear space on the front sheet, suitable for stamping. The cover sheet shall include the project name, Division 26 name and product description. Where multiple equipment is submitted under one binding, include an index of all equipment as the front sheet.

.3 Assume full responsibility for submission of shop drawings. Allow minimum two (2) weeks for Consultant's review.

.4 The Consultant will only review shop drawings bearing the Division 26 and Contractor's stamps of approval.

.5 Submit shop drawings showing the following:

.1 Submit shop drawings showing the following:

.2 Project name.

.3 Project tag number.

.4 Manufacturer's name and model number.

.5 Supplier's name.

.6 Approval agencies.

.7 Shipping and working weight.

.8 Performance characteristics.

.9 Dimensions, including required clearances.

.10 Electrical characteristics.

.11 Bill of materials and finishes.

.12 Time required to fabricate and deliver.

.13 All variations from Tender Documents.

.14 Construction and field connection details.

.15 Installation requirements.

.6 The Consultant's review shall not relieve this Division of responsibility to provide Products in accordance with the design intent and Contract Documents.

.7 Manufacturer's printed data sheets for standard items are acceptable providing pertinent characteristics are identified and relate to specified items.

.8 Each shop drawing shall be checked and stamped as being correct, by trade purchasing item, and by Contractor, before drawing is submitted. If above requirements are not complied with, shop drawings will be rejected and returned forthwith.

.9 Where applicable, provide wiring details, schematics, single line drawings, and wiring diagrams showing interconnection with work of other Trades.

.10 Verify and check dimensions to ensure proper installation of equipment in available space and without interference to work of other Trades. Ensure that electrical and all other coordination is complete prior to submission of shop drawings.

.11 Provide data sheets and samples for all wiring devices and wall plates prior to installation. Device and plate colours/finishes to be confirmed prior to ordering.

.12 Where requested, submit samples of Products for review and approval.

.13 Do not have equipment delivered to site until a shop drawing for the item has been reviewed.


JAL No. 14-194

1.10 INTERFERENCE AND DETAIL DRAWINGS .1 Prepare Interference Drawings in conjunction with all parties and trades concerned

showing sleeves and openings and passage of piping and conduits through building structure. Drawings shall also show inserts, curbs, equipment bases, anchors, special hangers and weights on all load points.

.2 Prepare fully dimensioned detail drawings of products and services in electrical rooms, service and ceiling spaces, and all other critical locations. Co-ordinate the Work with all other Divisions. Base drawings on reviewed shop drawings and indicate all details pertaining to access, clearances, sleeves, electrical connections, and elevations of pipes, ducts and conduits. Include location of access doors provided under this Division.

.3 Ensure that clearances required by jurisdictional authorities are indicated on the Interference Drawings. The Owner will not consider any extra cost as a result of the Contractor’s failure to prepare proper interference drawings.

1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS .1 Conform to General Requirements. Maintain at least 2 sets of documents and

clearly mark on same as job progresses, changes and deviations from work shown so that on completion Owner will have records of exact location of ducts and equipment and record of material and equipment changes.

.2 Contractor shall obtain clean set of prints from Consultant at start of Contract Work and shall keep these prints up-to-date at jobsite, accurately recording all changes made on project and locating all services, equipment, etc. which may have been shown only diagrammatically on Contract Documents.

.3 Contractor shall ensure that as-built information is accurately recorded and shall check same. As-Built drawings shall be reviewed with Consultant at each jobsite meeting.

.4 Prepare record drawings showing the following:

.1 Inverts of all services entering and leaving the building and at property lines.

.2 Dimensions of underground services in relation to property lines at key points of every run.

.3 Elevations of underground services in relation to ground floor level of the building.

.4 Location of all services embedding in the structure, utilizing grid line references.

.5 Dimensioned locations of all services left for future work.

.6 All changes to the Work due to Change Orders and Site Instructions.

.7 All changes to the Work during construction.

.8 All changes to structural and architectural elements that affect the backgrounds of this record set.

.9 Location and designation of all electrically supervised valves, flow switches and pressure switches.

.10 Location and designation of all items requiring access or service in a hidden location.

.11 Location of all access doors provided under Division 26.

.12 All changes and revisions to Specifications, details and equipment schedules.

.13 All homerun conduits, junction boxes for complete electrical systems.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 Upon completion of Contract Work, prior to Substantial Performance inspection and after final review with Consultants, Contractor shall neatly transfer recorded information and make final As-Built submission to Consultant for review in the following form:

.1 One (1) copy of clean, legible prints.

.2 One (1) copy of AutoCAD 2013 format drawings. Files shall retain all setting (layers, line types, scales colours, etc) used in the drawing files provided by consultant.

.6 After Record Drawings have been reviewed, revised if necessary until acceptable to the consultant. Deliver drawings in the form of CD and one (1) set of prints taken from that CD to Owner.

1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL .1 Contractor will be responsible for collecting and organizing three (3) copies of all

data, operating instructions, maintenance and trouble-shooting instructions, parts lists, parts diagrams, evidence of all tests and certifications, complete reviewed shop drawings, etc. and assembling them in neat manuals in hard cover. Identify cover “Operation and Maintenance Manual for NAME OF THE PROJECT”. Manuals shall be separated with dividers in logical sections and volumes.

.2 Contractor shall also collect from Subtrades and Suppliers all Guarantees/Warranties specified. Check that starting date (date of Substantial Performance of entire project) and extent of each guarantee/warranty are clearly indicated. Check also that all guarantees/warranties indicate Supplier’s Name or Subcontractor’s Name as appropriate together with contact phone number. Assemble neatly in labeled section of each manual.

.3 Prior to requesting Substantial Performing inspection, submit one (1) copy to Consultant for review. Make all corrections requested by Consultant and forward the corrected two (2) copies to the Owner.

1.13 SCHEDULING .1 Comply with the construction schedule. Conform to phasing of work if applicable.

Conform to interim and final completion dates.

.2 Co-ordinate electrical schedule with general construction schedule.

.3 Submit a bar chart schedule showing the start and completion dates for each activity based on a critical path analysis of the work.

.4 Include in schedule for electrical work done by others, e.g. Power Supply Authority connection.

1.14 ALTERNATES AND SUBSTITUTIONS .1 Substitute Products will only be considered when tendered Products become

unobtainable. State in tender the proposed substitute and amount added or deducted.

.2 It is the responsibility of this Division to ensure "Substitute Products" fits space allotted and gives performance specified.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 If Products manufactured and/or specified by a manufacturer named as equivalent are used in lieu of the manufacturer specified, be responsible for ensuring that the substituted Product is equivalent in performance and operating characteristics to the specified Product, and, it shall be understood that all costs for additional space, larger power feeders and changes to associated or adjacent work will be borne by the contractor offering the substitution. In addition, in Equipment Rooms where Products named as equivalent is used in lieu of specified Products and the dimensions of such Products differs from the specified Products, prepare and submit for approval, accurately dimensioned layouts of rooms affected.

.4 Contractor shall pay the Consultant on a per diem basis (hourly) for the review of the alternate Products for cost saving purpose.

1.15 VALUATION OF CHANGES .1 For each change submit a complete itemized breakdown of labour and material.

.2 Only the net difference between an extra and a credit will be subject to overhead and profit mark-up.

.3 Material shall be valued at current trade prices incorporating all discounts and labour rates. Overhead and profit shall be as shown in the Tender Form.

1.16 WORKMANSHIP .1 Workmanship and method of installation shall conform to best standards and

practice and be performed to approval. Work shall be done by tradesmen skilled in work to be performed. Where required by local or other By-Laws and Regulations, tradesmen shall be licensed in their trade. Install all work and equipment to manufacturer's printed directions.

1.17 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .1 Coordinate the Work with all Divisions. Inform other Divisions of the locations of

openings, chases, sleeves, supports, services, connections, etc., to be incorporated into the Work.

.2 Check the locations of all expansion/building joints and ensure that all electrical installations are at or crossing these locations are as detailed and as required to compensate for the possible movement at the joint.

.3 Confirm the exact location of outlets, fixtures and connections. Check architectural details and elevations for more requirements. Confirm location of connection points for equipment supplied under other Divisions or by the Owner.

.4 Install neatly all equipment and apparatus to allow free access for maintenance, adjustment and eventual replacement.

.5 Install metering and/or sensing devices to provide accurate and reliable sampling of quantities being measured. Install instruments to permit easy observation.

.6 Provide suitable shielding and physical protection for devices.

.7 Install all Products and services in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and/or recommendations.


JAL No. 14-194

.8 Provide all supports, hangers and fasteners. Secure all Products and services so as not to impose undue stresses on the structure and systems.

.9 Ensure that the load onto structures does not exceed the maximum loading per square meter (foot) as shown on structural drawings or as directed by the Consultant.

.10 Do not use explosive activated tools.

1.18 FIELD REVIEW .1 The Owner and Consultant shall have access to the site at all times for review of the

work during construction.

.2 Arrange for review of Products during manufacturing.

.3 Provide all gauges, instruments and other necessary measuring equipment required for review of the Work.

.4 Maintain a complete set of Contract Documents at all times for field reference by the Consultant.

.5 Correct any deficiencies as they are reported during the performance of the Work.

1.19 TEMPORARY SERVICES .1 Provide temporary office, workshop and tools and material storage space for the

Work and assume responsibility for any loss or damage thereto. Buildings erected for this purpose shall conform in appearance to those erected for similar purposes under other Divisions of Specification.

.2 Provide temporary lighting for whole construction area. Coordinate with General Contractor for requirements.

.3 Provide scaffolding and shoring necessary for work of this Division. Scaffolding and shoring shall be adequate to protect the workmen according to Provincial and Local Regulations.

.4 Provide rigging and millwrighting, labour and equipment necessary for the work of this Division. Employ only workmen well experienced and skilled in such trades for this portion of the work.

.5 Provide hoisting machinery, operators, labour and materials necessary to lift and place equipment supplied under this Division.

.6 The permanent systems or any part thereof shall not be used during construction for construction purposes, unless so permitted by the Owner, in writing.

1.20 PROTECTION AND CLEANING .1 Securely plug or cap open ends of electrical raceways or equipment to prevent entry

of dirt, dust, debris, water, snow or ice.

.2 Equipment stored on site shall be protected from weather and kept dry and clean at all times. Take care to avoid corrosion of metal parts.

.3 Protect all finished and unfinished Work of this and other Divisions from damage due to carrying out of this Work.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 Make good any damage caused directly or indirectly to walls, floors, ceilings, woodwork, brickwork, finishes, etc.

.5 Before energizing any systems, inspect and clean the inside of all panelboards, switchgear and cabinets to ensure that they are completely free from dust and debris.

.6 Clean all polished, painted and plated work. Clean all lighting fixtures. Remove all debris, surplus material and tools.

.7 Carry out additional cleaning operations of systems as specified in other Sections of this Division and as Division 1 requirements.

1.21 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .1 Separate and recycle waste materials.

.2 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with General Contractor’s requirements.

.3 Divert unused wiring and metal materials to metal recycling facility, or place in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with General Contractor’s requirements.

1.22 MOCK-UPS AND TRIAL USAGE .1 Provide mock-ups in accordance with the conditions stated in the Contract Form and

Division 1 of the Specifications.

.2 Trial usage of any equipment or materials shall not be construed as evidence of acceptance of same and no claim for damage shall be made for injury to or breaking of any part of such work which may be so used.

1.23 COMMISSIONING .1 Be responsible for commissioning of all work provided under this Division. The total

commissioning requirements of this Division involve:

.1 Complete activation of all systems.

.2 Re-torquing of all bolted connections in all distribution equipment.

.3 Calibration, testing and verification of all systems.

.2 Commissioning shall commence with activation and verification of all systems in accordance with requirements of the Specifications. This will include but not be limited to the following items to be tested, adjusted and verified:

.1 Main Switchboard. .2 Transformers. .3 Lighting and power distribution. .4 Fire alarm systems. .5 Emergency lighting system .6 Electric heating equipment/system. .7 Power generator .8 Automatic transfer switch .9 Lighting control system


JAL No. 14-194

1.24 TESTING .1 Carry out all tests specified and tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. The

testing and adjusting is the responsibility of this Division.

.2 Provide all equipment, labour, instruments, expenses of the manufacturer's representative, and incidentals, and pay for all power and fuel required to carry out the tests.

.3 Submit the record of all tests and have these tests signed by Clerk of Works or Contractor's Superintendent and, where applicable the manufacturer's representative. Show in schedule form a record of the systems or parts of systems tested, the date of the test, the circumstances such as current, temperatures, etc., the duration of the test and any special remarks pertaining to events during the test. Note which tests have been witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

.4 Submit certification letters from the manufacturers of all equipment certifying that their technical representatives have inspected and tested their equipment and are satisfied with the methods of installation and operation. Where existing systems are extended, provide letters covering both new and existing equipment and connections. These letters shall state the names of persons present at testing, methods used and a list of functions performed with location and room numbers where applicable.

1.25 INSPECTION .1 Arrange for inspection of all Work by the authorities having jurisdiction. On

completion of the Work furnish final unconditional certificates of approval by the inspection authorities.

.2 Application for final review will be considered when the Work has been completed and written declarations submitted that all commissioning, testing adjustment, set up and documentation is complete. Final review shall be done when:

.1 All reported deficiencies have been corrected.

.2 All systems have been balanced, tested, commissioned and are operational.

.3 The Owner has been instructed in the operation and maintenance of all equipment.

.4 All reports have been submitted and reviewed.

.5 All maintenance manuals have been submitted and reviewed.

.6 All tags and nameplates are in place and all data submitted and reviewed.

.7 Cleaning up is finished in all respects.

.8 All certificates are furnished.

.9 All spare parts and replacement parts specified have been provided.

.10 All record drawings have been submitted and reviewed.

1.26 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION .1 Provide personnel, equipment and tools to demonstrate and instruct Owner’s

designated personnel in operation, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment to satisfaction of the Owner. This work shall take place during Owner’s regular business hours prior to acceptance.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Where specified elsewhere in this Division, manufacturers shall provide demonstration and instructions.

.3 Where specified elsewhere in this Division, manufacturers shall provide demonstration and instructions.

.4 Where deemed necessary, the Consultant or Owner’s agent may record these demonstrations via video tape or other means for future reference.

1.27 WARRANTY .1 Provide a written guarantee stating that systems, equipment, components, etc. have

been installed to manufacturer’s instructions, that systems meet the contract requirements and that all deficiencies in material and labour occurring within one year after substantial completion, will be corrected at no charge.

.2 Obtain Product warranties in excess of one (1) year from the manufacturer on behalf of the Owner. These Product warranties shall be issued by the manufacturer to the benefit of the Owner.

.3 Instruct all manufacturers and suppliers that warranties on Products will commence at the date of Substantial Performance and not from the date the Products are put into operation.

.4 All corrections to deficiencies listed in field review reports and other correspondence, as well as but not limited to those indicated in testing, adjusting, balancing and commissioning shall be completed prior to turn over.

1.28 CAD DRAWINGS

.1 If required for coordination purposes, the Contractor may obtain Design Drawings from the Consultant after completing the required Document Request Form and paying a handling charge of $75 + HST per drawing.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 05 00 Page 1 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 This section of specification is an integral part of the contract documents and shall

be read accordingly.

.2 Comply with general conditions, supplementary conditions of the contract, and section 26 01 00– Electrical general requirements.

.3 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishings of labour, materials, and equipment required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete Electrical systems as shown, as specified and as otherwise required. Complete systems shall be left ready for continuous and efficient satisfactory operation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS .4 Submit shop drawings and product data for products specified in this section in

accordance with Section 26 01 00 – Electrical General Requirements.

1.3 PRODUCTS .5 Products shall be new, of Canadian manufacture where available, first quality and

uniform throughout. Submit tender based on the use of products and equipment specified, or on the listed acceptable alternate equipment as further detailed.

.6 Electrical products s shall be C.S.A. approved and be so labeled. Products not C.S.A. approved shall receive acceptance for installation by Ontario Hydro Special Inspections Branch before delivery, and modifications and charges required for such acceptance shall be included in work of this Section. Products shall not be installed or connected to the source of electrical power until approval is obtained.

.7 Where manufacturer is not specified provide products of high commercial standard and quality consistent with the standards of these specifications. Provide products of same manufacture for like applications unless noted otherwise.

.8 Products shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with latest issue of applicable Standards or Authorities when such are either mentioned herein, or have jurisdiction over such materials or items of equipment. Confirm capacity, ratings and characteristics of products being provided to supply power to equipment provided under other Sections of the work. Resolve discrepancies before such items are purchased.

.9 Acceptance of products installed presumes that products have not been damaged or exposed to conditions that would adversely affect performance and life expectancy. If in the opinion of the Consultant, products have sustained damage, or have been exposed to abnormal conditions it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to have such tests performed as deemed necessary by the Consultant to establish condition and therefore, acceptability of installed products.


JAL No. 14-194

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION .1 Cable and conduit

.1 Identify conduits and cables for the various systems by the use of the following distinctive coloured labels. The Labels shall comprise pressure sensitive plastic tape with printing labels indicating the system. Apply a small area of paint to the inside of each outlet box, pull box and panel as it is being installed. Identify junction boxes in suspended ceiling areas with colour on both inside and outside.

.1 120/208 volt system - yellow

.2 347/600 volt system – white

.3 Emergency power - orange

.4 Fire alarm systems – red

.5 Data cabling system – blue

.6 P.A./Telephone systems – grey

.7 Security/Intercom/CATV systems – black

.8 Other telecommunication systems - green

.2 Locate identification labels at follows:

.1 Behind each access.

.2 At each change of direction, at junction boxes, and at both ends of each run.

.3 At not more than 15m apart in straight runs.

.4 Where passing through a wall, partition, and floor. One on each side of wall, partition, and floor.

.2 Cable and conduit labels

.1 For power and lighting system feeders, install labels at either end of the conductors where terminated inside of equipment to match wiring diagram conductor identification or panelboard circuit numbers. Typical identification Panel AA circuit - 21; use "AA-21". For a three phase circuit provide identification on phase A conductor only. For a single phase circuit provide identification on the phase conductor.

.2 For lighting branch circuits identify circuit at panel and in outlet box connection to lighting fixture. Install label on phase conductor tap-off. Typical identification if fixture connected to Panel A, circuit 5; marker identification A-5.

.3 For branch circuits supplying single phase and three phase devices such as receptacles and connections to equipment identify conductors at panel and in device outlet box. Install label on phase conductor inside outlet box. Typical identification if device is connected to Panel B - circuit 14, marker identification "B-14".

.4 For switchboards identify all control conductors at terminal strips inside equipment and where terminated at all remote devices. Identification shall match numbering system on Drawings and "Reviewed" shop drawings.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 For fire alarm systems, identify all conductors at terminal strips located in:

.1 Control panels.

.2 Annunciators.

.3 Printers.

.4 Local terminal cabinets.

.5 All remote devices.

.6 All connections in the system.

.7 Provide identification in accordance with the numbering system on the "Reviewed" shop drawings.

.6 For miscellaneous systems identify all conductors at terminal strips located in:

.1 Control and/or monitoring panels.

.2 Control and/or monitoring stations.

.3 Local terminal cabinets.

.4 All remote devices.

.5 All connections in the system.

.6 Provide identification in accordance with the numbering system on the "Reviewed" shop drawings.

.3 Equipment nameplates

.1 Provide lamacoid name plates, white background with black engraved letters 0.4" (10 mm) high, for electrical equipment but not limited to panels, switchboards, transformers, disconnect switches, breakers, contactors, relay panels, starters, TVSS, FACP and miscellaneous panels.

.2 Nameplates shall indicate voltage, capacity, upstream, and downstream equipment Typical identification for panel: "Lighting Panel C, 120/208 v, 3 phase, 4 W. Supplied from Panel BB".

.3 Switchboards - Plates to be mounted on face of switchboards. Typical identification for switchboard: "Switchboard AAA - 120/208 V, 3 phase, 4 W". Typical identification for branch feeders: "Power Panel BB".

.4 Install plates after all painting has been completed. Secure with mechanical fastening devices except on the inside of panel doors where gluing will be acceptable.

.4 Power system colour code

.1 Power system phase colour code:

.1 Red - Phase A

.2 Black - Phase B

.3 Blue - Phase C

.4 Neutral - White

.5 Ground - Green.

.2 Identify incoming utility service lines with enamel paint to above colour code.

.3 Band buses in switch board and panels to above colour code.

.4 Provide branch conductor to above colour code.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 Manufacturer’s nameplates

.1 Have the manufacturer's nameplates affixed to each item of all equipment showing the size, name of equipment, serial number and all information usually provided, including voltage, cycle, phase, horsepower, etc., and the name of the manufacturer and his address. Ensure that all stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates is perfectly legible. Ensure that nameplates are not painted over. Where apparatus is to be concealed, attach the nameplate in an approved location on the equipment support or frame.

.2 Ensure that panels and other apparatus which have exposed faces in finished areas do not have any visible trade marks or other identifying symbols. Mount nameplates behind doors.

.6 Signage

.1 Provide signage to local inspection authority on all equipment and electrical rooms.

.2 The suitable warning signs must be installed as per Electrical Safety Code.

.7 Single line distribution drawings

.1 Provide clear acrylic covered framed as-built single line distribution system drawing of the entire project in the main electrical room. Distribution system shall be CAD generated. Size shall be minimum 305 x 460 mm with all text legible. Provide interim drawings until such time that permanent as-built drawings are available for permanent installation.

2.2 WIRES AND CABLES .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the followings:

.1 CSA C22.2 No. 0.3, Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables.

.2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.131 – Type TECK 90 Cable.

.3 CSA C22.2 No. 38, Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables.

.4 CSA C22.2 No. 75, Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

.5 CSA C22.2 No. 65, Wire Connectors.

.2 Use copper conductors T90 or RW90, 90oC rated insulation unless otherwise noted.

.3 Aluminum conductors (90C rated insulation) may be used where noted, in sizes #2 AWG and larger, applied with corrosion preventing compound and hydraulic or powder activated tools, are used for all connections. Where aluminum conductors used for specified copper conductors, provide larger conduits as required by Code, size conductors to meet design requirements of capacity and voltage drop.

.4 For a residential branch circuit protected by 15A circuit breaker, #14 AWG copper conductors may be used where the home run does not exceed 27m.

.5 Solid conductors of #12AWG and smaller. Stranded conductors for #10 AWG and larger.


JAL No. 14-194

.6 Except as indicated hereinafter, wire for 120 volt lighting and receptacle branch circuits to be #12 AWG except that #10 minimum to be used where the home run exceeds 27m (90’). Wire for 120 volt control circuits to be #12 AWG minimum, and for 24 volt control circuits to be #16 AWG minimum.

.7 For wiring through or in lighting fixtures use type 'GTF' fixture wire, rated 600 volts to meet code requirements for recessed fixtures.

.8 Wire to ceiling outlet boxes on which a lighting fixture is or may be mounted, with conductors having insulation suitable for 90C.

.9 Cables located in plenum, ceiling or floor spaces shall be totally enclosed in non-combustible conduit or raceway or be armoured cable where permitted by the Ontario Building Code.

.10 Unless specified otherwise, wire for branch circuits shall be 2#12 + Grd in 16mm conduit.

.11 Wires and cables for outdoor locations shall be minus 40C rated.

.12 Armoured cables shall be complete with interlocked aluminum armour, approved fastening and connectors and meet the requirements of Vertical Flame Test-Cables in Cable Tray of CSA C22.2 No. 0.3. The PVC jacket cables (TECK 90 and ACWU90) shall be FT6 rated.

.13 Install all wiring in conduit, unless indicated as armoured. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.

.14 Use an approved lubricant to assist in pulling conductors through conduit. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards.

.15 Balance the loading on feeders so that unbalanced load is less than 10%.

.16 Limit the voltage drop at the end of feeders and branch circuits to 2% at the rated load of the circuit.

.17 For single conductor armoured cables, where required to conform to the Electrical Safety Code, Rule 12-108, Bulletin 12-7-11.

.18 Lighting fixture wiring in accessible ceiling spaces shall be run in conduit from the lighting panel to ceiling outlet boxes with armoured cable drops no longer than 3.0m (10 ft.) permissible from the boxes to fixtures.

.19 Protect all exposed non-armoured cables in manholes, pull pits and trenches with an approved fire protective fibreglass tape of '3M' manufacture or approved equal. Extend the protective wrapping on the cables where they leave pull pits or trenches below switchgear to the circuit breaker or fused switch terminals. Rack cables in manholes and pull pits to provide clear access for maintenance and servicing.

.20 Use BX for concealed locations of existing wall. Where BX is not practical for a existing wall, run wires in metal wire way surface mounted in finished area.

.21 Splice wire, up to and including No. 6 gauge, with nylon insulated expandable spring pressure type connectors. Splice large conductors using compression type connections insulated with heat shrink sleeves.


JAL No. 14-194

2.3 RACEWAYS AND FITTING .1 Drawings do not show all raceways. Those shown are generally in diagrammatic

form only.

.2 Conform with the requirements of the latest editions of the following:

.1 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18, Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware.

.2 CSA C22.2 No. 45, Rigid Metal Conduit.

.3 CSA C22.2 No. 56, Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

.4 CSA C22.2 No. 62, Surface Raceways and Lighting Fixture Raceways and Fittings.

.5 CSA C22.2 No. 83, Electrical Metallic Tubing.

.6 CSA C22.2 No. 126, Cable Tray System.

.7 CSA C22.2 No. 211.2, Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) Conduit.

.8 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 227.3, Flexible Non-metallic Tubing.

.9 CSA C22 No. 18, Outlet Boxes, Conduits Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware.

.3 Conduits

.1 Rigid steel conduit hot dip galvanized inside and outside installed:

.1 On the exterior of building;

.2 Where exposed to mechanical damage;

.3 Where conduits turn up or turn down out of concrete slab;

.4 Damp and wet locations.

.2 Steel galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT) installed:

.1 In partitions;

.2 In ceiling spaces;

.3 In service spaces.

.4 In masonry walls.

.3 Rigid PVC (unplasticized) conduit except for exit light, emergency lighting, and fire alarm system installed:

.1 In slabs with rigid steel galvanized turn-up;

.2 Underground with rigid steel galvanized turn-up;

.3 In concrete walls;

.4 Damp and wet locations.

.4 Flexible armoured conduit:

.1 In partitions;

.2 For lighting fixture drops;

.3 From ceiling junction boxes into wall outlets;

.4 Flexible armoured conduits shall be limited to 10'-0" lengths where run horizontally from take-off junction boxes.

.5 Liquid tight flexible conduit

.1 Final connection to motors.

.2 Any equipment which vibrates or generates noise.


JAL No. 14-194

.6 For EMT use steel concrete tight set screw fittings as manufactured by T & B or equal. Die cast or pressure cast fittings are not acceptable. For rigid steel conduit use only steel or malleable iron threaded fittings. Threadless, die cast or pressure cast fittings are not acceptable.

.7 ENT might be used where permitted by OESC, provided with mechanical protection as required by OESC.

.8 Provide bushings on the ends of all conduits in enclosure, boxes, panels and cabinets, to protect the conductor installation. Except where grounding bushings are specified use all plastic insulated bushings temperature rating 150C with double locknuts.

.9 Use PVC conduit for all landscaping locations where conduit comes in contact with soil. Refer to Landscape Drawings for final elevation of planting soil. Co-ordinate and adjust electrical devices accordingly.

.10 Conceal all conduits except in service spaces, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms and areas with ceilings.

.11 Install all locknuts and bushings to ensure a secure mechanical and electrical bond. Use Erickson couplings in lieu of running threads.

.12 Where conduit joints occur in concrete, use silicone sealing compound to make water tight.

.13 Lay out conduit to drain free of all moisture.

.14 Securely hold conduits in place in concrete or masonry during pouring and construction operations; provide templates, forms and spacers as necessary.

.15 Support multiple runs of conduit on channel or angle iron with rod hangers.

.16 Secure all conduits in place with conduit clamps T & B or equal. Perforated pipe straps, wire lashings, wood screws or nails are not acceptable.

.17 Provide conduit expansion joints where conduits cross building expansion joints, also in straight runs of conduit 30 m (100') or longer. Conduit expansion joints shall be telescoping sleeve type, with insulated bushings and ground jumper.

.18 Make field bends and offsets uniform and symmetrical without flattening conduit. Minimum bending radius shall be ten (10) times the conduit diameter.

.19 Ream conduit ends to remove burrs and sharp edges. Fit conduit stubs with waterproof plastic caps during installation to protect threads and to prevent entrance of moisture into conduit.

.20 Test all conduits for clear bore using ball mandrel, brushes and snake. Clear any conduit which rejects the ball mandrel. Replace if necessary. Bear all costs involved in making all work good, restoring all surfaces to original condition.

.21 Install a continuous nylon cord 180 kg (400 lb) test in each conduit left empty.


JAL No. 14-194

.22 Install a copper ground conductor within the flexible conduit at each connection.

.23 Provide conduit seals in conduits which pass to the outside.

.24 Provide pull boxes, fittings or junction boxes in conduit runs, on the basis of not more than two (2) right angle bends or their equivalent or not more than 30 m (100'), in straight runs between boxes. For outdoor direct buried conduit, up to 50m.

.25 Size conduits to code requirements, provide larger sizes where noted.

.26 Size conduits for low voltage wiring to manufacturer's recommendations.

.27 Provide conduit sealing fittings and correspond for hazardous application to Electrical Safety code requirements.

.28 Maximum conduit size permitted in a concrete slab shall be 35 mm. In any case verify with Structural Consultant for acceptability.

.29 Where multi-conduits parallel run and/or crossover in concrete slab/wall, verify with Structural Consultant for acceptability.

.4 Install raceways system complete with appropriate fittings such as connectors, bushings, elbows, couplings, locknuts, expansion fittings, fasteners and supports and accessories supplied as integral parts of assembly, as specified. Installation shall comply with Regulatory Authorities requirements.

.5 Neatly install exposed raceway running parallel to and at right angles to building lines and equally spaced in groups.

.6 Keep raceway ends parallel and on proper spacing to suit knockouts or raceway openings in equipment or enclosure.

.7 Keep raceways at least 150 mm clear of heating pipes, flues and hot item surfaces. Where required clearance cannot be provided, obtain written approval from engineer to alter layout or to reduce clearance.

.8 Provide expansion couplings, with bonding jumper and ground clamps where raceways cross building control joints.

.9 Use only metallic, enclosed raceway on installation that required shielding of electrical cables or where installed in ceiling used as return air plenum, as specified or indicated on Drawings.

.10 Raceways shall have established positive low resistance paths to ground and effectively isolate conductors so that any short-circuit arc is confined.

.11 Select appropriate fittings, such as grounding bushings, bonding and grounding straps, to maintain continuity and effectiveness of grounding of raceway system.

.12 Provide necessary fasteners and supports acceptable for type and size of raceways, to ensure rigid, complete assembly.

.13 Provide suitable inserts or expansion type machine bolts for fastening raceways, fittings, boxes and equipment to concrete surfaces.

.14 Do not use wood screws, lag screws, expansion shields, rawl plugs and nylon inserts.


JAL No. 14-194

.15 Secure raceway and other associate work to structure members. Raceway shall not be supported from ceiling suspension system.

.16 Thoroughly clean raceway and dry clear obstructions before pulling cable or wire.

.17 Minimum raceway size: 16mm (1/2”) conduit equivalent system.

.18 Cable tray

.1 Manufacturer The cable tray system specified herein shall be the SpecMate Center Spine

Cable Tray System as manufactured by The Wiremold Company. Acceptable Alternate: Canadian Electrical Raceways

.2 Materials The tray shall be constructed of 6063 T6 aluminum alloy and shall utilize a

center spine with center lines to indicate all areas where after field cutting of tray, new holes need to be drilled or screws inserted. The standard 4" [102 mm] deep bottom rung tray in which the spine acts to separate the cable compartments, shall offer a full 4" [102 mm] wall separating each compartment. The rung spacing shall be min. 12” (305 mm) and the width shall be 12” (305 mm).

.3 Construction The Cable tray shall be constructed to form open and accessible

compartments to hold the necessary cables which will also enable full viewing of same. The tray shall be center hung allowing cable lay in where applicable.

The tray shall be constructed with two components, (1) the center spine and

(2) the rung. The spine is a single aluminum extrusion containing two hollows. The upper or vertical hollow provides surfaces to mount the splice connector & hanger rod. The lower or horizontal hollow has wings extending left and right which provide extra support for the rungs. The rungs shall have a 1" [25mm] cable laying surface and be placed horizontally along the spine on 12" [305mm] centers. The end of the rungs shall be bent upward to a height of 4" [102mm] forming a 90 degree angle, creating a cable laying area between the spine and the vertical portion of the rung. The rung shall be designed with a center screw groove along its length to provide a direct connection for rung mounted accessories. The ends of all rungs shall be fitted with a plastic cap to prevent damage to the cable and injury to the installer.

The rungs shall be field removable and replaceable, enabling the avoidance

of obstructions during installation and easy restructuring of the system should future alterations become necessary. The interchangeable rungs shall offer future expansion of the tray capacity without removal of cables or the existing spine.


JAL No. 14-194

The tray must offer an open view of the cables and be free of side rails.

.4 Fittings A full complement of fittings for the cable tray shall be available including,

but not limited to, 45 and 90 degree flat, vertical inside and outside elbows, tee and cross fittings, couplings for joining sections of the tray, hangers, end blanks, a field-installed divider and all other components necessary to make the system workable. The fittings and accessories shall be of compatible material.

2.4 OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES .1 Comply with the requirements of latest edition of the followings:

.1 CSA Standard C22.2 No.18, Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.

.2 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 85, Rigid PVC Boxes and Fittings.

.2 Outlet and conduit boxes - general

.1 Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.

.2 102mm square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices.

.3 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.

.4 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.

.5 347V outlet boxes for 347V switching devices.

.6 Combination ganged boxes with appropriate steel removable barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.

.7 Where standard make boxes are not suitable, provide boxes of special design to fit space and other requirements.

.8 Where vapour proof lighting is specified, provide matching vapour proof ceiling or wall junction boxes and fittings as required.

.3 Sheet steel outlet boxes

.1 Electro-galvanized steel single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38mm or as indicated. 102mm square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required.

.2 Electro-galvanized steel utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size 102 x 54 x 48mm.

.3 102mm square or octagonal outlet boxes complete with steel fixture studs where supporting lighting fixtures. Die cast fittings not permitted.

.4 102mm square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for lush mounting devices in finished plaster or tile walls.

.4 Masonry boxes

.1 Electro-galvanized stamped steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for devices flush mounted in exposed block walls, minimum size 95x 50 x 64mm standard and 102 x 57 x 61mm for 347V.

.5 Concrete boxes

.1 Electro-galvanized stamped steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required.


JAL No. 14-194

.6 Conduit boxes

.1 Cast FS or FD aluminium, or feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of switches and receptacles.

.2 PVC FS or FD boxes or PVC conduit where required in special corrosive areas as indicated on Drawing.

.7 Floor boxes

.1 Floor boxes shall be recessed type, Wiremold RFB series or approved equal. Provide all necessary accessories to suit application.

.2 Concrete tight electro-galvanized sheet steel floor boxes with adjustable finishing rings to suit floor finish with brushed aluminum faceplate. Device mounting plate to accommodate short or long ear receptacles. Minimum depth: 28mm for receptacles; 73mm for communication equipment.

.3 Round (Floor Mount): 84mm x 63mm deep minimum complete with side and bottom knock-outs.

.4 Rectangular: one, two, or three gang flush device floor boxes minimum size 110 x 81 x 70mm removable barriers for power/low voltage cables, complete with side and bottom knockouts.

.5 Multi-Outlet: Electro-galvanized tamped steel concrete type, combination power / communication, flush mounting complete with modular device plates, side and bottom knockouts, lift-up cast aluminium recessed cover and cable lid, black epoxy powder finished 229x257x76mm deep, or 64mm deep.

.6 Adjustable, watertight, concrete tight, cast floor boxes with openings drilled and tapped for 16mm and 21mm conduit.

.7 Raised Access Floor Boxes

.1 Electro-galvanized steel, combination power and communication. Flush in raised floor tile complete with lift-up cast aluminium recessed cover cand cable lid. Modular device plates, 254m flexible armoured dable and plug for power

.2 Dimensions: 203 x 152 x 114mm.

.8 Fittings - general

.1 Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.

.2 Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.

.3 Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35mm and pull boxes for larger conduits.

.4 Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.

.9 Installation

.1 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.

.2 Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work.

.3 For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come with 6 mm of opening.

.4 Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Reducing washer are not allowed.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 Size and install appropriate boxes and enclosures in accordance with applicable section(s) of Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code and manufacturer’s recommended procedures.

.6 Co-ordinate location and installation of boxes so as to be accessible and clear from building system equipment, etc.

.7 Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.

.8 Use pull boxes for conduits larger than 35mm. Use conduit outlet bodies for conduit 35mm.

.9 Provide approved hole plugs in unused conduit knockouts and openings.

.10 Furnish boxes and enclosures with corrosion resistant machine screws.

.11 Boxes and enclosures embedded in concrete for flush-mounting, shall be secured properly with connecting conduits and related works set in place before concrete is poured. Forms, when used, shall be able to be removed without disturbing installed boxes or enclosures.

.12 Ensure junction and outlet boxes mounted in ceiling cavities do not interfere with removal of ceiling tiles..

.13 Use masonry boxes for flush mounting in exposed block walls, concrete boxes for flush mounting in concrete wall.

.14 Furnish conduit boxes with neoprene gaskets for outdoor area or hazardous area application.

.15 Install all wall boxes for door security access devices, fire alarm devices, etc., adjacent to lock side of door openings unless otherwise shown. Check door swing before installing any switch.

.16 Install all boxes in walls so that tapped holes for mounting wiring devices or fixtures will be aligned vertically or horizontally, as required. Where boxes are grouped at one location with common and varying mounting heights, align boxes horizontally and vertically from centre line unless otherwise indicated.

.17 Offset outlet boxes in sound attenuating partitions to avoid undue transmission of sound between the partition elements. Use flexible conduit connections where wiring is required between outlet boxes on opposite sides of partition.

.18 Offset outlet boxes where installed on either side of a fire separation.

.19 Where steel supports are required for outlet boxes, wood supports are not acceptable.

.20 Maintain integrity of vapour barriers along building perimeter wall where flush outlet boxes are required.

2.5 CONTACTORS .1 Conform with the requirements of latest edition of CSA C22.2, No. 14 – Industrial

Control Equipment.

.2 Provide enclosed lighting contactors for all lighting control and other non-motor loads. The contactors shall be fully rated and withstand the large initial in-rush currents of lamps without contact welding.

.3 Contactors shall be NEMA rated, magnetic, electrically held, complete with suitable type enclosure and 120V coil.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 Accessories

.1 Pilot lights (ON/OFF).

.2 On/Off/Auto selector switch.

.3 Auxiliary contacts (NO and NC) and relays to match control function.

.4 Control circuit fuse holders and fuses.

.5 Control transformers in each 347/600V enclosed contactor. Transformer shall be 120V secondary and furnished with primary and secondary fuses. Bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.

.5 Manufacturers:

.1 Cutler-Hammer

.2 Schneider

.3 Siemens

.6 Mount contactors at 1500 mm AFF to operating handle/pushbutton.

2.6 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS .1 All access panels and doors to be Milcor or Bel, 12 gauge with concealed hinges.

.2 In glazed tile walls provide #304 alloy stainless steel with #4 finish recessed frame and secured with stainless steel countersunk flush head screws.

.3 In plaster surfaces provide dished steel door for plaster finish with welded metal lath and plastic grommet for keyhole.

.4 In other finishes use plain steel door with lock and anchor straps, complete with factory prime coat.

.5 In lay-in ceilings, tiles properly marked may serve as access panels.

.6 Provide the appropriate Division of Work with panels and doors, complete with frames and all pertinent information for installation. Arrange and pay for that Division to install them. Ensure that all panels and doors are flush mounted and properly aligned with building modules and grids. Indicate locations on record drawings.

.7 Select all access panels and doors to provide adequate access, and to suit appropriate architectural finish, minimum size 150 mm x 150 mm (6" x 6"). Where necessary for persons to enter, provide minimum 600 mm x 450 mm (24" x 18") size doors.

2.7 SPRINKLER PROOF EQUIPMENT .1 Provide all equipment in sprinklered areas with accessories to prevent the entry of

water into the enclosures in the event that the sprinkler system is activated.

.2 Materials

.1 CSA enclosure type 2.

.2 Louvres facing outward and downward where openings are required for heat dissipation. Expanded metal screening is not acceptable.

.3 CSA certified sealing rings for rigid steel galvanized conduit and CSA certified raintight connectors for steel galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or other raceways as required.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Provide seal rings and raintight connectors on all conduit terminations entering the top or side of all enclosures and for all conduit terminations for pull boxes, junction boxes, splitter troughs, wireways, auxiliary gutters, cable troughs and disconnect switches installed below the level of the sprinkler heads.

.4 Refer to Mechanical Drawings for extent of sprinklered areas.

2.8 BACKBOARDS .1 Provide backboards for all surface mounted power distribution equipment. Provide

backboards for telecommunication systems as indicated.

.2 Backboards shall be minimum 0.76” (19mm) thick, good one (1) side fire retardant plywood backboards, pressure impregnated with fire retardant chemicals, and stamp. Conform to CSA 080.

.3 Construct each backboard in a rectangular shape of the size as indicated. Where no size is indicated, provide a backboard a minimum 4” (100mm) higher than the equipment. Where more than one (1) piece of equipment is installed on the backboard, construct the backboard of a size to suit the maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions of the equipment. Backboards for Telecommunication system shall be minimum 4” (W) x 8” (H).

.4 Finish each backboard with one (1) coat of primer followed by a minimum of one (1) finish coat of ASA 61 grey paint prior to installing any equipment.

.5 Fastenings:

.1 Fasten each backboard to a wall or to a support structure using cadmium plated hardware. Provide a flat washer under the head of each fastener. Recess the head of the mounting bolt where equipment, including future equipment, is to be installed.

.2 Use expansion shields, toggle bolts or other types of wall fastenings to suit the wall type. Align the mounting bolts with the wall studs for stud type walls.

.3 Install fastenings a maximum 20” (500mm) apart in both the vertical and horizontal directions.

.4 When installing equipment heavier than 50kg, fasten the equipment through the backboard directly to the wall or support structure.

2.9 METALS .1 Metal construction required for the electrical work shown on the structural drawings

will be carried out by Division 5.

.2 Provide all other electrical work such as, but not limited to, equipment bases, supports, catwalks, framework to support checker plates and electrical equipment above trenches and cable pits, ladders, etc. pit and trench covers, and as called for on the Electrical Drawings. Have such work carried out in accordance with the requirements of Division 5.

2.10 SLEEVES AND CURBS .1 Provide conduit sleeves of galvanized steel for conduit and cable runs passing

through concrete walls, beams, slabs and floor. Cut flush with finished surface.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Extend galvanized conduit sleeves for conduit rising through slabs 4" minimum above finished floors.

.3 Through exterior walls below grade waterproofed floors, and other waterproof walls use heavy weight cast iron pipes machine cut. Extend sleeves 100 mm (4") above finished floors, and cut flush with underside of floor.

.4 For rectangular duct openings for bus ducts and cable tray use minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel sleeves or provide a removable wood box-out of the required size. Brace sleeves to retain their position and shape during the pouring of concrete and other work.

.5 Seal sleeves and openings to maintain fire rating. Use Dow-Corning #3-6548 `Silicone RTV' foam, Thomas & Betts `Flamesafe' firestop system, installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.

.6 Seal all openings and sleeves after installation of equipment:

.1 With an approved material to maintain fire rating where sleeves and openings pass through fire separations and floors.

.2 With an approved material to maintain fire rating for sleeves and openings provided for future equipment.

.7 Size sleeves to provide 13 mm (1/2") clearance all around.

.8 Provide all flashing and waterproofing for sleeves through roof and exterior walls to the requirements of Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

.9 Except where furred in provide watertight concrete curbs, 100 mm (4") high by 100 mm (4") wide with 19 mm (3/4") chamfered edges around all sleeves and openings passing through waterproof floors.

2.11 SUPPORTS AND BASES .1 Submit proposed method of attachment of hangers and beam clamps, to cellular

steel deck for approval before proceeding with Work.

.2 Supply and erect special structural Work required for the installation of electrical equipment. Provide anchor bolts and other fastenings unless noted otherwise. Mount equipment required to be suspended above floor level, where details are not shown, on a frame or platform bracketed from the wall or suspended from the ceiling. Carry supports to either the ceiling or the floor, or both as required, at locations where, because wall thickness is inadequate, it is not permitted to use such brackets.

.3 Electrical panels, switches or other electrical equipment shall be complete with suitable bases or mounting brackets.

.4 Provide channel or other metal supports where necessary, to adequately support lighting fixtures. Do not use wood unless wood forms part of the building structure.

.5 Secure supports, in general to structure, from inserts in concrete construction or from building structural steel beams, using beam clamps. Provide additional angle or channel steel members, required between beams for supporting conduits and cables.


JAL No. 14-194

.6 Provide any additional supports required from existing concrete construction for any piping or equipment, by drilling same and installing expansion bolt cinch anchors.

.7 Do not use explosive drive pins in any section of Work without obtaining prior approval.

.8 Hangers for electrical conduit shall be galvanized after fabrication. Conduit hangers shall be as manufactured by:

Burndy Canada Ltd. Canadian Strut Products Ltd. E. Myatt & Co. Ltd. Steel City Electric Co. Pilgrim Thomas & Betts B-line

.9 Do not use, perforated strapping (grappler bars).

.10 Steel supports in wet or dry locations to be galvanized after fabrication.

.11 Provide concrete housekeeping pads or bases for all floor mounted equipment 100 mm (4") high with 19 mm (3/4") chamfered edges, keyed to the floor slab and extending at least 100 mm (4") on all sides of the equipment. Where drawout truck type circuit breakers are provided extend pad to accommodate complete withdrawal of breaker. Provide and set all anchor bolts.

.12 Use only factory made threaded or toggle type insert.

.13 Place inserts only in structural members and not in the finishing material.

.14 Provide bus ducts, cable trays, and wireways with fire barriers at each floor level and fire separation.

.15 Provide locations and dimensions for all pads and curbs and provide and set all anchor bolts for all concrete work provided under Division 3, Concrete.

2.12 HAND DRYER .1 Hand-dryers shall be touch-to-start, recessed type to mounting height as directed by

Architect on site. Nova 5, No. 0112, 1800 watt, 120 volt, white enamel finish. Bobrick is approved alternate.

2.13 SPARE PARTS .1 Furnish spare parts and maintenance materials as recommended by the equipment

manufacturer and as appropriate for a period of two (2) years after acceptance of the Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NEUTRALS AND PHASING .1 Provide one (1) identified grounded neutral conductor for each set of branch circuits

connected to different mains of each panel.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 For circuits identified as computer dedicated (D) or isolated ground (IG), provide individual neutral per identified circuit.

.3 Install a separate neutral for each GFCI circuit when the GFCI is located at the panelboard.

.4 Connect two or three (2 or 3) circuits sharing a common neutral to different mains or phases.

.5 Balance the connected loads across the mains of each panel to within 15%.

.6 Circuit numbers on the panels must correspond to the numbers on the Drawings.

.7 Connections in all equipment to be Phase A, B and C from left to right, and front to back when viewing from the front or accessible direction.

3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS .1 Mounting heights are from floor level to centre line of device outlet, unless noted

otherwise. Confirm all locations before installation. In all areas accessible to persons in wheelchairs , the mounting heights of all switches, thermostats, intercom switches, pull stations, etc., required by Building Code “Barrier Free” shall comply with Code requirements.

.2 The mounting heights of all power and lighting devices shall comply with Ontario Electrical Safety Code requirements. The mounting heights of all fire alarm devices shall comply with CSA requirements.

.3 If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation.

.4 Install electrical equipment at following heights (centre of device) unless indicated otherwise.

.1 Wall switches, dimmers, timers, speed controllers, speaker volume controllers, thermostats and hand dryers: 1200 mm.

.2 Wall receptacles: General: 350 mm. Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 250 mm. Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 250 mm. In mechanical rooms: 1200 mm. (gang with switch)

.3 Panelboards: as required by Code or as indicated.

.4 Telephone, TV and data outlets: 350 mm.

.5 Wall mounted Interphone outlets: 1200 mm.

.6 Door bell pushbuttons and door open push buttons: 1200 mm.

.7 Security key switches, card readers and intercom switches: 1200 mm.

.8 Security wall-mounted motion sensor: 2300 mm.

.9 .5 Install all fire alarm equipment/devices in accordance with CAN/ULC-S524

“Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems” latest edition, the manufacturer's instructions, Ontario Building Code, Underwriter's Laboratory of Canada, Electrical Safety Code, these Documents and requirements of Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.


JAL No. 14-194

3.3 WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT .1 Co-ordinate all the work with Mechanical Division. The locations of starters, motors

and associated equipment indicated on the drawings are approximate and diagrammatic only. Co-ordinate with the work of the Mechanical Division Mechanical Trade Sections to ensure proper location of equipment. The exact locations of conduit terminations at Mechanical units shall be determined from equipment manufactures' approved shop drawings. Conduits must be installed to enter only in the locations designated by equipment manufactures.

.2 Provide all electric baseboard heaters, cabinet heaters, force flow unit heaters and heating cables. Mechanical Division shall provide electric duct heaters.

.3 Provide safety disconnect switches required at motors by OESC whether shown on the drawings or not. Provide power wires and connections to all mechanical equipment.

.4 All the motor starters/controllers, and/or line voltage thermostats shall be supplied by Mechanical Division and installed by Division 26. Division 26 shall provide safety disconnect switches and power connections to the motors. Mechanical Division shall provide all the control wiring, control devices and low voltage thermostats.

.5 Where motor starters, switches and the like, are grouped together, provide suitable plywood backboard to which all such equipment shall be secured.

.6 Where the single-phase exhaust fan shall be controlled by manual switch, Division 26 shall provide power connections to the fan, heavy-duty toggle control switch and provide the safety disconnect means.

.7 Wiring and connections from fire alarm system to motor starters/control panels for motor control operations. Co-ordinate with Mechanical Division.

.8 Where applicable, power supplies to MCC. Mechanical Division will provide MCC, main lugs, power supplies and controls to motors.

.9 Fire alarm signals to starters / control panels and MCC.

3.4 SERVICES TO EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY OWNER / OTHER DIVISIONS .1 Provide all necessary connections required for equipment supplied by the Owner

and other Divisions. Examine all Drawings and Specifications and identify all requirements.

.2 Verify the type, rating and location of all outlets and/or connections required for all equipment provided by the Owner and other Divisions.

.3 Provide isolation devices as required to the equipment for all services.

3.5 PROVISION FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION .1 Spaces designated for future equipment or building expansion shall be left clear.

.2 Provide services for future extensions complete with Products necessary for present termination and to permit future extension.

.3 Identify each service by a permanent marker at its termination point.


JAL No. 14-194

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 Provide all cutting and patching required for the Work of Division 26. Work shall be

carried out in conformance with the requirements of Division 2. Include any radiography required to locate concealed services before penetrating into inaccessible locations.

.2 Any modifications to building shall be done so as not to diminish structural, fire resistance, or smoke barrier integrity.

.3 Proposed modifications to structure shall require acceptance by the Structural Engineer.

.4 Consultant shall be afforded the opportunity to review the intent prior to any major cutting.

3.7 PAINTING .1 Provide all exposed ferrous metal work, and Products, except conduit, with at least

one (1) factory prime coat or paint one prime coat on site. Clean up or wire brush all equipment before painting. Unless otherwise noted finish painting will be done under Division 9, Finishes of these Specifications.

.2 If not factory coated, clean, wire brush and paint all ferrous supports and hangers concealed in ceiling spaces of kitchens or other similar high humidity areas. Do not paint galvanized supports and hangers.

.3 Repaint or refinish all damaged factory applied finishes.

.4 Provide oil base red oxide primer applied as per manufacturer's recommendations.

3.8 VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL .1 Spring type vibration isolations shall be complete with horizontal spring constant

(kH) to vertical (kV) ratio between one and two to assure stability. Select springs to operate no greater than 2/3 solid deflection. For indoor mounting use springs with one (1) coat of zinc chromate primer and two (2) coats of paint. For outdoor mounting use springs of neoprene coated steel or stainless steel. All spring housings to be hot dipped galvanized. Where the spring assembly is bolted to the floor provide vibration isolation washers and pads to reduce transmission of vibration.

.2 Pad type isolators shall be rubber for indoor application, neoprene for oil filled devices and for outdoor use. Use 30 durometer rubber and 50 durometer neoprene. Select pad type isolators which do not exceed the mid-point of their recommended operating rate with maximum deflection of 20% of thickness. Use minimum 6 mm (1/4") thick pads under spring assemblies.

.3 Provide spring type vibration isolators for IC engine driven equipment. Raise equipment to operating height, levelled with blocks and shims so that connections can be made to a rigid system at operating level before isolator adjustments.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 For power class transformers provide spring or pad type isolators in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where dry type transformers are contained within unit substation enclosures mount the core and coils to the structural framing of the unit substation. Locate isolators between core and coil frame and unit substation structural frame.

.5 Provide pad type isolators for all floor mounted dry type distribution transformers. Locate isolators between transformer enclosure and floor.

.6 Where transformers are platform mounted from structure above provide spring hangers with levelling devices and sound pads in all supports.

.7 Make connections to rotating, vibrating, magnetic or other noise producing equipment such as motors, transformers, and between independent structure by means of loop flexible conduits.

.8 If objectionable noise or vibration should be transmitted to occupied portions of the building by any part of the electrical work, make necessary changes and/or additions, to the Consultant's approval, without addition to the contract price.

3.9 CONCRETE .1 Concrete work shown on the structural drawings will be done as part of Division 3,

Concrete of these Specifications.

.2 Provide all other concrete work necessary for the Work of this Division. Have such work carried out in accordance with Division 3, Concrete of these Specifications.

3.10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING .1 Before commencement of excavation of the Work, determine with the Consultant,

the municipalities and utilities, the presence of existing underground services at the site and verify satisfactory condition. Locate such services and mark out same. Ensure that all trades concerned are aware of their presence.

.2 Do all excavation and backfilling up to grade required for the electrical work inside and outside of building. Check available soil test reports. Obtain instructions of the Consultant regarding the type of soils and their extent.

.3 Carry out all trench excavation in strict conformity with all applicable acts and bylaws.

.4 Excavate to the required depth and width. Backfill excess excavation.

.5 For direct buried cable in all soil conditions excavate to 150 mm (6") below and a minimum of 200 mm (8") to either side of the cable run. Fill back with a bedding of granular 'A' gravel or sand.

.6 Provide ducts under roads and paved areas.

.7 Refer to details and to Utility Company requirements for concrete encased duct installations.

.8 Where excavation is necessary in proximity to and below the level of any footing, provide a sleeve at the proximity and backfill with 14,000 kPa (2,000 psi) concrete to the level of the highest adjacent footing. Proximity is determined by the angle of repose as established by the Consultant.


JAL No. 14-194

.9 Protect the bottom of excavations against flooding and freezing. Use pumping or other means to keep bottom dry. Do not open more than weather will permit. Have excavations inspected at least once a week by authorities. Break up rocks and boulders and remove these by drilling and wedging. Do not use blasting unless approved in writing by the Consultant.

.10 Compact all backfill to a density of 95% Modified Proctor. Before backfilling, obtain approval. Remove all shoring during backfilling. Obtain approval for all compaction machines used.

.11 Backfill trenches within building, with clean sharp sand in individual layers of maximum 150 mm (6") thickness. Manually compact the first layers up to a compacted level of 300 mm (12”). Machine compact the balance up to grade, using approved equipment.

.12 Backfill trenches outside buildings, not under roads, parking lots, or traffic areas, manually compact up to a compacted level of 450 mm (18") above the cable or duct bank with individual layers of material up to 150 mm (6") thick, using sand or granular 'A' gravel. Machine compact the balance up to grade with 150 mm (6") layers of approved excavated material.

.13 Backfill all other trenches outside buildings with granular 'A' gravel in layers not exceeding 150 mm (6") thickness, up to grade level; manually compact up to 450 mm (18"), machine compact the balance.

.14 Do not use water for consolidation or during compaction of backfill, unless approved in writing by the Consultant.

.15 After a period has passed adequate to reveal any settlement fill all depressions to correct grade level with appropriate material, machine compacted. Pay all costs required to make good all damage caused by settlement.

.16 Store and dispose of excavated materials as follows:

.1 During the progress of the contract place the material as directed in such a manner that a minimum of damage or disfigurement of the existing ground will result and the material will not in any way impede the progress of the work. Dispose of surplus material as directed by the Consultant.

.2 Place surplus topsoil separately from subsoil. Leave the site clear and unencumbered.

.3 Protect, brace, support as required existing pipes, ducts, cables, etc. encountered in the work. Do not disturb or interrupt the operation of any services without written approval from the Consultant.

3.11 CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT BANKS .1 Provide PVC duct runs consisting of parallel ducts encased in concrete as indicated

on drawings.

.2 Ducts and concrete encasement for Power Supply Authority service cables shall conform with their standards and requirements.

.3 Place and set all ducts and accessories and supervise to ensure integrity of complete installation.


JAL No. 14-194

.4 Conform with the requirements of the latest editions of CSA 22.2 No. 211.1, Rigid Types EB1 and DB2/ES2 PVC Conduit.

.5 Join ducts together with an approved coupling to provide a sound and watertight joint. Stagger joints in adjacent ducts by not less than 200 mm (8"). Where PVC and bell fittings are used make connections to duct with an approved PVC solvent.

.6 Install ducts with spacing of not less than 190 mm centre to centre both horizontally and vertically. Use only plastic or masonry spacers. Provide two (2) spacers minimum per 3000 mm (120") length of duct.

.7 Grade ducts not less than 75 mm (3") per 30 m (100') for drainage and provide drainage facilities as detailed.

.8 Encase ducts with 3000 pound concrete with a minimum cover of 75 mm (3") on all sides using pea gravel aggregate. Work concrete below and between ducts to product a homogeneous mass. Provide reinforcing steel. Anchor all ducts in place in such a manner as to ensure that there is no movement during the placing of concrete.

.9 Immediately after concrete has been placed test each duct with a mandrel not less than 300 mm (12") long and having a diameter 7 mm (1/4") less than the diameter of the duct. After all obstructions have been cleared pull a stiff bristle brush through each duct to remove all sand and other foreign material. Install a 225 kilogram (500 lb) test rope or other equivalent non-metallic cord in each duct and seal all ends with standard plastic duct plugs.

.10 Provide end bell fittings at duct bank finished end face.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 14 00 Page 1 WIRING DEVICES DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Provide all switches, receptacles, wiring devices, coverplates as required to complete the installation.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the following:

.1 CSA-C22.2 No.42, General Use Receptacles, Attachment Plugs and Similar Wiring Devices.

.2 CSA-C22.2 No.42.1, Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices.

.3 CSA-C22.2 No.55, Special Use Switches.

.4 CSA-C22.2 No.111, General-Use Snap Switches.

.5 CSA-C22.2 No. 144, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 26 01 00 –

Electrical General Requirements.

1.4 MANUFACTURER .2 Wiring devices shall be manufactured by 1) Hubbell; 2) Pass & Seymour; 3) Bryant.

Catalogue numbers are referred below to indicate quality standard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SWITCHES .1 Switches shall be with following features:

.1 White decorative type.

.1 Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire.

.2 Silver alloy contacts.

.3 Urea or melamine moulding for parts subject to carbon tracking.

.4 Suitable for back and side wiring.

.5 Fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps.

.2 Switches for 120 Volt lighting circuits

.1 Hubbell RSD115W, RSD315W and RSD415W, 15 ampere for single pole, three-way and four-way switching as required for the application.

.3 Switches for motor or other control applications shall be horsepower rated, Hubbell, HBL7832D and HBL7810D 30Ampere for double-pole and three-pole for one application.


JAL No. 14-194

2.2 RECEPTACLES .1 Receptacles shall be with following features:

.1 White decorative type, urea moulded housing.

.2 Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring.

.3 Break off links for use as split receptables.

.4 Eight back wired entrances, four side wiring screws.

.5 Triple wipe contacts and riveted grounding contacts.

.6 Impact-resistant nylon face.

.7 U-ground.

.8 GFCI receptacles shall meet UL 943 requirements and be complete with test and reset buttons, and LED indication light.

.2 Duplex receptacle, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, RRD15W (CSA 5-15R).

.3 Duplex receptacle, 20 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, our, Hubbell, HBL2162W (CSA 5-20RA).

.4 GFCI duplex receptacle, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, GF15WL (CSA 5-15R).

.5 GFCI duplex receptacle, 20 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, GF20WL (CSA 5-20RA).

.6 Isolated ground receptacle, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, IG2152 (CSA 5-15R).

.7 Single 30 amp, 120/208 volt, 2 phases, 3pole, 4 wire, Hubbell, RR430WIP (CSA 14-30R).

.8 Single 50 amp, 120/208 volt and 120/240 volt, 2 phases, 3 pole, 4 wire, Hubbell, RR450WIP (CSA 14-50R).

.9 TVSS duplex receptacle, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, HBL5260WSA (CSA5-15R).

.10 Tamper-resistant duplex receptacle, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Pass & Seymour TR62 (CSA5-15R).

2.3 COVER PLATES .1 Decorative type, white thermoset plastic, complete with matching screw.

.2 Weatherproof covers shall be while-in-use type polycarbonate body, cover and plates, conform to NEMA3R. Hubbell # WP826MP.

.3 Sheet metal cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes.

.4 Water-tight hinged cover suitable for floor box for ganged receptacles, data/telephone outlets, finish to Architect’s directions.


JAL No. 14-194

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch closed.

.2 Install devices in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is required in one location. When supplied from different voltages or power sources, provide metal barriers in the ganged box.

.3 Clean debris from outlet boxes.

.4 Install devices plumb and level.

.5 Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

.6 Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

.7 Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

.8 Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

.9 Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 23 00 Page 1 EXISTING POWER GENERATOR RELOCATE DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

.1 This section of specification is an integral part of the contract documents and

shall be read accordingly. .2 Comply with general conditions, supplementary conditions of the contract, and

section 260100 – Electrical General Requirements.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Provide a complete and operable Standby Bi-Fuel electric generating system, including all devices and equipment specified herein, as shown on the drawings, or required for the service.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section of Electrical General

Requirements. .2 TRCA is moving and intend to re-use their existing generator located at 5

Shoreham Drive, Vaughan and re-locate it to their new site at 101 Exchange Avenue, Vaughan. This scope of work describes the actions required to bring the existing 2005 generator up to current code requirements.

.3 Work to be carried out at 5 Shoreham Drive:\ .1 Mechanical contractor to disconnect existing gas supply to generator and

make safe in accordance with CSA-B149.1-10. .2 Mechanical contractor to have existing diesel fuel in existing sub-base

tank pumped out and have the drained tank purged of all residue and certified safe for transportation as per Transport Canada regulations.

.3 Electrical contractor to disconnect incoming electrical feeds from normal supply to generator services (block heater, battery charger, etc.) & terminate in a safe manner in accordance with Ontario Electrical Code.

.4 Electrical contractor to disconnect electrical power feeds from generator to transfer switch & terminate in a safe manner in accordance with Ontario Electrical Code.

.5 Crane generator set c/w enclosure and emptied sub-base tank from existing concrete pad and load onto flatbed truck. & remove generator set c/w enclosure & tank

.4 Work to be carried out at 101 Exchange Avenue:

.1 Electrical Contractor to install the generator set on new concrete pad (to

be provided by the General Contractor). Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with General Contractor and proceed accordingly.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Transport existing generator from 5 Shoreham Drive to new site at 101 Exchange Avenue, crane off generator from flatbed truck to new concrete pad. Secure sub-base fuel tank to concrete base in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

.3 Paramount Power Systems Ltd (Generator / Tank manufacturer) to modify existing fuel tank to comply with CSA-B139ON-06 fuel code. At a minimum, the modifications shall include: .1 Fill pipe – modify fill piping to bring fill point to generator exterior

c/w ULC approved fill spill box c/w lockable cap at a minimum of 1m above grade.

.2 Normal vent – modify vent piping to bring normal vent to generator exterior at a minimum of 150mm above fill point. Ensure vent is fitted with approved vent whistle to facilitate re-fuelling of sub-base tank.

.3 Emergency blow-off vent – modify vent piping to bring emergency vent to generator exterior at a minimum of 150mm above fill point.

.4 Low fuel level switch - verify low fuel level switch & indicators are in proper working order, and repair or replace as necessary.

.5 Supply & install new remote annunciator panel c/w wiring to be located at reception. (wiring TBA)

.6 Remove dislodged foam insulation within intake hood.

.7 Re-mount battery charger c/w new neoprene vibration isolators and brackets as necessary.

.4 Electrical contractor to wire and connect individually protected power feeds for 2000W-208V block heater, 15A-120V battery charger.

.5 Generator manufacturer to supply new TTI EAP-110 remote annunciator panel. Electrical contractor to install at location shown on plans and provide wiring from generator control panel to remote annunciator in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Approved cable manufacturer: Belden Cable.

.6 Electrical contract to provide new gas supply piping from main station to generator c/w and separate shutoff valve to supply 2,000,000 BTUH of gas at 5psi pressure. Provide new regulator within 2m of generator enclosure along with any other necessary equipment in accordance with CSA-B149 codes.

.7 Mechanical contractor to fill fuel tank with diesel fuel to normal top limit.

.5 Project Automatic Transfer Switch: .1 Relocate existing transfer switch at to 5 Shoreham Drive to new location

at 101 Exchange Avenue. .2 Electrical contractor to mount the transfer switch in location shown on

plans. .3 Electrical contractor to supply and install new power wiring from generator

breaker to emergency side of transfer switch. .4 Electrical contractor to provide normal power supply wiring and load

wiring to transfer switch.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 Generator manufacturer to provide technician and resistive load bank to start-up and commission generator set. After verifying safeties are working, run generator on resistive load at full kilowatt rating for 4 hours, taking readings every 30 minutes. After full load test, run generator on available building load for 1 hour to verify operation of transfer switch including automatic start and stop of generator. Provide copy of report to engineer for review.

.6 Generator manufacturer to provide minimum 1 hour refresher training to site operating personnel at time of commissioning.

1.4 WARRANTY

.1 A no deductible warranty shall be provided for all products against defects in materials and workmanship for a two year period from the start-up date, per the manufacturer’s Extended Coverage Limited Warranty.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

.1 Provide a complete set of tools necessary for the maintenance of the generator

set. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box. .2 Submit a separate price for a maintenance contract to cover routine and major

overhaul operations. List maintenance requirements in relation to operating hours.

.3 Include labour, equipment, tools and any other special requirements in the cost

of the maintenance contract. 1.6 SPARE PARTS

.1 Submit an itemized price list of recommended spare parts required for routine

and minor overhauls for a minimum period of two (2) years. .2 Submit a separate price list for recommended spare parts required for one (1)

complete overhaul. PART 2 - PRODUCTS N/A

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Equipment shall be installed by the contractor in accordance with final submittals and contract documents. Installation shall comply with applicable state and local codes as required by the authority having jurisdiction. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and instructions included in the listing or labeling of UL listed products.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Installation of equipment shall include furnishing and installing all interconnecting

wiring between all major equipment provided for the on-site power system. The contractor shall also perform interconnecting wiring between equipment sections (when required), under the supervision of the equipment supplier.

.3 Equipment shall be permanently fastened to the concrete pad in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions and seismic requirements of the site. .4 Equipment shall be initially started and operated by representatives of the

manufacturer. .5 All equipment shall be physically inspected for damage. Scratches and other

installation damage shall be repaired prior to final system testing. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt and construction debris prior to initial operation and final testing of the system.

.6 Electrical Contractor will be responsible for carrying the cost of MOEE

Application for the Online registration. The proposed generator shall meet the current MOEE noise and emission requirements for the online registration. Price shall also allow for any professional services required by MOEE consultant for such process. Generator supplier is also responsible for TSSA approval.

3.2 INITIAL INSTALLATION PERFORMANCE TESTING

.1 The complete installation shall be used for compliance with the specification following completion of all site work. Testing shall be conducted by representatives of the manufacturer, with required fuel supplied by Contractor. The Engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the tests. Provide a resistive load bank and make temporary connections for full load test.

.2 After above tests have been successfully completed, the fuel tank shall be

completely filled at no cost to the Owner. 3.3 TRAINING

.1 The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program shall be not less than 4 hours in duration and the class size shall be limited to 5 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner.

3.4 SERVICE AND SUPPORT

.1 The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain service parts inventory at a

central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical replacement parts at the local service organization, and in service vehicles. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year.

.3 The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each

generator set provided for at least 20 years.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

.1 Provide commissioning by Third Party for the generator and A.T.S. Refer to item 1.23 Commissioning under Electrical General Requirements and Section 019100 for more information and comply accordingly.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 41 00 Page 1 GROUNDING DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 This section of specification is an integral part of the contract documents and

shall be read accordingly.

.2 Comply with general conditions, supplementary conditions of the contract, and section 26 01 00 – Electrical general requirements.

.3 Provide all grounding to comply with the Ontario Electrical Safety Code and the latest instructions of the Inspection Authority, with any further requirements as noted herein.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS .1 All grounding conductors stranded copper, bare or insulated as required.

.2 All grounding conductors stranded copper, bare or insulated as required.

.3 Use Cadweld process for all weld connections. Burndy and/or AMP of Canada Ltd. mechanical grounding connectors are an acceptable equivalent to welded connections.

.4 All ground connectors to be designed and approved for grounding purposes.

.5 Ground buses – 7 mm x 40 mm, 305 mm long or as required.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Provide ground busses in the main electrical room for use in bonding equipment

in the room. Ground the buses per Electrical Safety Code. Provide ground connections from buses to main low voltage switchboards and all exposed metal work. Provide ground connections to the main water supply pipe.

.2 Connect the ground bus inside the switchgear assembly to the grounding system.

.3 Inside main secondary switchboard, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus with conductor rated minimum 25% main bus rating.

.4 Connect the ground bus in each emergency distribution panel to the grounding system. Connect generator to the grounding system.

.5 Bond all interior non-electrical metallic piping systems to the electrical system ground including, but not limited to, water supply, waste water, and gas systems.

.6 Bond all conduit, and all non-current carrying metal parts, equipment cases, frames, bases, brackets, etc.


JAL No. 14-194

.7 Bond each piece of fixed equipment back to the switchboard or panel feeding that equipment, by one of the following methods:

.1 Where equipment is fed by a steel conduit, provided sizing is adequate, utilize conduit for the ground return conductor. At switchboard provide a grounding bushing, and strap such conduits to the ground bus (size per Code).

.2 Where the size of the conduit is inadequate (per Code), or if the conduit is flexible, install a separate insulated copper ground inside the conduit. At the switchboard or distribution panel, provide a grounding bushing, loop the ground conductor through the bushing, and connect to the switchboard ground bus. At the fixed equipment, connect to an internal ground bus, or connect to the inside of the metal enclosure utilizing approved screws and connectors (remove all paint).

.3 For branch circuits, the conduits may be used for grounding, provided seamless steel fittings are used on EMT and threaded fittings are used on rigid conduit. At each receptacle connect a stranded copper ground wire from the outlet box to the grounding terminal on the receptacle. Install a separate grounding conductor in all PVC conduits.

.4 Where equipment is fed by a multi-conductor power cable, provide a ground conductor in the cable. At the switchboard or panel, connect to the ground bus. Use a grounding connector on the cable for positive grounding of the metallic sheath. Loop the ground wire to the grounding connector.

.8 Run a separate ground wire in all flexible conduits. Connect each end to ground bus or lug or connector.

.9 Where mechanical protection is required for insulated grounding conductors install in rigid conduit. Use rigid PVC conduit in concrete or below grade slab and aluminum conduit in other locations.

.10 Provide weld connection or mechanical grounding connectors for:

.1 All connections between grounding conductors.

.2 All connections to building steel.

.3 All connections between grounding conductors and cable lugs.

.11 Where single ground conductor is in one conduit, the conduit must be non-ferrous.

.12 Arrange grounding to provide the minimum impedance paths for ground fault currents. Provide any additional grounding required for approval by the inspecting authorities.

.13 In pool area, provide bonding to ground to conform to Ontario Electrical Safety Code Section 68.


JAL No. 14-194

.14 All low voltage neutral ‘XO’ of the transformer shall be bonded to the transformer enclosure/frame with a minimum conductor sized as per Ontario Electrical Safety Code, Table 16.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 44 00 Page 1 PANELBOARDS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Provide factory assembled panelboards as herein specified and as shown on the Electrical Drawings.

.4 Refer to the Electrical Drawings for: voltage; phase; size and type of mains; size, type and quantity of the branch devices; location; surface or flush mounting.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the following:

.1 CSA C22.2 No. 29 - Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards.

.2 CSA C22.2 No. 5 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

.3 CSA C22.2 No. 4 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.



.2 Shop drawings shall include electrical details and dimensions of panel, branch circuit device (breaker and switch) type, quantity and ampacity.

1.4 MANUFACTURERS .1 The manufacturer of the panelboards shall be the manufacturer of the major

components within the assembly, including circuit breakers and fusible switches.

.2 Product of one manufacturer for entire project. Acceptable manufacturers are:

.1 Cutler-Hammer

.2 Schneider

.3 Siemens

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RATINGS .1 Panelboards rated 120/208 volt AC shall have short-circuit rating as per

Coordination Study.

.2 Panelboards shall be labeled with the short-circuit rating.

.3 Where series ratings are applied, provide the labels in accordance with the requirements of Electrical Safety Code. The labels shall state but not limited to:

.1 Size and type of upstream devices;

.2 Branch devices that can be used;


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Short-circuit rating.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION .1 Interiors shall be completely factory assembled devices.

.2 Enclosure:

.1 Indoor dry locations: CSA type 1.

.2 Indoor sprinkler locations: CSA type 2.

.3 Outdoor locations: CSA type 3R.

.3 Provide doors with concealed hinges, combined locks and latches for all panelboards except fusible disconnect switch type distribution panelboards.

.4 Two (2) keys for each panelboard and key all panelboards alike.

.5 Interior trim shall be dead-front construction to shield user from energized parts.

.6 Main bus shall be tin finished high quality aluminum. Ground bus shall be sized to accommodate branch circuit grounding conductors. 200% neutral as required.

.7 Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered sections on left and even on right, with each section identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number and phase.

.8 Provide bolt-on type circuit breakers and/or disconnect switch units.

.9 Provide plug-in type circuit breakers in load centre panelboards in suites.

.10 Means of locking off to meet the Department of Labour requirements for elevator panelboards.

.11 Trims and doors shall be painted ANSI 61 grey. Factory applied paint finish on all exterior surfaces.

.12 All required lugs.

.13 Connectors for future breakers and switches. Drill and tap bus work.

2.3 CUSTOM BUILT PANELBOARD ASSEMBLIES .1 Double stack panels as indicated.

.2 Contactors and/or relays as indicated.

.3 Feed-through and/or sub-feed lugs as indicated.

.4 Special ground buses as indicated.

.5 Special neutrals as indicated.

.6 Connectors for future branch devices as indicated.

2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS .1 Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic

operation, with over centre toggle handle. The handle shall reside in a position between “ON” and “OFF”.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Circuit breakers shall have thermal and magnetic trip mechanism, to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping, trip-free and trip indicating. Circuit breakers rated at 125A and larger shall have thermal and adjustable magnetic trip mechanism.

.3 Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip type and have a common handle. Tie handles are not acceptable.

.4 Clearly marked with their rated ampacity and respective trip rating and visible without removing bolted covers.

.5 Provide handle locking devices on all branch circuit breakers controlling communication equipment, lighting control, exit signs, emergency lighting, fire alarm system and other life safety equipment.

.6 Circuit breakers feeding unswitched lighting circuits shall be “switching duty” type.

.7 Provide class ‘A’ ground fault protection with the circuit breaker, where required by Electrical Safety Code.

2.5 FUSIBLE SWITCH UNITS .1 Refer to Section of Disconnect Switches.

.2 Fusible pull-outs or door-operated type switches not acceptable.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION .1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

.2 Identify circuits controlled by each breaker on directory cards provided with panels. Directories shall be typed and mounted in metal frame with clear plastic cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install panelboards securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surface.

.2 Provide three (3) empty 27 mm (1”) conduits from all recessed lighting and receptacle panelboards, terminated in ceiling space above.

.3 Provide three (3) empty 53 mm (2”) conduits from all recessed distribution panelboards, terminated in ceiling space above.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 47 00 Page 1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1- GENERAL




.3 Provide all disconnect switches, whether an integral part of equipment or separately mounted. Refer to Electrical Drawings for switches’ voltage, ampacity and number of poles.

1.2 REFERENCE .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the following:

.1 CSA C22.2 No. 4, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.

.2 CSA C22.2 No. 39, Fuseholder Assemblies.

.3 CSA C22.2 No. 248 (Part 1 to Part 16), Low Voltage Fuses.



.2 Product data: switches’ ratings and enclosure dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES .1 Enclosure:

.1 Indoor dry locations: CSA Type 1.

.2 Indoor sprinkler locations: CSA Type 2.

.3 Outdoor locations: CSA Type 3R.

.2 Provision for padlocking in off switch position by locks.

.3 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.

.4 Fuses: size as indicated.

.5 Fuseholders: suitable without adaptors, for type and size of fuse indicated.

.6 Heavy-duty horsepower rated, quick-make, quick-break action, front operation, with integral handle mechanism and visible contacts in “OFF” position.

.7 ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.

.8 Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labelled for this application.

.9 Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar.

.10 Lugs suitable for copper and/or aluminum conductors.


JAL No. 14-194

2.2 LOAD BREAK SWITCHES .1 Interrupting rating of 12 times continuous current. Interrupting capacity to withstand

and close onto circuits having available fault currents of 100 kA rms symmetrical.

.2 Switch blades and terminals silver plated copper with drilled holes and surface ground to ensure high quality surface contact.

.3 Replaceable arc suppressing contacts of silver tungsten construction with first-in, last-out operation.

.4 Positive switching action of operating mechanism independent of speed at which handle is operated.

.5 Quick make, quick break, stored energy operating mechanism for manual closing operation.

.6 Operating handle mechanically interlocked with fuse access door with provision for padlocking in open position.

.7 Operating mechanism arranged to prevent "teasing" operation of contacts.

.8 Mechanism designed so that it is impossible to close switch without first charging opening spring.

.9 Opening and closing springs of switch must be charged sequentially not simultaneously.

.10 Opening of switch no longer than 7 Hz.

.11 Operating handle to remain static when opening on shunt trip or by mechanical push button.

.12 Switches front accessible for quick and easy installation or removal.

.13 Removable interphase barriers and grid type arc chutes.

.14 Open type load break bolted contact switches for switchboard mounting.

.15 Where separately mounted, enclosure shall be designed to withstand mechanical stresses associated with available fault current.

2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION .1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section of 26 05 00

.2 Indicate name of load controlled.

2.4 MANUFACTURERS .1 Product of one manufacturer for entire project. Acceptable manufacturers are:

.1 Cutler-Hammer.

.2 Schneider.

.3 Siemens.

.4 GE.


JAL No. 14-194

2.5 FUSES .1 Fuses up to 600 volts and over 600amps:

.1 Where used in motor, transformer and other circuits with an inrush: Class L time delay. Ferraz Shawmut type A4BT or equal by Bussman.

.2 All remaining fuses: Class L non-time delay. Ferraz Shawmut A4BY or equal by Bussman.

.2 Fuses up to 600 volts and up to and including 600amps:

.1 Where used in motor, transformer and other circuits with an inrush: Class J time delay. Ferraz Shawmut type AJT or equal by Bussman.

.2 All remaining fuses: Class J non-time delay. Ferraz Shawmut type A4J or equal by Bussman.

.3 Fuse storage cabinet: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet with shelves, suitable sized to store spare fuses and fuse pullers, complete with hinged door.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install disconnect switches complete with fuses if applicable.

.2 In finished areas, where disconnecting devices are required, provide a circuit breaker in flush mounted enclosure.

.3 Provide three spare fuses of each type and size used above 600 amp and six spare fuses of each type and size used up to and including 600amp.

.4 Install fuses in mounting devices immediately before energizing circuit.

.5 Ensure correct fuses fit to physically match mounting devices.

.6 Ensure correct fuse fitted to assigned electrical circuit.

.7 Mount the fuse storage cabinets on the wall in electrical rooms. Mount the spare fuses in clip neatly arranged and labeled.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 50 00 Page 1 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Provide all lighting fixtures with lamps, ballasts and accessories as specified herein and as shown on the Electrical Drawings.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 Comply with all requirements of the latest edition of CSA Standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 01 00.

.2 Include fixture catalogue data sheets with shop drawings. Arrange the fixture catalogue data sheets and identify in the same sequence as the specified fixture list. Fixture catalogue data sheets shall indicate the following:

.1 Dimensions, weight, material, finish and mounting details.

.2 Performance: Candle power distribution curves in two planes, C.V. chart of indoor fixtures and lumen output chart of outdoor fixtures and flood lights.

.3 Pole wind loading, weight, dimension, anchoring details and finish.

.4 Lamps: type and base, burning hours, CRI, CCT and lumens.

.5 Ballasts: type, wiring diagram, watts, voltage, P.F., sound rating, starting temperature, efficiency and other required characteristics.

.3 Submit photometric IES file for all substituted fixtures. Where requested, submit electronic lighting level calculation analysis for the area with substituted fixtures.

.4 Where requested, submit fixture samples of each substituted fixtures.

.5 Where requested, submit two (2) colour chips 75 mm x 75 mm in size, illustrating fixture finish colour.

.6 Where requested, submit certified heat-run test data for each type of ballast mounting.

.7 Within four (4) weeks of Contract award, provide information on electronic ballast operating frequency for Owner’s co-ordination with Owner supplied equipment operating at high frequencies.

1.4 WARRANTY .1 Warrant fluorescent and high intensity discharge (HID) lamps for a period of 24

months from the date of acceptance of the work. Include labour for replacing lamps in the warranty.

.2 Warrant incandescent lamps for the period of their rated life from the date of acceptance of the Work. Include labour for replacing lamps in the warranty.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Warrant LED lamps and drivers for a period of 36 months from the date of acceptance of the work. Include labour for replacing lamps and drivers in the warranty.

.4 Warrant HID ballasts for a period of 24 months and fluorescent ballasts for a period of 60 months from the date of acceptance of the work. Include labour for replacing lamps in warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LAMPS

.1 High Pressure Sodium Lamps shall be coated type with 2100K CCT, minimum lamp life of 24,000 burning hours.

.2 Metal Halide lamps shall be coated type with 4000K CCT, minimum lamp life of 18,000 burning hours, minimum CRI of 80. Pulse start type where available. Provide double envelope lamps suitable for open fixtures.

.3 Fluorescent Lamps shall be 4100K CCT, minimum CRI of 85, minimum lamp life of 20,000 burning hours. T8 lamp shall be energy advantage type with minimum 95 lumens/w.

.4 Compact Fluorescent Lamps shall be 4100K CCT, minimum lamp life of 12,000 burning hours. Minimum CRI of 82, provide four (4) pin lamps for fixtures on dimming circuits.

.5 Incandescent Lamps shall be rated for 125 volt power supply and for use on 120 volt (nominal) supply. Lamps suitable for burning in any position. Reflector lamps to have minimum life of 5,000 burning hours. Unless noted otherwise conventional filament incandescent lamps to have minimum life of 5,000 burning hours at rated voltage. Tungsten halogen lamps to have minimum life of 2,500 burning hours at rated voltage. MR16 lamps to have minimum life of 10,000 burning hours.

.6 LED Lamps

.1 Minimum lamp life of 50,000 burning hours. 4000K CCT. 2-pin, 12V. direct replacement of MR16.

.7 Manufacturers

.1 Philips

.2 Osram-Sylvania

.3 G.E.

2.2 BALLASTS .1 Fluorescent

.1 Rapid start high efficiency electronic fluorescent ballast, unless otherwise noted.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 CSA and UL listed, Class P and type 1 outdoor, integrated electronic circuitry, less than 10% of voltage and frequency sustained variations with no damage to ballast. Less than 15% THD. Ballasts shall have an average lamp crest factor of less than 1.7. Ballast shall have frequency of operation in range 20-30 kHz or greater than 42KHz and operate without visible flicker. Power factor shall exceed 95%. No polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) will be permitted. Comply with ANSI C62.41 Category A for transient protection. Class A sound rating, -18°C (0°F) starting temperature, minimum 0.85 ballast factor. Meet FCC Standard for EMI/RFI.

.2 Where dimming ballasts are specified, the electronic dimming ballast shall have the following additional features:

.1 Ballast shall dim continuously between 100% and 20% light output as a minimum.

.2 Ballast shall maintain full filament heat throughout the dimming range.

.3 Ballast dimming circuitry shall be UL Class 2 and fully isolated from ballast input power.

.4 Ballast shall require no intermediate trimming controls between ballast and controlling device

.5 Dimming ballasts shall be compatible with the dimming system supplied.

.3 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts

.1 Unless noted otherwise, all high pressure sodium, and metal halide ballasts for operation on single phase, 60 cycle power supply 347V or 120 volt as noted. All ballasts to be constant wattage high power factor 0.9 or better. The wave form of the ballast output to provide the full rated lamp output without adversely affecting lamp life.

.2 Meet all applicable ANSI specifications.

.3 Ballasts mounted integral with lighting fixtures to be sealed, potted quiet type and be mounted with an approved vibration assembly and any required accessories to minimize noise transmission.

.4 Ensure trouble-free operation free of overheating for all proposed methods of ballast installation. Supply certified heat-run test data with each type of ballast mounting.

.5 Provide weatherproof ballasts with -30C starting temperature for outdoor locations and indoor unheated locations.

.6 Provide F-can or potted core & coil type for indoor locations.

.7 Provide pulse start ballast where applicable.

.4 Manufacturers

.1 Advance

.2 Universal

.3 Osram – Sylvania

2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES .1 Fixtures shall have CSA labels and shall be complete with lamps, ballasts and

necessary accessories for installation.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Unless otherwise indicated, fluorescent lighting fixture bodies to be minimum 20 gauge, cold rolled prime steel of rigid construction with knockout as required. Fixture rigidity to permit any suspension method without sag. Fluorescent fixtures to be suitable for either individual or continuous mounting. Fixture sockets to apply continuous holding pressure on lamps.

.3 Fluorescent fixtures to be finished in baked white enamel (or other colour if specified) which shall resist chipping, corrosion and discolouration. Before finishing all metal to be chemically degreased and neutralized. Finish shall be not less than two coats of enamel, sprayed on and baked. Reflecting surfaces to be white with an average reflectance of not less than 85%.

.4 All fixture types designed with adequate heat sinks to dissipate the generated heat in order to prevent ballast and lamps from overheating with the resulting decrease in their rated life expectancy and/or light output. Fixtures to be wired with type GTF fixture wire.

.5 All fixtures shall be complete with required safety disconnect means.

.6 Fixtures to be designed so that minimum time is required for lamp or ballast replacement.

.7 Plastic lenses to be 100% virgin acrylic not less than 3 mm thick.

.8 All metal halide fixtures shall be equipped with protective lenses.

.9 Include all necessary accessories in tender price for a complete installation. No extra will be allowed for the supplier or contractor failing to provide such accessories.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install all fixtures in the standard manner for the type of fixture and in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions. Support all fixtures from structural members except that fixtures installed in suspended ceilings may be supported by the ceiling where the ceiling supports are reinforced to carry the weight of the fixtures. Co-ordinate with Division 9 and submit written confirmation to the requirements of the Inspection Authority.

.2 In non-accessible ceilings wire with not less than 1220 mm AC90 or RW90 wire in flexible conduit to adjacent outlet boxes placed above finished ceiling within reach of the fixture openings.

.3 In accessible ceilings wire with 1830 mm AC90 or RW90 wire in flexible conduit to adjacent outlet boxes.

.4 Where fixtures are not installed in approved ceiling system, provide steel fixture studs, brackets and hangers. Where fixtures are hung on chain hangers, provide chain of closed link type capable of supporting ten times the fixture weight. Use U-bolts for chain ends; S-hooks are not acceptable.

.5 Provide suitable trim for all fixtures installed in drywall ceiling or within lay in or snap in tiles.


JAL No. 14-194

.6 Provide I.C. frame/enclosure for all fixtures installed in insulated ceiling. Confirm the insulated ceiling areas with Architect. Provide fire rated boxes for all recessed fixture in fire rated ceiling area.

.7 Provide plaster frames for all fixtures recessed in plaster ceilings. Have plaster frames installed under Division #9 and ensure that they are located correctly. Pay for all work associated with this work.

.8 Protect fixtures from dirt and damage during construction and clean when the installation is completed. Replace fixtures showing marks or scratches due to handling or tool marks.

.9 Align fixtures shown in continuous rows or broken lines so that all rows appear as straight lines. Crooked lines and misplaced fixtures will not be accepted.

.10 here luminaries are surface mounted on inverted T-bar ceilings, they shall be supported directly from the building structure. Where this is not possible due to presence of mechanical ducts or other obstruction, supply and install galvanized steel channel, Unistrut or equal, above the ceiling, securely attached to the structure and not from the suspension system for the ceiling, and fasten the luminaires to the channel with clamping nut, bolt, flat washers and lock washer to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Provide bolts at least every 1.2m length of fixture (i.e., 3 bolts for 2.4m fixture).

.11 Fixtures are shown on the electrical drawings in approximate locations only. Install fixtures in accordance with reflected ceiling plans, details and/or field instructions issued by the Engineer. .

.12 Install lighting fixtures in service areas, underground parking areas, unfinished areas, mechanical and electrical rooms after the mechanical and electrical equipment is in place. Locate fixtures on site to clear all obstructions to the approval of the Consultant. Provide auxiliary steel members for hanging fixtures below ducts and other equipment. Where ceiling height is more than 3 metres, suspend ceiling surface mounted fixtures at 3 metres AFF. Where ceiling height is more than 3 metres, suspend ceiling surface mounted fixtures at 3 metres AFF.

.13 Provide all mounting hardware for all fixtures.

.14 Check the latest ceiling finishes in all areas where recessed fixtures are specified to ensure that fixtures are purchased with suitable ceiling trim for the particular ceiling finish. Replace fixtures which are sent to the site with wrong ceiling trim or flanges with fixtures having the correct trims, flanges, etc. as required without additional cost.

.15 Provide safety chains for all HID fixtures with integral ballasts. Attach chain to fixture and building structure. Safety chain to be designed and secured so as to sustain the sudden weight of the fixture.

.16 In stairs, provide fixture on every main and half landing level. Co-ordinate with Architectural drawings for number of landings.


JAL No. 14-194

.17 Fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the reflected ceiling layouts with due consideration for mechanical diffusers, bulkheads, sprinkler heads, and other obstructions. Check Mechanical and Architectural drawings before roughing-in to avoid any possible conflict.

.18 Fixtures connected to ground fault interruptor circuits shall have separate neutrals (common neutrals for 2 or 3 circuits are not acceptable).

.19 Exterior wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be mounted on recessed boxes except where fixtures with integral outlet boxes are specified in which case the recessed outlet box is not required. Outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored to the wall.

.20 Unless otherwise indicated supply and install concrete bases for lighting standards. Concrete bases shall be trowel finished with all exposed corners bevelled at 45 degrees. Junction boxes shall be carefully set and anchored to ensure flush fit of junction box cover. Concrete bases shall be constructed of 20 Mpa concrete air entrained and steel reinforced as shown on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 53 00 Page 1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Provide emergency lighting system including exit signs, remote heads, and battery units, as shown on the drawings, as specified herein and as otherwise required.

1.2 REFERENCE .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the following:

.1 CSA-C22.2 No. 9, General Requirements for Luminaires.

.2 CSA-C22.2 No. 141, Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting.

.3 CSA-C22.2 C860, Performance of Internally Lighting Exit Signs.

.4 CSA-C282, Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 26 01 00

.2 Include fixture catalogue data sheets with shop drawings indicating dimensions, components, electrical characteristics and performance data for each fixture and device. Arrange the fixture catalogue data sheets and identify in the same sequence as the specified fixture list.

.3 Submit test report and verifications following the completion of testing.

1.4 WARRANTY .1 For batteries, with a no-charge replacement during the first 5years and a pro-rate

charge on the second 5 years.

1.5 MANUFACTURERS .1 Emergi-Lite, Lumacell, Beghelli.


JAL No. 14-194

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXIT SIGNS .1 Supply and install the Lumacell® LA Series pictogram Exit Signs. The equipment

shall operate with universal 2-wire AC input voltage of 120 to 347VAC at less than 2.5W and universal 2-wire DC input voltage from 6 to 24VDC at less than 1.5W for single and double face signs. The equipment shall be suitable for wall, end, or ceiling mount. The housing shall be constructed of rugged extruded aluminum and have a maximum depth of 2-1/2”. The faceplate(s) shall be constructed of extruded Aluminum and shall incorporate a protective clear poly-carbonate panel. Each face plate shall come standard with two legend films for pictogram and direction selection. The light source shall be white light-emitting diodes (LED) and shall provide even illumination in normal and emergency operation.

.2 The pictogram Exit Sign shall the CSA 22.2 No.141-10 .3 Include for the supply, installation and wiring (to nearest emergency lighting

circuit) of 10 additional exit signs at locations later directed on site. .4 Alternate Manufacturers: 1. Emergi-Lite 2. Beghelli 3. Luxnet

2.2 WEATHER-PROOF EXIT SIGNS .1 Same as standard exit lights, except:

.1 Housing to be industrial grade polyvinyl chloride fully gasketted around lens and canopy.

.2 The sealed face plate shall be constructed of heavy duty vandal-resistant polycarbonate.

2.3 STANDARD REMOTE HEADS .1 Single or double cast aluminum head(s), complete with mounting plates, 300 degree

horizontal and 80 degree vertical minimum adjustment.

.2 Lamps: MR16 Narrow beam, 20W or as shown.

.3 Input: 24VDC as shown.

.4 Mounting: ceiling or wall as shown.

.5 Finish: white painted.

.6 Provide white metal wire guard as required.

.7 Provide weather proof remote heads as indicated on drawings.


JAL No. 14-194

2.4 BATTERY UNIT .1 Supply voltage: as indicated on the Electrical Drawings.

.2 Output voltage: 24V DC.

.3 Operating time: 1/2 hours minimum.

.4 Battery: sealed, maintenance free, long-time lead with rated life of ten (10) years.

.5 Charger: solid state, multi-rate, voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature compensated, short circuit protected with regulated output of plus or minus 0.01V for plus or minus 10% input variations capable of restoring a discharged battery to the fully-charged state within twenty-four (24) hours, and switched to a float charge when not in full charge mode.

.6 Solid state transfer circuit.

.7 Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, operates at 80% battery output voltage.

.8 Signal lights: solid state, for “AC Power ON’ and ‘High Charge’.

.9 Lamp heads: integral on unit and remote, 345° horizontal and 180° vertical adjustment, white painted cast aluminum head. Lamp type: wide beam flat MR16, 2-20W, unless noted otherwise.

.10 Cabinet: suitable for direct or shelf mounting to wall and complete with knockouts for conduits. Removable or hinged front panel for easy access to batteries.

.11 Finish: standard factory finish.

.12 Auxiliary equipment:

.1 Advanced diagnostic printed circuit board with auto self test and time delay.

.2 Test switch and LED trouble indicator.

.3 Battery disconnect device.

.4 AC input and dc output terminal blocks inside cabinet.

.5 Mounting shelf.

.6 Transient voltage surge suppressor on the supply side of power to the unit.

2.5 WIRING .1 Refer to basic materials and methods.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Pendant mount exit sign in service rooms and other areas where necessary to clear

obstructions. Install suspended exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers.

.2 Install all unit equipment, remote heads, exit signs, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.


JAL No. 14-194

.3 Direct heads for illumination to meet OBC requirements.

3.2 TESTING AND VERIFICATION .1 Arrange with the manufacturer to conduct a complete inspection and test of all

installed emergency lighting system.

.2 Manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for properly aiming remote heads, recording the light level readings, recording battery full load operation time, issuing a verification indicating that lighting levels meet OBC requirements, and the system has been installed properly.

.3 Submit report and verification to Consultant.

.4 Correct all deficiencies.

.5 Witnessed by Consultant.

.6 All cost involved in testing, verification, and corrections shall be included in the Tender Price.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 54 00 Page 1 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:

1. Digital Lighting Controls

2. Relay Panels

3. Emergency Lighting Control (if applicable)

.2 Related Sections:

1. Section [261400 - Wiring Devices:] Receptacles

2. Section [265000 – Lighting Equipment:] Fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.

3. Section [259500 – Building Automation System] Building integrator shall provide integration of the lighting control system with Building Automation Systems.

4. Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section

5. Electrical Sections, including wiring devices, apply to the work of this Section.

.3 Control Intent – Control Intent includes, but is not limited to:

1. Defaults and initial calibration settings for such items as time delay, sensitivity, fade rates, etc.

2. Initial sensor and switching zones

3. Initial time switch settings

4. Task lighting and receptacle controls

5. Emergency Lighting control (if applicable)

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE)

.2 Underwriter Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.3 International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)


JAL No. 14-194

.4 International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

.5 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

.6 WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.

.7 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. 20 – Plug Load Controls 2. 508– Industrial Controls 3. 916 – Energy Management Equipment. 4. 924 – Emergency Lighting

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION & OPERATION

.1 The Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this section covers the following equipment:

1. Digital Occupancy Sensors – Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications.

2. Digital Switches – Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton on/off, dimming, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications.

3. Handheld remotes for personal control – One-button dimming, two-button on/off, or five-button scene remotes provide control using infrared communications. Remote may be configured in the field to control selected loads or scenes without special tools.

4. Digital Daylighting Sensors – Single-zone closed loop, multi-zone open loop and single-zone dual-loop daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications can provide switching, bi-level, tri-level or dimming control for daylight harvesting.

5. Digital Room Controllers – Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relay plenum-rated controllers for on/off control. Selected models include 0-10 volt or line voltage forward phase control dimming outputs and integral current monitoring capabilities.

6. Digital Plug-Load Controllers – Self-configuring, digitally addressable, single relay, plenum-rated application-specific controllers. Selected models include integral current monitoring capabilities.


JAL No. 14-194

7. Configuration Tools – Handheld remote for room configuration and relay panel programming provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and allow bi-directional communication of room variables and occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings.

8. Digital Lighting Management (DLM) local network – Free topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices.

9. Digital Lighting Management (DLM) segment network – Linear topology, BACnet MS/TP network (1.5 twisted pair, shielded,) to connect multiple DLM local networks for centralized control

10. Network Bridge – provides BACnet MS/TP-compliant digital networked communication between rooms, panels and the Segment Manager or building automation system (BAS) and automatically creates BACnet objects representative of connected devices.

11. Segment Manager – provides web browser-based user interface for system control, scheduling, power monitoring, room device parameter administration and reporting.

12. Programming and Configuration software – Optional PC-native application capable of accessing DLM control parameters within a room, for the local network, via a USB adapter, or globally, for many segment networks simultaneously, via BACnet/IP communication.

13. LMCP Digital Lighting Management Relay Panel – provides up to 8, 24, or 48 mechanically latching relays. Relays include a manual override and a single push-on connector for easy installation or removal from the panel. Panel accepts program changes from handheld configuration tool for date and time, location, holidays, event scheduling, button binding and group programming. Provides BACnet MS/TP-compliant digital networked communication between other lighting controls and/or building automation system (BAS).

14. Emergency Lighting Control Unit (ELCU) – allows a standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building


JAL No. 14-194

1.4 LIGHTING CONTROL APPLICATIONS

.1 Unless relevant provisions of the applicable local Energy Codes are more stringent, provide a minimum application of lighting controls as follows:

1. Space Control Requirements – Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with Manual- or Partial-ON functionality in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications where hands-free operation is desirable and Automatic-ON occupancy sensors are more appropriate. Provide Manual-ON occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room, meeting room, open plan system and training room. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line-of-sight may be obscured, provide ceiling- or corner-mounted sensors and Manual-ON switches.

2. Bi-Level Lighting – Provide multi-level controls in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or applications where variable dimming is used.

3. Task Lighting / Plug Loads – Provide automatic shut off of non essential plug loads and task lighting in all spaces except toilet rooms and storerooms. Provide Automatic-ON of plug loads whenever spaces are occupied. For spaces with multiple occupants a single shut off consistent with the overhead lighting may be used for the area.

4. Daylit Areas – Provide daylight-responsive automatic control in all spaces (conditioned or unconditioned) where daylight contribution is available as defined by relevant local building energy code:

.1 All luminaires within code-defined daylight zones shall be controlled separately from luminaires outside of daylit zones.

.2 Daytime setpoints for total ambient illumination (combined daylight and electric light) levels that initiate dimming shall be programmed in compliance with relevant local building energy codes.

.3 Multiple-leveled switched daylight harvesting controls may be utilized for areas marked on drawings.

.4 Provide smooth and continuous daylight dimming for areas marked on drawings. Daylighting control system may be designed to turn off electric lighting when daylight is at or above required lighting levels, only if system functions to turn lamps back on at dimmed level, rather than turning full-on prior to dimming.


JAL No. 14-194

5. Conference, meeting, training, auditoriums, and multipurpose rooms shall have controls that allow for independent control of each local control zone. Rooms larger than 300 square feet shall instead have at least four (4) pre-set lighting scenes unless otherwise specified. Occupancy / vacancy sensors shall be provided to extinguish all lighting in the space. Spaces with up to four moveable walls shall include controls that can be reconfigured when the room is partitioned.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submittals Package: Submit the shop drawings, and the product data specified below at the same time as a package.

.2 Shop Drawings:

1. Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as proposed to be installed.

2. Show exact location of all digital devices, including at minimum sensors, room controllers, and switches for each area on reflected ceiling plans. (Contractor must provide AutoCAD format reflected ceiling plans.)

3. Provide room/area details including products and sequence of operation for each room or area. Illustrate typical acceptable room/area connection topologies.

4. Network riser diagram including floor and building level details. Include network cable specification and end-of-line termination details, if required. Illustrate points of connection to integrated systems. Coordinate integration with mechanical and/or other trades.

.3 Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions.

.4 Include data for each device which:

1. Indicates where sensor is proposed to be installed.

2. Prove that the sensor is suitable for the proposed application.


.1 Manufacturer: Minimum [10] years experience in manufacture of lighting controls.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment:

1. Ambient temperature: 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F).


JAL No. 14-194

2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.

1.8 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a five year limited manufacturer’s warranty on all room control devices and panels.

Part 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Acceptable Manufacturer:

1. WattStopper

.1 System: Digital Lighting Management (DLM)

2. Basis of design product: WattStopper Digital Lighting Management (DLM) or subject to compliance and prior approval with specified requirements of this section, one of the following:

.1 Douglas Lighting Control

.2 Substitutions:

1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for approval by the design professional a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and must be made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a review of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis.

2. By using pre-approved substitutions, the contractor accepts responsibility and associated costs for all required modifications to circuitry, devices, and wiring. The contractor shall provide complete engineered shop drawings (including power and control wiring) with deviations from the original design highlighted for review and approval prior to rough-in.

2.2 DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS

.1 Furnish the Company’s system which accommodates the square-footage coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors, switches, daylighting sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters.

2.3 DIGITAL WALL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSORS

.1 Wallbox mounted passive infrared PIR or dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic) digital occupancy sensor with 1 or 2 switch buttons.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide scrolling LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:

1. Digital calibration and pushbutton configuration for the following variables:

.1 Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments

.2 Time delay – 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments

.3 Test mode – Five second time delay

.4 Detection technology – PIR, Dual Technology activation and/or re-activation.

.5 Walk-through mode

.6 Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.

2. Programmable control functionality including:

.1 Each sensor may be programmed to control specific loads within a local network.

.2 Sensor shall be capable of activating one of 16 user-definable lighting scenes.

.3 Adjustable retrigger time period for manual-on loads. Load will retrigger (turn on) automatically during the configurable period of time (default 10 seconds) after turning off.

.4 On dual technology sensors, independently configurable trigger modes are available for both Normal (NH) and After Hours (AH) time periods. The retrigger mode can be programmed to use the following technologies:

i Ultrasonic and Passive Infrared

ii Ultrasonic or Passive Infrared

iii Ultrasonic only

iv Passive Infrared only

3. Independently configurable sensitivity settings for passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies (on dual technology sensors) for both Normal (NH) and After Hour (AH) time periods.

4. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.

5. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld configuration tool and control by remote personal controls.

6. Device Status LEDs including:

.1 PIR detection


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Ultrasonic detection

.3 Configuration mode

.4 Load binding

7. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.

8. Assignment of local buttons to specific loads within the room without wiring or special tools

9. Manual override of controlled loads.

10. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual wall switch sensor shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the wall switch sensor itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.

.3 BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects:

1. Detection state

2. Occupancy sensor time delay

3. Occupancy sensor sensitivity, PIR and Ultrasonic

4. Button state

5. Switch lock control

6. Switch lock status

.4 Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.

.5 Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.

.6 Two-button wall switch occupancy sensors, when connected to a single relay dimming room controller, shall operate in the following sequence as a factory default:

1. Left button

.1 Press and release - Turn load on

.2 Press and hold - Raise dimming load

2. Right button

11Press and release - Turn load off

.1 Press and hold - Lower dimming load


JAL No. 14-194

.7 Low voltage momentary pushbuttons shall include the following features:

1. Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:

.1 Bi-level LED

.2 Dim locator level indicates power to switch

.3 Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active

2. The following button attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

.1 Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa).

.2 Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.

.3 Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.

.4 Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.

.5 Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.

.6 Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads.

.8 WattStopper part numbers: LMPW, LMDW. Available in white, light almond, ivory, grey, red and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening.

2.4 DIGITAL WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR

.1 Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) passive infrared (PIR), ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor.

.2 Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:

1. Digital calibration and pushbutton configuration for the following variables:

.1 Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments

.2 Time delay – 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments

.3 Test mode – Five second time delay

.4 Detection technology – PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re-activation.

.5 Walk-through mode


JAL No. 14-194

.6 Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.


.1 Each sensor may be programmed to control specific loads within a local network.

.2 Sensor shall be capable of activating one of 16 user-definable lighting scenes.

.3 Adjustable retrigger time period for manual-on loads. Load will retrigger (turn on) automatically within a configurable period of time (default 10 seconds) after turning off.

.4 On dual technology sensors, independently configurable trigger modes are available for both Normal (NH) and After Hours (AH) time periods. The retrigger mode can be programmed to use the following technologies:

i Ultrasonic and Passive Infrared

ii Ultrasonic or Passive Infrared

iii Ultrasonic only

iv Passive Infrared only

3. Independently configurable sensitivity settings for passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies (on dual technology sensors) for both Normal (NH) and After Hour (AH) time periods.

4. One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network.

5. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.

6. Device Status LEDs, which may be disabled for selected applications, including:

.1 PIR detection

.2 Ultrasonic detection

.3 Configuration mode

.4 Load binding

7. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.

8. Manual override of controlled loads.

9. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual occupancy sensor shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the sensor itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.


JAL No. 14-194


1. Detection state

2. Occupancy sensor time delay

3. Occupancy sensor sensitivity, PIR and Ultrasonic

.4 Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.

.5 Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.

.6 WattStopper product numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC

2.5 DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES

.1 Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration. Wall switches shall include the following features:

1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls.

2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.

3. Configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.

4. Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:

.1 Bi-level LED

.2 Dim locator level indicates power to switch

.3 Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active

5. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps.


.1 Button priority may be configured to any BACnet priority level, from 1-16, corresponding to networked operation allowing local actions to utilize life safety priority

.2 Scene patterns may be saved to any button other than dimming rockers. Once set, buttons may be digitally locked to prevent overwriting of the preset levels.


JAL No. 14-194

7. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual wall switch shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the wall switch itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.


1. Button state

2. Switch lock control

3. Switch lock status

.3 Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.

.4 Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration shall be required to achieve multi-way switching.

.5 The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

1. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa).

2. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.

3. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.

4. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.

5. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.

6. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads.

.6 WattStopper product numbers: LMSW-101, LMSW-102, LMSW-103, LMSW-104, LMSW-105, LMSW-108, LMDM-101. Available in white, light almond, ivory, grey, red and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening.

2.6 HANDHELD REMOTE CONTROLS

.1 Battery-operated handheld devices in 1, 2 and 5 button configurations for remote switching or dimming control. Remote controls shall include the following features:

1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for line of sight communication with DLM local network within up to 30 feet.

2. LED on each button confirms button press.


JAL No. 14-194

3. Load buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads.

4. Inactivity timeout to save battery life.

.2 A wall mount holster and mounting hardware shall be included with each remote control

.3 WattStopper part numbers: LMRH-101, LMRH-102, LMRH-105.

2.7 DIGITAL PARTITION CONTROLS

.1 Partition controls shall enable manual or automatic coordination of lighting controls in flexible spaces with up to four moveable walls by reconfiguring the connected digital switches and occupancy sensors.

.2 Four-button low voltage pushbutton switch for manual control.

1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with configuration remote control.

2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.

3. Configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.

4. Each button represents one wall; Green button LED indicates status.


6. WattStopper part number: LMPS-104. Available in white, light almond, ivory, grey and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening.

.3 Contact closure interface for automatic control via input from limit switches on movable walls (by others).

1. Operates on Class 2 power supplied by DLM local network.

2. Includes 24VDC output and four input terminals for maintained third party contract closure inputs.

.1 Input max. sink/source current: 1-5mA

.2 Logic input signal voltage High: >18VDC

.3 Logic input signal voltage Low: <2VDC


JAL No. 14-194

3. Four status LEDs under hinged cover indicate if walls are open or closed; supports LMPS-104 as remote status indicator.


5. WattStopper part number: LMIO-102

2.8 DIGITAL DAYLIGHTING SENSORS

.1 Digital daylighting sensors shall work with room controllers to provide automatic switching, bi-level, or tri-level or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Daylighting sensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring.

1. Closed loop sensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone.

2. Open loop sensors measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones.

3. Dual loop sensors measure both ambient and incoming daylight in the space to insure that proper light levels are maintained as changes to reflective materials are made in a single zone.

.2 Digital daylighting sensors shall include the following features:

1. The sensor’s internal photodiode shall only measure lightwaves within the visible spectrum. The photodiode’s spectral response curve shall closely match the entire photopic curve. The photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers.

2. Sensor light level range shall be from 1-6,553 footcandles (fc).

3. The capability of ON/OFF, bi-level or tri-level switching, or dimming, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room controller(s).

4. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a field-selectable deadband, or a separation, between the “ON Setpoint” and the “OFF Setpoint” that will prevent the lights from cycling excessively after they turn off.

5. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a field-selectable minimum level.

6. Photosensors shall have a digital, independently configurable fade rate for both increasing and decreasing light level in units of percent per second.

7. Photosensors shall provide adjustable cut-off time. Cut-off time is defined by the number of selected minutes the load is at the minimum output before the load turns off. Selectable range between 0-240 minutes including option to never cut-off.


JAL No. 14-194

8. Optional wall switch override shall allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise lighting levels for a selectable period of time or cycle of occupancy.

9. Integral infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls.

10. Configuration LED status light on device that blinks to indicate data transmission.

11. Status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.

12. Recessed switch on device to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.

13. BACnet object information shall be available for the following daylighting sensor objects, based on the specific photocell’s settings:

.1 Light level

.2 Day and night setpoints

.3 Off time delay

.4 On and off setpoints

.5 Up to three zone setpoints

.6 Operating mode – on/off, bi-level, tri-level or dimming

14. One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network.

15. A choice of accessories to accommodate multiple mounting methods and building materials. The photosensors may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox. Standard tube photosensors accommodate mounting materials from 0-0.62” thickness (LMLS-400, LMLS-500). Extended tube photosensors accommodate mounting materials from 0.62”-1.25” thickness (LMLS-400-L, LMLS-500-L). Mounting brackets are compatible with J boxes (LMLS-MB1) and wall mounting (LMLS-MB2). LMLS-600 photosensor to be mounted on included bracket below skylight well.

16. Any load or group of loads in the room can be assigned to a daylighting zone

17. Each load within a daylighting zone can be individually enabled or disabled for discrete control (load independence).

18. All digital parameter data programmed into a photosensor shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the photosensor itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.

.3 Closed loop digital photosensors shall include the following additional features:

1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 100-degree angle, cutting off the unwanted light from bright sources outside of this cone.


JAL No. 14-194

2. Automatic self-calibration, initiated from the photosensor, a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.

3. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following self-calibration. For switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation a sliding setpoint control algorithm with separate Day and Night setpoints shall prevent abrupt ramping of loads.

4. WattStopper Product Number: LMLS-400, LMLS-400-L.

.4 Open loop digital photosensors shall include the following additional features:

1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60-degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room.

2. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following manual calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software. For switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints for each zone shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation, a proportional control algorithm shall maintain the design lighting level in each zone.

3. Each of the three discrete daylight zones can include any non overlapping group of loads in the room.

4. WattStopper Product Number: LMLS-500, LMLS-500-L.

.5 Dual loop digital photosensors shall include the following additional features:

1. Close loop portion of dual loop device must have an internal photodiode that measures light in a 100 degree angle, cutting off the unwanted light from sources outside of this con

2. Open loop portion of dual loop device must have an internal photodiode that can measure light in a 60 degree angle, cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room.

3. Automatically establishes application-specific set-points following self-calibration. For switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation a sliding setpoint control algorithm with separate Day and Night setpoints shall prevent abrupt ramping of load.

4. Device must reference closed loop photosensor information as a base line reference. The device must be able to analyze the open loop photosensor information to determine if an adjustment in light levels is required.

5. Device must be able to automatically commission setpoints each night to provide adjustments to electrical lighting based on changes in overall lighting in the space due to changes in reflectance within the space or changes to daylight contribution based on seasonal changes.


JAL No. 14-194

6. Device must include extendable mounting arm to properly position sensor within a skylight well.

7. WattStopper product number LMLS-600

2.9 DIGITAL ROOM CONTROLLERS AND PLUG-LOAD CONTROLLERS

.1 Digital controllers for lighting and plug loads automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room and plug load controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting and plug load control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install, and will not have dip switches or potentiometers, or require special configuration for standard Plug n’ Go applications. The control units will include the following features:

1. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room.

2. Simple replacement – Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf.

3. Multiple room controllers connected together in a local network must automatically prioritize each room controller, without requiring any configuration or setup, so that loads are sequentially assigned using room controller device ID’s from highest to lowest.

4. Device Status LEDs to indicate:

.1 Data transmission

.2 Device has power

.3 Status for each load

.4 Configuration status

5. Quick installation features including:

.1 Standard junction box mounting

.2 Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable

6. Based on individual configuration, each load shall be capable of the following behavior on power up following the loss of normal power:

.1 Turn on to 100%

.2 Remain off

.3 Turn on to last level

7. Each load shall be configurable to operate in the following sequences based on occupancy:

.1 Auto-on/Auto-off (Follow on and off)


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Manual-on/Auto-off (Follow off only)

8. The polarity of each load output shall be reversible, via digital configuration, so that on is off and off is on.

9. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects:

.1 Load status

.2 Electrical current

.3 Total watts per controller

.4 Schedule state – normal or after-hours

.5 Demand response control and cap level

.6 Room occupancy status

.7 Total room lighting and plug loads watts

.8 Total room watts/sq ft

.9 Force on/off all loads

10. UL 2043 plenum rated

11. Manual override and LED indication for each load

12. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz), or 347 VAC, 60 Hz (selected models only). 120/277 volt models rated for 20A total load, derating to 16A required for some dimmed loads (forward phase dimming); 347 volt models rated for 15A total load; plug load controllers carry application-specific UL 20 rating for receptacle control.

13. Zero cross circuitry for each load

14. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual room controller or plug load controller shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the controller itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.

.2 On/Off Room Controllers shall include:

1. One or two relay configuration

2. Efficient 150 mA switching power supply

3. Three RJ-45 DLM local network ports with integral strain relief and dust cover

4. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-101, LMRC-102

.3 On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include:

1. Real time current monitoring

2. Multiple relay configurations .1 One, two or three relays (LMRC-21x series)


JAL No. 14-194

.2 One or two relays (LMRC-22x series)

3. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply

4. Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports with integral strain relief and dust cover

5. One dimming output per relay

.1 0-10V Dimming - Where indicated, one 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers. The 0-10 volt output shall automatically open upon loss of power to the Room Controller to assure full light output from the controlled lighting. (LMRC-21x series)

.2 Line Voltage, Forward Phase Dimming - Where indicated, one forward phase control line voltage dimming output per relay for control of compatible two-wire or three-wire ballasts, LED drivers, MLV, forward phase compatible ELV, neon/cold cathode and incandescent loads. (LMRC-22x series)

.3 Each dimming output channel shall have an independently configurable minimum and maximum calibration trim level to set the dimming range to match the true dynamic range of the connected ballast or driver.

.4 The LED level indicators on bound dimming switches shall utilize this new maximum and minimum trim.

.5 Each dimming output channel shall have an independently configurable minimum and maximum trim level to set the dynamic range of the output within the new 0-100% dimming range defined by the minimum and maximum calibration trim.

.6 Calibration and trim levels must be set per output channel.

.7 Devices that set calibration or trim levels per controller are not acceptable.

.8 All configuration shall be digital. Devices that set calibration or trim levels per output channel via trim pots or dip-switches are not acceptable.

6. Each load shall have an independently configurable preset on level for Normal Hours and After Hours events to allow different dimmed levels to be established at the start of both Normal Hours and After Hours events.

7. Fade rates for dimming loads shall be specific to bound switch buttons, and the load shall maintain a default value for any bound buttons that do not specify a unique value.

8. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

.1 Establish preset level for each load from 0-100%

.2 Set high and low trim for each load

.3 Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours


JAL No. 14-194

9. Override button for each load provides the following functions:

.1 Press and release for on/off control

.2 Press and hold for dimming control

10. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-211, LRMC-212, LRMC-213, LMRC-221, LMRC-222

.4 Plug Load Room Controllers shall include:

1. One relay configuration with additional connection for unswitched load

2. Configurable additive time delay to extend plug load time delay beyond occupancy sensor time delay (e.g. a 10 minute additive delay in a space with a 20 minute occupancy sensor delay ensures that plug loads turn off 30 minutes after the space is vacated).

3. Factory default operation is Auto-on/Auto-off, based on occupancy

4. Real time current monitoring of both switched and un-switched load (LMPL-201 only)

5. Efficient switching power supply

.1 150mA (LMPL-101)

.2 250mA (LMPL-201)

6. RJ-45 DLM local network ports

.1 Three RJ-45 ports (LMPL-101)

.2 Four RJ-45 ports (LMPL-201)

7. WattStopper product numbers: LMPL-101, LMPL-201.

2.10 DLM LOCAL NETWORK (Room Network)

.1 The DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building.

.2 Features of the DLM local network include:

1. Plug n’ Go® automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached.

2. Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.

3. Push n’ Learn® configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network.


JAL No. 14-194

4. Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor, wall switch or IR receiver.

.3 Digital room devices connect to the local network using pre-terminated Cat 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors, which provide both data and power to room devices. Systems that utilize RJ-45 patch cords but do not provide serial communication data from individual end devices are not acceptable.

.4 If manufacturer’s pre-terminated Cat 5e cables are not used for the installation, the contractor is responsible for testing each cable following installation and supplying manufacturer with test results.

.5 WattStopper Product Number: LMRJ-Series

2.11 DLM SEGMENT NETWORK (Room to Room Network) .1 The segment network shall be a linear topology, BACnet-based MS/TP subnet to

connect DLM local networks (rooms) and LMCP relay panels for centralized control.

1. Each connected DLM local network shall include a single network bridge (LMBC-300), and the network bridge is the only room-based device that is connected to the segment network.

2. Network bridges, relay panels and segment managers shall include terminal blocks, with provisions for separate “in” and “out” terminations, for segment network connections.

3. The segment network shall utilize 1.5 twisted pair, shielded, cable supplied by the lighting control manufacturer. The maximum cable run for each segment is 4,000 feet. Conductor-to-conductor capacitance of the twisted pair shall be less than 30 pf/ft and have a characteristic impedance of 120 Ohms.

4. Network signal integrity requires that each conductor and ground wire be correctly terminated at every connected device.

5. Substitution of manufacturer-supplied cable must be pre-approved: Manufacturer will not certify network reliability, and reserves the right to void warranty, if non-approved cable is installed, and if terminations are not completed according to manufacturer’s specific requirements.

6. Segment networks shall be capable of connecting to BACnet-compliant BAS (provided by others) either directly, via MS/TP, or through NB-ROUTERs, via BACnet/IP or BACnet/Ethernet. Systems whose room-connected network infrastructure require gateway devices to provide BACnet data to a BAS are unacceptable.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 WattStopper Product Number: LM-MSTP, LM-MSTP-DB

2.12 CONFIGURATION TOOLS

.1 A wireless configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks using two-way infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface.

.2 Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include but not be limited to:

1. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet.

2. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven operation.

3. Must be able to read and modify parameters for room controllers, occupancy sensors, wall switches, daylighting sensors, network bridges and relay panels, and identify room devices by type and serial number.

4. Save up to eight occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors.

5. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting. Set room mode for testing of Normal Hours (NH) and After Hours (AH) parameter settings.

6. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-configuration, and input light level data to complete configuration of open loop daylighting controls.

7. Set room mode for testing of Normal Hours (NH) and After Hours (AH) parameter settings.

8. Verify status of building level network devices.

.3 WattStopper Product Numbers: LMCT-100, LMCI-100/LMCS-100

2.13 NETWORK BRIDGE

.1 The network bridge module connects a DLM local network to a BACnet-compliant segment network for communication between rooms, relay panels and a segment manager or BAS. Each local network shall include a network bridge component to provide a connection to the local network room devices. The network bridge shall use industry standard BACnet MS/TP network communication and an optically isolated EIA/TIA RS-485 transceiver.

1. The network bridge shall be provided as a separate module connected on the local network through an available RJ-45 port.


JAL No. 14-194

2. Provide Plug n’ Go operation to automatically discover room devices connected to the local network and make all device parameters visible to the segment manager via the segment network. No commissioning shall be required for set up of the network bridge on the local network.

3. The network bridge shall automatically create standard BACnet objects for selected room device parameters to allow any BACnet-compliant BAS to include lighting control and power monitoring features as provided by the DLM room devices on each local network. BACnet objects will be created for the addition or replacement of any given in-room DLM device for the installed life of the system. Products requiring that an application-specific point database be loaded to create or map BACnet objects are not acceptable. Systems not capable of providing BACnet data for control devices via a dedicated BACnet Device ID and physical MS/TP termination per room are not acceptable. Standard BACnet objects shall be provided as follows:

.1 Read/write the normal or after hours schedule state for the room

.2 Read the detection state of each occupancy sensor

.3 Read the aggregate occupancy state of the room

.4 Read/write the On/Off state of loads

.5 Read/write the dimmed light level of loads

.6 Read the button states of switches

.7 Read total current in amps, and total power in watts through the room controller

.8 Read/write occupancy sensor time delay, PIR sensitivity and ultrasonic sensitivity settings

.9 Activate a preset scene for the room

.10 Read/write daylight sensor fade time and day and night setpoints

.11 Read the current light level, in footcandles, from interior and exterior photosensors and photocells

.12 Set daylight sensor operating mode

.13 Read/write wall switch lock status

.14 Read watts per square foot for the entire controlled room

.15 Write maximum light level per load for demand response mode

.16 Read/write activation of demand response mode for the room

.17 Activate/restore demand response mode for the room

.2 WattStopper product numbers: LMBC-300


JAL No. 14-194

2.14 SEGMENT MANAGER

.1 For networked applications, the Digital Lighting Management system shall include at least one segment manager to manage network communication. It shall be capable of serving up a graphical user interface via a standard web browser utilizing either unencrypted TCP/IP traffic via a configurable port (default is 80) or 256 bit AES encrypted SSL TCP/IP traffic via a configurable port (default is 443).

.2 Each segment manager shall have integral support for at least three segment networks. Segment networks may alternately be connected to the segment manger via external routers and switches, using standard Ethernet structured wiring. Each router shall accommodate one segment network. Provide the quantity of routers and switches as shown on the plans.

.3 Operational features of the Segment Manager shall include the following:

1. Connection to PC or LAN via standard Ethernet TCP/IP via standard Ethernet TCP/IP with the option to use SSL encrypted connections for all traffic.

2. Easy to learn and use graphical user interface, compatible with Internet Explorer 8, or equal browser. Shall not require installation of any lighting control software to an end-user PC.

3. Log in security capable of restricting some users to view-only or other limited operations.

4. Automatic discovery of DLM devices and relay panels on the segment network(s). Commissioning beyond activation of the discovery function shall not be required to provide communication, monitoring or control of all local networks and lighting control panels.

5. After discovery, all rooms and panels shall be presented in a standard navigation tree format. Selecting a device from the tree will allow the device settings and operational parameters to be viewed and changed by the user.

6. Ability to view and modify room device operational parameters. It shall be possible to set device parameters independently for normal hours and after hours operation including sensor time delays and sensitivities, and load response to sensor including Manual-On or Auto-On.

7. Ability to set up schedules for rooms and panels, view and override current status of panel channels and relays, and assign relays to groups. Schedules shall automatically set controlled zones or areas to either a normal hours or after hours mode of operation. Support for a minimum of 100 unique schedules, each with up to four time events per day. Support for annual schedules, holiday schedules and unique date-bound schedules.


JAL No. 14-194

8. Ability to group rooms and loads for common control by schedules, switches or network commands.

9. Ability to monitor connected load current and display power consumption for areas equipped with room controllers incorporating the integral current monitoring feature.

10. Provide capabilities for integration with a BAS via BACnet protocol. At a minimum, the following points shall be available to the BAS via BACnet IP connection to the segment manager: room occupancy state; room schedule mode; room switch lock control; individual occupancy sensor state; room lighting power; room plug-load power; load ON/OFF state; load dimming level; panel channel schedule state; panel relay state; and Segment Manager Group schedule state control.

11. The Segment Manager shall allow access and control of the overall system database via Native Niagara AX FOX connectivity. Systems that must utilize a Tridium Niagara controller in addition to the programming, scheduling and configuration server are not acceptable.

.4 Segment Manager shall support multiple DLM rooms as follows:

1. Support up to 120 network bridges and 900 digital in-room devices (LMSM-3E).

2. Support up to 300 network bridges and 2,200 digital in room devices, connected via network routers and switches (LMSM-6E).

.5 WattStopper Product Numbers: LMSM-3E, LMSM-6E, NB-ROUTER, NB-SWITCH, NB-SWITCH-8, NB-SWITCH-16.

2.15 PROGRAMMING, CONFIGURATION AND DOCUMENTATION SOFTWARE

.1 PC-native application for optional programming of detailed technician-level parameter information for all DLM products, including all parameters not accessible via BACnet and the handled IR configuration tool. Software must be capable of accessing room-level parameter information locally within the room when connected via the optional LMCI-100 USB programming adapter, or globally for many segment networks simultaneously utilizing standard BACnet/IP communication.

1. Additional parameters exposed through this method include but are not limited to:

.1 Occupancy sensor detection LED disable for performance and other aesthetic spaces where blinking LEDs present a distraction.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Six occupancy sensor action behaviors for each controlled load, separately configurable for normal hours and after hours modes. Modes include: No Action, Follow Off Only, Follow On Only, Follow On and Off, Follow On Only with Override Time Delay, Follow Off Only with Blink Warn Grace Time, Follow On and Off with Blink Warn Grace Time.

.3 Separate fade time adjustments per load for both normal and after hours from 0 - 4 hours.

.4 Configurable occupancy sensor re-trigger grace period from 0 - 4 minutes separate for both normal hours and after hours.

.5 Separate normal hours and after hours per-load button mode with modes including: Do nothing, on only, off only, on and off.

.6 Load control polarity reversal so that on events turn loads off and vice versa.

.7 Per-load DR (demand response) shed level in units of percent.

.8 Load output pulse mode in increments of 1second.

.9 Fade trip point for each load for normal hours and after hours that establishes the dimmer command level at which a switched load closes its relay to allow for staggered On of switched loads in response to a dimmer.

2. Generation of reports at the whole file, partial file, or room level. Reports include but are not limited to:

.1 Device list report: All devices in a project listed by type.

.2 Load binding report: All load controller bindings showing interaction with sensors, switches, and daylighting.

.3 BACnet points report: Per room Device ID report of the valid BACnet points for a given site's BOM.

.4 Room summary report: Device manifest for each room, aggregated by common BOM, showing basic sequence of operations.

.5 Device parameter report: Per-room lists of all configured parameters accessible via hand held IR programmer for use with O&M documentation.

.6 Scene report: All project scene pattern values not left at defaults (i.e. 1 = all loads 100%, 2 = all loads 75%, 3 = all loads 50%, 4 = all loads 25%, 5-16 = same as scene 1).


JAL No. 14-194

.7 Occupancy sensor report: Basic settings including time delay and sensitivity(ies) for all occupancy sensors.

3. Network-wide programming of parameter data in a spreadsheet-like programming environment including but not limited to the following operations:

.1 Set, copy/paste an entire project site of sensor time delays.

.2 Set, copy/paste an entire project site of sensor sensitivity settings.

.3 Search based on room name and text labels.

.4 Filter by product type (i.e. LMRC-212) to allow parameter set by product.

.5 Filter by parameter value to search for product with specific configurations.

4. Network-wide firmware upgrading remotely via the BACnet/IP network.

.1 Mass firmware update of entire rooms.

.2 Mass firmware update of specifically selected rooms or areas.

.3 Mass firmware upgrade of specific products.

.2 WattStopper Product Number: LMCS-100, LMCI-100

2.16 LMCP LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS

.1 Provide lighting control panels in the locations and capacities as indicated on the plans and schedules. Each panel shall be of modular construction and consist of the following components:

1. Enclosure/Tub shall be NEMA 1, sized to accept an interior with 1 - 8 relays, 1 - 24 relays and 6 four-pole contactors, or 1 - 48 relays and 6 four-pole contactors.

2. Cover shall be configured for surface or flush wall mounting of the panel as indicated on the plans. The panel cover shall have a hinged and lockable door with restricted access to line voltage section of the panel.


JAL No. 14-194

3. Interior assembly shall be supplied as a factory assembled component specifically designed and listed for field installation. The interior construction shall provide total isolation of high voltage (Class 1) wiring from low voltage (Class 2) wiring within the assembled panel. The interior assembly shall include intelligence boards, power supply, DIN rails for mounting optional Class 2 control devices, and individually replaceable latching type relays. The panel interiors shall include the following features:

.1 Removable, plug-in terminal blocks with connections for all low voltage terminations.

.2 Individual terminal block, override pushbutton, and LED status light for each relay.

.3 Direct wired switch inputs associated with each relay shall support 2-wire momentary switches only.

.4 Digital inputs (four RJ-45 jacks) shall support 1-, 2-, 3-, 4-, and 8-button digital switches; digital IO modules capable of receiving 0-5V or 0-10V analog photocell inputs; digital IO modules capable of receiving momentary or maintained contact closure inputs or analog sensor inputs; digital daylighting sensors; and digital occupancy sensors. Inputs are divided into two separate digital networks, each capable of supplying 250mA to connected devices.

.5 True relay state shall be indicated by the on-board LED and shall be available to external control devices and systems via BACnet.

.6 Automatically sequenced operation of relays to reduce impact on the electrical distribution system when large loads are controlled simultaneously.

.7 Group and pattern control of relays shall be provided through a simple keypad interface from a handheld IR programmer. Any set of relays can be associated with a group for direct on/off control or pattern (scene) control via a simple programming sequence using the relay override pushbuttons and LED displays for groups 1-8 or a handheld IR programmer for groups 1-99.

.8 Relay group status for shall be provided through LED indicators for groups 1-8 and via BACnet for groups 1-99. A solid LED indicates that the last group action called for an ON state and relays in the group are on or in a mixed state.

.9 Single-pole latching relays with modular plug-in design. Relays shall provide the following ratings and features:

.1 Electrical:

.1 30 amp ballast at 277V

.2 20 amp ballast at 347V


JAL No. 14-194

.3 20amp tungsten at 120V

.4 30 amp resistive at 347V

.5 1.5 HP motor at 120V

.6 14,000 amp short circuit current rating (SCCR) at 347V

.7 Relays shall be specifically UL 20 listed for control of plug-loads

.2 Mechanical:

.1 Replaceable, ½” KO mounting with removable Class 2 wire harness.

.2 Actuator on relay housing provides manual override and visual status indication, accessible from Class 2 section of panel.

.3 Dual line and load terminals each support two #14 - #12 solid or stranded conductors.

.4 Tested to 300,000 mechanical on/off cycles.

4. Isolated low voltage contacts provide for true relay status feedback and pilot light indication.

5. Power supply shall be a multi-voltage transformer assembly with rated power to supply all electronics, occupancy sensors, switches, pilot lights, and photocells as necessary to meet the project requirements. Power supply to have internal over-current protection with automatic reset and metal oxide varistor protection.

6. Where indicated, lighting control panels designated for control of emergency lighting shall be provided with factory installed provision for automatic by pass of relays controlling emergency circuits upon loss of normal power. Panels shall be properly listed and labeled for use on emergency lighting circuits and shall meet the requirements of UL924 and NFPA 70 - Article 700.


JAL No. 14-194

7. Integral system clock shall provide scheduling capabilities for panel-only projects without DLM segment networks or BAS control.

.1 Each panel shall include digital clock capability able to issue system wide automation commands to up to (11) eleven other panels for a total of (12) twelve networked lighting control panels. The clock shall provide capability for up to 254 independent schedule events per panel for each of the ninety-nine system wide channel groups.

.2 The clock capability of each panel shall support the time-based energy saving requirements of applicable local energy codes.

.3 The clock module shall provide astronomic capabilities, time delays, blink warning, daylight savings, and holiday functions and will include a battery back up for the clock function and program retention in non-volatile FLASH memory. Clocks that require multiple events to meet local code lighting shut off requirements shall not be allowed.

.4 The clock capability of each panel shall operate on a basis of ON/OFF or Normal Hours/After Hours messages to automation groups that implement pre-configured control scenarios. Scenarios shall include:

.1 Scheduled ON / OFF

.2 Manual ON / Scheduled OFF

.3 Astro ON / OFF (or Photo ON / OFF)

.4 Astro and Schedule ON / OFF (or Photo and Schedule ON / OFF)

.5 The user interface shall be a portable IR handheld remote control capable of programming any panel in the system (LMCT-100)

.6 The clock capability of each panel shall employ non-volatile memory and shall retain user programming and time for a minimum of 10 years.

.7 Schedules programmed into the clock of any one panel shall be capable of executing panel local schedule or Dark/Light (photocell or Astro) events for that panel in the event that global network communication is lost. Lighting control panels that are not capable of executing events independently of the global network shall not be acceptable.

8. The lighting control panel can operate as a stand-alone system, or can

support schedule, group, and photocell control functions, as configured in a Segment Manager controller, via a segment network connection.


JAL No. 14-194

9. The lighting control panel shall support digital communications to facilitate the extension of control to include interoperation with building automation systems and other intelligent field devices. Digital communications shall be RS485 MS/TP-based using the BACnet® protocol. .1 The panel shall have provision for an individual BACnet device ID

and shall support the full 222 range (0 – 4,193,304). The device ID description property shall be writable via the network to allow unique identification of the lighting control panel on the network.

.2 The panel shall support MS/TP MAC addresses in the range of 0 127 and baud rates of 9600k, 38400k, 76800k, and 115.2k bits per second.

.3 Lighting control relays shall be controllable as binary output objects in the instance range of 1 64. The state of each relay shall be readable and writable by the BAS via the object present value property.

.4 Lighting control relays shall report their true on/off state as binary input objects in the instance range of 1 64.

.5 The 99 group Normal Hours/After Hours control objects associated with the panel shall be represented by binary value objects in the instance range of 201 299. The occupancy state of each channel group shall be readable and writable by the BAS via the object present value property. Commanding 1 to a channel group will put all relays associated with the channel into the normal hours mode. Commanding 0 or NULL shall put the relays into the after hours mode.

.6 Setup and commissioning of the panel shall not require manufacturer-specific software or a computer. All configuration of the lighting control panel shall be performed using standard BACnet objects or via the handheld IR programming remote. Provide BACnet objects for panel setup and control as follows: .1 Binary output objects in the instance range of 1 64 (one

per relay) for on/off control of relays. .2 Binary value objects in the instance range of 1 99 (one

per channel) for normal hours/after hours schedule control. .3 Binary input objects in the instance range of 1 64 (one

per relay) for reading true on/off state of the relays. .4 Analog value objects in the instance range of 101 199

(one per channel group) shall assign a blink warn time value to each channel. A value of 5 shall activate the blink warn feature for the channel and set a 5-minute grace-time period. A value of 250 shall activate the sweep feature for the channel and enable the use of sweep type automatic wall switches.

.7 The description property for all objects shall be writable via the network and shall be saved in non-volatile memory within the panel.


JAL No. 14-194

.8 The BO and BV 1 99 objects shall support BACnet priority array with a relinquish default of off and after hours respectively. Prioritized writes to the channel BV objects shall propagate prioritized control to each member relay in a way analogous to the BACnet Channel object described in addendum aa. (http://www.bacnet.org/Addenda/Add-135-2010aa.pdf)

.9 Panel-aggregate control of relay Force Off at priority 2 shall be available via a single BV5 object. Force On at priority 1 shall be available via a single BV4 object.

.10 Lockout of all digital switch buttons connected to a given panel shall be command-able via a single BV2 object. The lock status of any connected switch station shall be represented as BV101-196.

10. WattStopper Product Number: LMCP8, LMCP24 or LMCP48

.2 User Interface Each lighting control panel system shall be supplied with at least (1) handheld configuration tool (LMCT-100). As a remote programming interface the configuration tool shall allow setup, configuration, and diagnostics of the panel without the need for software or connection of a computer. The user interface shall have the following panel-specific functions as a minimum: 1. Set network parameters including panel device ID, MS/TP MAC address,

baud rate and max master range. 2. Relay Group creation of up to 99 groups. Group creation shall result in

programming of all seven key relay parameters for member relays. The seven parameters are as follows: After-hours Override Time Delay, Normal Hours Override Time Delay, Action on Transition to Normal Hours, Action on Transition to After Hours, Sensor Action During Normal Hours, Sensor Action During After Hours, Blink-Warn Time for After Hours.

3. Program up to 254 separate scheduled events. Events shall occur on seven day intervals with each day selectable as active or inactive, and shall be configurable as to whether the event is active on holidays. Holidays are also defined through the User Interface.

4. Program up to 32 separate Dark/Light events. Events shall have a selectable source as either calculated Astro with delay, or a digital IO module with an integral 0-5V or 0-10V analog photocell. Dark/Light events shall occur on seven day intervals with each day selectable as active or inactive, and shall be configurable as to whether the event is active on holidays.

5. Button binding of digital switches to groups shall be accessible via the handheld IR remote and accomplished from the digital switch station.

6. Programming of panel location information shall be accomplished by the handheld IR remote and include at a minimum LAT, LON, DST zone, and an approximate city/state location.


JAL No. 14-194

7. An additional handheld IR remote may optionally be specified to be permanently mounted to the panel interior via a retractable anti-theft lanyard to allow for convenient programming of the panel while assuring that the handheld programmer is always present at that panel. An unlimited number of handheld IR remotes may also be purchased for facilities staff as determined by the end user’s representative.

8. WattStopper Product Number: LMCT-100

2.17 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

.1 Emergency Lighting Control Unit – A UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit providing normal lighting to an area. The unit provides normal ON/OFF control of emergency lighting along with the normal lighting. Upon normal power failure the emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON until normal power is restored. Features include:

1. 120/277 volts, 50/60 Hz, 20 amp ballast rating

2. Push to test button

3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface

.2 WattStopper Product Numbers: ELCU-100, ELCU-200.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

.1 A factory authorized manufacturer’s representative shall provide the electrical contractor a functional overview of the lighting control system prior to installation. The contractor shall schedule the pre-installation site visit after receipt of approved submittals to review the following:

1. Confirm the location and mounting of all digital devices, with special attention to placement of occupancy and daylighting sensors.

2. Review the specifications for low voltage control wiring and termination.

3. Discuss the functionality and configuration of all products, including sequences of operation, per design requirements.

4. Discuss requirements for integration with other trades.

3.2 CONTRACTOR INSTALLATION AND SERVICES

.1 Contractor to install all devices and wiring in a professional manner. All line voltage connections to be tagged to indicate circuit and switched legs.


JAL No. 14-194

.2 Contractor to install all room/area devices using manufacturer’s factory-tested Cat 5e cable with pre-terminated RJ-45 connectors. If pre-terminated cable is not used for room/area wiring, the contractor is responsible for testing each field-terminated cable following installation, and shall supply the lighting controls manufactuerer with test results. Contractor to install any room to room network devices using manufacturer-supplied LM-MSTP network wire. Network wire substitution is not permitted and may result in loss of product warranty per DLM SEGMENT NETWORK section of specification. Low voltage wiring topology must comply with manufacturer’s specifications. Contractor shall route network wiring as shown in submittal drawings as closely as possible, and shall document final wiring location, routing and topology on as built drawings.

.3 Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions unless otherwise indicated. Before start up, contractor shall test all devices to ensure proper communication.

.4 Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy savings.

1. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted while occupied.

.5 Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the configuration of the system including room by room description including:

1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints.

2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.)

3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.)

.6 Post start-up tuning – After 30 days from occupancy contractor shall adjust sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner’s requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect / Owner of post start-up activity.

3.3 FACTORY SERVICES

.1 Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer's factory authorized representative shall start up and verify a complete fully functional system.

.2 The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with three weeks written notice of the system start up and adjustment date.

.3 Upon completion of the system start up, the factory-authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system.


JAL No. 14-194

3.4 COMMISSIONING SUPPORT SERVICES

.1 On this project, a commissioning agent will be hired to verify the installation and programming of all building systems, which includes the lighting control system. Manufacturer should include an extra day of technician’s time to review the functionality and settings of the lighting control hardware with the commissioning agent, including reviewing submittal drawings and ensuring that instructions on how to configure each device are readily available. Manufacturer is NOT responsible for helping the commissioning agent inspect the individual devices. It will be the commissioning agent’s responsibility to create and complete any forms required for the commissioning process, although the manufacturer or contractor may offer spreadsheets and/or printouts to assist the agent with this task.

.2 The commissioning agent shall work with the electrical contractor during installation of the lighting control hardware to become familiar with the specific products. The agent may also accompany the manufacturer’s technicians during their start-up work to better understand the process of testing, calibration and configuration of the products. However, the contractor and manufacturer shall ensure that interfacing with the agent does not prevent them from completing the requirements outlined in the contract documents.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 72 00 Page 1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Section 26 01 00 - Electrical - General Requirements. .2 Conform with applicable Section 26 05 00 requirements governing installation,

electrical connections, raceways, conductors and the like. 1.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM .1 General .1 The Building consists of an existing Edwards EST2 System. Provide all

additional devices as shown on the Drawings and extend existing Fire Alarm System to New Addition. Provide all necessary material, labour, programming, etc. for upgrade of the existing System to accommodate the additional devices.

.2 All components shall be CSA and ULC listed and labeled, acceptable to the Ontario Fire Marshal and the local Fire Department and suitable for operation on service characteristics noted. System equipment and operation and installation shall comply with the National and Provincial Building Code; Canadian Underwriters Association Standards CUA-70 and CUA-72A, Canadian Electrical Code, and ULC Standard CAN4-S524-M91 and latest amendments.

.3 All new initiating devices shall be conventional type to match existing. .2 System Components .1 Fire Alarm Signaling Device Fire alarm signaling device shall have temporal pattern. Connect adjacent

signals on different and alternating circuits. New devices to match existing. .2 Fire Alarm Strobe Light Fire Alarm Visual signals shall match existing. .3 Manual Alarm Stations Manual stations shall match existing. Stations shall be pull-lever open circuit

type with a break-glass feature. A locked test feature shall be provided to permit transmission of an alarm without breaking the glass. For surface mounted applications surface cast back boxes shall be provided. Provide guards for stations in rooms noted. All pull station shall be c/w clear lexan polycarbonate shield and local built-in horn.

.4 Automatic Detectors Automatic detector stations generally shall be combination, fixed temperature

and rate-of-rise for 57 deg. C. (135 deg. F.) applications. All detectors shall be ceiling mounted on flush octagonal outlet boxes complete with adapter plates to conceal outlet box. Provide guards for detectors in rooms as noted. New devices shall match existing.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 Smoke Detectors Provide new smoke detectors to match existing. Equip detectors with a mechanism or special tool so that the unit or part of the

unit cannot be removed by unauthorized personnel. .4 Operation .1 The operation of any detector, pullstation, or similar device shall cause all of the

audible and visual devices in the building to operate until the device and panel are restored to normal. Trouble signals shall be automatically disconnected during an alarm.

.2 System shall be capable of normal operation at 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage. Voltage above and below these limits shall initiate transfer to standby supply, and actuate trouble indication.

.3 Alarm initiating devices shall be grouped in zones. Appropriate zone of alarm indication shall be displayed by electrically supervised lamp annunciator on the control unit and on remote annunciators.

.4 Operation of Air Duct Detectors in Individual Supply Air Handling Systems shall initiate alarm to main system and shut down fan motors.

.5 Failure of any fuse (except auxiliary fuses), loss of main power, loss of standby power, a broken detection or signal circuit conductor, or single ground fault shall result in a distinct trouble signal at the control panel and at any other location indicated on the drawings. The audible trouble signals may only be silenced manually at the control panel and the silencing mechanism must be automatically reset upon correction of the fault.

.6 Supervise all mechanisms such that none can be left "OFF" or deactivated without causing the trouble signals to operate.

.7 Supervisory circuits for sprinkler system and standpipe valve supervisory switches shall not cause an alarm but shall be individually annunciated and shall cause all trouble signals to sound.

.5 Installation .1 ULC and CSA standards and Electrical Safety Code, shall establish installation

requirements. .2 Conductors entering the control panel shall be identified and terminated on individual terminals.

.3 Wiring for audible and visual signal circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum. Voltage drop to any signal shall not exceed 10 percent. Wiring for detection circuits shall be No. 16 AWG minimum. Wire resistance shall not exceed 50 Ohms. Conductors shall be connected in accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagram and run in conduit throughout.

.4 Wiring must be cut at each automatic and manual station and device, and connected to the four terminals provided on the unit. (These connections ensure supervision of the circuit. Looping of the wires under terminal screw is not permissible). All wiring shall be continuous between control panel, detectors, stations and signals. Splices where permitted by the Engineer shall comprise soldered joints.


JAL No. 14-194

.5 Install resistor for signal circuit in a suitable box adjacent to the last signal of the signal circuit; if diodes are used, install in the outlet box of the last signal of the signal circuit and indicate on signal. End-of-line resistors for station circuits shall be mounted in flush box, maximum of 6 feet above floor beyond last device on circuit.

.6 Mount detectors on ceiling as per ULC standard CAN4-S524-M91 unless otherwise specified herein, at the highest point where variations in ceiling height exist. Do not mount detectors on sides, undersides, or less than 12" (300 mm) from beams, joists, open web steel joists or any structure projecting below actual ceiling height.

.7 Should interference from obstruction, lamp positions or heat radiating surfaces be encountered in locating any detector where shown, locate the detector as near as possible to the indicated position, clear of obstacles, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

.8 Identify signal circuit, box circuit, auxiliary circuit, wiring at fire alarm control panel, annunciator, terminal boxes or elsewhere on completion of work.

.9 Wiring for sprinkler system devices, flow switches and monitor switches, will be provided under this Division of the work.

.6 Tests .1 Retain the services of the equipment supplier to provide Special

Commissioning "Verification, Inspection and Certification" and to supervise the connection, initial test and adjustment of the system throughout new Addition and existing school. The verification shall be done to suit code and Local Authorities requirements.

.2 Verification procedure shall comply with ULC standard CAN4-S537-M86 and shall include providing proper functioning and connection of each device and function of the systems. Furnish upon completion of the work, a letter from the manufacturer as evidence that such tests and instruction have been performed to their satisfaction, and additionally to indicate that:

a. System complies with manufacturer's installation recommendations,

ULC requirements, and specified operation. b. Installation is acceptable for Warranty. c. Completed system complies with regulations concerning supervision of

functions, signals, stations, and automatic detectors. d. Test completed systems for Building Approval Authority. Advise Local

Fire Department when "Verification" is to be performed. .7 Shop Drawings & Documents .1 Prepare maintenance schedule. Contractor to correct shop drawings to provide

"as-installed" record. .2 Shop Drawings for the Fire Alarm System shall include copies of documents to

substantiate ULC listing for all items, identified by catalogue. .3 Provide copies of Inspection and Verification Certificates to Local Fire

Department, Fire Prevention Division.


JAL No. 14-194

.8 Graphics

1. Provide fire alarm graphics at the main entrance. Refer to Electrical Drawings for more information and proceed accordingly.

.9 Inspection Certification .1 Retain services of the Supplier to perform tests and provide the following

documents: a. A copy of the inspection Technician's report showing location of each

device, and certifying the test results of each device. b. A Certificate of Verification confirming that the inspection has been

completed and showing the conditions upon which such inspection and certification have been rendered.

c. Proof of liability insurance for the inspection. d. Audibility level plots in the renovated and addition areas.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 73 00 Page 1 TELECOMMUNICATION RACEWAYSYSTEMS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 This Section of the Specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and

shall be read accordingly.

.2 Comply with general condition, Supplementary conditions of the contract, section 26 01 00– Electrical General Requirements

.3 Comply with section 26 05 00 – Basic Materials & Method.

.4 Comply with EIA/TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

1.2 SCOPE .1 Provide empty raceway systems including conduits, cable trays, terminal cabinets,

plywood backboards, pull boxes, outlets and cover plates for enclosure of wiring.

.2 Telecommunication systems include, but not limited to, telephone, data cabling, cable TV, P.A., security and access control, emergency alarm, etc.

.3 Co-ordinate with system contractors for all the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Wall outlets shall be 115 mm square boxes with plaster rings to suit single gang

devices unless otherwise noted. Provide stainless steel cover plates for the outlet boxes for future use.

.2 Conduit size shall be in accordance with systems contractor’s requirements and recommended standards.

.3 Minimum pull box size shall be as follows:

Maximum conduit size

Size of pull boxes in millimetres For each additional conduit size increase width by:-

Width Length Depth 27mm 102mm 406mm 76mm 51mm 35mm 152mm 508mm 76mm 76mm 53mm 203mm 914mm 102mm 127mm 78mm 305mm 1219mm 127mm 152mm 103mm 381mm 1524mm 203mm 203mm

.4 Suite junction boxes shall be minimum 200mmX200mmX102mm, complete with hinged cover with locking device.

.5 Plywood backboards shall be minimum 1200 x 2400 mm, 19 mm thick, painted with 2 coats of fire retardant light grey enamel.

.6 Provide a minimum of 2 duplex receptacles on separate circuits at each backboard.

SECTION 26 73 00 Page 2 TELECOMMUNICATION RACEWAYSYSTEMS DATE 07 NOV 2014 Jain & Associates Limited Project 14019-TRCA

JAL No. 14-194

.7 Provide grounding at each backboard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Vertically mount outlet boxes, unless noted otherwise, 300 mm to centre above

floor, or 150 mm above counter top where shown at counters or benches.

.2 Fish conduit, clear blockages and outlet and clean out pull boxes at completion of installation. Leave conduit free of water or excess moisture. Install No. 12 gauge galvanized soft iron pull wire, or 1/8" nylon pull cord (minimum 400LB) continuously from outlet to outlet, through conduit and fasten at each box.

.3 Conduit bonds shall have a bending radius of not less than nine times conduit diameter. Ream out conduit and identify ends with green paint.

.4 Install additional steel pull boxes in such a manner that, throughout entire system, there shall be not more than two 90 degree or equivalent bends or more than 30,000 mm in each run, so that wire or cables may be pulled in or withdrawn with reasonable ease.

.5 Show as-installed conduit routing and location of all pull boxes on the record drawings, prior to project completion, for use by systems contractors to facilitate wiring and equipment installation. Include above noted information on final record drawings at project completion.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 31 23 16 PAGE 1 EARTHWORK DATE 07 Nov 2014 ward99 architects TRCA-14019 1. GENERAL

.1 Acceptable standards for materials and methods specified in Provincial and local codes are not repeated here.

.2 Discuss site conditions with Architect before commencing work to establish if further soil investigation or engineering analysis if required.

.3 Protect property from damage caused by altered drainage courses, and weathering, drying out, washouts and settlement at newly excavated and graded areas.

.4 Co-ordinate final grading with work of others, and include refilling and compaction of settled and washed out areas to incorporate their specified work.

.5 Verify the accurate locations of services with the utilities concerned before commencing work. Report to Architect, unlocated existing services encountered during work, and do not proceed without their instructions. Repair damage to existing services should it occur.

.6 Terminate and block unused drain discovered during excavation at each end and at least 2m from building walls.

2. PRODUCTS

.1 Fill aggregate shall conform to the following all capable of compaction to 95% Proctor Density. :Fill Type 1: Crushed limestone min. 19mm 7% passing through No. 10 sieve, or local fill when approved. Fill Type 2: Granular, course clean no more than 15% passing through No. 10 sieve. Fill Type 3: Site or imported material, containing no organic or foreign matter, and which the contractor can demonstrate is compatible to a density of 85% standard Proctor. :Sand: to conform to CSA A23 for fine aggregate.

3. EXECUTION

.1 Remove topsoil completely from areas on which work of building foundations, slabs, paving, surfacing, regrading or construction traffic is executed. Stockpile topsoil that is satisfactory for re-use where directed by Architects.

.2 Remove soil containing humus, sod, roots and which is unstable for use from under areas that are specified in paragraph .1, and to a depth of 300mm.

.3 Excavate to extent and levels required for construction; to undisturbed, level, form, dry surfaces free of excess loose material and for foundations to a depth of at least 1200mm or 1.2m below finish grade or local requirements.

.4 Raise subgrade to rough levels where required with Fill Type 3, deposited in maximum layers of 200mm, each compacted before placing of subsequent layers.

.5 Remove excess material completely from site.

.6 Backfill at walls, foundations and trenches only after preceding work has been completed and approved by Consultants and/or Building Inspectors, and it is adequately braced and supported. Backfill in maximum layers of 300mm. Compact each layer before the next is placed. Backfill both sides of walls simultaneously where such backfilling is required. Use Fill Type 1 in trenches under concrete slabs and paved surfaces. Fill Type 2 at foundations and retaining walls under concrete slabs, and paved surfaces and Fill Type 3 otherwise.

.7 Place and compact base courses for slabs and pavements of Fill Type 1, minimum 150mm.

.8 Scarify subgrade at areas for planting and work top 75mm to produce an even textured surface free from weeds, roots and materials larger than 75mm in any dimension. Distribute topsoil from stockpile evenly, to elevation indicated on to a minimum depth of 125mm over entire area of site except where other surfaces and constructions are indicated.

END OF SECTION